PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


Purchased  by  the  Hammill  Missionary  Fund. 

O 

PS  1514  . D7  C5x 

Davi s , John  A . , d . 1 897 . 

Choh  Lin 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/chohlinchineseboOOdavi_O 


1 ■ 


Amoy.  Page  143. 


CHOH  LIN, 


®j)t  Cljincse  Son  tojjo  Attaint  a |]readjtr. 


BY  THE 

Rev.  J.  A.  DAVIS, 

Author  of  the  “Chinese  Slave-Girl,”  “Tom  Bard,”  etc. 


PHILADELPHIA  : 

PRESBYTERIAN  BOARD  OF  PUBLICATION 
AND  SABBATH-SCHOOL  WORK, 

No.  1334  CHESTNUT  STREET. 


COPYRIGHT,  1884,  BY 

THE  TRUSTEES  OF  THE 

PRESBYTERIAN  BOARD  OF  PUBLICATION. 


ALL  RIGHTS  RESERVED. 


Westcott  k Thomson, 
Stercotypers  and  Electrotypers,  Philada. 


fit  HIS  JfeoOK 

"V-  V 

|s  ^espettfuUg  glebicattb,  bitljout  %ir  Jhofaltbge, 


TO  THE 


Rev.  Drs.  TALMAGE,  RAPALJE  and  KIP, 

OF  THE  AMOY  MISSION — 


MEN  OF  WHOM  THE  REFORMED  CHURCH  MAY  JUSTLY  BE  PROUD. 


Their  judicious,  quiet,  persistent,  yet  modest  efforts  for  the  temporal 
as  well  as  spiritual  good  of  those  around  them  will,  by  the 
grace  of  God,  live  and  grow  to  bless  those  in  and  around 
Amoy  as  long  as  the  Chinese  remain  a people. 


* 


PREFACE. 


This  is  a true  story  of  a real  Chinese  boy  who 
became  a preacher.  Choh  Lin  is,  and  has  been, 
a preacher  of  the  gospel  for  more  than  twenty 
years,  and  for  most  of  that  time  connected  with  the 
Amoy  mission  of  the  Reformed  (Dutch)  Church 
in  America. 

When  the  writer  was  living  in  Amoy  he  took 
down  from  Choh  Lin’s  own  lips  the  most  of  the 
facts  here  given,  and  since  his  return  to  America 
has  written  up  the  notes  thus  gathered,  adding  facts 
that  came  to  him  through  other  sources.  So  it  is 
a true  story.  The  real  name  of  Choh  Lin,  for 
satisfactory  reasons  is  not  given. 

Parts  of  the  first  chapters  of  this  story  were 

written  for  and  published  in  The  Sower,  and  at 

5 


6 


PREFACE. 


the  request  of  not  a few  readers  it  is  completed 
and  sent  out  in  this  form,  with  the  hope  and  prayer 
of  the  writer  that  it  may  lead  many  of  our  young 
people  to  think  of  and  to  pray  and  work  more 
heartily  for,  missions  in  China. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  I. 

PAGE 

The  Chinese  Baby 11 

CHAPTER  II. 

The  Child  of  the  Gods 16 

CHAPTER  III. 

A Little  Boy  Lost 22 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Learning  to  Worship  Idols 30 

CHAPTER  V. 

The  Sick  Father 37 

CHAPTER  VI. 

The  Father’s  Death 46 

7 


8 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

PAGE 

The  Funeral 53 

CHAPTER  VHI. 

Cruel  Relatives 60 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Seeetng  a Life-giving  God 72 

CHAPTER  X. 

Poverty 81 

CHAPTER  XI. 

The  Famine 92 

CHAPTER  XII. 

The  Dogs 100 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Boys’  Troubles 110 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Choh  Lin  at  School 123 

CHAPTER  XV. 

Stoning  the  Devil 133 


CONTENTS. 


9 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

PAGE 

Rebellion  at  Amoy 143 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

Mbs.  Lee  Finds  the  Life-giving  God 155 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Pebsectjtion 169 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

In  Amoy 185 

CHAPTER  XX. 

In  the  Mission-School 195 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

Trying  to  be  a Christian 210 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

Business  Offers 220 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

A New  Relative 233 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

Becoming  a Preacher 244 


10 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

PAGE 

Chi  Lap  and  the  Grandmother  become  Christians  256 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

Choh  Lin  Married  and  a Preacher 268 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

The  Gospel  at  Tay  Soa 281 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Settled  at  Ang  Tung  Thau 294 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

Trials  of  a Pastor 307 


Choh  Lin. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  CHINESE  BABY. 

BOUT  forty  years  ago  there  lived  in  China,  in 


-LI-  a little  village  standing  on  a bay  of  the  ocean, 
a Chinaman  named  Sol  Law  Lee.  The  village  in 
which  Mr.  Lee  lived  was  at  the  foot  of  a mountain, 
and  so  was  named  Tay  Soa,  or  “Foot  Mountain.” 
He  was  the  richest  man  in  the  place  and  had  the 
finest  house  there,  yet  if  you  had  seen  it  you  would 
have  thought  that  it  was  only  a number  of  out- 
houses for  cattle,  connected  by  two  walls. 

One  day  there  was  born  in  this  house  a boy-baby. 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Lee  were  very  proud  of  their  little 
son,  and  when  the  father  met  friends  on  the  street 
or  at  his  place  of  business  he  was  glad  to  have  them 
bow  and,  as  they  clasped  and  shook  their  own 
hands,  say  to  him,  “ Ka  li  kiong-hi  ” (“  unto  you 
congratulations”).  When  the  little  fellow  had  lived 
a whole  month  his  relatives  and  friends  from  the 
village  and  the  other  places  around  gathered  at  Mr. 
Lee’s  house  to  see  the  new-comer  and  to  have  a 


ii 


12 


CHOH  LIN. 


grand  feast  in  his  honor,  as  well  as  to  be  present  at 
the  ceremony  of  shaving  the  child’s  head.  Each 
brought  some  present  for  the  little  fellow  or  his 
parents.  There  were  fowls  and  fruit  and  many 
other  things  to  eat,  and  among  them  twenty  duck 
eggs  painted  in  pretty  colors.  Some  had  brought 
money ; two  or  three  brought  silver  rings,  not  for 
the  fingers,  but  for  the  wrists  and  ankles  of  the 
baby : one  of  these  ankle-rings  had  a tiny  silver 
bell  fastened  to  it  to  jingle  when  he  moved  his  feet. 
His  grandmother  gave  some  clothing  for  him  to 
wear  and  a queer  little  cap,  beautifully  embroidered 
with  red  and  yellow  silk,  to  put  on  his  head.  The 
visitors  gave  many  presents,  because  they  expected 
Mr.  Lee,  as  he  was  rich,  to  give  them  many  in  re- 
turn, and  better,  too,  than  they  gave. 

When  all  of  the  friends  had  enjoyed  the  first 
part  of  the  feast,  the  little  boy  was  brought  into 
the  room.  He  was  not  a beauty.  His  little  head 
was  covered  with  silky  black  hair ; his  nose  was  as 
flat  and  small  as  though  his  nurse  had  let  him  fall 
on  it ; and  the  little  black  eyes  seemed  to  be  looking 
down  to  see  where  the  nose  had  gone.  Around 
each  wrist  a red  cord  was  tied,  to  keep  the  spirit  of 
mischief  from  getting  loose  and  making  the  hands 
do  bad  things  when  the  boy  grew  up. 

When  the  little  child  made  his  appearance  one 
and  another  of  the  people  said,  “ Pretty,”  “ Very 
pretty,”  u Smart,”  “ Brave,”  and  other  pleasant 
things  for  the  parents  to  hear. 


THE  C'HINESE  BABY. 


13 


Bat  now  came  the  great  event  of  the  feast.  A 
barber  was  brought  in,  and  with  his  little  three- 
cornered  razor  shaved  off  the  hair  from  the  baby’s 
head,  leaving  it  entirely  bald.  Of  course  this  was 
not  what  the  child  liked,  but  Chinese  babies  must 
soon  learn  that  grown  people  have  strange  ways. 
As  the  men  and  boys  in  China  have  all  but  the 
back  part  of  their  heads  shaved,  the  little  baby  had 
to  begin  some  time. 

The  Chinese  do  not  shave  their  heads  because 
they  are  heathen,  but  because  the  nation  has  been 
conquered  by  the  Mantchu  Tartars,  who  forced  them 
to  follow  the  Tartar  way  of  shaving  the  head  and 
braiding  the  hair. 

When  the  barber  had  gone  the  father  gave  to  the 
bald-headed  little  fellow  a name.  Since  the  first 
name  given  usually  wears  out  or  gives  place  to 
another  as  soon  as  boys  are  large  enough  to  go  to 
school,  we  will  call  the  little  boy  by  the  name  that 
was  given  him  a few  years  after.  This  was  Chhoh 
Lin  : we  will  write  it  Choh  Lin. 

Three  months  after  this  “ feast  of  shaving  the 
child’s  head  ” invitations  were  sent  out  again  to 
the  relatives  and  friends.  As  before,  they  brought 
presents  for  the  little  fellow.  Chief  among  these 
gifts  were  a red  chair  and  some  molasses  candy. 
Does  some  girl  or  boy  say,  “ I wish  I were  a Chi- 
nese baby  if  he  can  get  plenty  of  molasses  candy  ” ? 
Wait  and  see  how  it  was  used.  The  candy  was 
warmed  and  put  on  the  seat  of  the  chair,  and  then 


14 


CHOH  LIN 


the  little  fellow,  dressed  in  his  nice  clothing,  was 
placed  on  the  candy  in  the  seat.  It  was  used  to 
keep  him  from  falling  otf! 

But  a more  important  ceremony  took  place  at 
this  feast.  The  presents  were  all  placed  before  the 
image  of  the  goddess  of  children.  Mr.  Lee  bowed 
before  this  idol  and  prayed  the  goddess  to  take  care 
of  his  little  boy,  to  make  him  good-natured,  to 
make  him  stay  awake  in  the  daytime  and  sleep 
well  at  night,  to  keep  him  from  crying  and  to  keep 
him  well.  When  they  supposed  that  the  goddess 
had  sufficiently  enjoyed  the  presents,  all  were  taken 
away  and  a feast  made  of  those  that  could  be  eaten. 

When  Choli  Lin’s  birthday  came,  then  a greater 
feast  still  was  prepared  and  more  presents  brought. 
After  the  friends  had  gathered,  a large  sieve  was 
placed  on  the  table  before  an  ancestral  tablet.  This 
is  a piece  of  carved  wood  standing  in  a carved 
block.  Into  this  upright  piece  was  cut  the  name 
of  Mr.  Lee’s  father,  who  had  died  many  years  be- 
fore. The  Chinese  believe  that  the  souls  of  their 
dead  friends  enter  into  these  tablets  of  wood  and  live 
in  them  for  a long  while.  On  the  sieve  were  placed 
some  silver  ornaments,  scissors,  ink  and  pen,  a book 
or  two,  a money-scale,  a small  boat,  tools,  and  other 
things.  Then  the  little  boy,  dressed  in  a new  suit 
of  clothes,  was  placed  on  the  sieve  among  the  things. 
The  Chinese  think  that  whatever  a child  at  this  time 
first  grasps  will  show  the  business  he  wifi  follow 
when  he  becomes  a man.  Choh  Lin  took  an 


THE  CHINESE  BABY. 


15 


orange,  so  some  thought  that  he  would  be  a farmer, 
and  others  that  he  would  like  eating  better  than 
anything  else. 

At  the  feast  following  this  ceremony  the  little 
boy  had  a dish  prepared  for  him  of  which  no  one 
else  was  allowed  to  eat — a soup  made  from  chicken 
feet.  This  soup  was  to  make  him  walk  soon  and 
become  a first-rate  runner. 

The  little  child  was  taken  each  time  before  the 
idols  and  the  ancestral  tablet,  and  made  to  hold  up 
his  hands  and  bow  his  head  as  if  praying  to  them. 
Thus,  when  only  a baby  Choh  Lin  was  made  an 
idolater  and  a worshiper  of  the  spirits  of  the  dead. 
How  could  he  help  growing  up  a heathen  ? He 
was  taught  to  serve  these  false  gods  only,  and  no 
one  told  him  to  say,  “Our  Father  which  art  in 
heaven  ” or  to  pray  to  Jesus.  Nobody  living  near 
his  home  knew  about  the  true  God  ; none  had  heard 
of  Jesus ; and  yet  it  is  but  little  more  than  forty 
years  since  Choh  Lin  was  born. 


CHAPTER  II. 


THE  CHILD  OF  THE  GODS. 

WHEN  Choh  Lin  had  passed  his  first  birthday 
his  grandmother  embroidered  for  him  a red 
woolen  cloth  with  bright-colored  silk,  yet  when  it 
was  finished  she  did  not  give  it  to  the  little  boy, 
but  gave  it  instead  to  his  mother.  She  took  it 
to  an  idol  temple,  and  from  the  incense-box  or  pot 
standing  before  the  idol  gathered  some  of  the  ashes 
made  by  burning  incense  to  the  god.  This  was 
carefully  placed  in  the  cloth,  and  then,  rolling  it 
up,  she  sewed  the  ashes  tightly  within.  On  the 
outside  of  this  little  bundle  the  name  of  the  god 
Avas  stamped.  The  package  was  then  brought  home 
and  hung  by  a silver  chain  about  the  little  fellow’s 
neck.  Choh  Lin  had  iioav  been  consecrated  to  the 
idol.  He  might  pray  to  other  images,  but  his  own 
idol  must  receive  the  first  and  most  of  his  service. 
By  carrying  with  him  the  incense-ashes  his  friends 
hoped  that  the  child  would  get  the  god’s  spirit. 
The  Chinese  suppose  that  the  spirit  of  the  idol 
enters  the  ashes  and  lives  there  to  do  good  to  those 
who  carry  it.  Not  only  was  Choh  Lin  to  be  the 
child  of  this  god,  but  the  god  was  expected  to  take 
16 


THE  CHILD  OF  THE  GODS. 


17 


care  of  the  boy,  to  watch  over  him,  hear  his  prayers 
and  do  him  every  favor  that  the  child  needed  or  the 
god  could  give.  Though  these  bundles  of  ashes 
are  not  worn  through  life,  yet  they  are  usually  not 
laid  aside  until,  to  the  Chinese  eye,  they  become 
quite  unclean  ; and  when  the  Chin  ;se  think  a thing 
is  dirty  they  are  generally  right. 

When  Choh  Lin  began  to  walk  it  was  the  cause 
of  great  rejoicing  in  the  Lee  household.  As  he 
toddled  three  or  four  steps  without  falling,  one  of 
the  family  took  a large  knife  and,  with  the  edge 
downward,  cut  down  to  the  floor  between  his  feet, 
and  then  again  behind  them,  as  though  to  cut  some- 
thing that  hindered  his  movements.  Of  course  the 
knife  did  not  touch  him,  but  was  supposed  to  cut 
off  some  invisible  cords  that  made  him  fall. 

Choh  Lin  was  not  as  strong  a child  as  his  older 
brother,  Chi  Lap,  and  the  mother  and  father  were 
very  much  afraid  that  their  little  boy  would  not 
grow  to  be  a man.  They  thought  that  evil  spirits 
were  making  their  child  weak,  and  would  after  a 
while  kill  him.  To  drive  away  the  evil  ones  they 
determined  on  a ceremony  that  was  supposed  to 
have  a great  effect  on  a child’s  health. 

Several  priests  were  invited  to  the  house,  who 
made  a kind  of  altar  of  the  tables,  one  on  the  top 
of  the  other ; and  on  the  top  one  they  placed  can- 
dlesticks, censers  and  images  of  the  gods,  chief 
among  them  the  goddess  of  children.  On  a tab !« 
in  another  part  of  the  room  they  placed  several 
2 


18 


CHOH  LIN. 


plates  with  different  kinds  of  meat,  fruits  and  cakes. 
When  all  was  ready  one  priest  rang  a bell,  another 
beat  a drum,  another  struck  on  cymbals,  and  all 
together  chanted  something  which,  with  their  mu- 
sic, was  intended  to  invite  a number  of  gods  or 
goddesses  of  children  to  the  house  and  to  a feast. 
To  describe  the  whole  of  the  ceremony  would  take 
too  long,  so  we  relate  only  the  last  part  of  it,  which 
is  the  most  important.  A framework  to  repre- 
sent an  open  door  was  set  up  in  the  room.  One 
of  the  priests,  dressed  to  represent  the  goddess  of 
children,  stood  beside  this  door  and  repeated  some 
words  to  frighten  the  evil  spirits  away.  While  he 
was  doing  this  Mr.  Lee  took  up  his  little  son  and 
gathered  his  other  children  around  him.  Each 
of  the  children  held  a lighted  incense-stick,  and  all 
were  ready  for  the  great  ceremony  of  frightening 
the  evil  spirits  so  that  they  would  not  dare  trouble 
Choh  Lin  again.  Then  one  of  the  priests  began 
blowing  a horn,  and,  with  this  in  one  hand  and  a 
sword  in  the  other,  he  slowly  marched  through  the 
door.  Mr.  Lee,  with  Choh  Lin  in  his  arms  and 
followed  by  his  children,  passed  through  the  door 
after  the  priest,  while  the  other  priests  made  all  the 
noise  they  could  with  bells,  cymbals  and  drums.  In 
this  way  they  felt  sure  that  little  Choh  Lin  would 
be  made  well  and  strong.  When  this  ceremony 
was  over  the  frame  through  which  the  little  boy 
was  carried  was  cut  to  pieces  and  burned.  This 
ceremony  is  called  “passing  through  the  door.’ 


THE  CHILD  OF  THE  GODS. 


19 


The  Chinese  probably  think  that  by  taking  the 
sick  child  through  the  door  during  the  frightful 
noises  the  evil  spirits  are  kept  back  from  the  little 
one,  and  then  when  the  door  is  destroyed  they  can- 
not find  it  to  pass  through  in  order  to  overtake  the 
child. 

Choh  Lin’s  parents  took  another  method  of  keep- 
ing evil  ones  away  from  their  child.  They  called 
him  “beggar,”  “dirty,”  “useless,”  because  they 
hoped  that  the  evil  spirits,  if  they  heard  how  the 
little  fellow  was  spoken  of,  would  think  that  no 
one  cared  much  for  him, and  so  would  let  him  live: 
thus  trying  to  cheat  the  evil  ones. 

On  his  second  birthday  Choh  Lin  was  honored 
with  another  party,  and  children,  especially  those 
who  would  probably  be  his  companions  as  he  grew 
up,  were  invited. 

Some  months  after  his  second  birthday  Choh 
Lin’s  older  sister,  a girl  of  ten  years,  became  very 
sick.  She  was  his  best  nurse,  and  he  missed  her 
very  much.  Whenever  he  could  he  would  go  to 
her  room  and  try  to  coax  her  to  get  up  and  play 
with  him.  Doctors  were  called,  and  gave  many 
and  strange  medicines.  Prayers  to  the  spirits  of 
dead  ancestors  were  offered,  idol  temples  were  vis- 
ited, presents  given  to  the  gods,  and  many  things 
done  to  drive  away  the  disease,  but  the  child  grew 
worse.  One  day,  when  it  became  evident  that  she 
must  die,  she  looked  upward,  and,  with  her  hands 
reaching  up,  prayed,  “ O Heaven,  do  not  take  me 


20 


CHOH  LIN. 


away  from  my  little  brother ! Save  me ; let  me 
live  that  I may  watch  over  him.  If  I go  away 
he  will  not  have  his  sister  to  care  for  him.”  She 
pleaded  to  live,  not  that  she  might  enjoy  life,  but 
that  she  might  care  for  her  little  brother.  Not 
long  before  she  died  she  asked  for  Choh  Lin,  and 
when  he  was  brought,  “ Who  will  care  now  for  my 
poor  little  boy?”  said  she.  “He  is  so  weak,  and 
young  too  ! how  can  he  get  along  without  his  sis- 
ter?” Then  looking  up,  as  though  to  a greater 
than  man,  she  said,  “ Heaven,  take  care  of  the  little 
boy  wTho  must  lose  his  sister.  Father  will  die,  and 
mother  too  must  die.  Please  do  not  let  the  little 
brother  suffer.”  Then  she  was  still,  and  those  who 
stood  by  her  said,  “ She  has  passed  on.”  She  was 
dead.  She  prayed  to  heaven,  but  did  not  know 
of  Jesus;  she  could  not  pray  to  Him  of  whom  no 
one  had  told  her. 

As  Choh  Lin  did  not  become  strong,  even  though 
the  grand  ceremony  of  “passing  through  the  door” 
had  been  attended  to,  his  father  and  mother  deter- 
mined to  try  another  ceremony.  The  fourteenth  or 
fifteenth  day  of  the  eighth  month  is  often  observed 
in  some  parts  of  China  as  a day  of  special  ceremony 
for  the  good  of  children.  Sometimes  this  ceremonv 
is  observed  on  the  birthday  of  a child,  and  occasion- 
ally too  for  the  good  of  grown  people  when  sick. 
The  ceremony  is  called  “ worshiping  the  measure.” 
This  they  decided  to  try.  So  on  the  fourteenth  day 
of  the  eighth  month  a table  was  set  in  the  house 


THE  CHILD  OF  THE  GODS. 


21 


with  various  kinds  of  food  ou  it,  and  a square  box 
for  measuring  rice.  In  this  measure,  which  was 
half  full  of  rice,  a set  of  money-scales,  a pair  of 
scissors,  a foot-measure  and  a small  mirror  of  metal 
were  placed,  one  article  in  each  corner.  A small 
wooden  image  to  represent  Choh  Lin,  an  incense- 
stick,  an  oil  lamp,  a candle  or  two  and  ten  chop- 
sticks were  also  placed  in  this  rice-measure.  When 
all  things  were  arranged  a single  priest  came  into 
the  room  and  chanted  a form  of  words  intended  to 
win  the  favor  of  the  gods,  but  more  especially  of 
the  two  gods  of  long  life  and  prosperity.  The 
things  on  the  table  were  partly  an  offering  to  these 
gods,  and  partly  to  show  the  wishes  of  the  people 
for  their  children.  The  priest  was  supposed  to  have 
an  influence  with  these  gods,  and  the  offerings  were 
designed  to  persuade  them  to  give  Choh  Lin  great 
favors,  the  two  chief  ones  being  long  life  and  plenty 
of  money.  This  ceremony  is  called  “worshiping 
the  measure  ” probably  because  these  two  gods  are 
thought  to  hold  the  measure  of  years  and  the  meas- 
ure of  wealth.  There  are  many  more  tilings  con- 
nected with  this  worship  whose  object  the  Chinese 
do  not  seem  to  understand.  They  perform  these 
ceremonies,  as  they  do  many  other  things,  because 
their  fathers  did  so  before  them. 


CHAPTER  III. 


A LITTLE  BOY  LOST. 


HREE  years  of  age ! What  a man  Choh  Lin 


-L  felt  himself  to  be ! Three  years  had  passed 
very  slowly  to  him,  though  he  did  not  remember 
much  of  them.  He  knew  that  he  was  no  longer  a 
baby,  but  a boy,  halfway  to  being  a man ; that  was 
enough.  He  walked  around  in  his  loose  trousers 
and  little  coat  as  pi’oud  of  his  growing  age  and 
size  as  though  he  were  a man  already.  He  was 
glad  to  tell  how  old  he  was,  but  in  this  he  did  not 
differ  from  other  boys  the  world  over.  Chinese  are 
always  willing  to  tell  their  ages.  It  has  probably 
never  happened  in  China  that  a young  lady  who 
has  had  more  than  thirty  birthdays  is  not  more  than 
eighteen  years  old.  Such  things  do  seem  possible 
in  some  other  countries. 

Just  after  the  Chinese  New  Year,  which  occurs 
in  our  February,  a man  asked  Choh  Lin,  “ This 
year,  how  old?” — “ Five  years”  said  he. — How 
proud  the  little  fellow  was  to  hear  the  man  say, 
“ What ! so  old  ? You  will  soon  be  a man  ” ! 

Five  years  old?  Did  Choh  Lin  tell  an  untruth? 
He  had  not  yet  reached  his  fourth  birthday ; why, 


22 


A LITTLE  BOY  LOST. 


28 


then,  did  he  say  that  he  was  five  years  old  ? But 
Choh  Lin  did  not  tell  an  untruth.  According  to 
Chinese  methods  of  counting  age,  Choh  Lin  was 
five  years  old,  though  he  had  had  only  three  birth- 
days and  had  not  lived  four  full  years.  The  Chi- 
nese do  not  reckon  age  by  birthdays,  but  by  the 
years  in  which  a person  has  lived.  Every  one  is  a 
year  older  there  on  New  Year’s  Day  than  he  was 
the  day  before.  All  the  Chinese  “ take  their  age  ” 
on  the  same  day.  It  thus  happens  that  infants  born 
on  the  last  day  of  the  old  year  are  two  years  old  on 
New  Year’s  morning,  even  though  they  have  not 
been  in  the  world  twenty-four  hours.  When  a 
Chinaman  is  asked  how  old  he  is,  he  understands 
the  question  to  mean,  In  how  many  years  have  you 
lived  ? 

After  Choh  Lin  became  thus  “ five  years  old  ” he 
thought  that  he  was  large  enough  to  go  around 
without  having  somebody  to  watch  him.  So,  call- 
ing one  of  the  large  dogs,  as  he  had  often  seen  his 
brother,  Chi  Lap,  do,  he  started  for  a walk.  No 
one  noticed  him,  and  soon  he  was  out  of  the  place 
and  had  gone  over  a hill  behind  the  village.  Every- 
thing was  strange  to  him,  and  he  did  not  know 
which  way  to  go.  Strange  men  were  walking  in 
the  field  before  him ; he  was  afraid  to  go  farther. 
Turning  around,  he  tried  to  find  the  way  home,  but 
took  the  wrong  course.  The  farther  he  went  the 
more  afraid  he  became,  until  he  could  not  keep  back 
the  tears ; then  came  the  low  cry,  “ Mother ! mother!” 


24 


CIIOTI  LIN. 


How  he  longed  to  be  home ! He  forgot  now  that 
he  would  soon  be  a man  ; he  was  willing  to  be  called 
a baby  again  if  he  might  but  reach  home,  where 
mother,  father,  brother  and  sister  were.  Afraid  of 
the  strange  men,  he  neither  dared  go  to  them  and 
ask  to  be  taken  home,  nor  even  to  cry  aloud.  He 
walked  on  and  on,  calling  softly  every  few  steps 
to  his  mother.  By  his  side  the  large  dog  walked 
slowly,  every  little  while  looking  into  his  young 
master’s  face  as  though  he  wanted  to  tell  him  what 
to  do,  but  could  not  say  it.  After  going  for  a long 
distance  the  little  fellow  sat  down  to  rest.  The  dog- 
lay  down  beside  him.  Tired  little  Clioh  Lin  laid 
his  head  on  the  dog,  and  was  soon  fast  asleep,  and 
there  he  lay  with  the  dog  as  a pillow  for  several 
hours. 

Choh  Lin  had  not  been  away  very  long  before 
he  was  missed  in  his  home.  But  as  Chi  Lap  was 
away,  it  was  supposed  that  the  two  boys  had  gone 
out  into  the  streets  for  a while,  and  would  be  back 
by  noon.  When  noon-time  came  Chi  Lap  returned, 
but  not  Choh  Lin.  Mr.  Lee  came  in  soon  after, 
and  was  asked  if  he  had  taken  his  little  boy  out 
with  him  to  his  business.  But  Mr.  Lee  had  not 
seen  Choh  Lin.  The  child  was  lost!  No  dinner 
was  eaten.  It  seemed  almost  impossible  that  the 
child  should  have  strayed  away  and  not  be  noticed 
by  anybody.  A dark  suspicion  crossed  Mr.  Lee’s 
mind.  Perhaps  somebody  had  stolen  his  boy!  He 
sent  all  of  his  hired  men  and  every  one  whom  he 


A LITTLE  BOY  LOST. 


25 


could  get  to  search  over  the  country  and  learn  if 
any  one  had  been  seen  carrying  his  child  away. 
He  himself,  taking  Chi  Lap  with  him  to  be  certain 
that  no  one  stole  his  older  boy,  started  off,  away 
from  the  rest,  to  look  for  the  child.  Chi  Lap  called 
his  dog  to  follow. 

While  the  men  were  searching  for  Choh  Lin  the 
women  of  the  household  were  rushing  around  from 
one  neighbor’s  house  to  another  asking  if  they  had 
seen  anything  of  the  little  boy.  But  the  mother 
went  at  once  to  the  temple  and  the  idol  to  whom 
Choh  Lin  had  been  consecrated,  and  told  the  god 
her  mournful  storv.  She  accused  him  of  nesdeeting- 
his  child,  and  then  begged  him  to  bring  back  her 
boy  or  to  tell  the  men  where  he  was.  She  promised, 
if  the  god  would  see  that  the  child  was  brought 
back  that  day,  a feast  should  in  due  time  be  pre- 
sented to  the  idol.  After  her  prayers  were  com- 
pleted she  “ drew  lots  ” to  see  what  the  answer  of 
the  god  would  be.  But  when  she  drew  the  paper 
that  was  supposed  to  contain  the  answer,  she  was 
unable  to  understand  its  meaning.  One  character, 
or  word,  seemed  to  be  the  one  meaning  “find,”  and 
from  this  she  at  least  hoped  that  the  god’s  answer 
was  favorable  and  the  child  would  be  found.  With 
this  hope  she  returned  home.  No  Choh  Lin  there; 
no  news  about  him. 

We  need  not  describe  her  sorrow  nor  yet  the 
search  of  the  men.  After  they  had  gone  out  of 
sight  of  the  village  and  of  Mr.  Lee  they  separated 


26 


CHOH  LIN. 


as  he  had  told  them,  but  each  one  moved  slowly 
and  lazily  along.  They  went  by  various  paths 
leading  from  the  village,  but  the  father  and  brother 
started  across  the  fields,  to  reach  by  a short  cut  a 
village  that  stood  on  the  water  some  miles  away. 
Mr.  Lee  thought  that  if  his  child  had  been  stolen, 
it  had  been  taken  to  that  town  to  start  from  there 
with  some  vessel.  After  going  for  several  miles, 
and  when  not  very  far  away  from  the  village,  Chi 
Lap’s  dog  began  to  bark  at  some  bird  that  he  saw. 
His  bark  was  answered  by  that  of  another  dog  in 
the  edge  of  a grain-field. 

“ Oh,  father !”  said  the  boy,  “ that’s  Kailo,  our 
dog.  Let  us  go  to  him ; it  may  be  that  Choh  Lin 
is  with  him.” 

Chi  Lap’s  dog  barked  in  answer  to  the  other,  and 
ran  toward  the  field  of  grain.  Mr.  Lee  and  his 
boy  followed  as  quickly  as  they  could,  and  there, 
just  awakening  from  his  sleep,  was  little  Choh  Lin 
with  his  head  resting  on  his  hand  and  his  elbow  on 
Kailo.  The  barking  of  the  dog  had  awakened  the 
little  boy.  Though  Kailo  wanted  to  go  to  meet  his 
friends,  he  felt  that  it  was  his  duty  to  take  care  of 
his  young  master  first.  Had  the  dog  not  stayed 
with  Choh  Lin,  Mr.  Lee  might  not  have  found  his 
boy. 

It  would  be  hard  to  say  who  was  the  happiest  at 
the  meeting,  but  Mr.  Lee  lost  no  time  in  carrying 
the  little  fellow  to  his  home. 

Before  many  days  the  mother’s  promise  to  the 


A LITTLE  BOY  LOST. 


27 


idol  was  kept  and  a feast  set  before  him.  Instead 
of  eating  the  food  themselves  or  giving  it  to  the 
priests,  the  Lee  family  gave  it,  after  the  god  had, 
as  they  supposed,  feasted  on  the  spirit  of  the  food, 
to  some  poor  people.  These  people,  eating  the  first 
real  good  meal  they  had  enjoyed  for  years,  felt  very 
thankful,  so  they  said,  that  Choh  Lin  had  been 
found,  and  they  felt  a wish — but  this  they  did  not 
tell — that  he  might  be  lost  and  found  often. 

That  night  his  grandmother  felt  that  Choh  Lin 
ought  to  be  taken  to  the  temple  to  olfer  thanks  him- 
self to  the  god.  Just  after  sunset  she  took  some 
incense-sticks  in  one  hand,  and,  leading  the  little 
boy  with  the  other,  brought  him  before  the  idol  to 
whom  he  belonged.  There  she  taught  him  to  light 
the  incense-sticks  and  set  them  in  the  box  before 
the  idol  • and  while  they  were  slowly  burning  she 
told  him  to  kneel  to  the  god  and  with  hands  folded 
bow  his  head  before  the  idol,  to  show  that  he  was 
thankful  for  being  saved.  He  tried  to  do  as  his 
grandmother  bade  him,  and  said  not  a word  until 
they  were  going  home  from  the  temple.  Then  he 
asked,  “ Grandmother,  did  that  god  take  care  of  me 
when  I was  lost?” 

“ Yes,”  said  the  old  lady ; “ he  is  a good  god  for 
bringing  our  little  boy  back  again  to  us.” 

“ But  why  did  he  not  keep  me  from  going  away, 
and  then  he  need  not  have  brought  me  back  ?” 
asked  the  child. 

“ You  ran  away  of  yourself,  and  the  god  watched 


28 


CHOH  LIN. 


that  you  did  not  go  so  far  that  no  one  could  find 
you.” 

“ Could  he  not  have  watched  me  just  as  well  at 
home  ? I was  so  tired,  and  that  is  the  reason  I did 
not  go  farther.  Did  the  god  make  me  tired  ?” 

“ No,  but  he  showed  your  father  where  you 
were.” 

“Grandmother,  it  was  Kailo  that  showed  where 
I was ; they  were  going  past  me.” 

“ But  the  god  may  have  told  the  dog  to  bark. 
The  god  did  take  care  of  you,  anyway,  while  you 
were  asleep.” 

“So  did  Kailo;  I slept  with  my  head  on  him. 
Grandmother,  if  dogs  can  take  care  of  us  as  well 
as  gods,  why  do  we  worship  gods  only,  and  not 
dogs  too?” 

“Do  not  talk  so,  my  child.  Dogs  are  only  dogs. 
They  die ; the  gods  always  live.  Dogs  do  not  un- 
derstand when  you  pray  to  them,  but  the  gods  do.” 

“ But  dogs  can  run  and  bark  and  bite,  too ; gods 
cannot.  They  must  stay  where  they  are,  like  dead 
dogs.” 

“ Choh  Lin,  you  must  not  speak  so ; it  is  very 
wicked.  What  you  see  is  only  the  idol  that  holds 
the  spirit  of  the  god.  You  cannot  see  a spirit. 
We  worship  not  the  idol,  but  the  spirit  in  it.  The 
spirit  is  like  the  wind  ; you  cannot  see  the  wind.” 

“ But  I can  feel  it.” 

“ Not  when  it  stands  still.  So  you  cannot  see 
or  feel  the  gods  when  they  stand  still.  But  you 


A LITTLE  BOY  LOST. 


29 


must  be  careful  not  to  talk  wickedly  about  the 
gods;  their  spirits  may  be  around  you  always,  and 
if  you  speak  against  them  they  may  hurt  you ; they 
may  make  you  sick  or  do  you  other  injury,  or,  per- 
haps, even  kill  you  or  some  of  your  friends.” 


CHAPTER  IV. 


LEARNING  TO  WORSHIP  IDOLS. 

HOH  LIN’S  father  now  gave  strict  commands 


that  the  little  fellow  must  not  be  allowed  to  go 
into  the  street  alone  at  all,  nor  would  his  father  take 
the  little  boy  along  with  him  to  his  business,  lest  he 
stray  away  again  and  be  lost.  Choh  Lin  thought 
this  very  trying.  He  had  not  many  things  with 
which  to  amuse  himself,  and,  as  his  brother  was  at 
school  most  of  the  day,  he  did  not  know  in  what 
way  to  spend  his  time.  Sometimes  his  mother  told 
him  stories  and  helped  to  amuse  him,  and  often  she 
told  him  about  the  gods  and  taught  him  to  worship 
them.  She  took  him  very  often  to  the  idol  temple, 
and  taught  him  to  pray,  to  offer  incense  and  food, 
and  how  to  learn,  as  she  believed,  whether  or  not 
the  gods  heard  and  would  answer  his  prayer. 

There  were  in  the  temple  several  pairs  of  short 
roots  of  trees.  These  roots  were  flat  on  one  side 
and  round  on  the  other,  and  both  ends  were  nearly 
pointed.  One  way  of  finding  out  whether  or  not 
his  prayer  would  be  heard  was  to  take  a pair  of 
these  roots  before  the  idol,  and,  after  holding  them 
together  for  a moment,  let  them  drop  to  the  floor. 
If  they  lay  one  with  the  flat  and  the  other  with  the 


30 


LEARNING  TO  WORSHIP  IDOLS. 


31 


round  side  up,  his  prayer  would  be  answered ; but 
if  both  lay  with  the  flat  side  down,  his  prayer  would 
not  be  granted  ; while  if  both  lay  with  the  flat  side 
up,  the  god  would  not  tell  whether  the  prayer  was 
to  be  heard  or  not.  Sometimes  when  people  wor- 
ship in  the  temples,  and  the  roots  do  not  fall  right 
the  first  time,  they  try  again  until  satisfied  that  the 
god  means  to  hear  the  prayer.  Of  course  that  is 
not  exactly  fair,  but  the  Chinese  do  not  always  treat 
their  gods  fairly. 

Mrs.  Lee  taught  her  boy  another  way  by  which 
he  might  not  only  learn  the  purpose  of  the  god, 
but  might  get  part  of  an  answer  to  his  petition.  In 
the  temple  were  many  pieces  of  paper  with  a verse 
printed  on  each  in  red  ink;  there  were  also  as  many 
small  sticks  of  bamboo-wood  as  pieces  of  paper. 
Each  piece  of  wood  was  numbered,  as  were  the 
papers.  Mrs.  Lee  taught  her  little  boy  to  take  a 
number  of  these  sticks,  and,  putting  them  into  a 
long  round  box,  to  kneel  before  the  god,  and  after 
bowing  and  offering  his  prayer  to  shake  the  box 
until  one  of  the  sticks  fell  out.  The  number  on 
this  stick  would  give  the  number  of  the  printed 
paper,  and  the  verse  on  that  would  probably  give 
some  answer,  or  tell  what  would  be  the  answer,  to 
his  prayer. 

Choh  Lin  was  very  willing  to  go  to  the  temple, 
and  often  asked  his  mother  to  take  him  to  worship 
the  gods.  She  was  glad  to  see  her  little  boy  show 
so  much  interest  in  the  worship  of  idols,  and  hoped 


32 


CHOU  LIN. 


that  he  would  grow  up  to  be  a faithful  worshiper 
of  the  gods  of  China. 

At  first  the  little  fellow  wanted  to  go  to  the  tem- 
ple because  that  took  him  out  into  the  streets,  and 
sometimes,  when  his  grandmother  went  to  the  tem- 
ple with  him,  she  would  take  him  for  a long  walk 
outside  of  the  village  after  they  had  been  to  worship. 
He  often  talked  of  the  gods  and  asked  many  ques- 
tions about  them.  He  cared  more  for  the  god  to 
whom  he  belonged  than  for  any  other,  and  his 
mother,  as  well  as  his  grandmother,  sometimes  grew 
tired  of  answering  his  questions  or  saying  to  him, 
“ I do  not  know.” 

One  day,  as  he  and  his  grandmother  were  taking 
a walk,  he  saw,  far  away,  smoke  arising.  He  did 
not  know  what  caused  it,  and  as  his  grandmother 
had  told  him  not  to  ask  so  many  questions,  he  did 
not  dare  say  anything  about  it,  but  kept  thinking 
and  looking  and  wishing  that  he  could  go  to  the 
smoke  and  see  what  was  there.  His  grandmother 
and  mother  had  told  him  that  he  must  pray  to 
heaven  and  that  there  were  good  beings  in  heav- 
en ; so  he  thought  at  length  that  the  far-away  place 
from  which  he  saw  the  smoke  arise  must  be  heaven, 
and  that  the  smoke  was  caused  by  the  people  there 
cooking  their  rice  for  supper. 

Some  days  after,  when  he  was  told  that  heaven 
would  take  care  of  him,  he  replied,  “I  am  going 
there  some  time.  I know  where  heaven- is  ; I saw  it 
the  other  day.” 


LEARNING  TO  WORSHIP  IDOLS. 


33 


“ You  saw  heaven  ?”  said  his  mother.  “ How 
could  you  see  heaven  ?” 

“ Oh,  I saw  it.  It  is  a great  way  off,  but  I saw 
it  with  my  eyes.” 

“ You  could  not  see  heaven,”  said  his  sister  ; “ no 
one  can  : it  is  too  far  away.” 

“Where  did  you  see  heaven?”  asked  his  grand- 
mother. 

“ I saw  it  away  off  back  of  the  hills,  near  the 
mountain.  It  was  so  far  away  that  I could  only 
see  the  smoke,”  replied  Choh  Lin. 

“See  the  smoke?”  laughed  Chi  Lap.  “He  has 
seen  the  clouds  in  the  sky,  that  is  all.” 

“No,  it  was  no  cloud;  it  was  smoke,”  answered 
the  little  boy.  “ I know  that  it  was  smoke,  and  the 
people  of  heaven  were  busy  cooking  their  rice.” 

Chi  Lap  laughed  louder  than  ever  as  he  said, 
“ You  saw  the  smoke  over  the  hills  near  the  moun- 
tain; that  is  nothing  but  a limekiln,  and  men /were 
burning  lime  there.  Your  heaven  is  not  very  far 
off,  and  it  is  not  a very  large  place,  either.  If  you 
pray  to  that  kind  of  heaven,  it  will  not  do  you 
much  good.  Limekiln-burners  do  not  make  a very 
good  heaven.” 

Chi  Lap’s  laughing  and  the  smile  on  the  faces 
of  the  rest  of  the  family  made  the  little  boy  feel 
ashamed,  and  he  began  to  cry.  His  mother  took 
him  on  her  lap,  and  soon  quieted  him  as  she  told 
him  that  heaven  was  not  on  this  earth,  but  in  the 
sky  somewhere,  and  far  above  the  clouds,  where  no 
a 


34 


CHOH  LIN. 


one  could  see  it.  To  all  of  his  questions  about 
heaven  she  could  only  say,  “ We  do  not  know  much 
about  it.  It  is  a good  place,  and  takes  care  of  the 
good  people  on  earth  who  pray  to  it.” 

Then  she  told  him  something  that  made  the  little 
fellow  ask  a great  many  more  questions.  “ On  the 
fifth  night  of  the  first  month  of  the  new  year,”  she 
said,  “ heaven  is  opened  and  a beautiful  angel  comes 
out  in  the  sky.  This  angel  is  clothed  in  red  and  is 
surrounded  by  light.  Whoever  sees  this  angel  and 
asks  any  favor  will  receive  what  is  asked  for.  Now, 
if  you  will  stay  up  on  the  night  when  the  angel  ap- 
pears, and  ask  a favor  of  heaven,  you  will  get  it.”  * 

“Does  the  angel  appear  only  once  each  year?” 
asked  Choh  Lin. 

“ Yes,  only  once,  and  he  is  not  always  seen  when 
he  does  come.  Somtimes  he  comes  when  people 
are  all  asleep.” 

“Why  do  they  not  stay  up  to  see  him?”  asked 
the  child. 

“ Because  many  do  not  care  enough  for  heaven’s 
favors ; and,  besides,  not  every  one  can  see  the  angel 
when  he  does  appear.” 

“ Who  cannot  see  him  ?”  asked  Choh  Lin. 
“Could  I see  him?” 

* This  tradition,  told  by  the  subject  of  this  story  to  the 
writer,  is  probably  not  known  generally  in  China.  There  is 
in  it  something  that  reminds  us,  especially  when  we  consider 
chronologies,  of  the  angels’  appearance  in  the  sky  at  Bethlehem 
at  the  birth  of  Christ. 


LEARNING  TO  WORSHIP  IDOLS. 


35 


“Yes,  I hope  so,”  said  his  mother.  “I  think 
that  you  are  good  enough ; you  worship  the  gods 
and  are  quite  a good  boy.” 

“ Why  cannot  some  people  see  the  angel  ?” 

“ Because  they  are  bad.  Good  people  may  see 
him,  and  bad  ones,  looking  at  the  same  time,  will 
see  nothing  at  all.  So  my  little  boy  must  be  good 
if  he  would  see  the  beautiful  angel  and  get  favors 
from  him.” 

“ But,  mother,  can  we  see  him  if  it  be  cloudy  ?” 
asked  Clioh  Lin. 

“Yes;  he  is  so  bright  that  he  would  shine 
through  the  clouds.” 

“Will  he  not  hurt  me?  I am  afraid  to  see 
him.” 

“ No  ; he  loves  children  if  they  are  good.” 

“ Did  you  ever  see  the  angel,  mother?”  asked  the 
little  boy. 

“No;  I looked  two  or  three  times  and  did  not 
see  him,  and  then,  when  people  said  that  I was  not 
good  enough,  I thought  that  it  was  true  and  did 
not  look  again.” 

“ You  are  good  now.  Why  do  not  you  look  the 
next  time  the  angel  comes  ?” 

“Perhaps  I will,  but  grown  people  are  not  as 
good  as  little  children  who  try  to  be  good.  If  my 
little  boy  could  see  the  angel  he  might  ask  him  to 
make  Choh  Lin’s  mother  better,  as  well  as  to  give 
Clioh  Lin  favors.” 

“ I will,  mother,”  said  the  child ; “ and  do  not 


36 


CHOH  LIN 


forget  to  tell  me  some  days  before  the  time,  for  I 
will  try  to  be  number-one  good  then.  I want  to 
see  the  angel  and  ask  him  for  something.” 

“ What  will  you  ask  for,  Choh  Lin?”  asked  Chi 
Lap. 

“ I will  ask  him  to  make  Chi  Lap  good,”  said 
the  little  boy;  “I  think  that  he  needs  it.” 

Chi  Lap  did  not  like  the  laugh  that  his  little 
brother’s  reply  caused.  He  forgot  that  he  had 
laughed  at  his  brother  a short  time  before.  We 
forget  if  anything  we  say  causes  others  pain ; we 
do  not  forget  our  own  pain  so  quickly. 


CHAPTER  V. 


THE  SICK  FATHER. 

YEARS  go  as  quickly  in  China  as  in  America 
for  old  people,  and  about  as  slowly  for  chil- 
dren. The  first  five  years  of  Choh  Lin’s  life  were 
long  ones,  and  to  him  it  seemed  that  he  never 
would  grow  to  be  a man.  One  day  an  old  man 
told  him  that  the  boys  who  grew  slowly  became 
the  strongest  men,  while  those  who  grew  up  quick- 
ly were  weak  and  died  soon.  This  made  the  little 
fellow  more  contented,  yet  he  would  quite  often 
stand  by  his  brother  and  quietly  measure  to  know 
whether  Chi  Lap  was  so  very  much  larger.  Chi 
Lap,  who  was  several  years  older,  seemed  to  the 
little  boy  to  be  almost  a man  already,  and  if  he 
were  as  large  he  would  be  satisfied. 

He  was  a proud  boy  when  Chi  Lap  gave  him  a 
new  top  and  said  that  he  might  play  with  the  older 
boys.  A ring  was  marked  on  the  ground  and  sev- 
eral boys  were  invited  to  bring  their  tops  to  spin  in 
the  ring.  After  Chi  Lap  and  two  or  three  others 
had  spun  their  tops,  and  one  or  two  were  left  lying 
in  the  ring,  Choh  Lin  said,  “ My  turn  now.  Let 
me  try.”  He  had  the  string  wound  around  the  top, 

37 


38 


CHOH  LIN. 


and  then  threw  it  as  he  saw  the  others  do,  but  it  did 
not  spin,  and  had  to  be  left  in  the  ring.  Then  one 
of  the  boys  sent  his  own  top  into  the  ring  and 
“pegged”  Clioh  Lin’s  so  hard  that  the  new  top 
was  split.  The  little  fellow  began  to  cry.  This 
counted  him  out  of  the  game  at  once,  for  a Chinese 
boy  who  cannot  see  his  top  broken  without  crying 
is  not  allowed  to  play.  The  little  boy  went  home 
resolving  that  he  would  not  spin  tops  again  if  the 
big  boys  must  peg  his  new  one  the  first  thing,  and 
then  not  let  him  play  at  all  after  that.  He  was  be- 
ginning to  learn  that  to  be  a big  boy  brought  troubles 
that  little  boys  could  not  well  bear. 

Choh  Lin  had  a little  friend  about  his  own  age 
named  Oan,  whom  lie  often  visited.  One  day,  as 
he  came  from  worshiping  the  idol  in  the  temple,  he 
saw  Oan,  and  while  Mrs.  Lee  and  Oan’s  mother 
were  talking  the  little  boys  had  a talk  by  them- 
selves. 

“ I have  been  to  the  temple  to  worship  my  god,” 
said  Choh  Lin.  “ What  god  do  you  have  for  yours, 
Oan  ?” 

“ I have  none,”  said  he.  “ Grandmother  and 
mother  do  not  take  me  to  the  temple  every  day. 
Sometimes  they  take  me  along  on  the  first  or  the 
fifteenth  of  the  moon,  but  I don’t  want  to  go 
often.” 

“ I like  to  go,”  said  Choh  Lin  ; “ I want  the  god 
to  love  me  and  take  care  of  me  and  give  me  many 
things.” 


THE  SICK  FATHER. 


39 


“ Do  the  gods  give  you  nice  things  ? What  do 
they  give?” 

“ Oh,  most  anything  you  ask  for,  so  mother 
says.” 

“ Did  they  give  you  that  new  top  that  Jim  broke 
the  other  day  ?” 

“ No ; Chi  Lap  gave  me  that.” 

“ What  has  your  god  ever  given  you?” 

“ He  has  not  given  much  yet,  but  he  will  some 
day,  mother  says.  She  told  me  that  the  gods  and 
the  spirits  have  given  my  father  all  of  his  things.” 

“ Didn’t  he  buy  them  ?” 

“ Yes,  but  the  gods  gave  him  the  money  or  helped 
him  get  it.” 

“ If  the  gods  do  that,  then  I mean  to  worship 
them  too,  and  ask  my  father  to  worship  them,  for 
he  told  me  that  he  had  no  money  when  I wanted 
him  to  buy  me  a dog.  Did  the  gods  give  you  your 
dogs  ?” 

“ No,  they  grew.  Perhaps  the  gods  did  give 
them  when  they  were  very  small,  and  the  dogs 
grew  the  rest.” 

“ How  long  will  it  take  to  get  things  that  way  ?” 

“ I don’t  know ; mother  says  we  must  keep  wor- 
shiping, and  then  the  gods  will  always  be  giving  us 
good  things.” 

“ Come,  Choh  Lin,”  said  his  mother,  “ we  will 
go  home.” 

At  home  they  found  Mr.  Lee  lying  down  in  the 
house.  He  had  just  come  back  from  a business-trip 


40 


CHOH  LIN. 


that  had  taken  him  several  days.  When  his  wife 
and  little  boy  came  in  he  said  to  them,  “ You  must 
be  very  still,  for  my  head  aches  very  much  and  I 
have  a fever.  I am  sick,  very  sick.” 

Mrs.  Lee  saw  that  her  husband  had  a high  fever, 
and  sent  for  the  doctor  at  once.  Mr.  Lee  had  never 
been  so  ill  before.  As  soon  as  the  doctor  came  Mrs. 
Lee  met  him  at  the  door  and  told  him  that  he  must 
make  Mr.  Lee  well  soon  or  he  would  get  no  pay  for 
his  medicine  and  care;  but  if  the  sick  man  was 
soon  restored  to  health  the  doctor  should  have  good 
pay.* 

Mrs.  Lee  was  so  anxious  to  see  her  husband  cured 
that  she  did  not  ask  about  the  price  of  medicine, 
but  only  that  he  be  made  well  very  soon. 

When  the  doctor  came  to  Mr.  Lee’s  bed  he  sat 
down  on  a chair,  and,  putting  on  a very  large  pair 
of  spectacles,  took  one  hand  of  the  sick  man  and 
then  the  other,  to  feel  if  there  was  much  difference 
in  the  pulses  of  the  two  wrists. 

“ Yes,”  said  he,  “ it  is  as  I feared.  The  pulses 
are  different,  and  there  is  a battle  going  on  in  the 
body.  Some  time,  when  you  were  busy  or  asleep, 
so  as  not  to  notice,  the  spirit  of  cold  crept  in,  and 

* When  the  doctor  in  China  comes  to  see  a sick  person  for 
the  first  time  the  friends,  if  not  the  sick  one,  sometimes  ask 
how  much  it  will  cost  to  cure ; and  if  the  price  be  too  much 
the  doctor  is  requested  to  do  it  for  less,  or  the  people  may  send 
for  another  who  will  cure  for  less  money.  As  the  people  pay 
for  the  medicines,  they  often  demand  the  cheaper  kinds  and 
refuse  to  take  those  which  cost  much. 


THE  SICK  FATHER. 


41 


it  is  now  fighting  the  heat  in  your  body  and  trying 
to  drive  it  out.  It  has  taken  its  stand  in  the  middle 
of  the  body,  and  is  there  fighting  the  two  sides.” 

“ But  if  there  is  cold  in  me,  why  am  I so  hot  ?” 
asked  the  sick  man. 

“ Why,”  said  the  doctor,  “ that  is  the  result  of 
heat  fighting  with  the  cold.  When  men  fight  they 
become  hot ; so  with  your  body — fighting  makes  it 
hot.  A dead  body  is  cold  because  its  heat  does  not 
fight;  in  fact,  it  has  been  driven  out,  and  the  cold 
has  taken  possession  entirely.” 

“ If  there  be  cold  in  me,  why  do  I not  feel  it  ?” 
asked  Mr.  Lee. 

“ The  cold  is  all  on  the  inside,  and  has  driven 
the  heat  toward  the  outside,”  answered  the  doctor. 
“ Did  you  not  feel  chilly  when  you  first  became  sick 
or  just  before  ? That  was  the  cold  entering  your 
body.  Now  we  must  stop  that  cold,  drive  it  out, 
or  it  will  conquer  the  heat  and  you  will  die.” 

Mr.  Lee  felt  too  sick  to  ask  any  more  questions, 
and  let  the  doctor  talk  to  Mrs.  Lee.  “ He  must 
have  nothing  cold  to  eat  or  drink,  and  he  must  be 
kept  very  warm ; there  must  no  wind  blow  on  him 
and  there  must  be  no  air  passing  through  the  room. 
He  must  be  kept  as  quiet  as  possible,”  were  the 
orders  of  the  doctor ; “ and  then,  by  the  heating 
medicines  I give  him,  the  cold  will  soon  be  driven 
out  or  overcome,  so  that  it  cannot  fight  any  more ; 
then  it  can  easily  be  removed.” 

He  told  Mrs.  Lee  to  send  some  one  around  to  his 


42 


CHOH  LIN. 


shop  soon,  when  the  medicines  would  be  ready,  and 
told  her  to  be  careful  to  give  them  just  as  he  di- 
rected, and,  above  all,  to  keep  her  husband  very 
quiet.  He  promised  to  come  again  in  the  morning, 
and  said  that  by  great  care  he  could  cure  Mr.  Lee, 
but  it  would  take  much  costly  medicine  and  give 
the  doctor  a great  deal  of  trouble  and  anxiety. 

The  whole  family  were  forbidden  to  go  into  Mr. 
Lee’s  room,  or  to  even  open  the  door,  lest  more  cold 
should  find  its  way  into  the  sick  man’s  body  and 
make  the  battle  to  drive  it  out  all  the  harder. 

Clioh  Lin  thought  it  very  trying  that  he  could 
not  speak  to  or  even  see  his  father,  but  his  mother 
told  him  that  he  might  help  him  very  much  by 
asking  the  gods  to  make  him  well.  The  little  fel- 
low felt  very  sorry,  and  when  he  went  to  bed  at 
night  determined  to  go  very  early  to  the  temple  the 
next  morning. 

Choh  Lin  was  up  early  and  on  his  way  to  the 
temple.  The  village  was  not  large,  and  he  had 
so  often  been  to  the  temple  that  he  could  easily  find 
the  way.  He  did  not  wish  any  one  to  know  that 
he  was  going,  so  he  went  out  very  quietly  through 
a back  door.  On  his  way  he  thought  of  Oan  and 
of  what  had  been  said  the  night  before.  His  little 
friend  was  not  up  yet  when  he  came  to  Oau’s  house ; 
but,  as  his  father  had  already  gone  to  work,  the 
door  was  open,  and  Choh  Lin  found  his  wav  to  the 
little  boy’s  bed  and  asked  him  to  go  with  him  to 
the  temple  to  pray.  Oan  was  soon  up  and  ready. 


THE  SICK  FATHER. 


43 


Quietly  the  little  boys  slipped  out  of  the  house,  and 
before  long  were  in  the  temple. 

Choh  Lin  had  told  of  his  father’s  illness,  and 
when  they  were  ready  to  worship  he  said  to  Oan, 
“ Let  me  worship  first.  You  can  wait  for  your 
dog,  but  my  father  cannot  wait.  I want  to  get  him 
well  very  quickly.” 

It  was  agreed  that  Choh  Lin  should  pray  first. 
Bowing  before  the  god,  he  began:  “O  god,  my 
father  is  very  sick,  and  we  cannot  make  him  well. 
We  do  not  know  how,  but  you  do,  and  you  can 
cure  him.  Choh  Lin,  your  little  slave-boy,  prays 
you  to  make  him  well  very  soon.  We  cannot  do 
without  my  father;  we  have  only  one,  and  if  he 
dies  our  hearts  will  not  let  us  get  another.  He  is 
good,  and  when  he  is  well  again  we  will  give  you 
many  good  things,  and  I think  that  he  will  come 
and  worship  you  too.  He  has  not  had  time  to  wor- 
ship you,  but  mother  and  I have  for  him.  Please 
make  him  well ; please  do  not  let  him  die,  for  Choh 
Lin’s  heart  will  die  then  ; and  you,  O great  god,  do 
not  want  a boy  whose  heart  is  buried ; please,  then, 
make  my  father  well.” 

When  the  little  fellow  had  finished  he  turned  to 
Oan  and  said,  “ Now  I have  done,  but  you  wait  a 
little,  until  the  god  thinks  how  to  cure  my  father. 
You  know  a father  is  worth  more  than  ten  thousand 
dogs.  Besides,  dogs  are  plenty,  and  I have  only 
one  father.” 

For  quite  a while  the  boys  waited ; then  Oan 


44 


CHOH  LIN. 


said,  “ May  I pray  now,  for  I want  a clog  soon  ? 
The  god  can  think  when  we  are  gone.” 

“ Yes,”  replied  Choh  Lin  ; “ gods  do  not  need  to 
think  long.” 

Then,  bowing  as  he  had  seen  Choh  Lin,  Oan 
began  praying  to  the  idol : “ O god,  please  give  a 
poor  little  boy  a dog.  He  has  no  money  to  buy 
one,  and  his  father  has  no  money  either.  You 
need  not  give  a large  dog ; if  it  be  only  half  as  big 
as  a kitten  it  will  do;  I will  make  it  grow  the  rest. 
If  you  have  more  black  ones  than  any  other  kind, 
give  me  a black  dog,  but  do  not  give  me  a white 
one  unless  you  want  all  the  others.  If  you  will 
give  me  a dog  I will  come  often  to  the  temple,  and 
will  bring  the  dog  too.  Please  give  a dog  to  Lo 
Oan,  a poor  boy  who  lives  in  Tay  Soa.” 

After  Oan  had  finished  he  asked  Choh  Lin,  “ Do 
you  think  I will  get  a dog  now  ?” 

“ I do  not  know,”  said  he ; “ you  must  pray  more 
than  once.  But  you  must  not  tell  the  god  that  you 
will  bring  the  dog  to  the  temple;  dogs  cannot  wor- 
ship. It  may  be  that  gods  do  not  like  to  have  them 
there.” 

“Shall  I tell  the  god  that  I will  leave  the  dog 
at  home  ?” 

“ Not  now  ; next  time  will  do.  You  must  pray 
often,  you  know.” 

“ Why  ? Cannot  the  god  remember  about  the 
dog?” 

“ I do  not  know.  Mother  and  grandmother  say 


THE  SICK  FATHER. 


45 


we  must  pray  often  until  the  god  does  give  what  we 
ask  for.  If  my  father  is  not  better,  I am  coming 
again  to-day.” 

“ I do  not  think  that  I will.  I want  a dog,  but 
I do  not  like  to  worship  too  much  for  one.  Some- 
body may  give  me  one ; then  I will  not  need  to  ask 
the  god.  I wish  that  some  one  would.  Let  us  go 
home  now.” 

So  the  little  boys  returned  home.  They  had 
prayed  to  a dumb  and  helpless  idol,  instead  of  to 
a real  God.  But  it  was  the  only  god  of  whom  they 
knew.  Why  did  they  not  know  about  Jesus  ? 


CHAPTER  VI. 


THE  FATHER'S  DEATH. 

THE  little  boys  reached  their  homes  before  any 
one  missed  them,  and  as  they  said  nothing 
about  going  to  the  temple,  none  suspected  that  they 
had  been  there  to  pray.  Clioh  Lin  was  told  by  his 
mother  that  his  father  was  no  better. 

“Oh,  he  will  be  better  soon,”  said  the  little  boy. 
“I  hope  that  he  will,  yet  I am  afraid  not.  He 
is  very,  very  ill.  It  is  a bad  fever.  But  why  does 
my  little  boy  think  that  his  father  will  get  well?” 

“ I know.  He  will  get  well  soon  ; I know  some- 
thing.” 

“ Has  a fortune-teller  said  so?” 

“No,  mother.  I will  tell  you.  I went  early  to 
the  temple  and  prayed  to  the  god  to  make  father 
well;  and  I am  going  again  and  mean  to  pray  until 
he  gets  well.  That  is  the  way  that  you  and  grand- 
mother told  me  to  do.” 

“ My  heart’s  loved  little  boy !”  said  Mrs.  Lee. 
“The  gods  must  hear  your  prayer.  You  are  good, 
and  the  idol  will  listen.  Yes,  pray,  and  pray  often. 
But  who  went  with  you  to  the  temple?” 

“ Oau  and  I went.  He  prayed  too,  but  he  did 

46 


THE  FATHER’S  DEATH. 


47 


not  pray  for  ray  father.  He  does  not  go  often,  and 
I did  not  ask  him  to  pray  for  my  father’,  because 
the  gods  may  not  know  yet  who  Oan  is.  Do  the 
gods  answer  the  prayers  of  those  whom  they  do  not 
know  ?” 

“ I think  that  the  gods  know  everybody.  But  I 
must  go,  for  the  doctor  is  coming.” 

When  the  doctor  came  he  saw  that  Mr.  Lee  was 
much  worse.  “ Ah,”  said  he,  “ the  medicine  is 
fighting  very  hard.  There  must  be  a great  deal 
of  cold  inside;  we  must  use  stronger  medicines.” 
So  he  prepared  a mixture  of  pepper  aud  some  other 
things  that  burn  even  worse,  and  told  Mrs.  Lee  to 
give  this  mixture,  with  the  other  medicine,  very 
often,  and  it  would  drive  the  cold  out  in  time. 
The  doctor  then  went  away,  promising  to  call  again 
soon. 

The  new  medicine  only  made  the  sick  man  worse. 
He  became  delirious,  and  every  little  while  would 
say,  “ Cold  water,  please!  cold  water  !”  But  no  one 
gave  the  sufferer  cold  water.  Sometimes,  when  he 
was  partly  asleep,  he  would  call  to  Choh  Lin,  “ My 
little  boy,  give  your  father  a drink  of  cold  water.” 
The  doctor’s  orders  were  strict ; and,  besides,  as  the 
Chinese  think  cold  water  is  not  good  for  well  people 
to  drink,  no  one  would  give  it  to  a sick  man. 

Mr.  Lee’s  friends  came  in,  and  seeing  how  ill  he 
was  said  that  another  doctor  must  be  called.  As 
they  could  not  agree  on  one,  several  were  sent  for. 
One  said  that  this  remedy  must  be  tried,  and  another 


48 


CEOE  LIN. 


that,  yet  the  new  doctors  did  no  better  than  the  old 
one. 

Mrs.  Lee  and  the  grandmother  went  more  than 
once  each  day  to  the  temple  to  pray  the  gods  to  cure 
the  sick  man,  and  promised  the  idols  a great  feast 
and  very  many  good  things  if  they  would  make 
him  well.  Choh  Lin  usually  went  with  them,  and 
when  he  saw  his  mother  cry  and  beg  the  gods  to 
drive  away  the  fever  and  not  let  her  husband  die, 
he  would  kneel  down  crying  before  his  own  special 
idol  and  say,  “ Please,  Choh  Lin’s  own  god,  do  not 
let  the  little  boy  of  your  own  heart  lose  his  father. 
He  is  the  only  father  I have,  and  if  he  dies  there  is 
no  place  where  I can  get  another.  Grandmother 
cries,  mother  cries,  Choh  Lin  cries,  Chi  Lap  cries, 
all  cry,  ‘Spare  him  whom  our  hearts  love.’” 

But  doctors,  medicines,  prayers,  tears,  did  not  stop 
the  fever.  Mr.  Lee’s  friends  felt  very  sad  when 
they  thought  that  he  must  die,  yet  there  were  not 
a few  in  the  village  who  did  not  care.  Some  said, 
“It  is  plain  that  death  wants  somebody  from  the 
village,  and  if  it  is  not  Mr.  Lee  it  will  be  one  of 
us.  So  if  he  is  taLen  we  shall  be  spared  the  longer.” 
It  was  not  that  they  wanted  the  sick  man  to  die, 
but  in  China  people  care  for  self  rather  than  for 
others,  and  think  when  death  is  trying  to  get  some 
one  else  he  will  let  them  alone.  So  far  do  they 
carry  this  selfish  idea  that  often  they  will  let  a man 
who  falls  into  the  water  drown  rather  than  pull 
him  out.  They  fear  that  by  pulling  him  out  they 


THE  FATHER’S  DEATH. 


49 


will  rob  Death,  who  will  get  his  pay  by  killing 
them. 

Some  who  were  glad  that  Mr.  Lee  was  likely  to 
die  were  those  who  owed  him  money;  they  thought 
that  if  he  died  they  would  get  clear  of  paying  their 
debts.  Some,  too,  thought  that  in  the  confusion  at- 
tending his  death  they  might  be  able  to  take  some 
of  his  property  without  being  noticed. 

At  length  the  doctors  gave  up  all  hope  ; they  said 
that  if  they  had  been  called  before  they  would  have 
saved  the  sick  man’s  life,  but  it  was  too  late  now. 
And  the  one  who  had  been  called  first  said  that  he 
knew  Mr.  Lee  would  die  as  soon  as  those  men  who 
knew  nothing  about  the  disease  took  him  in  charge 
to  dose  him  with  their  worthless  remedies. 

Choh  Lin’s  mother  and  grandmother  could  not 
give  up  yet.  Each  resolved  to  try  once  more  to 
“ bring  back  the  spirit  of  the  sick  man,”  as  they 
said.  The  grandmother,  taking  the  little  boy  to 
the  temple,  told  him  to  pray  to  his  own  idol  while 
she  worshiped  another.  Lighting  a large  number 
of  incense-sticks  before  the  idol  and  kneeling  before 
it,  she  told  the  god  that  her  son  was  sick,  and  that 
he  must  be  made  well  or  there  would  be  a great 
deal  of  suffering  in  the  village;  not  only  would  his 
family  suffer,  but  many  of  the  people  would  suffer 
and  be  unable  to  give  incense  or  food  or  any  good 
things  to  the  gods ; so  they  too  would  suffer.  Then 
she  begged  the  god  to  allow  her  to  take  with  her  a 
curiously-shaped  utensil,  looking  somewhat  like  an 


50 


CHOH  LIN. 


arrow,  on  which  were  the  characters — that  is,  Chi- 
nese words — for  “command.”  This  would  mean, 
if  in  the  room  of  the  sick  man,  that  the  god  com- 
manded the  disease  to  leave.  This  utensil  was  to 
be  hung  up  in  the  sick  room  and  worshiped  as 
tho'ugh  it  were  an  idol.  When  the  old  lady  sup- 
posed that  her  prayer  was  heard,  and  that  she  might 
take  what  she  asked  for,  she  took  the  utensil  from 
its  place,  and,  calling  Choh  Lin,  started  for  home. 

As  soon  as  the  little  boy  and  his  grandmother 
came  home,  Mrs.  Lee,  taking  Chi  Lap,  went  to  the 
temple.  Here,  at  her  request,  two  priests  were 
waiting.  They  had  with  them  the  coat  that  Mr. 
Lee  had  last  worn,  a small  mirror  made  of  metal 
brightly  polished  and  a pole  of  bamboo-wood  fresh- 
ly cut,  with  leaves  yet  green  at  the  top.  A stick, 
fastened  by  a string  to  the  top  of  the  pole,  was  put 
into  the  coat  for  arms  ; then  above  it,  and  just  high 
enough  to  represent  the  head  of  a man  wearing  the 
coat,  the  mirror  was  fastened  to  the  string.  When 
everything  was  ready  the  priest  gave  the  pole  to 
Chi  Lap,  who  field  it  over  his  shoulder.  Then  a 
priest  rang  a bell  and  called  Mr.  Lee’s  name,  and 
repeated  some  words  supposed  to  have  power  to 
bring  the  spirit  of  the  man  who  had  worn  the  coat 
back  to  its  place.  After  the  priest  had  repeated 
these  words  and  performed  several  ceremonies  that 
need  not  be  told  here,  the  coat  was  hurriedly  taken 
to  Mr.  Lee’s  house,  and,  as  he  was  too  weak  to  have 
it  put  on,  the  coat  was  laid  over  him  on  the  bed. 


THE  FATHER’S  DEATH. 


51 


The  object  of  all  this  was  to  call  back  the  spirit, 
which  was  supposed  to  be  leaving  Mr.  Lee’s  body. 
The  poor  man  understood  the  meaning  of  it  all, 
though  he  seemed  too  weak  to  speak,  and  he  only 
tried  to  shake  his  head.  After  a while  he  motioned 
to  his  wife  to  come  to  him.  He  whispered,  “ Bo 
law  eng ; kan  si-mia  e law  be  ” (There  is  no  road  to 
use;  I have  ari’ived  at  life’s  end). 

The  delirium  and  fever  had  passed  away;  so  had 
his  strength,  and  Mr.  Lee  knew  that  he  must  die. 
For  a few  minutes  his  strength  came  back  a little, 
and  he  called  his  two  boys  to  his  bed.  Looking  at 
them,  he  said,  “ My  boys,  your  father  has  been  to  a 
land  where  it  is  very  hot,  and  there  was  no  water 
there  for  him.  He  asked  the  people  to  give  him 
one  drink,  only  one  taste  of  cold  water,  but  they 
would  not.  Two  looked  like  his  own  Chi  Lap  and 
Choh  Lin,  but  it  could  not  be ; they  would  not  let 
their  father  die  for  want  of  a drink  of  cold  water. 
But  no  one  would  give  it,  and  the  fever-fire  has 
burned  his  spirit  loose.  It  must  go  soon,  but  where 
he  does  not  know.  When  it  has  gone  his  boys 
must  not  forget  to  place  food  and  water  where  it 
may  get  them.  I do  not  wish  to  go  ; I wish  to  stay 
and  care  for  my  boys  and  for  all.  But  it  is  too  late 
now.  It  is  all  dark,  dark  ! Let  me  sleep.” 

They  stooped  over  him;  they  called  his  name, 
but  he  did  not  answer,  he  did  not  notice  them. 
“ He  is  asleep,”  said  one.  Yes,  he  was  asleep,  but 
it  was  the  sleep  that  does  not  waken.  His  breath- 


52 


CHOH  LIN. 


ing  was  slower  and  slower  until  it  stopped,  and  Mr. 
Lee  was  dead. 

For  a few  moments  they  stood  around  the  dead 
man  in  silence,  hoping  that  he  was  asleep,  until 
Choh  Lin’s  grandmother  stooped  over  the  bed  and 
listened  ; he  did  not  breathe.  She  started  back  with 
the  cry,  “ My  heart  has  passed  away  ! my  heart  has 
passed  away !” 

Sad  was  the  lamentation  of  the  old  mother  • more 
touching  still  were  the  cries  of  Mrs.  Lee  when  she 
knew  that  she  was  a widow.  She  begged  his  spirit 
to  come  back,  to  speak  just  once  more  to  her,  and 
besought  it  not  to  leave  her  alone  as  a bird  in  a 
cage  with  no  hand  to  keep  her  from  starving.  How 
should  she  now  care  for  the  little  fledglings  in  the 
nest?  Soon  they  would  call  for  food,  and  she  must 
hear  their  cry,  unable  to  feed  them.  She  little 
thought  how  like  a prophecy  these  words  would 
prove. 

When  it  became  known  that  Mr.  Lee  was  dead 
the  friends  in  the  house  began  to  cry  and  lament 
their  loss.  They  had  reason  to  mourn,  for  they 
had  no  good  hope  of  meeting  the  dead  loved  one 
again.  As  Mr.  Lee  said,  it  was  all  dark,  dark  to 
them.  No  gospel  to  light  death,  no  Jesus  to  give 
light  to  the  grave.  That  darkness  is  awful. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


THE  FUNERAL. 


S soon  as  the  mourners  became  more  quiet,  can- 


-Ll_  dies  and  incense-sticks  were  lighted  and  placed 
by  the  side  of  Mr.  Lee’s  body.  The  Chinese  believe 
that  all  is  dark  in  the  spirit-world,  and  that  the 
spirit  does  not  know  how  to  find  the  path  ; so,  as 
soon  as  possible  after  death,  candles  are  lighted  to 
show  the  way.  The  incense  is  meant  as  worship  to 
the  spirit.  The  people  worship  the  spirits  of  the 
dead  somewhat  as  they  do  idols,  only  they  treat  the 
spirits  with  much  more  respect  than  they  do  their 
gods ; they  fear  and  love  them  more. 

The  next  day,  when  the  body  was  prepared  for 
the  coffin,  the  whole  family  assembled  in  the  room 
in  which  it  lav.  Chi  Lap,  who  had  been  told  what 
to  do,  took  a cup  of  wine,  and,  kneeling  before  the 
dead,  three  times  placed  the  cup  to  the  lips  of  the 
corpse.  After  this  he  took,  with  a pair  of  chopsticks, 
some  cooked  food  from  a bowl  and  offered  this  three 
times,  and  again  he  did  the  same  with  boiled  rice. 
While  he  was  thus  offering  drink  and  food  to  the 
dead  all  the  rest,  except  Mrs.  Lee  and  old  Mrs. 


54 


CHOU  LIN. 


Lee,  kneeled  around  the  body  and  with  loud  cries 
mourned  their  loss. 

After  this  another  ceremony  was  performed.  A 
paper  sedan-chair,  an  imitation  of  the  real  ones  in 
which  the  Chinese  ride,  and  four  imitation  chair- 
bearers,  or  men  to  carry  the  sedan,  made  of  paper, 
were  placed  on  the  ground  in  front  of  the  house, 
and  four  cups  of  wine  and  eight  small  cakes — real 
cups  and  wine  and  real  bread — were  put  near  them. 
When  all  was  ready  for  the  ceremony  Chi  Lap  set 
fire  to  the  paper  men  and  sedan,  while  two  priests 
who  were  present  recited  a prayer,  keeping  time 
with  brass  cymbals. 

The  people  suppose  that  these  paper  men  and 
sedan-chairs,  when  burned,  become  spirit  men  and 
chairs  in  the  next  world  to  carry  the  soul  of  the 
one  they  mourn.  The  wine  and  bread  are  for  the 
use  of  the  chair-bearers.  They  are  expected  to  get 
the  spirit  of  the  food  in  the  other  world.  A paper 
house  with  paper  furniture,  paper  clothes  and  every- 
thing that  the  soul  was  supposed  to  need  in  the 
other  world  were  burned  also. 

Lest  the  reader  should  grow  tired  of  these  cere- 
monies, we  will  pass  over  the  rest  of  them. 

Little  Choh  Lin  did  not  understand  their  mean- 
ing, nor  did  he  quite  understand  why  his  father  was 
put  into  the  coffin.  He  had  never  seen  so  much 
done  at  any  other  funeral,  and  could  not  see  why  it 
should  be  done  for  his  father.  He  asked  his  mother 
if  it  was  because  his  father  did  not  worship  the  gods 


THE  FUNERAL. 


55 


as  much  as  other  people  that  so  much  must  be  done 
for  him  when  dead.  His  mother  told  him  that  his 
father  was  a good  man,  and  because  he  was  good 
and  had  left  money  to  do  it  with,  they  could  have 
so  many  ceremonies. 

“But,  mother,”  asked  the  little  fellow,  “does  not 
my  father  grow  tired  of  so  many  ceremonies  ? I 
would.  He  said,  ‘ Let  me  sleep  ’ when  he  died, 
and  the  priests  and  people  will  not  let  him  sleep. 
Their  noise  will  disturb  him.  Shall  I tell  them 
to  stop?” 

“No,  my  boy,”  said  Mrs.  Lee,  “it  will  not  dis- 
turb him.  Noise  does  not  trouble  spirits  as  it  does 
us.  Besides,  all  this  crying  and  mourning  will  tell 
the  spirits  how  much  your  father  was  loved  and 
how  much  he  is  missed  now.  They  will  think  that 
he  was  a great  man  in  the  world,  and  will  treat  him 
with  respect.” 

“ Mother,  if  father  was  such  a good  man,  why 
must  he  die?” 

“ I do  not  know,  Choh  Lin.  It  was  the  will  of 
heaven — heaven  knows.” 

“ Why  could  it  not  be  the  will  of  heaven  that 
some  bad  man  should  die  ? There  are  many  such 
men.” 

“Choh  Lin  must  not  ask  such  questions.  We 
cannot  tell  why  heaven  takes  away  good  people 
who  are  loved  and  leaves  bad  ones  who  are  hated.” 

“ What  is  heaven,  mother  ?” 

“ I do  not  know.  Heaven  is  above  us,  whence 


56 


CHOH  LIN. 


good  things  come;  the  sunshine,  rain  and  other 
good  things  live  there.” 

The  Chinese  often  talk  about  heaven,  yet  when 
asked  where  and  what  heaven  is  they  seem,  like 
Mrs.  Lee,  to  know  very  little  about  it.  Perhaps 
the  first  fathers  of  the  Chinese  learned  from 
prophets,  or  from  the  Bible,  or  from  God  himself, 
that  heaven  is  God’s  home  and  the  place  where 
every  good  is ; but  when  the  people  turned  to  idols 
they  lost  nearly  all  the  knowledge  they  had  about 
God  and  heaven. 

When  the  body  of  the  dead  man  was  put  into 
the  coffin  the  lid  was  fastened  down  tightly  and 
every  part  of  the  coffin  made  air-tight  with  cement. 
Then,  instead  of  burying  the  dead  a few  days  after 
death,  the  body  was  kept  for  a number  of  weeks  in 
the  best  room  in  the  house.  The  Chinese  keep  their 
dead  so  long  before  burial  because  they  think  that 
it  will  seem  like  wanting  to  get  rid  of  their  friends 
if  they  hurry  the  bodies  off  to  the  grave.  They 
regard  it  a disgrace  to  have  the  funeral  too  soon. 

When  the  time  came  for  Mr.  Lee’s  funeral,  the 
relatives  and  friends  gathered  at  the  house  to  join 
the  procession  to  the  grave.  No  address  was  given, 
no  prayer  offered,  no  hymn  sung,  because  it  was  a 
heathen  funeral.  The  coffin  was  placed  on  a bier 
carried  by  ropes  fastened  to  poles  that  were  borne 
on  the  shoulders  of  men.  An  offering  was  then 
made  to  a god  in  the  hope  that  he  would  take  care 
of  the  soul  of  the  man  whom  they  were  about  to 


THE  FUNERAL. 


57 


bury.  After  the  offering  the  bearers  took  up  the 
bier  and  started  for  the  grave.  Before  them  went 
men  blowing  instruments  of  music,  and  following 
the  coffin  was  a covered  sedan-chair  carried  by  two 
men,  in  which  was  a little  wooden  tablet.  After 
the  sedan  came  Choh  Lin  and  Chi  Lap  on  foot, 
and  Mrs.  Lee  and  the  grandmother  riding  in  sedans. 
Then  came  the  rest  of  Mr.  Lee’s  family  and  his 
friends  on  foot.  All  of  these  relatives  were  crying 
and  mourning  with  loud  voices.  For  a few  mo- 
ments the  noise  would  be  less,  then  all  would  burst 
into  tears  again  and  mourn  louder  than  before. 

Choh  Lin  and  Chi  Lap,  as  also  their  mother, 
grandmother  and  sister,  wore  over  their  clothing 
long  coarse  sackcloth  cloaks  of  a grayish-white 
color.  These  coats  had  hoods  that  covered  the 
heads  all  but  a small  part  of  the  face,  arid  long 
sleeves  that  almost  hid  the  hands.  Others  of  the 
relatives  wore  these  coats,  but  only  the  nearest 
relatives  wore  the  hoods. 

The  grave  was  on  the  side  of  a hill,  and  was 
lined  with  cement.  Into  this  grave  the  coffin  was 
lowered,  and  then,  when  all  others  had  moved  back, 
Chi  Lap  came  forward  and  bowed  toward  the  coffin 
three  times  until  his  face  touched  the  ground.  Next 
came  Choh  Lin,  then  Mrs.  Lee  and  the  grand- 
mother, afterward  the  daughter,  and  last  the  other 
relatives,  each  in  turn  bowing  with  face  to  the 
ground. 

At  the  end  of  this  ceremony  of  worshiping  the 


58 


CHOU  LIN. 


dead,  Chi  Lap  took  the  tablet  that  had  been  carried 
in  the  sedan-chair,  and,  while  all  of  the  rest  kneeled, 
placed  it  at  the  head  of  the  grave,  and  then,  kneel- 
ing too,  he  said,  “ Let  the  flesh  and  the  bones  return 
to  the  earth  again,  but  let  the  spirit  enter  this  tab- 
let.” 

The  grave  was  closed  with  cement,  and  the 
friends,  taking  the  tablet  in  the  sedan-chair  again, 
returned  to  the  village.  The  tablet  was  placed  in  a 
room  in  Mr.  Lee’s  house  near  those  of  his  father 
and  grandfather.  The  Chinese  suppose  that  one 
spirit  of  the  dead  person  at  the  grave  enters  this 
tablet  and  lives  there ; so  they  treat  these  little  pieces 
of  wood  as  though  they  were  real  persons.  They 
place  food  and  drink  before  them  ; they  offer  incense 
to  them ; they  worship  the  wood  and  pray  to  it : 
they  say,  however,  that  they  do  not  worship  the 
wood,  but  the  spirit  in  it.  So  powerful  do  they 
suppose  a spirit  becomes  after  death  that  sometimes, 
when  a man  wishes  to  take  terrible  vengeance  on  an 
enemy,  he  kills  himself.  He  thinks  if  he  is  a spirit 
that  he  can  make  his  enemy  suffer  far  more  than  if 
he  remained  in  the  world  in  a body, 

No  one  seems  to  know  how  the  Chinese  first  got 
the  idea  of  worshiping  the  spirits  of  the  dead.  Very 
many  do  not  worship  idols ; many  laugh  at  the  gods, 
but  none  laugh  at  the  worship  of  the  spirits.  There 
are  several  stories  told  by  the  Chinese  about  the 
first  worship  of  the  tablets,  and  we  will  give  two 
of  them  in  a few  words : 


Ancestral  Tablet. 


Page  58. 


THE  FUNERAL. 


59 


More  than  two  thousand  years  ago,  as  a noted 
prince  was  traveling  with  some  of  his  people 
through  a woods,  all  the  food  was  eaten,  and  no 
more  could  be  got.  One  of  the  servants  of  this 
prince — so  the  story  goes — to  save  the  great  man’s 
life  cut  a piece  of  flesh  from  his  own  thigh  and  had 
it  cooked  for  his  master.  The  prince  was  saved, 
but  the  poor  man,  unable  to  walk,  was  burned  to 
death  by  a fire  that  was  kindled  in  the  woods.  The 
prince  afterward  had  a tablet  made  in  memory  of 
his  faithful  servant,  and  to  this  he  offered  incense 
and  worship. 

The  other  story  is,  that  a little  boy,  who  had  been 
very  disobedient  to  his  parents,  afterward  became 
very  good  to  them.  His  mother  one  day,  when 
taking  food  to  him  in  the  field,  fell  over  a root  of  a 
tree  and  hurt  herself  so  badly  that  she  died  of  it. 
The  boy  took  this  root  and  made  images  of  his 
parents  and  worshiped  them.  Do  you  think  the 
Chinese  foolish  ? But  they  do  not  know  any  better. 
Why? 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


CRUEL  RELATIVES. 


AFTER  the  funeral  Choh  Lin  missed  his  father 
very  much.  j While  the  body  remained  in  the 
house  the  little  fellow  seemed  to  think  that  the 
dead  man  was  asleep  and  would  awake  again ; but 
now,  since  the  room  in  which  the  coffin  had  stood 
was  empty,  he  longed  very  much  to  see  his  father. 
Mr.  Lee  had  been  very  fond  of  his  sons,  and  Choh 
Lin  was  his  special  favorite.  It  was  not  merely  the 
petting  and  the  good  things  given  him  by  his  father 
that  the  little  boy  missed;  he  wanted  to  see  him 
again  because  he  loved  him. 


One  day,  shortly  after  the  funeral,  Choh  Lin 
asked,  “ Mother,  when  will  father  come  back?  I 
want  to  see  11101.” 

“ He  will  not  come  back,  Choh  Lin,”  replied  the 
mother. 

“ Not  come  back  at  all  ? Can  I not  have  my 
father  any  more?” 

“No,”  said  Mrs.  Lee;  “you  have  no  father  now, 
I no  husband.  He  has  left  us  alone.” 

“ We  are  not  alone,  mother.  You  are  here,  I 
am,  Chi  Lap  is,  and  so  are  grandmother  and  my 
sister;  father  only  is  gone.  Where  has  he  gone?” 

60 


GRUEL  RELATIVES. 


61 


“ He  has  gone  away  into  the  spirit-world,  never 
to  come  again  to  his  family.” 

“ Can  I not  see  my  father  again  ? Why  did  he 
go  and  leave  his  little  boy  behind  him  ? Why  did 
he  not  take  Choh  Lin  too?  Can  I go  to  him?” 

“No,  no,  my  little  boy;  you  must  stay  with  me. 
You  do  not  wish  to  die,  do  you  ?” 

“ What  is  it  to  die,  mother  ?” 

“ It  is  to  be  put  into  a coffin  and  be  buried  in 
the  ground,  and  go  alone  into  the  gloomy  desert  of 
the  spirit-world,  there  to  be  without  friends,  cloth- 
ing, food — without  anything — unless  people  in  this 
life  care  for  your  wants.” 

“ Has  my  father  no  home  nor  food  where  he  is?” 

“ No,  none  but  what  we  give  him.” 

“Then  if  we  do  not  take  care  of  him  he  will  be 
hungry  and  will  starve.  Poor  father  ! What  would 
he  do  if  we  could  not  take  care  of  him?  What 
will  he  do,  and  what  will  we  do,  when  we  die?  If 
no  one  should  feed  us  in  the  spirit-world  wrould 
we  die?” 

“No.  Spirits  cannot  die.  They  shiver  with 
cold,  they  grow  hungry  and  thirsty,  they  are  lone- 
ly, they  starve,  but  cannot  die.” 

“ Mother,  did  father  have  more  than  one  soul  ?” 
asked  Chi  Lap,  who  had  just  come  into  the  room. 
“'You  say  that  his  soul  is  in  the  spirit- world,  yet 
the  soul  at  the  grave  came  into  the  tablet  that  we 
brought  home  with  us.” 

“ My  boys,”  said  the  mother,  “ each  body  has 


62 


CHOH  LIN. 


more  than  one  spirit — we  do  not  know,  surely,  how 
many : one  goes  into  the  dark  world,  another  into 
the  tablet,  and  another  stays  at  the  grave.  We  can- 
not see  into  the  spirit-world.” 

Not  long  after  the  burial  of  Mr.  Lee  the  friends 
and  relatives  of  the  dead  man  came,  as  they  said, 
“ to  settle  up  his  accounts  with  themselves.”  As 
her  husband’s  business  had  been  so  large,  and  Mrs. 
Lee  was  unable  to  carry  it  on,  or  even  to  settle  it, 
she  was  glad  to  have  help.  But  the  men  said  that 
they  could  attend  to  it  without  any  help  from  her. 
Each  one  knew  how  his  own  account  stood,  and  all 
of  them  together  could  arrange  the  whole  very 
easily. 

Men  whom  Mr.  Lee  had  helped  in  business  came, 
and,  presenting  bills,  said  that  Mr.  Lee  owed  them 
large  sums  of  money.  Others  to  whom  Mr.  Lee 
had  lent  money  when  asked  for  it  said  that  he  owed 
them  very  much  more  than  they  owed  him.  These 
knew  that  Mrs.  Lee  was  not  able  to  defend  herself 
or  take  care  of  her  property,  and  that  her  boys 
were  too  small  yet  to  go  to  law  with  them ; so  they 
thought  that  it  would  be  an  easy  way  not  only  to 
get  rid  of  paying  debts,  but  of  getting  part  of  Mr. 
Lee’s  property. 

The  relatives  who  had  charge  of  the  business 
made  these  men  give  them  a share  of  the  money 
which  their  bills  demanded,  and  then  settled  with 
them.  Thus,  instead  of  Mrs.  Lee  getting  the 


CRUEL  RELATIVES. 


63 


money  that  was  owing  her  husband,  she  lost  it 
and  more  besides.  In  this  way  nearly  all  of  the 
money  that  Mr.  Lee  had  left  for  his  wife  and  chil- 
dren was  taken  from  them. 

Men  who  had  worked  for  Mr.  Lee  brought  in 
large  accounts  that  they  said  had  been  unsettled  for 
many  months.  The  relatives  did  not  care  to  look 
for  receipts  among  Mr.  Lee’s  papers ; if  these  men 
only  gave  them  a large  part  of  the  money,  the  ac- 
counts were  paid. 

When  all  had  been  paid,  not  only  was  the  money 
all  gone,  but  much  had  been  borrowed.  These  rel- 
atives had  lent  it  themselves  or  borrowed  of  others, 
and  they  said  that  the  property  must  be  sold  to  pay 
back  this  money.  Mrs.  Lee  tried  to  stop  them,  and 
said  that  they  were  cheating  her  and  Mr.  Lee’s  chil- 
dren. The  men  became  very  angry  and  threatened 
to  turn  her  and  her  children  out  of  doors.  Mr. 
Lee’s  property  was  theirs,  they  said  ; they  had  ad- 
vanced money  to  pay  off  his  debts,  and  they  meant 
to  have  that  money  back  again.  Besides,  Mr.  Lee, 
they  said,  had  owed  them  for  many  years,  and  they 
had  waited  for  their  pay  until  he  was  able  to  give 
it. 

Mrs.  Lee  saw  that  these  men  meant  to  rob  her 
of  all  her  property  in  one  way  and  another,  and 
that  she  had  no  one  to  help  her ; so  she  determined 
to  take  the  control  of  her  affairs  in  her  own  hands. 
She  tried  to  send  the  men  away,  but  they  would  not 
go ; she  tried  to  take  the  business  out  of  their  con- 


64 


CHOH  LIN. 


trol,  but  they  would  not  give  it  up ; she  tried  to 
learn  about  the  business,  and  even  that  they  refused 
to  tell  her. 

There  are  laws  in  China,  and  officers  of  govern- 
ment to  see  that  these  laws  are  obeyed,  but  a little 
money  given  to  these  officers  usually  saves  the  of- 
fender from  punishment.  There  are  roguery  and 
cheating  in  our  own  land,  yet  this  is  really  the 
place  for  honest  people ; but  rogues  are  as  plenty  in 
China  as  honest  men  are  here,  and  that  means  that 
there  are  very  many  of  them. 

All  that  Mrs.  Lee  could  do  only  made  matters 
worse.  A woman  in  China  has  little  hope  of  get- 
ting her  rights  before  the  mandarins  (Chinese  offi- 
cers), and  very  seldom  does  a woman  appeal  to  them. 
The  only  way  that  Mrs.  Lee  could  take  to  drive 
away  these  relations  of  her  husband  was  to  call  on 
her  own  father’s  family  to  help  her.  They  lived 
far  away  from  Tay  Soa,  and  she  was  left  to  help 
herself.  The  people  in  the  village  might  have  pitied 
Mrs.  Lee,  but  they  said,  “ It  is  not  our  business ; we 
will  only  get  into  trouble  ourselves  by  helping; 
these  men  will  bring  a false  charge  against  us  to 
the  mandarins,  and  we  will  receive  harm  ourselves, 
while  Mrs.  Lee  will  get  no  good.”  So  the  poor 
woman  was  left  to  the  rascality  of  these  men,  who 
took  away  all  the  property  that  Mr.  Lee  left  his 
family. 

His  boats  were  seized  by  these  men,  who  pre- 
tended to  own  them,  or  were  sold  to  others  to  pay 


CRUEL  RELATIVES. 


65 


the  debts  that  it  was  said  were  on  the  property ; all 
the  rice  in  the  rice-shop  had  been  stolen  by  these 
relatives;  the  lumber  in  the  lumber-yard  disap- 
peared, no  one  seemed  able  to  tell  how;  and  several 
rice-fields,  his  relatives  said,  belonged  to  their  fam- 
ily. In  this  way  all  the  property,  except  the  house 
in  which  Mrs.  Lee  lived  and  the  furniture,  was  taken 
away,  and  she  was  left  without  anything  to  support 
her  family. 

In  her  anxiety  to  save  something  for  her  family 
Mrs.  Lee  partly  forgot  her  grief  at  the  loss  of  her 
husband;  and  now  that  she  must  do  something  at 
once  to  get  food  for  her  children,  she  had  no  time 
to  mourn.  Unable  to  punish  those  who  had  robbed 
her,  the  poor  widow  hated  the  unjust  men  all  the 
more.  She  determined  to  be  revenged  on  them  in 
some  way,  and  taught  her  boys  not  only  to  hate,  but 
to  think  of  punishing,  the  men  who  had  taken  their 
property. 

One  day,  as  the  family  at  their  scanty  dinner 
were  talking  of  some  way  to  “get  even”  with  the 
rogues,  Mrs.  Lee  said  to  Choli  Lin,  “You  can  pray 
your  god  to  punish  them.  Ask  him  to  send  sick- 
ness and  death  to  their  families — to  make  the  rain 
destroy  their  crops  or  the  drought  to  kill  their  rice. 
Ask  him  to  send  robbers  to  steal  what  they  have 
or  to  make  the  mandarins  catch  and  shut  them  in 
prison.  Your  god  ought  to  take  your  part  and 
punish  those  who  rob  you.” 

“You  can  pray  to  your  father’s  spirit  to  bring 
5 


66 


CHOH  LIN. 


sickness  and  loss  and  death  to  their  families,”  added 
the  grandmother. 

“ I do  not  believe  that  my  father’s  spirit  would 
do  it,”  replied  Chi  Lap.  “ He  would  not  let  us 
fight  the  boys  who  hurt  us  when  he  was  alive,  and 
I do  not  believe  that  he  will  harm  people  now.” 

“But  you  can  pray  him  to  help  you  get  back  the 
property  that  those  rogues  stole  from  you.” 

“ Can  my  father’s  spirit  help  us,  grandmother?” 
asked  Choh  Lin. 

“Certainly,”  replied  the  grandmother. 

“Then  why  must  we  give  his  spirit  food,  clothing 
and  other  things?”  inquired  the  child. 

“ Because  he  does  not  know  yet  where  to  find  such 
things  in  the  spirit-world,”  answered  the  grand- 
mother. “ But  you  need  not  ask  many  questions 
now.”  The  old  lady  was  afraid  to  hear  the  boys 
ask  questions  about  the  spirit-world.  The  Chinese 
believe  so  many  foolish  things  that  they  do  not  like 
to  be  catechised  about  their  superstitious  notions. 

Mrs.  Lee  found  it  very  hard  to  get  food  for  her 
family,  and  more  than  once  not  only  she  and  the 
grandmother,  but  the  children  too,  were  obliged  to 
go  hungry  to  bed.  She  thought  one  day  that  she 
would  try  to  sell  her  large  house  and  buy  or  rent  a 
small  one,  and  have  enough  money  left  to  support 
her  family  for  a long  time.  She  asked  a man  if  he 
knew  of  any  one  who  wanted  to  buy  a house.  This 
soon  came  to  the  ears  of  the  relatives  who  had  rob- 
bed her,  and  they  were  afraid  that  she  would  sell 


GRUEL  RELATIVES. 


67 


and  go  away  with  the  money ; so  some  of  them 
came  at  once  to  forbid  her  selling  the  property. 
She  had  no  right  to  do  it,  they  said.  Mrs.  Lee 
gave  sharp  answers  in  reply.  They  told  her  that 
if  she  tried  to  sell  they  would  at  once  drive  her  out 
of  the  house  and  take  it  themselves.  A few  days 
after  they  heard  that  she  meant  to  dispose  of  the 
place,  and  several  came  as  soon  as  possible  to  “ see 
about  it.”  The  result  of  all  was  that  they  drove 
Mrs.  Lee  and  her  family  from  the  large  house  and 
made  her  take  a much  smaller  one  that,  they  said, 
belonged  to  Mr.  Lee.  The  large  one  they  took  pos- 
session of,  as  they  professed,  for  Mr.  Lee’s  children. 

But  this  did  not  end  the  cruelty  of  these  men. 
They  wanted  an  excuse  to  keep  the  house.  They 
dared  not  rob  any  more.  Besides,  they  were  afraid 
that  if  they  took  the  house  they  might  be  obliged 
to  support  the  children  and  widow.  Only  one  way 
seemed  open  to  them : they  would  have  Mrs.  Lee 
marry  again,  and  then  as  a wife  in  another  family 
they  could  say  that  since  she  had  deserted  Mr.  Lee’s 
relatives  they  were  not  obliged  to  care  for  her  and 
she  had  no  right  to  his  property.  They  knew  that 
if  she  did  marry  she  would  keep  her  children,  and 
then,  on  the  plea  that  the  children  had  been  adopted 
into  another  family,  these  relatives  would  claim  the 
property. 

One  day  a number  of  Mr.  Lee’s  relatives  came 
to  the  house  where  Mrs.  Lee  was  living  and  pre- 
tended to  be  anxious  about  her  welfare.  They  said 


68 


CHOH  LIN. 


it  was  a pity  that  her  husband  had  left  his  business 
in  such  a bad  condition.  They  did  not  believe  that 
the  men  who  settled  it  had  done  the  very  best  with 
the  property,  yet  it  was  too  late  now  to  remedy  that. 
Nor  was  it  just  that  those  men  should  keep  posses- 
sion of  the  large  house ; yet,  as  they  were  many  and 
had  great  influence,  it  would  be  safer  to  say  little 
about  it  now.  They  were  only  keeping  the  house 
for  the  children ; as  soon  as  the  boys  became  men  it 
would  be  given  back  to  them.  Besides,  that  house 
could  not  be  sold  out  of  the  family;  it  stood  not  on 
Mr.  Lee’s  ground,  but  on  that  belonging  to  the 
whole  family.  They  were  poor  themselves  and  un- 
able to  aid  the  widow,  though  they  would  gladly  do 
all  in  their  power  to  help  so  good  a woman.  Grad- 
ually thev  turned  the  conversation  until  one  of  them 
said  to  the  other,  “ If  a young  and  rich  man,  good 
enough,  could  be  found  to  marry  our  sister  here, 
how  fortunate  it  would  be  for  her  and  her  children, 
who  otherwise  may  suffer!” 

“ Oh  no,”  said  the  other ; “ it  would  not  do  to 
think  of  her  marrying  and  leaving  the  family.  We 
cannot  let  her  go.” 

“But  she  need  not  leave  our  family,”  replied  the 
first.  “ She  is  too  much  one  of  us  to  be  lost  by 
marrying  again.” 

In  this  way  they  tried  to  find  out  whether  the 
widow  would  be  willing  to  marry;  but  as  she  said 
nothing  and  acted  as  though  she  did  not  hear,  ono 
asked  her  what  she  thought  of  Ian’s  plan. 


CRUEL  RELATIVES. 


69 


“ What  plan  ?”  asked  Mrs.  Lee. 

“ Ian  thinks  that  if  you  could  find  a good  and 
rich  husband  to  take  care  of  you  and  the  children 
it  would  save  you  a great  deal  of  care  and  suffer- 
ing,” replied  the  man. 

“ I do  not  want  a husband  ; I never  mean  to 
marry  again.  No  woman  can  find  more  than  one 
good  husband,  and  few  find  even  one  in  this  world. 
Their  father,”  said  Mrs.  Lee,  pointing  to  the  boys, 
“ was  a good  man.  He  was  the  only  good  one  in 
this  place,  or  some  one  would  have  cared  for  a 
widow  who  had  no  friends.  N o,  I wi  11  never  have 
a husband  again.” 

The  men  soon  found  that  it  was  useless  to  talk 
gently  about  her  marrying,  and  they  began  to  say 
that  she  must  get  a husband. 

“I  have  a husband,  and  I love  him  yet,”  said 
she  firmly.  “His  body  only  is  dead;  his  spirit 
lives,  and  I will  go  to  him  some  day,  but  it  shall 
not  be  from  the  house  of  a stranger.” 

It  was  useless  to  reason  with  her  about  her  chil- 
dren. “I  will  take  care  of  them,”  said  she,  “if  I 
must  give  my  life  to  do  it.  If  we  must  starve,  we 
will  starve  together.  Cruel  relatives  can  then  think 
that  they  killed  us;  for  what  have  they  done  but 
rob  his  children  of  the  food  that  he  gathered? 
Vengeance  will  come  some  day.  If  through  the 
skeleton  gate  of  starvation  we  must  go  to  the  spirit- 
world,  we  will  come  back  again.  The  robbers  of 
the  widow  and  fatherless  will  then  find  them- 


70 


CHOII  LIN. 


selves  robbed,  and  none  can  find  that  which  will 
then  be  taken  away.” 

The  woman’s  manner  and  words  frightened  some 
of  the  men,  and  they  were  ready  to  let  Mrs.  Lee 
take  her  own  course.  But  two  or  three  more  des- 
perate ones  determined  not  to  be  baffled.  They 
would  not  let  a woman  conquer.  They  told  her 
that  she  must  marry.  She  might  as  well  yield  first 
as  last,  for  they  were  men,  and  many  too,  while  she 
was  only  a woman,  and  one  alone. 

“ If  I am  only  one  and  but  a woman,”  said  Mrs. 
Lee,  “ there  is  one  thing  I can  do : I can  die  a 
widow.” 

Angry  beyond  control  at  her  determination,  one 
of  the  men  caught  up  a heavy  iron  hoe  and  struck 
Mrs.  Lee  on  her  bead.  Without  a word  or  a cry, 
only  uttering  a low  moan,  the  poor  woman  sank  to 
the  floor.  Pale,  silent  and  motionless  she  lay  there. 

“She  is  dead,  dead;  you  have  killed  her,”  cried 
the  daughter. 

“My  child!  my  child!  are  you  dead?  are  you 
dead?”  moaned  the  old  grandmother  as  she  bent 
over  Mrs.  Lee.  “Have  I lost  my  last  and  best? 
No,  do  not  go. — O spirit  of  my  child,  come  back  ! 
come  back ! My  light,  go  not  out;  leave  me  not  in 
darkness.” 

When  the  men  saw  what  had  been  done  they 
were  frightened,  and  hurriedly  left  the  house,  and 
as  soon  as  possible  the  village. 

For  a moment  Choh  Lin  looked  at  his  mother, 


CRUEL  RELATIVES. 


71 


then  at  his  sister  and  grandmother,  and  when  lie 
saw  them  kneeling  beside  his  mother  and  mourning 
for  her,  he  too  began  to  ciy.  Chi  Lap’s  first  thought 
was  to  strike  the  man  who  had  struck  his  mother, 
but  as  he  saw  them  all  run  away  he  kneeled  beside 
his  grandmother  and  asked,  “ Is  mother  badly 
hurt  ?”  He  could  not  understand  that  death  could 
come  so  suddenly. 

“Badly  hurt,  poor  child?”  said  the  grandmother. 
“She  is  dead.  You  have  no  father,  and  now  no 
mother,  and  my  last  child  is  gone.” 

“No,  she  is  not  dead,”  replied  Chi  Lap.  “See, 
she  moves ; she  is  alive. — Mother ! mother ! do  not 
die!  do  not  leave  us!” 

Mrs.  Lee  was  not  dead,  though  very  dangerously 
wounded.  For  some  time  she  was  senseless,  but 
after  the  blood  had  been  washed  from  the  wound 
and  the  injured  woman  laid  on  a bed,  she  slowly 
recovered  her  senses.  For  several  days  it  was  un- 
certain whether  she  would  live  or  die,  but,  being  a 
strong,  healthy  woman,  she  passed  the  time  of  dan- 
ger and  gradually  grew  better.  It  was  some  weeks 
before  she  was  entirely  well. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

SEEKING  A LIFE-GIVING  GOD. 

THE  cruelty  of  these  relatives  made  a great  stir 
in  the  village,  though  the  mandarins  took  no 
notice  of  it.  Perhaps  they  thought  that  as  Mrs. 
Lee  was  poor  they  would  get  no  money  for  punish- 
ing her  enemies.  No  one  made  complaint  to  them, 
so  that  they  were  not  obliged  to  attend  to  the  matter. 
If  the  officers  in  China  took  notice  of  every  case 
of  cruelty,  they  would  find  far  more  to  do  than  they 
have  now. 

The  elders  of  the  village,  however,  felt  that  these 
relatives  had  gone  too  far,  and  if  not  stopped  might 
actually  murder  the  poor  woman;  so  they  forbade 
the  men  abusing  her  any  further,  but  allowed  them 
to  keep  their  ill-gotten  property. 

The  elders  of  a Chinese  village  have  authority 
something  like  that  of  parents  in  our  country, 
though  they  are  not  government  officers.  The  rob- 
bers knew  that  if  they  disobeyed  the  elders  a com- 
plaint would  be  made  to  the  mandarins,  and  then 
much  of  the  stolen  property  must  be  surrendered  to 
save  them  from  punishment.  After  this  Mrs.  Lee 

72 


SEEKING  A LIFE-GIVING  GOD. 


73 


and  her  family  were  not  troubled  so  much,  though 
by  no  means  free  from  little  annoyances. 

Mrs.  Lee  was  very  grateful  for  her  recovery,  and 
looked  upon  it  as  life  from  the  dead.  She  believed 
that  some  god  had  restored  her  to  life.  This  god 
she  determined  to  find — to  make  him  her  own,  and 
then  teach  her  fami-ly  of  him.  But  who  was  the 
god  ? Where  was  he  worshiped  ? What  temple 
had  been  built  in  his  honor?  Often  she  asked  her- 
self these  questions,  and  in  every  way  possible  tried 
to  find  out.  She  talked  to  her  friends  in  the  village 
about  her  recovery,  and  told  them  that  she  believed 
there  was  somewhere  a greater  god  than  she  had 
known  before,  who  had  brought  her  back  to  life 
again.  She  asked  them  to  tell  all  they  knew  of 
the  gods  of  their  own  and  other  countries,  but  they 
could  tell  little  more  than  she  knew  already.  “Per- 
haps,” said  one,  “ there  is  a greater  god  in  our  land 
than  we  know,  and  he  may  be  worshiped  in  some 
temple  far  away  from  Tay  Soa.” 

She  learned  of  a number  of  temples,  some  many 
miles  away.  Saying  nothing  to  others,  she  started 
one  morning  alone  to  find  one  of  these.  It  was  a 
long,  weary  walk,  but  when,  near  noon,  she  reached 
the  place,  she  found  the  same  gods  worshiped  there 
that  she  had  known  in  Tay  Soa.  She  prayed  and 
offered  incense  to  them,  yet  in  her  heart  felt  that 
they  were  not  what  she  sought.  At  night  she 
reached  home  disappointed,  though  determined  to 
seek  another  temple,  a larger  one  still,  farther  away, 


74 


CHOH  LIN. 


of  which  she  had  heard  on  her  journey.  She  went 
to  this,  too,  to  be  disappointed.  Though  some  of  the 
idols  were  different  from  those  she  had  seen  before, 
yet  after  offering  food,  incense  and  prayer  she  left, 
feeling  that  none  of  them  had  the  spirit  of  the  god 
she  longed  to  find. 

In  this  way  she  went  to  temple  after  temple  until 
all  within  many  miles  of  her  home  had  been  vis- 
ited, yet  nowhere  did  she  find  the  life-giving  god. 
In  her  talks  with  the  priests  she  asked  what  each 
god  did,  and  always  asked  if  there  were  any  who 
could  give  life  to  the  dead.  Some  gave  one  and 
some  another  answer,  but  all  said  that  none  of  the 
gods  whom  they  knew  could  restore  the  dead  to 
life,  nor  did  they  believe  there  were  such  gods  in 
China  or  in  any  other  land.  One  priest  said, 
“There  is  no  such  thing  as  a dead  person  coming 
to  life  again.  Once  dead,  the  body  is  dead  for  ever. 
There  is  no  god  who  can,  or  at  least  who  will,  bring 
it  back  to  life.” 

“ There  must  be  such  a god,”  she  replied,  “ for 
I was  killed,  or  so  nearly  killed  that  I must  have 
died  had  not  some  god  unknown  to  me  brought  my 
life  back.  There  is  such  a god,  and  I am  trying  to 
find  him.  I want  to  know  where  his  temple  is,  that 
I may  go  there  to  worship  him.  He  gave  life  back 
to  me,  and  when  I find  him  he  shall  have  me  and 
all  that  I have.” 

Some  priests  looked  at  her,  then  at  each  other, 
with  a look  that  seemed  to  say,  “ The  woman  is 


SEEKING  A LIFE-GIVING  GOD. 


75 


crazy others  told  her  that  her  search  would  be 
vain. 

Not  only  did  she  go  to  the  temples  of  both  of  the 
great  religions  of  China — the  Buddhist  and  the 
Tauist — but  tried  to  learn  their  doctrines  and  all 
about  the  many  gods  of  which  they  taught.  Every- 
where she  met  with  the  same  disappointment.  The 
hungering,  thirsting  famine  of  soul,  the  anxious 
longing  to  find  the  god  who  gave  life,  remained, 
but  of  the  god  she  could  learn  nothing.  Wearied 
with  her  search,  she  gradually  came  to  believe  that 
there  was  no  such  god,  or,  if  there  were,  that  he  had 
hid  himself  so  that  none  could  find  him. 

An  aged  priest  told  her  one  day,  “ I am  an  old 
man  and  more  learned  than  you  ; I have  studied 
this  long  and  carefully,  and  ought  to  know.  I tell 
you  there  is  no  better  god  than  those  we  worship. 
Our  country  is  the  oldest,  wisest  and  best  of  the 
world,  and  certainly  has  the  best  gods.  If  there 
were  better  ones,  the  wise  men  who  lived  long  ago 
would  have  found  out  about  them.  But  no  learned 
men,  no  books,  nothing  in  the  Middle  Kingdom  ” 
(the  Chinese  name  for  their  country),  “ tells  of  other 
gods.” 

“Is  all  known?”  asked  Mrs.  Lee;  “is  there 
nothing  new  to  learn?” 

“ There  is  nothing  new  to  learn  about  the  gods,” 
was  the  reply. 

“But  there  are  new  things  in  the  world — new 
things  to  us,  too,”  answered  Mrs.  Lee.  “ At  every 


76 


CHOU  LIN. 


rise  of  the  sun  comes  a new  day.  New  years  follow 
the  old  ones ; new  lives  begin,  and  old  die  out  and 
are  gone.  Why  may  it  not  be  that  new  gods  are 
born,  or  at  least  appear?” 

“ None  have  appeared,”  was  the  reply. 

“ Perhaps  we  know  none  who  have  appeared,  yet 
they  may  have  shown  themselves  elsewhere.” 

“ If  any  gods  better  than  those  of  the  Middle 
Kingdom  live,  they  would  surely  show  themselves 
to  our  country.  Gods,  like  men,  seek  the  best  lands 
as  their  home.  No,  rest  assured  that  the  best  gods 
are  those  who  have  made  our  country  their  choice. 
Other  nations  try  to  get  our  gods.  For  many  years 
there  has  been  a class  of  foreigners  in  our  country 
who  have  pretended  to  bring  in  a new  religion,  but 
they  are  merely  copying*  one  of  ours,  the  Buddhist. 
But  the  copy  is  too  poor;  the  gods  are  not  deceived 
by  it.  These  foreigners  intend  to  teach  our  people 
this  new  religion,  and  hope  by  that  means  to  win 
the  favor  of  the  gods,  but  they  have  another  object : 
they  wish  to  get  money.” 

“ Perhaps  foreigners  have  better  gods  at  home,” 
suggested  Mrs.  Lee. 

oo 

“I  don’t  think  so,”  replied  the  old  man.  “If 
they  had  they  would  have  brought  some  of  their 
idols  here  for  us  to  buy,  or  at  least  would  have  told 

* There  is  a strong  resemblance  between  the  worship  of  the 
Roman  Catholics  in  China  and  that  of  the  Buddhists.  An  ob- 
server hardly  knows  which  is  copying,  if  either  be  taken  from 
the  other,  the  similarity  is  so  striking. 


SEEKING  - A LIFE-GIVING  GOD. 


77 


us  about  them.  They  have  better  ships,  better 
money,  better  cloth,  better  tools,  better  medicine; 
they  have  better  guns,  too,  than  we.  All  these 
they  bring  to  sell  to  our  people,  but  they  never 
bring  any  of  their  gods  nor  their  religion  to  sell. 
They  would  surely  do  it  if  they  had  better  than 
we.  Indeed,  they  would  bi'ing  their  religion  to 
sell  if  they  had  any.” 

“ What ! have  foreigners  no  gods  at  all  ?”  asked 
Mrs.  Lee  in  astonishment. 

“ They  have  none,”  replied  the  priest,  “ except 
that  of  which  I tell  you,  and  that  is  but  a poor 
copy  of  our  own.” 

“ Do  they  never  worship,  have  they  no  temples, 
no  gods  at  all,  in  foreign  countries?”  inquired  Mrs. 
Lee.  “ Then  they  are  wretched  indeed.” 

“ I have  not  asked  them,  but  others  of  our  peo- 
ple who  have  lived  on  their  ships  say  that  they 
never  worship  any  idol  or  spirit.” 

“ Perhaps  the  men  who  come  to  our  country  are 
the  poor  outcast  ones  of  their  country,  who  have 
been  driven  away  because  they  would  not  worship 
the  gods  or  spirits.” 

“That  may  be,”  replied  the  old  priest  thought- 
fully : then,  after  a moment  of  silence,  he  continued, 
“ No,  that  cannot  be,  for  some  men  who  have  come 
here  were  their  mandarins  and  commanded  their 
large  war-vessels.  These  did  not  worship  either.” 

“ Strange  people  they  must  be,”  spoke  Mrs.  Lee, 
half  to  herself,  “to  have  nothing  to  worship!  They 


78 


CHOH  LIN. 


must  be  like  dogs  or  buffaloes.  How  much  better 
the  Middle  Kingdom  is  than  those  wretched  foreign 
countries ! But  how  can  it  be  that  they  have  no 
gods?  Who  cares  for  them?  Do  they  not  serve 
any  being  nor  love  anything  ?” 

“Yes'/’  replied  the  priest,  with  a change  in  his 
look  and  tone;  “they  do  serve  something,  and  love 
it  more  than  any  in  our  land  do  our  gods.  For- 
eigners have  a god  ; they  love  him,  too,  with  all 
their  hearts,  and  give  all  they  have  to  his  service. 
It  is  for  this  god  they  leave  their  country  and  come 
here.” 

“ What  do  you  mean  ?”  asked  Mrs.  Lee,  not  un- 
derstanding the  priest’s  words.  “You  said  they 
have  no  gods,  and  now  you  tell  me  that  they  have 
one  whom  they  love  and  faithfully  serve.” 

“Oh,”  answered  the  old  man,  “the  god  of  whom 
I speak  is  known  and  worshiped  in  China  too. 
The  people  know  and  worship  him,  while  the  man- 
darins serve  him  faithfully.” 

“ Is  it  the  emperor?”  inquired  she. 

“ No,”  was  the  reply.  “ I will  show  you  one  of 
their  gods ;”  and  he  showed  her  a silver  dollar. 
“This  is  the  god  of  the  foreigners;  for  this  they 
live — for  this  they  make  war,  enslave  and  murder 
nations.” 

“ What  do  you  mean  ?”  asked  Mrs.  Lee,  looking 
at  the  priest  with  astonishment. 

“ I mean  that  some  years  ago,  when  our  emperor 
forbade  the  smoking  and  buying  of  opium,  and  or- 


SEEKING  A LIFE-GIVING  GOD. 


79 


deretl  that  none  should  be  brought  into  the  country, 
then  foreigners  made  war  on  us.  They  had  better 
guns,  soldiers  and  ships  than  ours,  and  forced  the 
emperor  to  allow  the  opium  to  be  sold — forced  our 
country  to  buy  that  which  makes  slaves  of  a people 
and  destroys  a nation.  Foreigners  did  it,  but  not 
because  they  love  opium — they  do  not  use  it  them- 
selves— but  did  it  because  they  love  silver.  For 
silver  they  would  ruin  any  people.” 

This,  it  must  be  remembered,  was  in  the  early 
days  of  Protestant  missions  in  China,  when  very 
little  had  yet  been  heard  about  the  true  God. 
Though  Roman  Catholics  had  been  for  many  years 
in  the  country,  it  is  possible  that  many  who  had 
heard  of  their  doctrines  thought,  as  did  the  priest, 
that  they  were  merely  poor  copies  of  Buddhism 
and  schemes  for  getting  money  from  the  people. 

At  length  Mrs.  Lee  gave  up  her  search,  but  not 
her  longing,  to  find  the  god  who  gives  life.  One 
day  she  told  her  mother-in-law  of  the  vain  search. 

“Are  not  the  gods  of  the  village  good  enough?” 
asked  the  old  lady.  “ They  are  for  me ; they  were 
for  your  husband,  for  his  father  and  for  his  ancestors 
before  him.  Why  should  they  not  be  good  enough 
for  you  ?” 

“ But  these  gods  do  not  give  life,”  answered  Mrs. 
Lee.  “ I want  to  find  the  one  who  gave  back  the 
life  to  me  that  our  cruel  relatives  took  away.  I 
want  to  make  an  offering  to  him  and  to  serve  him. 
Oh,  where  is  such  a god  to  be  found  ?” 


80 


CHOH  LIN. 


“ There  is  none,”  was  the  reply.  “ Yon  were  not 
dead.  If  one  dies  there  is  is  no  coming  back  again 
to  life.  You  were  almost  dead,  but  our  gods  saved 
you  that  you  might  take  care  of  your  children. 
Don’t  anger  them  now  by  seeking  some  other  god, 
but  give  them  your  thanks.  We  have  nothing  else 
to  give,”  she  added  in  a lower  tone.  “ Do  not  show 
such  ingratitude  as  to  forsake  them  for  some  un- 
known god,  who  neither  has  done  you  a kindness 
nor  knows  about  you.” 

The  children  at  first  knew  little  about  Mrs.  Lee’s 
search.  She  told  Choh  Lin  one  day  that  she  had 
been  looking  for  the  god  who  had  brought  her  back 
to  life  again. 

“ I can  tell  you  where  that  god  is,”  said  he ; “ it 
is  my  god.  You  gave  me  to  him  and  taught  me  to 
serve  him,  and  so  he  brought  life  back  to  you  that 
you  may  take  care  of  me.  When  we  are  rich  again 
I mean  to  make  him  a great  feast.” 

Mrs.  Lee  did  not  care  to  destroy  Choh  Lin’s  faith 
in  his  god,  and  said  nothing  in  reply.  Gradually 
her  desire  to  find  another  god  passed  away.  She 
thought  that  perhaps  it  was  true  that  the  gods  of 
her  own  country  had  been  her  friends,  yet  not  one 
of  these  was  the  god  she  wanted. 


CHAPTER  X. 


POVERTY. 


FTER  recovering  from  her  wound,  Mrs.  Lee 


-TX  learned  how  poor  she  was.  Besides  herself, 
she  had  her  two  boys,  her  daughter  and  mother-in- 
law  to  support,  and  neither  money  nor  property 
with  which  to  do  it.  The  mother-in-law  was  too 
old  and  the  boys  were  too  young  to  do  much,  and  it 
was  contrary  to  Chinese  custom  for  girls  of  the  age 
of  her  daughter  to  do  any  work  except  such  as 
could  be  done  at  home.  Mrs.  Lee  had  only  her 
own  strength  on  which  to  depend.  She  was  able  to 
work,  but  there  are  always  in  China  more  willing 
and  able  to  work  than  there  is  work  for  them  to 
do.  Whatever  faults  the  Chinese  have,  laziness  is 
not  one  of  them.  Most  of  the  people  are  anxious 
to  earn  a living:  if  a chance  is  given.  Work  is 
scarce  and  wages  are  low.  An  ordinary  day-laborer 
thinks  he  receives  good  pay  if  he  can  get  one  hun- 
dred cash  (or  less  than  ten  cents)  a day.  It  is  true, 
the  common  kinds  of  food  are  cheap,  but  a family 
of  five  must  live  very  poorly  to  be  supported  on 
the  wages  of  one  laboring-man.  The  wages  of  a 
woman  are  even  less. 


81 


82 


CHOH  LIN. 


During  Mrs.  Lee’s  illness  debts  for  food  had  been 
incurred ; these  must  be  paid.  So,  when  able  to 
work,  she  found  herself  with  debts,  but  no  money 
and  almost  without  food.  The  poor  woman  had  no 
time  to  mourn  over  her  misfortune,  nor  could  she 
give  the  time  she  wished  to  the  search  for  the  life- 
giving  god.  When  there  was  work  she  could  not 
leave  it  even  for  this  object,  and  when  there  was 
nothing  to  do  she  seldom  felt  willing  to  go  to  the 
distant  temples,  because  obliged  to  take  a present 
for  the  god  whose  temple  she  visited : she  was  too 
poor  to  give  more  than  the  commonest  present. 

It  was  not  unusual  for  Mrs.  Lee  to  be  several 
days  at  a time  without  work,  and  more  than  once 
the  last  cash  was  spent  and  the  last  bit  of  food 
eaten.  At  such  times  she  would  go  away  from  the 
house,  and  where  none  noticed  her  would  sit  down 
to  weep.  Sometimes,  if  a little  food  were  left,  she 
would  go  away  before  meal-time,  pretending  that 
some  business  called,  and  stay  away  in  the  hope 
that  the  rest  would  eat  before  she  returned.  If 
they  waited,  she  told  them  on  her  return  that  she 
had  eaten  enough,  and  they  must  take  what  food 
there  was  at  home.  Little  Choh  Lin  at  such  times 
coaxed  his  mother  to  take  some  food,  refusing  to 
eat  until  she  did.  His  coaxing  would  make  her 
pretend  to  eat,  though  she  seldom  took  more  than 
a little  morsel. 

Not  often  nor  long  at  a time  during  the  first  year 
of  her  poverty  did  Mrs.  Lee’s  family  lack  food. 


POVERTY. 


83 


Unable  to  buy  a large  quantity  at  a time,  she  must 
pay  a much  larger  price  and  buy  the  cheapest  kinds 
of  food.  Choh  Lin  hardly  knew  how  meat  tasted, 
and  seldom  ate  fish,  though  fish  are  usually  so  plen- 
tiful and  cheap  along  the  coasts  and  rivers  of  China. 
Only  now  and  then  could  the  family  have  a dish  of 
rice,  and  when  they  had  it  Choh  Lin  said  it  was 
“ Om,  om,”  that  is,  “ Water-rice,  water-rice/’ — 
meaning  that  the  rice  was  so  much  mixed  with 
water  as  to  seem  mostly  water. 

While  rice  is  eaten  by  all  the  Chinese  who  can 
afford  it,  there  are  many  kinds  of  food  much 
cheaper,  and  the  poor  people  must  eat  many  a meal 
without  tasting  rice.  When  they  do  have  it,  it  is 
often  cooked  until  it  becomes  what  they  call  “ om,” 
— that  is,  rice  very  soft  and  almost  dissolved  in 
water,  like  a thin  starch.  The  poorer  the  people 
the  more  water  is  mixed  with  their  rice.  Sweet 
potatoes  form  one  of  the  most  plentiful  foods  of 
Southern  China.  These  are  watery  and  stringy,  or 
woody.  In  China,  or  at  least  in  the  southern  part, 
they  do  not  usually  plant  white  potatoes,  though  a 
few  small  ones  are  raised  for  the  use  of  foreigners. 
Beans,  leeks,  and  a vegetable  very  much  like  our 
radish,  though  without  sharpness,  are  cultivated 
and  eaten  by  the  poorer  people,  while  melon-seeds 
and  seeds  of  other  vegetables,  together  with  almost 
anything  eatable,  help  to  keep  them  from  starvation. 
Nothing  is  wasted  in  China.  The  parts  of  fish  and 
animals  that  even  the  poorest  in  our  country  would 


84 


CHOH  LIN. 


throw  away  are  carefully  saved  and  eaten  by  the 
poor.  The  old  pictures  of  Chinese  selling  rats  and 
puppies  for  food  may  never  be  a reality  in  that 
country,  yet  the  writer  knows,  from  what  he  has 
seen,  that  rats  and  other  animals  not  more  desirable 
are  eaten  by  some  of  the  people.  In  times  of  fam- 
ine, and  even  when  famine  does  not  distress  them, 
the  poor  gather  potato-leaves  and  weeds,  which  they 
cook  and  eat. 

The  country  near  the  coast  is  overcrowded  with 
people,  and,  though  the  land  is  fertile  and  the  Chi- 
nese are  good  farmers,  and  though,  as  there  is  no 
winter  and  scarcely  any  frost,  the  land  in  the  south- 
ern part  produces  two  and  sometimes  as  many  as 
four  crops  a year,  yet  there  is  scarcely  ever  a time 
when  some  people  are  not  starving  there. 

Choh  Lin  learned  what  it  is  to  live  on  poor  food. 
If  the  two  boys  were  unable  to  earn  much  by  work, 
they  helped  their  mother  in  other  ways.  A hungry 
boy  will  do  a great  deal  to  get  something  to  eat,  and 
a boy  who  loves  his  friends  will  do  more  to  keep 
them  from  suffering.  These  two  little  fellows  were 
hungry,  and  they  loved  their  mother,  sister  and 
grandmother;  they  willingly  did  what  they  could 
to  provide  for  the  wants  of  the  family. 

As  Mrs.  Lee  was  too  poor  to  buy  fuel,  the  boys 
were  compelled  to  hunt  wood.  They  could  not 
pick  up  sticks  along  the  roadside,  since  there  are  no 
roads  in  Southern  China,  only  paths;  nor  could  they 
gather  up  broken  and  useless  pieces  of  fence,  as 


POVERTY. 


85 


there  are  no  fences ; nor  yet  could  they  go  to  the 
woods  and  gather  dead  limbs  or  parts  of  fallen  trees, 
for  there  are  not  many  woods,  and  single  trees  are 
scarce;  even  fruit  trees  are  not  plenty.  These  and 
the  great  banians  scattered  here  and  there  over  the 
country  are  not  allowed  to  be  cut  for  fire-wood. 
Fortunately,  the  people  need  little  fuel  except  for 
cooking,  as  they  keep  warm  by  putting  on  more 
clothes  rather  than  by  making  fires  in  the  chilly 
weather  of  winter.  The  boys  did,  however,  have 
two  ways  to  get  fuel.  They  lived  near  a bay  of 
the  ocean,  and  sometimes  wood  drifted  ashore.  For 
this  they,  with  other  children,  eagerly  watched. 
The  smallest  sticks  were  picked  up,  and  he  who 
could  find  a large  one  thought  himself  fortunate. 
As  many  other  children  went  to  the  shore  for  the 
same  purpose,  Choh  Lin  and  his  brother  very  often 
found  not  a bit  of  wood.  Each  one  tried  to  be  at 
the  water  in  the  morning  long  before  sunrise,  and 
even  before  daylight,  because  the  first  there  of 
course  had  the  best  chance  for  wood.  Often  the 
two  brothers  were  roused  from  a sound  sleep  long 
before  daylight  to  go  down  to  the  shore  for  fuel. 
They  begged  hard  to  be  allowed  to  sleep  a little 
longer,  saying  that  the  other  children  did  not  get 
up  so  early,  and  promising  to  go  soon  if  they  might 
take  a little  nap.  The  grandmother,  who  usually 
called  them,  would  not  listen  to  these  appeals,  but 
forced  the  little  fellows  to  go  at  once,  lest  others 
should  be  at  the  shore  first.  Once  or  twice  they 


86 


CHOH  LIN. 


were  permitted  to  lie  still  for  a while,  but  as  they 
came  back  each  time  without  a particle  of  fuel,  the 
old  lady  learned  that  if  they  were  to  have  anything 
with  which  to  cook  their  food  the  boys  could  take 
no  morning  nap. 

The  other  way  of  getting  fuel  was  to  take  bags 
and  a heavy  hoe  and  go  along  the  paths,  and  wher- 
ever they  dared  to  dig  up  grass  by  the  roots,  and, 
shaking  off  the  earth,  to  lay  it  out  to  dry.  When 
ready  to  return  they  gathered  up  the  partly-dried 
grass,  put  it  into  their  bags  and  carried  it  home. 
Here  it  was  laid  out  again  in  the  sun,  and  when 
thoroughly  dried  was  stored  away  for  fuel. 

Choh  Lin  and  Chi  Lap  were  also  obliged  to  hunt 
for  food.  Any  remnant  of  fish  or  meat  that  had 
been  thrown  away  by  others,  if  at  all  fit  to  eat,  was 
carried  home  and  cooked.  At  low  tide  they  gathered 
small  shellfish,  shrimps  and  whatever  else  might  be 
eaten.  On  the  rocks  in  the  water  were  tiny  oysters. 
With  a little  cup  and  a pointed  piece  of  iron  the 
two  boys  would  go  at  low  tide  along  the  rocks  hunt- 
ing for  oysters.  Most  of  the  other  children  of  Tay 
Soa  went  too,  so  that  Choh  Lin  and  his  brother  did 
not  bring  home  much.  They  were  thankful  to 
bring  home  anything. 

In  China  small  boys  learn  that  it  is  not  the  best 
thing  in  the  world  to  be  small.  If  the  brothers 
found  a good  place,  larger  boys  would  drive  them 
away  and  get  the  oysters  themselves;  sometimes  they 
would  even  take  what  they  had  gotten  by  hard 


POVERTY. 


87 


work.  Many  a struggle  did  the  brothers  have  in 
their  efforts  to  get  food,  and  it  not  unfrequently  hap- 
pened that,  coming  home  with  empty  oyster-cups, 
they  found  nothing  at  all  to  eat.  They  bore  the 
privation  as  well  as  possible,  seldom  finding  fault, 
for  they  saw  that  the  others  were  hungry  too. 

One  day,  as  the  boys  were  coming  home  from  a 
vain  search  for  both  wood  and  oysters,  Choh  Lin 
asked,  “ Why  is  it,  Chi  Lap,  that  you  and  I,  who 
once  had  plenty,  must  now  be  hungry  so  often?” 

“ I don’t  know,”  answered  Chi  Lap,  “ but  I know 
that  it  is  very  hard  to  be  hungry  half  of  the  time.” 

“ Do  you  know  that  I think  it  is  because  the  gods 
have  forgotten  us,”  said  Choh  Lin.  “ They  used 
to  give  us  all  we  wanted.” 

“If  they  have  forgotten  us,”  replied  the  older 
brother,  “ they  are  not  good  gods.  Gods  who  take 
care  of  people  when  they  are  rich  and  forget  them 
as  soon  as  they  are  poor  are  little  better  than  beg- 
gars. What  is  the  use  of  worshiping  them  if  they 
do  us  no  good  ?” 

“ They  do  do  us  good,”  spoke  Choh  Lin,  “ but 
we  have  not  worshiped  in  the  temples  as  we  used 
to  do  ; and  it  may  be  that  the  gods  have  forgotten 
us  because  they  don’t  see  us  any  more.” 

“ Then  they  have  no  business  to  be  gods,”  an- 
swered Chi  Lap,  half  angrily.  “ We  remember 
our  friends,  though  we  don’t  see  them  for  a long 
time ; and  a god  who  cannot  do  as  much  as  we  is 
not  worth  having.” 


88 


CHOU  LIN. 


“ You  must  not  talk  so,  Chi  Lap,”  said  the 
younger  brother  earnestly.  “ Grandmother  says  it 
is  wrong,  and  that  we  are  already  suffering  because 
we  don’t  worship  in  the  temples.” 

“ Oh,  grandmother  is  old  and  she  forgets.  If 
the  gods  treat  us  in  this  way  after  all  our  worship 
and  feasts  and  presents,  then  they  are  gods  who  will 
get  nothing  from  me.” 

“ Grandmother  and  mother  think  that  they  are 
good,  or  why  does  mother  go  to  one  temple  after 
another  to  worship  them  ?” 

“ Shall  I tell  you  why,  Choh  Lin  ? No  one  has 
told  me,  but  I know  it.  Mother  is  not  satisfied 
with  the  gods  since  we  became  so  poor,  and  she  is 
looking  for  a better  one : she  calls  it  a life-giving 
god,  but  people  say  there  is  no  such  god.  I think 
that  she  will  soon  stop  going  to  the  temples ; she 
don’t  go  nearly  as  often  as  she  used  to.” 

“ That  is  because  she  is  too  busy,  and  also  too 
tired  when  work  is  done.  I am  tired  too  when  we 
have  done  hunting  wood  and  oysters.” 

“ So  am  I tired ; and,  more  than  that,  I don’t 
want  to  go  to  the  temple,  nor  do  I mean  to  go  any 
more,  unless  the  gods  treat  us  better.  They  took 
the  good  things  we  gave  them  when  we  had  plenty, 
and  now,  when  we  have  nothing,  they  let  us  suffer. 
Father  did  not  think  very  much  of  them  before  he 
died.  He  only  gave  them  things  because  mother 
and  grandmother  said  he  must,  and  because  he  was 
afraid  the  gods  might  hurt  him  if  he  did  not.  That 


POVERTY. 


89 


is  the  way  many  other  men  feel,  I know ; I have 
heard  them  talk.  If  other  men  need  not  worship, 
I don’t  mean  to.” 

Chi  Lap  had  learned,  as  many  other  boys  are 
learning  from  the  men  in  China,  to  care  very  little 
for  idol-worship,  while  Choh  Lin  had  not  yet  gone 
beyond  the  teachings  of  his  mother  and  grand- 
mother. Women  are  the  idolaters  and  teachers  of 
idolatry  in  China,  while  men,  as  a rule,  only  wor- 
ship the  idols  ®when  they  hope  to  gain  something 
by  the  practice. 

Choh  Lin  did  not  give  up  the  idea  that  the  gods 
had  forgotten  him.  The  more  he  thought  of  what 
Chi  Lap  had  said,  the  more  difficult  it  was  to  un- 
derstand why  the  gods  should  forget  him.  It 
seemed  to  him  unkind  in  them  to  desert  him  when 
he  most  needed  their  help.  “ Mother,”  said  he  one 
day,  “ did  not  you  teach  me  that  I belong  to  the 
god  whose  name  I wear?” 

“ Yes,”  was  the  answer. 

“ Didn’t  you  say  that  the  god  would  take  care  of 
me  if  I served  him  faithfully?” 

“ Yes,”  replied  the  mother,  more  hesitatingly, 
“and  probably  he  will,  after  a while.  He  may  be 
trying  you  now.  But  remember  that  you  have  not 
cared  for  your  god  of  late ; you  hardly  ever  go  to 
the  temple,  and  it  would  not  be  strange  if  the  god 
should  neglect  you,  since  you  neglect  him.” 

“Don’t  he  know  that  I am  poor,  and  must  hunt 
oysters  and  pick  up  wood,  and  have  not  time  to 


90 


CHOH  LIN. 


worship  ? If  I am  caring  for  you  and  grand- 
mother, that  saves  his  doing  it.” 

“ That  is  true,”  replied  Mrs.  Lee,  “ and — and — 
But  I think  you  should  not  forget  to  worship  in 
the  temple.” 

“ If  I am  busy,  and  doing  right  too,  why  should 
my  own  god  forget  me?  Will  he  not  continue  to 
take  care  of  me  unless  I keep  giving  him  presents?” 

“ Certainly  he  will,”  replied  the  grandmother, 
who  saw  that  Mrs.  Lee  hesitated. 

“ Why,  then,  is  it,”  asked  the  little  boy,  “ that 
as  soon  as  I stop  worshiping  and  giving  presents  he 
stops  showing  me  favors  ?” 

“ He  has  not  stopped,”  replied  the  old  lady. 
“ You  are  alive  and  well  now ; you  have  a home 
and  friends  and  something  to  eat.  Some  day,  if 
you  are  faithful  to  him,  no  doubt  your  god  will 
give  you  great  favors  again.  He  has  only  let  you 
lose  a few  things,  and  still  gives  you  many.” 

“Why  did  he  let  me  lose  anything?”  asked  the 
child.  “I  was  careful  to  serve  him;  why  should 
he  not  take  better  care  of  me  ? Many  boys  in  Tay 
Soa,  who  never  go  to  the  temple  unless  on  feast- 
days,  have  far  more  than  we  have.  It  seems  to 
me  that  we  don’t  get  much  good  from  serving  the 
gods.” 

“ Oh,  Choh  Lin,  you  must  not  speak  so ; it  is 
veiy  wrong,”  replied  the  grandmother.  “ I am 
afraid  that  the  gods  will  punish  you  for  such 
words.” 


POVERTY. 


91 


“If  they  punish  him  for  speaking  so,”  spoke 
Chi  Lap,  who  had  quietly  listened,  “ they  will  only 
do  what  they  have  done  to  him  for  his  doing  right.” 

“ My  son,  you  are  speaking  very  badly,”  said 
Mrs.  Lee.  “ We  must  not  serve  the  gods  for  what 
we  can  get ; we  must  do  it  for  what  they  have  done 
for  us.” 

“ That  is  what  I think,  mother,”  replied  the  older 
brother.  “ They  have  let  us  lose  our  property,  so 
that  we  have  nothing  to  serve  them  with  ; and  the 
way  for  us  to  do  is  to  let  the  gods  take  care  of 
themselves.” 

The  two  women  saw  that  it  was  useless  to  argue 
with  Chi  Lap.  Their  only  hope  was  to  keep  Choh 
Lin  from  becoming  as  indifferent  to  the  gods  as  his 
older  brother  was. 


CHAPTER  XI. 


THE  FAMINE. 

TAROUGHTS  and  famines  are  not  rare  in 
J-"'  Southern  China.  The  rainy  season  usually 
ends  in  May  or  June.  After  that,  until  autumn, 
and  sometimes  until  February,  rain  seldom  falls. 
But  if  storms  come  they  are  frequently  fearful  in 
violence,  as  well  as  in  the  amount  of  rain  that  falls 
in  a few  hours.  It  is  during  this  season  of  the 
year  that  the  typhoons,  as  they  are  called  in  China 
(hurricanes),  come.  These  storms  may  last  only  a 
few  hours,  rarely  more  than  a day,  yet  during  one 
of  them  as  much  as  six  inches  of  rain  has  been 
known  to  fall.  The  typhoons  do  not  come  regu- 
larly ; occasionally  several  years  go  by  without  one, 
and  again  there  will  be  several  in  a year. 

If  the  rainy  season  passes  without  much  rain 
foiling  or  lasts  much  less  than  three  months,  famine 
may  follow.  Since  the  country  is  so  full  of  people, 
the  failure  of  a single  crop  produces  want,  and 
when  the  two,  three,  and  even  four,  crops  of  a year 
foil,  there  is  certain  to  be  great  suffering.  Provis- 
ions are  not  stored  up  in  China  by  large  dealers  as 
in  America,  uor  does  China  buy  much  food  from 

92 


THE  FAMINE. 


93 


foreign  countries.  Of  late  years,  however,  since 
Choh  Lin  became  a man,  foreign  merchants  in 
times  of  scarcity  buy  great  quantities  of  food  else- 
where and  sell  it  to  the  people.  Thus  foreigners 
have  prevented  much  suffering,  and  yet  have  made 
themselves  rich. 

The  rice-fields  of  China  are  level  spots  of  ground 
surrounded  by  a small  embankment  a few  inches 
high  and  wide.  The  fields  vary  in  size,  from  a 
small  part  of  an  acre  to  several  acres.  These  fields 
are  always  near  a stream,  spring  or  well,  from 
which  is  taken  the  water  to  flood  them  when  the 
crop  is  growing.  Usually,  a number  of  rice-fields 
are  together,  and  the  one  nearest  the  water  is  flooded 
first;  when  that  is  full  the  water  is  allowed  to  flow 
into  the  next,  and  so  on  until  all  are  covered.  Some- 
times a little  canal  is  made  between  the  fields,  and 
this  being  kept  full  of  water  and  openings  made  in 
the  banks  of  the  fields  along  which  it  passes,  the 
water  runs  in,  and  thus  keeps  each  one  full.  The 
ground  is  usually  ploughed  and  harrowed  or  raked 
when  very  wet  or  even  partly  under  water,  and  the 
young  rice-plants  are  set  in  the  ground  when  it  is 
flooded.  A newly-planted  rice-field  is  a pretty 
sight,  with  the  tiny  spears  of  green  rising  in  regular 
rows  from  the  sheet  of  quiet  water.  Nor  does  the 
beauty  grow  less  when  the  tall  rice,  swaying  with 
the  wind,  seems  like  green  waves  rising  and  falling 
in  an  almost  hidden  sea  of  silver.  Many  fields  are 
made  by  terracing  the  hillsides,  the  smallest  being 


94 


CHOU  LIN. 


the  highest,  so  that  they  appear  like  great  green 
steps  on  the  hills,  growing  smaller  and  smaller  as 
they  ascend.  Of  course  there  are  none  of  these  on 
hillsides  that  have  not  a spring  above  them.  Usu- 
ally, there  are  rice-fields  on  the  banks  of  the  rivers, 
from  which  the  water  to  flood  them  is  taken.  This 
is  pumped  up  by  a sort  of  endless-chain  pump 
worked  by  men’s  feet. 

When  Choh  Lin  was  seven  years  old  there  did 
not  fall  as  much  rain  as  usual  in  the  spring,  and 
with  the  early  summer  came  a drought.  The  first 
crop  of  rice  planted  in  April  grew  well  for  a few 
weeks,  and  then  the  water  began  to  fail.  The  fields 
farthest  away  from  spring  and  brook  were  shut  off 
from  the  supply.  Field  after  field  was  in  this  way 
deprived  of  water  and  the  growing  rice  left  to  die. 
While  near  the  failing  water  the  fields  remained 
green,  farther  away  they  grew  yellow,  ripening 
straw,  but  no  rice.  Soon  there  were  great  barren 
patches  from  which  the  half-grown  rice  had  been 
gathered  by  the  disappointed  farmers.  Daily  the 
people  watched  the  sky,  hoping  for  some  sign  of 
rain.  Clouds  now  and  then  appeared  and  raised 
their  drooping  spirits,  but  passed  away.  The  farm- 
ers went  to  the  temples  and  prayed  for  rain.  With 
empty  hands,  but  full  hearts,  they  gathered  in  the 
temples  and  begged  the  idols  not  to  let  them  and 
their  children  starve.  They  gave  their  meagre  of- 
ferings, hoping  to  buy  what  the  gods  were  unwilling 
to  give ; but  all  in  vain.  Day  after  day  the  sun 


THE  FAMINE. 


95 


poured  his  rays  upon  the  parched  earth  until  the 
dreary  summer  wore  away. 

A few  sheaves  of  ripened  rice  had  been  gathered 
here  and  there  near  the  springs  and  streams,  while 
the  other  fields  had  produced  nothing  but  empty 
straw.  The  farmers  had  watched  the  growth  of  the 
other  crops,  hoping  that  these  would  live  until  rain 
came ; but  they  saw  the  leaves  of  the  sweet  potatoes 
curl  up  and  the  beans  die,  and  thus  crop  after  crop 
failed.  The  people  dug  up  the  small  potatoes  and 
ate  them.  The  poor  gathered  the  withered  potato- 
vines  and  cooked  them  to  stay  the  cravings  of  hun- 
ger. When  the  time  for  planting  the  second  crop 
of  rice  came  in  June  or  July,  there  was  no  water 
for  flooding  the  fields.  The  whole  country  was 
parched. 

Around  the  failing  springs  and  wells  the  thirsty 
ones  gathered.  Well  after  well  sent  back  empty 
the  bucket  dipped  to  its  lowest  depth ; one  spring 
after  another  dried  up  ; the  brooks  failed,  and  only 
in  the  large  streams  was  water  to  be  found.  At 
night  the  poor  people  gathered  around  the  few  deep 
wells  containing  a little  water.  Each  waited  his 
turn,  and  some  remained  until  morning  before  they 
could  get  a portion,  as  the  water  would  soon  be  ex- 
hausted, and  they  must  wait  for  a fresh  supply  to 
run  in.  Even  this  resource  soon  almost  entirely 
failed.  The  owners  of  the  wells,  finding  them 
empty  in  the  morning,  shut  and  locked  them.  At 
times  the  locks  were  broken  and  the  scant  supply 


96 


CHOH  LIN. 


of  water  taken.  Sometimes  the  stillness  of  the 
night  was  broken  by  the  angry  words  of  men  fight- 
ing for  water. 

Many  poor  families  suffered,  and  so  did  Mrs. 
Lee’s.  She  could  earn  no  money.  Even  had  she 
had  money,  food  was  so  scarce  that  it  would  have 
taken  a small  fortune  to  support  a family  in  China. 
Begging  around  Tay  Soa  was  useless,  for  most  of 
the  people  were  little  better  than  beggars.  Day 
after  day  Chi  Lap  and  Choh  Lin,  with  their  little 
baskets,  wandered  wearily  over  the  country,  hunt- 
ing for  weeds  or  something  that  might  do  for  food. 
They  watched  the  tides  on  the  shore,  and  gathered 
all  the  oysters  they  could,  as  well  as  other  shellfish. 
In  this  way  the  two  boys  did  much  to  keep  their 
family  from  starving. 

This  struggle  for  life  was  a long  and  hard  one, 
and  it  often  seemed  that  more  than  one  of  the  fam- 
ily must  die  before  it  ended.  Chi  Lap,  older  and 
stronger,  was  better  able  to  endure  hunger;  Choh 
Lin  grew  thin  and  seemed  wasting  away. 

One  day  their  mother  and  grandmother  were 
talking  of  their  suffering,  when  Mrs.  Lee  said,  “If 
there  were  only  four  instead  of  five  mouths  to  feed 
we  might  live,  but  if  we  continue  in  this  way  I fear 
that  little  Choh  Lin,  the  weakest,  will  die.  There 
seems  only  one  way  to  save  his  life : we  ljjust  give 
him  away  to  some  rich  man.  He  is  such  a nice 
loving  boy  that  many  will  be  glad  to  have  him.” 

Chi  Lap  overheard  his  mother,  and  cried,  “Oh, 


THE  FAMINE. 


97 


mother,  do  not  give  Choh  Lin  away.  He  is  only 
a little  boy ; it  doesn’t  take  much  to  feed  him.  We 
must  keep  him.  He  is  the  little  one ; if  he  is  gone 
we  shall  all  be  lonely  and  our  hearts  will  die.  We 
cannot  let  him  go;  if  we  must  starve,  let  us  all 
starve  together.  But  better  times  will  come.” 

Again  and  again  did  Mrs.  Lee  talk  of  giving  her 
little  boy  away,  and  as  often  was  she  persuaded  by 
her  older  son  to  keep  the  little  one. 

Choh  Lin  became  too  weak  to  accompany  his 
older  brother  in  the  searches  for  food.  One  day 
his  mother  took  the  little  fellow  to  the  temple  to 
pray  for  rain  and  for  food.  Kneeling  before  the 
idol,  the  child  lifted  up  his  skeleton  hands  and 
pleaded  that  the  god  would  not  forget  and  leave 
them  to  starve.  When  they  were  slowly  walking 
back  the  child  asked,  “ Mother,  do  you  think  the 
gods  will  let  us  starve?” 

“ I don’t  know,”  was  her  reply.  “ I hope  not, 
yet  others  are  starving  and  dying  around  us.  If 
the  famine  keep  on  much  longer,  I fear  we  must 
all  die.” 

“ If  we  only  had  some  money  to  make  offerings 
to  my  god  and  give  him  a feast,  I am  sure  he  would 
keep  us  from  starving.  I believe  he  loves  me  and 
wants  to  take  care  of  me,  but  it  may  cost  so  much 
that  the  gods  cannot  do  it  for  nothing.” 

Mrs.  Lee  gave  her  little  son  a look  of  surprise, 
but  said  nothing,  though  his  remark  made  her  think, 
and  she  asked  herself,  “ Can  it  be  true  that  the  gods 
7 


98 


CHOH  LIN. 


care  only  for  the  rich  and  not  for  the  poor?  Is 
there  no  god  who  cares  for  people  without  expecting 
something  for  it?  We  are  taught  that  the  gods 
care  for  those  who  make  them  presents;  even  the 
god  of  the  beggars  is  their  friend  because  they  offer 
him  part  of  what  they  get.” 

One  day  Chi  Lap  came  in  with  a quick  step,  and 
in  a cheerful  voice  said,  “Oh,  mother,  the  famine 
will  soon  end  now.  The  great  mandarins  have  or- 
dered a procession  to  the  temples  to  pray  for  rain. 
All  the  mandarins  and  nobles  are  to  go  there  and 
ask  the  gods  to  bring  the  famine  to  an  end.  A 
proclamation  has  been  made  forbidding  the  people 
to  take  life,  to  kill  any  animals.  The  mandarins 
say  that  the  gods  are  angry  at  the  people  for  shed- 
ding blood,  and  therefore  withhold  the  rain.” 

“ Have  we  shed  any  blood  ?”  asked  Choh  Lin. 

“No,  child,”  answered  his  grandmother;  “we 
are  too  poor,  and  have  nothing,  no  goat  nor  even 
a chicken,  whose  blood  we  might  shed.” 

“ Well,  I am  glad  the  gods  are  not  angry  at  us, 
then,”  said  the  little  fellow. 

“ Yet  they  make  us  suffer  as  much  as  those  who 
have  shed  blood,”  replied  Chi  Lap. 

“We  are  all  alive,”  spoke  the  grandmother, 
“ while  others  have  died.  How  do  you  know  but 
that  the  gods  are  taking  care  of  us,  while  they  can- 
not help  our  suffering  from  the  famine  that  they 
must  send  upon  others?” 

“ Well,  I know  what  I’d  do  if  I had  my  way,” 


THE  FAMINE. 


99 


said  Chi  Lap.  “ The  gods  make  people  suffer : I’d 
make  the  gods  suffer.  I would  just  throw  their 
idols  out  of  doors.  If  they  will  not  do  anything 
without  pay,  and  then  punish  a lot  of  people  for 
what  one  does,  they  ought  to  be  punished  them- 
selves. How  can  people  help  shedding  blood  some- 
times? They  must  live  and  eat  meat  too.” 

“ Chi  Lap  ! Chi  Lap !’’  spoke  the  grandmother, 
“be  still  with  your  wickedness.  The  gods  will 
punish,  and  maybe  kill  us  all,  for  what  you  say.” 

“ Grandmother,  I am  only  saying  what  I have 
heard  men  say,”  replied  the  boy.  “If  I am  so 
wicked,  they  must  be,  yet  the  gods  do  not  punish 
them.” 

“ Perhaps  the  gods  have  sent  this  very  drought 
because  of  their  wickedness,”  replied  the  grand- 
mother. “ When  I was  a child  we  never  heard 
such  things  said  of  the  gods.  Then  every  one 
spoke  of  them  in  reverence,  and  men  worshiped  as 
well  as  women.  Now  people  speak  ill  of  the  gods. 
Some  great  calamity  will  surely  come  to  our  nation 
for  this.” 

Although  the  procession  was  made  in  the  city, 
the  drought  and  famine  continued  for  months,  nor 
did  they  stop  until  the  rainy  season  of  the  following 
spring. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


THE  DOGS. 

rTIHE  boys  had  kept  their  dogs  after  the  property 
was  taken.  From  being  plump  and  fat,  the 
creatures  became  lean  as  the  dogs  of  the  street.  The 
boys  tried  to  save  some  of  their  own  food  to  give 
their  pets,  but  Mrs.  Lee  forbade  this,  and  threatened 
to  have  the  animals  killed  if  Chi  Lap  and  Choh 
Lin  gave  them  food. 

Some  of  the  neighbors,  who  knew  that  the  boys 
did  not  have  enough  to  eat,  asked,  “Why  do  not 
you  kill  and  eat  your  dogs?  Kill  them, cook  them. 
Dog-meat  is  better  than  beggar’s  meat”  (hunger). 

“ We  will  not  kill  our  dogs,”  answered  Chi  Lap; 
“ they  are  too  good.  If  they  did  not  forsake  us 
when  we  needed  them,  we  will  not  forsake  them 
when  they  need  us.” 

When  Choh  Lin  understood  what  was  meant  he 
ran  to  his  own  dog,  and,  throwing  his  arms  around 
his  neck,  said,  “ No,  Kailo,  we  will  not  kill  you.  I 
will  keep  you  until  I am  a man;  then  I will  feed 
you  enough  to  make  you  fat  again.” 

Each  morning,  when  the  boys  started  on  their 
errands  after  fuel  or  food  before  the  drought  began, 


100 


THE  DOGS. 


101 


the  (logs  accompanied  them.  No  matter  how  early 
the  little  fellows  started,  the  dogs  were  at  the  door 
to  welcome  and  go  with  them  to  the  shore  or  field. 
Until  the  famine  began  the  animals  managed  to 
find  food  enough  to  keep  from  actual  starvation, 
but  with  the  scarcity  the  poor  creatures  grew  thin 
as  skeletons  and  were  unable  to  run  as  once  they 
did.  If  the  dogs  or  the  boys  were  fortunate  enough 
to  find  anything  that  could  be  eaten,  the  poor  brutes 
devoured  it  as  though  afraid  the  little  would  grow 
less  for  every  second  it  remained  uneaten.  What- 
ever the  boys  found  fit  to  eat,  and  that  they  could 
possibly  do  without,  they  gave  to  the  dogs.  Often 
much  of  the  time  spent  in  hunting  for  wood  was 
really  spent  in  searching  for  something  with  which 
to  feed  the  starving  brutes. 

The  dogs  seemed  to  understand  the  feeling  of 
their  young  masters  and  gratefully  took  the  little 
food  given.  Had  they  been  like  the  street-dogs  of 
China,  they  would  not  only  have  stolen  something 
to  eat  wherever  they  could  find  it,  but  might  have 
attacked  each  other  or  have  tried  to  kill  and  eat 
their  young  masters.  Naturally  gentle,  affectionate 
and  obedient,  starvation  did  not  change  the  nature 
of  the  faithful  brutes.  Sometimes  Choh  Lin,  sit- 
ting down  in  the  sand  on  the  shore,  would  take  his 
dog  between  his  knees,  and,  looking  into  his  eyes, 
would  try  to  encourage  him  with  a hope  of  better 
times:  “ Poor  Kailo ! you  won’t  be  thin  and  hun- 
gry then,  will  you?  No,  old  dog,  you’ll  have 


102 


CHOH  LIN. 


enough  then  ; and  it  won’t  be  bits  and  bones,  either, 
but  you’ll  have  rice  and  fish  and  meat — good  meat, 
too.  Won’t  that  be  good,  old  dog?” 

The  affectionate  creature  looked  into  the  face  of 
his  master  as  if  he  understood  all  and  only  lacked 
words  to  answer.  Tenderly  he  would  lick  the  bare 
arm  resting  on  his  neck  or  rest  his  head  against  the 
boy’s  knee,  while  he  looked  wistfully  into  the  thin 
face  before  him. 

One  morning  the  boys  missed  their  dogs;  not 
daring  to  call  loudly,  lest  other  boys  should  hear 
and  hurry  to  get  first  to  the  shore,  the  brothel’s 
hastened  to  the  water,  expecting  to  find  their  dogs 
waiting  for  them  on  their  return.  But  no  dogs  ap- 
peared as  they  came  home,  nor  had  any  of  the  family 
seen  them.  Calling  did  not  bring  them;  so  the  boys 
started  on  a search  for  the  animals.  After  looking 
a long  time  and  calling  often,  they  heard  the  low 
bark  or  cry  of  a dog.  Running  to  the  place  whence 
the  sound  came,  they  found  Chi  Lap’s  dog  lying 
stretched  out  and  dead,  while  the  faithful  Ivailo  lay 
beside  him.  The  poor  fellow  wagged  his  tail  fee- 
bly, as  if  to  welcome  his  young  master,  and  then  in 
a low  moan  seemed  to  try  to  tell  that  his  friend  was 
dead.  Sorrowfully  the  boys  kneeled  beside  the  dead 
brute  and  mourned  as  though  he  were  a brother. 
Looking  up  through  his  tears,  Choli  Lin  said,  “ We 
have  but  one  dog  now,  Chi  Lap ; he  is  only  half 
mine,  the  other  half  is  yours.  Ivailo  is  our  dog 
now.  We  will  take  care  of  him — won’t  we,  Chi 


THE  DOGS. 


103 


Lap?”  And  then,  taking  Kailo’s  head  between  his 
hands,  the  little  fellow  said,  “You  must  not  die; 
we  cannot  do  without  you,  Kailo.” 

When  the  first  burst  of  sorrow  was  over  the  boys 
talked  about  what  had  caused  the  death  of  the  dog, 
not  thinking  that  he  had  died  from  hunger. 

“ He  always  was  a good  dog,”  said  Chi  Lap, 
“and  when  his  soul  is  born  again  into  another 
body,  it  will  not  be  as  a dog.  I think  he  will  be 
even  better  than  a girl.  He’ll  be  a boy  like  you 
and  me,  Choh  Lin.” 

“Do  you  think  we  will  know  him,  Chi  Lap?” 
asked  the  younger  brother. 

“ I do  not  know,”  replied  the  other ; “ perhaps 
he  will  know  us.  A baby-boy  may  be  born  whom 
we  like  very  much,  and  in  it  will  be  the  soul  of  my 
dog.” 

“Where  has  his  soul  gone  now,  Chi  Lap?” 

“ I don’t  know.  Perhaps  it  has  gone  up  in  the 
air,  -where  the  clouds  are.” 

“ What  are  souls?” 

“Souls  are — they  are — ” and  Chi  Lap  hesi- 
tated. “Souls  are  the  clouds  from  which  all  the 
rain  has  fallen.  The  body  is  the  rain,  and  the 
soul  is  the  cloud  when  the  rain  has  gone  out  of 
it.” 

Choh  Lin  asked  no  more  questions.  Probably 
he  knew  as  much  as  he  did  before  he  asked  his 
brother.  There  are  other  people  besides  Chinese 
boys  who  cannot  describe  the  soul. 


104 


CHOH  LIN. 


After  talking  till  they,  for  the  time,  forgot  their 
sorrow,  Chi  Lap  said,  as  he  pointed  to  the  dead  dog, 
“ But  we  must  bury  him,  or  some  people  who  are  as 
hungry  as  we  will  find  San  and  eat  him.  There  is 
not  much  of  him  left  except  bone  and  skin,  but  he 
was  too  good  to  be  eaten.” 

“ Where  shall  we  bury  him?”  asked  Choh  Lin. 
“Shall  we  carry  him  to  some  hill  where  they  bury 
people  ?” 

“ No,”  replied  the  other,  “ he  is  too  heavy  to 
carry;  we  will  bury  him  right  here.  He  came  here 
to  die;  maybe  he  chose  this  place  because  he  thought 
it  a lucky  spot.  No  one  will  find  his  body  here. 
You  stay  here  and  watch  until  I can  go  for  a hoe 
with  which  to  dig  his  grave.” 

“ No,”  replied  the  little  fellow,  “ I do  not  want 
to  stay  here  alone ; the  black-faced  man  may  get  me 
if  I am  here.”  (When  the  Chinese  wish  to  frighten 
their  children  they  tell  them  that  the  black-faced 
man  will  get  them.)  “Let  me  go  home  with  you. 
Kailo  will  stay  here  and  watch  by  San — won’t  you, 
Kailo  ?”  The  feeble  wag  of  the  dog’s  tail  and  a 
weak  effort  to  lick  his  young  master’s  hand  were 
the  dog’s  answer.  But  he  was  too  weak  to  get  on 
his  feet  to  follow  the  boys. 

Choh  Lin  would  neither  stay  nor  go  alone,  so  the 
two  boys  started  to  get  a hoe  with  which  to  dig  the 
grave,  leaving  Kailo  to  watch  by  his  dead  compan- 
ion. On  their  way  the  boys  resolved  to  say  nothing 
about  the  death  of  San. 


THE  DOGS. 


105 


“Must  not  we  tell  mother  or  grandmother?” 
asked  Choh  Lin. 

“ No,”  replied  the  older  brother;  “if  they  don’t 
know  they  can’t  tell.  People  will  ask  where  my 
dog  is,  and  if  they  find  out  they  will  dig  him  up. 
Don’t  tell  anybody  where  San  is.” 

“I  won’t,”  replied  the  little  fellow,  pressing  his 
lips  together — “ not  even  if  they  whip  me  for  it.” 

When  they  reached  home  Chi  Lap  was  sent  off 
on  an  errand  at  once.  It  kept  him  away  for  some 
time.  Choh  Lin  waited  impatiently  for  his  return, 
and  was  ready  with  a hoe  as  soon  as  Chi  Lap  came 
back. 

“ Where  are  you  going  with  that  hoe  ?”  asked  the 
grandmother  as  she  saw  the  two  boys  starting  off. 
“ Bring  it  back  and  give  it  to  me,  and  you  boys  go 
down  to  the  water ; the  tide  will  soon  be  low  enough, 
so  that  you  may  find  shrimps  or  crabs.” 

Not  daring  to  tell  their  object,  the  boys  reluctant- 
ly obeyed,  and,  taking  their  basket,  went  down  to 
the  slioi'e. 

“ Kailo  will  take  care  of  San,”  said  Choh  Lin 
hopefully,  “and  we’ll  come  back  as  soon  as  we  can, 
and  then  go  to  bury  the  good  dog.” 

“Where  will  we  get  a hoe?”  asked  Chi  Lap. 
“ If  grandmother  were  not  so  harsh  I would  have 
told  her  about  San.” 

“ No  matter,  Chi  Lap,”  said  the  other,  taking  his 
older  brother  by  the  hand  as  they  walked  along ; 
“ we  can  borrow  a hoe  somewhere,  I know.” 


106 


CHOH  LIN. 


“ Yes,  but  mother  and  grandmother  won’t  let  us 
go  unless  we  tell  them.  Perhaps  they  won’t  let  us 
go  even  then.” 

“I  will  tell  you  what  we  can  do:  we  won’t  go 
home  from  the  shore,  but  go  around  and  borrow  a 
hoe  from  somebody  at  the  other  end  of  the  village, 
and  then  we  can  bury  San.” 

“ I am  afraid  no  one  will  let  us  have  a hoe.” 

“Let  me  tell  you  what  we  can  do,  Chi  Lap.  Let 
us  tell  Jip  ; he  won’t  let  any  one  know.  He  is  our 
friend,  and  he  liked  San  too ; he  will  get  his  father’s 
hoe  and  help  us.” 

“ That’s  so  ; we  can  do  that.”  And  more  cheer- 
fully the  two  boys  went  down  to  the  water.  They 
met  Jip  there,  and  told  him  the  story  of  San’s  death, 
and  asked  if  he  would  help  bury  the  dog. 

“ Poor  old  San  !”  said  Jip ; “ he  was  such  a good 
dog!  I am  sorry  lie  is  dead.  Yes,  I can  get  a hoe, 
and  will  help  you  bury  him.” 

As  soon  as  they  could  the  three  boys  left  the  wa- 
ter and  started  on  their  sad  errand.  As  they  were 
going  Jip  asked,  “Haven’t  you  any  paper-money 
and  other  paper  to  put  on  San’s  grave?” 

“ No,  we  didn’t  think  about  that,”  answered  Chi 
Lap.  “ Do  you  think  we  ought  to  put  paper  there? 
A dog’s  spirit  won’t  know  how  to  use  it  in  the 
other  world?” 

“ We  don’t  know  how  much  a dog’s  spirit  knows 
when  it  gets  out  of  the  body,”  replied  Jip.  “I 
would  put  paper  on  the  grave.” 


THE  HOGS. 


107 


“We  haven’t  any,”  answered  Choh  Lin. 

“ And  that  isn’t  the  worst  of  it : we  have  no  cash 
to  buy  it,”  said  Chi  Lap. 

“ I have  some  cash  at  home,”  replied  Jip ; “ we’ll 
take  that.” 

“We  can’t  pay  you  back,  Jip,”  said  Chi  Lap; 
“ at  least  not  till  we  are  richer  than  we  are  now.” 

“ That  makes  no  difference,”  answered  Jip;  “let 
San  be  my  dog  too.” 

The  paper  was  bought;  Jip  got  the  hoe,  and  the 
three  boys  started  for  the  grave. 

This  paper,  that  is  made  to  imitate  money,  cloth- 
ing and  other  things,  is  put  on  the  grave  of  the 
dead  in  the  expectation  that  when  it  disappears 
from  the  grave  it  will  be  found  in  the  spirit-world, 
and  there  be  real  money  and  clothing  and  other 
necessary  things  for  the  use  of  the  spirit  on  whose 
grave  it  was  first  placed. 

When  the  boys  came  in  sight  of  the  dogs  they 
saw  Kailo  stretched  out  beside  his  dead  companion. 
He  took  no  notice  of  their  approach,  though  Choh 
Lin  called  him  by  name.  “ See,  Kailo  is  asleep,” 
said  the  little  fellow  to  the  others.  Kailo  was 
asleep,  but  it  was  the  same  slumber  that  had  come 
to  San  before.  Lying  side  by  side,  the  two  dogs 
were  dead.  It  was  a sad  discovery  for  Choh  Lin. 
Sitting  down  beside  the  body  of  the  brute,  he 
stroked  the  head,  wetting  it  with  his  tears  as  he 
mourned  over  his  dead  friend.  The  two  bereaved 
young  masters  sat  each  beside  his  own,  and  Jip 


108 


CHOH  LIN 


stood  near  by,  looking  on  in  sad  silence.  There 
were  tears  in  his  eyes  too. 

After  waiting  a while  he  walked  a little  way 
from  the  boys  and  began  digging.  Chi  Lap  soon 
followed  him  and  helped  at  the  work,  the  two  mean- 
while talking  of  the  good  qualities  of  the  dogs. 
When  a place  deep  and  broad  enough  to  contain 
the  bodies  of  the  dogs  had  been  dug  they  came  to 
Choh  Lin,  who  still  sat  stroking  the  head  of  his 
dog,  though  silently  now,  anil  Chi  Lap  said,  “Now, 
Choh  Lin,  the  grave  is  ready ; shall  we  bury  San 
first?  he  died  first.” 

Without  replying  the  little  fellow  arose,  and  Jip, 
who  acted  as  undertaker,  tried  to  fold  San’s  fore  feet 
over  his  breast.  The  boy  had  thoughtfully  brought 
with  him  two  long  pieces  of  cotton  cloth  ; these  he 
put  around  the  body  as  the  Chinese  place  ropes 
about  a coffin,  toward  the  head  and  toward  the  feet. 
Then,  placing  the  hoe-handle  through  the  pieces  of 
cloth,  whose  ends  were  tied  together,  he  motioned 
to  Chi  Lap  to  put  one  end  of  the  handle  on  his 
shoulder,  and,  Jip  taking  the  other,  the  two  carried 
the  dog  to  the  grave,  and  then,  removing  the  bands 
of  cloth,  came  back  for  Choh  Lin’s  dog.  When 
this  had  been  prepared  in  the  same  way  Choh  Liu 
said,  “ Let  me  help  carry  Kailo.” 

The  two  dogs  were  laid  side  bv  side  in  the  ground. 
“Shall  we  have  the  ceremonies?” asked  Jip,  looking 
at  the  other  boys. 

“ I think  we  ought  to  bow  once,”  said  Chi  Lap. 


THE  DOGS. 


109 


“I  mean  to  worship  just  as  if  it  were  my 
brother,”  spoke  Choh  Lin. 

Stepping  back  from  the  grave,  first  Chi  Lap  and 
afterward  Choh  Lin,  approached  and  bowed  each 
three  times;  Jip,  out  of  sympathy  for  his  friends, 
imitated  them,  and  then  said,  “ Now  shall  I cover 
them  ?” 

The  dogs  were  soon  covered,  the  paper  scattered 
over  the  grave,  and  then  the  boys  slowly  started 
homeward. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


BOYS’  TROUBLES. 

CHOH  LIN  did  not  soon  forget  the  death  of  his 
dog.  Indeed,  twenty  years  after,  when  a Chris- 
tian preacher,  he  told  the  author  with  no  little  sor- 
row the  story  of  the  famine  and  the  burial  of  the 
dogs. 

It  was  a joyful  time  in  Tav  Soa  when  the  first 
rain  fell  after  the  famine.  When  the  cry,  “ Haw 
lai  !”  (Rain  comes),  was  shouted  in  the  streets  every 
one  rushed  out  to  see  the  welcome  sight.  The  wast- 
ed faces  turned  upward  to  catch  the  first  drops, 
while  the  despairing  look  that  had  been  on  nearly 
every  face  gave  place  to  smiles  of  gladness.  The 
rain  began  in  earnest,  and  the  people  saw  that  there 
was  a prospect  of  a great  rainfall. 

One  shower  followed  another  in  rapid  succession, 
hardly  giving  the  farmers  time  to  plough  or  plant 
between  them.  But  rain  was  so  welcome  that  none 
seemed  to  fear  it.  Not  stopping  to  think  of  the 
wetting  they  would  get,  the  men  began  to  work  as 
soon  as  the  ground  was  moist  enough.  They  seemed 
to  forget,  too,  their  weakness  and  hunger  in  the 
prospect  of  soon  having  an  abundance  of  food, 
no 


BOYS’  TROUBLES. 


Ill 


While  the  men  went  to  the  fields  the  women  went 
to  the  temples  to  offer  their  thanks  to  the  gods. 
Choh  Lin  and  his  brother  took  their  share  in  the 
general  rejoicing.  Though  almost  starving  for  lack 
of  food,  yet  with  plenty  of  water  they  seemed  to 
feel  stronger. 

“ Oh,  mother,”  said  Choh  Lin  a few  days  after 
the  first  rain,  “ the  grass  is  coming  out ; we  will  soon 
be  able  to  pick  green  leaves  and  blades  of  grass, 
and  not  be  obliged  to  cook  dried  ones  any  more. 
My  god  has  at  last  heard  our  prayers,  and  now 
we  will  have  enough  to  eat  again.” 

“ He  has  taken  a long  time  to  think  about  hear- 
ing your  prayers,”  replied  Chi  Lap,  good-naturedly. 
“ If  he  had  waited  a little  longer  he  need  not  have 
done  it  at  all.  We  should  not  have  required  any- 
thing to  eat  in  this  world.  But  he  seems  to  have 
cared  for  others  as  much  as  for  you.” 

“Well,  he  is  a good  god,”  said  the  smaller  boy; 
“ he  does  care  for  all.” 

“ That  may  be,”  answered  Chi  Lap,  “ but  I see 
that  most  of  the  people  thank  the  other  gods  for 
rain.  Would  it  not  be  well  for  you  to  tell  them 
that  they  are  thanking  the  wrong  god?” 

“ Choh  Lin  is  right,  as  are  the  other  people,” 
spoke  the  grandmother.  “ All  the  gods  have  joined 
together  and  answered  the  prayers  for  rain  ; they  are 
good  to  those  who  serve  them.” 

“ That  is,  to  those  who  lived  through  the  famine,” 
said  Chi  Lap  in  a lower  tone.  “ If  people,  instead 


112 


CHOH  LIN. 


of  dying  from  starvation,  would  just  wait,  they 
might  learn  how  good  the  gods  are.” 

Food  did  soon  become  more  plenty.  That  which 
had  been  hoarded  was  now  brought  out.  Since 
there  was  a prospect  of  enough  before  long,  each 
one  who  had  more  than  would  be  needed  tried  to 
sell  at  the  high  prices.  These  soon  came  down,  and 
not  only  was  there  more  to  be  bought,  but  it  could 
also  be  bought  with  less  money.  Mrs.  Lee  found 
all  the  work  she  could  do,  and  Chi  Lap,  who  had 
grown  large  enough  to  help,  also  earned  money. 
The  work  of  wood-gathering  and  hunting  for  food 
was  given  almost  entirely  to  Choh  Lin,  who  with 
more  food  soon  became  quite  strong  again.  At  first 
he  feared  to  go  alone,  but  gradually  became  used  to 
it  and  went  cheerfully  to  his  work.  He  did  not 
find  it  as  pleasant,  however,  to  hunt  for  wood  as 
when  his  brother  was  with  him.  The  other  boys, 
taking  advantage  of  his  small  size,  gave  the  little 
fellow  no  small  trouble. 

One  day,  on  his  way  home  from  the  shore  with  a 
bundle  of  sticks,  he  sat  down  to  rest.  Near  him 
was  a peg  driven  in  the  ground  to  which  a cow  was 
tied  to  eat  the  grass.  Hardly  thinking  what  he  did, 
the  boy  took  a stick  from  the  bundle  and  began  tap- 
ping on  the  top  of  the  peg.  Soon  rapid  footsteps 
were  heard  behind  him.  In  a moment  the  little 
fellow  was  on  his  feet,  but  not  soon  enough  to  es- 
cape one  of  his  tormentors.  A large  boy  who  dis- 
liked Choh  Lin  came  up  and  gave  him  a severe 


BOYS’  TROUBLES. 


113 


kicking  for  trying,  as  lie  said,  to  break  the  peg. 
The  big  fellow  did  not  own  the  cow,  but  here  was 
an  excuse  for  hurting  the  small  boy  without  run- 
ning- any  risk  of  being;  hurt  in  return. 

Many  a time  did  Choh  Lin  receive  knocks  and 
kicks  from  the  larger  boys.  They  stole  his  wood 
and  took  away  the  oysters  and  crabs  he  had  gathered, 
and  when  he  struggled  to  keep  his  property  they 
pushed  him  down  and  beat  and  kicked  him  for 
fighting.  This  was  not  because  he  had  so  many 
enemies,  but  because  in  Tay  Soa,  as  in  many  other 
places  in  China,  there  were  two  parties  among  the 
boys.  The  side  to  which  Choh  Lin  belonged  was 
not  only  smaller,  but  composed  of  smaller  boys,  so 
that  the  little  fellow  and  his  relatives  were  worsted 
in  more  than  one  fight.  They  did  not,  however, 
often  come  to  blows,  though  now  and  then  there 
was  a real  fight  between  the  two  sides.  Boys  as 
well  as  men  in  China  are  less  willing  to  fight  than 
people  are  in  America.  When  they  have  battles, 
they  prefer  to  fight  with  their  tongues ; this  does 
not  hurt  much,  and  such  battles  can  be  fought  at 
any  time  or  place  and  yet  the  fighters  not  be  unfitted 
for  work  afterward.  These  tongue-battles  between 
the  boys’  parties  sometimes  ended  in  real  battles, 
rftones  were  flung,  sticks  were  used,  fists  and  feet 
were  brought  into  the  fight,  and  sometimes  there 
were  bloody  noses  and  bruised  bodies  before  the 
belligerents  separated. 

The  most  of  Choh  Lin’s  trouble  came  when  he 


114 


CHOH  LIN. 


was  alone.  If  his  older  brother  were  with  him,  the 
larger  boys  usually  let  him  alone. 

More  than  once,  Choh  Lin,  after  telling  the  story 
of  his  wrongs,  added,  “ I wish  I were  a man  ; then 
they  would  not  knock  me  around  as  they  do  now.” 

Chi  Lap  would  say,  “Wait  until  we  are  men; 
then  we  will  pay  them  back.” 

The  sister  often  wished  herself  a man  to  take  the 
part  of  her  brothers.  To  her  words  of  sympathy 
Choh  Lin  replied  one  day,  “I’m  glad  that  you  are 
a girl  and  must  stay  in  the  house.  No  one  can 
harm  you.  I almost  wish  that  I was  a girl  too ; 
girls  don’t  get  kicked  and  knocked  around  as  we 
do.” 

“ I’ll  tell  you  what  we  can  do,”  replied  Chi  Lap. 
“ Our  sister  will  soon  be  old  enough  to  be  married ; 
then  mother  must  marry  her  to  a very  big  man,  and 
he  can  give  those  boys  one  of  the  hardest  beatings 
they  ever  had,  and  you  and  I,  Choh  Lin,  will  just 
look  on  and  see  it.” 

“ There  is  a better  way  to  punish  your  enemies,” 
said  the  grandmother.  “ You  are  not  strong  enough 
to  punish  those  boys,  but  others  are.” 

“ Who,  grandmother?”  asked  the  boys. 

“ If  I tell  you,  Chi  Lap  will  only  mock  at  what 
I say,”  replied  the  old  lady ; “ but  I will  tell  Choh 
Lin  : he  knows  how  to  respect  the  aged.” 

“ I do  respect  the  aged,”  replied  Chi  Lap.  “Do 
not  I always  treat  you  kindly,  grandmother?” 

“Yes,  you  treat  me  well  enough,”  replied  she, 


BOYS’  TROUBLES. 


115 


“ but  it  is  not  of  myself  that  I speak.  There  are 
beings  greater  far  than  I,  whom  you  treat  with  dis- 
respect.” 

“ Whom  do  you  mean?”  asked  Chi  Lap  in  won- 
der. 

“ I mean  the  gods,”  was  the  reply.  “ You  speak 
of  them  as  though  they  were  of  no  more  account 
than  slaves.” 

“ I do  not  mean  to  mock  them,”  answered  Chi 
Lap.  “ The  gods  may  be  good  enough,  but  I do 
not  quite  see  their  goodness.  I only  say  what  the 
men  say  of  the  gods,  anyway.” 

“Yes,  and  we  who  serve  them  faithfully  must 
suffer  for  what  you  and  such  men  say  of  them.  The 
white  crow  must  starve  in  the  black  one’s  famine.” 

Chi  Lap  made  no  reply,  and  the  grandmother, 
turning  to  Choh  Lin,  continued:  “If  you  go  to  the 
temple  and  pray  to  the  gods,  they  will  punish  your 
enemies.  Tell  your  own  god  that  he  must  take  care 
of  you  ; and  if  the  bad  boys  continue  to  abuse  you, 
then  ask  him  to  punish  them  severely;  yes,  tell  him 
to  kill  them.” 

“Oh,  grandmother,”  said  he,  “I  don’t  want 
them  to  be  killed.  If  the  god  would  punish  and 
make  them  cry  twice  as  bad  as  they  make  me  cry, 
that  would  be  enough.” 

“ How  would  it  do,”  asked  Mrs.  Lee,  who  had 
listened,  “ to  ask  the  god  to  make  the  boys  your 
friends  ?” 

“Do  gods  ever  do  that?”  asked  Chi  Lap.  “I 


116 


CHOH  LIN 


thought  they  punished  the  bad,  rewarded  the  good 
and  took  care  of  their  friends,  and  that  is  all.  I 
did  not  know  that  they  cared  at  all  for  bad  people, 
except  to  let  them  go  on  and  grow  worse  and  worse 
until  they  could  not  stand  it  any  longer;  then  they 
suddenly  threw  them  down  into  the  dark  prison  for 
the  bad.” 

“That  is  what  the  gods  do,”  replied  the  grand- 
mother. “ They  do  not  make  bad  people  good  nor 
good  people  bad ; that  is  the  work  of  people  them- 
selves.” 

“ I wish  the  gods  would  help  people  to  become 
better,”  said  Mrs.  Lee  with  a sigh. 

Not  long  after  this  talk  Clioh  Lin  asked  his 
brother,  “Chi  Lap,  will  you  make  a kite  for  me? 
The  other  boys  have  kites;  it  is  kiteflying-time, and 
I want  a kite  too.” 

“ What  kind  do  you  want  ?”  asked  the  older 
brother. 

“Just  the  best  one  you  can  make,”  answered 
Clioh  Lin.  “ Make  a big  bird — one  that  will  fly 
very  high  and  pull  hard  at  the  string.” 

“All  right!”  replied  Chi  Lap. 

This  custom  of  flying  kites  is  quite  common  in 
Southern  China.  In  the  city  of  Foo  Chow  (recent- 
ly attacked  by  the  French),  some  distance  north  of 
Tay  Soa,  the  ninth  day  of  the  ninth  month  is  ob- 
served as  a special  day  for  flying  kites.  At  Tay 
Soa  and  Amoy  the  spring  is  the  kiteflying-time. 
The  kites  are  made  in  all  kinds  of  shapes — some 


BOYS’  TROUBLES. 


117 


like  fish,  others  like  birds,  others  like  snakes,  and, 
indeed,  like  almost  anything  else  that  the  ingenious 
Chinese  can  think  of  imitating. 

A bird-kite  was  made  for  Clioh  Lin,  and  the 
little  fellow,  with  his  friend  Oan  and  two  or  three 
other  boys,  went  out  to  fly  it.  Some  of  the  larger 
boys  of  the  other  party  were  out  flying  kites,  but 
had  none  as  fine  as  that  of  Choh  Lin.  Chi  Lap 
could  do  well  whatever  he  tried,  but  he  was  more 
skillful  in  kite-making  than  in  anything  else,  as 
this  kite  proved. 

When  the  small  boys  appeared  with  the  fine  large 
kite,  the  larger  boys  tried  to  coax  its  owner  to  trade 
it  off  for  one  of  theirs.  Failing  in  that,  they  of- 
fered to  buy  it,  but  Choh  Lin  was  unwilling  to  part 
with  it.  Determined  to  get  the  better  kite  in  some 
way,  yet  unwilling  to  take  it  from  him  by  force, 
they  tried  to  persuade  him  to  make  his  kite  fly  a 
race  with  one  of  theirs.  One  of  them  said,  “ Clioh 
Lin,  let  us  see  whose  kite  can  fly  the  best?  If 
yours  can,  then  you  may  take  mine,  but  if  mine 
flies  the  highest,  then  I will  take  yours.” 

The  little  fellow  was  unwilling  to  try  this,  but  at 
length  consented ; the  kites  went  up,  and  Choh  Lin’s 
went  higher  than  any  others. 

“ There,  Tun  !”  cried  he,  “ my  kite  is  the  highest. 
Yours  can’t  go  as  high  as  that.  But  you  can  keep 
your  kite ; I don’t  want  it.” 

“Oh  yes,  take  it,”  whispered  Oan;  “it’s  yours 
now ; then  give  it  to  us.” 


118 


CHOH  LIN. 


“Tun,  Choh  Lin  has  won  your  kite,”  said  one  of 
the  little  boy’s  friends,  “so  hand  it  over  to  him.” 

For  a moment  the  larger  boy  hesitated,  and  then, 
one  of  his  friends  whispering  to  him,  he  spoke: 
“ Right ! Choh  Lin’s  kite  has  won.  I don’t  want 
to  give  up  mine,  but  it’s  fair. — Here,  Choh  Lin, 
take  the  string;  I will  not  pull  it  down.  Now  let 
me  hold  the  string  of  yours  for  a while.” 

Without  thinking,  the  little  fellow  took  the  cord 
of  Tun’s  kite,  handing  that  of  his  own  to  the  larger 
boy.  Tun  took  it  and  walked  slowly  away,  flying 
the  kite  as  if  it  were  his  own.  In  a few  minutes 
Choh  Lin  handed  the  string  he  held  to  Oan  and 
went  to  Tun  and  asked  for  his  own  kite. 

“ This  is  not  yours,”  replied  the  large  boy ; “ it  is 
mine  now.” 

Choh  Lin’s  entreaties  and  threats  were  of  no 
avail.  Tun’s  friends  sided  with  him,  and  there 
was  no  help  for  the  smaller  boys.  Choh  Lin  was 
obliged  to  give  up  his  own  aud  take  the  poorer  kite; 
but  kiteflying  had  no  further  interest  for  him  now. 
Taking  hold  of  the  string,  he  pulled  down  the  kite, 
and,  carrying  it  in  his  hand,  started  with  his  friends 
for  home.  They  had  not  gone  far,  muttering  and 
threatening  what  they  would  do  to  the  larger  boys 
as  soon  as  a chance  offered,  when  Oan,  seeing  some 
stones  in  their  path,  said,  “ Here’s  a chance  now. 
Let  us  throw  stoues  at  their  kites  and  break  them.” 

“ We  can’t  hit  them;  they  are  too  high,”  replied 
Choh  Lin. 


BOYS’  TROUBLES. 


119 


“ Well,  we  can  hit  the  boys,  if  we  can’t  the  kites,” 
said  one  of  the  others ; “ let  us  try.” 

The  kite  was  dropped,  and  in  a moment  the  little 
fellows  caught  up  several  stones  each,  and,  running 
back  a short  distance,  began  throwing  at  the  larger 
boys.  Fortunately,  the  aim  was  bad  and  not  a 
stone  struck  the  mark.  But  those  who  held  no 
kite-strings  did  not  wait  to  be  hit:  they  started 
after  the  small  boys,  chasing  them  some  distance. 
Choh  Lin  and  his  companions  in  their  haste  neg- 
lected to  take  up  the  kite,  and  the  larger  boys  car- 
ried it  back  as  their  own. 

After  this  the  little  fellow  was  careful  to  make 
no  bargains  and  to  have  nothing  to  do  with  the 
larger  boys.  Perhaps  it  saved  him  from  falling 
into  the  practice,  common  among  boys  as  well  as 
men  in  China,  of  betting  and  gambling. 

One  day  in  the  autumn  some  of  Choh  Lin’s 
friends  met  him  and  said,  “ There  is  a man  down 
street  who  has  a whole  tubful  of  crickets  to  sell; 
let  us  buy  some  and  have  a cricket-  fight.” 

“ I haven’t  any  cash,”  replied  he. 

“ I have,”  answered  Chiap,  “ and  will  lend  you 
some ; then  you  can  pay  me  back  when  your  mother 
gives  you  money.” 

“ But  she  does  not  give  me  any  money,”  replied 
he;  “she  is  too  poor  yet.” 

While  they  were  talking  Chi  Lap  came  along. 

“ Here  comes  your  brother ; he’ll  let  you  have 
cash,”  said  one  of  the  boys. 


120 


CHOH  LIN. 


“ I don’t  want  to  fight  crickets,”  replied  Ckoh 
Lin. 

“ Don’t  want  to  ? Why,  it’s  fun,”  said  the  other ; 
“come  along  and  try.  You  don’t  want  to  because 
you  do  not  know  about  it.  Chi  Lap  will — won’t 
you,  Chi  Lap?”  called  out  Chiap. 

“ Do  what  ?”  asked  he. 

“ Fight  crickets.  There’s  a man  down  street  who 
has  a whole  tubful.  They  are  fine  strong  young 
crickets,  and  he  sells  them  cheap,  too.  Let’s  have 
a cricket-fight. — What  do  you  say,  Chi  Lap?” 

“ Where  is  the  man  ?”  asked  he  eagerly ; and  the 
boys  hurried  down  the  street  to  the  cricket-seller, 
Choh  Lin  following  more  slowly. 

Crickets  were  bought,  placed  in  a box  and  the 
boys  hastened  away  to  have  a cricket-fight.  A 
basin  was  brought  and  set  on  the  ground.  Chiap 
and  Chi  Lap  then  sat  down  on  opposite  sides,  and 
each  put  a cricket  in  front  of  him  in  the  basin. 
The  two  boys  then  bet  each  several  cash  that  his 
own  cricket  would  be  the  best  fighter.  Some  of  the 
other  boys  who  had  followed  bet,  some  on  Chiap’s 
and  others  on  Chi  Lap’s  cricket.  When  all  were 
ready  the  two  boys,  each  with  a straw,  began  teasing 
his  cricket  until  the  two  insects  became  angry,  when, 
uttering  loud  chirrups,  they  sprang  upon  each  other. 
Then  began  a battle  between  the  little  creatures  that 
would  have  been  terrible  if  they  had  been  large. 
The  boys  crowded  around  the  basin  and  jostled  each 
other  as  they  eagerly  watched  the  fight,  each  seem- 


BOYS'  TROUBLES. 


121 


ing  nearly  as  much  excited  as  the  crickets.  They 
cheered  and  shouted,  and  urged  the  enraged  insects 
on  in  the  battle.  Though  each  little  creature  had 
a leg  torn  off,  both  kept  on  with  the  desperate  com- 
bat. At  length  Chi  Lap’s  cricket  stopped  fighting, 
and  soon  ceased  struggling ; he  was  dead. 

Chiap  had  won  Chi  Lap’s  cash,  and  others  who 
had  bet  on  his  cricket  lost  their  money  too. 

“ I mean  to  try  it  again,  Chiap,”  said  Chi  Lap, 
“ if  you  will.”  Another  fight  was  soon  arranged 
for,  the  money  staked  and  the  battle  begun.  This 
time  Chiap’s  cricket  lost  two  of  its  legs,  and  was 
forced  to  try  to  escape,  and  Chi  Lap  was  the  winner. 

Since  each  had  won  a battle,  the  third  must  be 
fought.  This  Chi  Lap  gained.  By  this  time  the 
rest  of  the  boys  were  ready  to  try  a cricket-fight. 
They  tried  to  persuade  Choh  Lin  to  buy  a cricket, 
or  at  least  bet  on  one,  but  he  remembered  his  kite 
and  refused.  He  even  tried  to  persuade  Chi  Lap 
to  stop,  and  threatened  to  tell  their  mother,  but  the 
elder  brother  had  caught  the  excitement  of  gam- 
bling,  and  he  would  not  stop  until  all  the  crickets 
had  fought.  After  losing  and  winning,  and  in  the 
end  losing  not  only  the  price  of  the  crickets,  but 
some  money  besides,  Chi  Lap  went  home  with  his 
younger  brother  somewhat  discouraged  with  gam- 
bling. 

Choh  Lin  told  their  mother,  who  scolded  her 
eldest  son  and  forbade  his  gambling  again.  This, 
however,  did  not  prevent  him,  but  it  did  stop  his 


122 


CHOH  LIN. 


gambling  when  Choh  Lin  was  by,  and  made  the  old- 
er less  willing  to  have  the  company  of  his  younger 
brother. 

Boys  very  early  in  life  learn  to  gamble  in  China; 
nor  is  it  strange : they  see  men  every  day  engaged 
in  it.  High  and  low,  rich  and  poor,  are  gamblers. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


CHOH  LIN  AT  SCHOOL. 

HEN  Choh  Lin  was  nine  years  old  his  mother 


felt  able  to  send  him  to  school.  He  was  a 
bright  boy,  and  every  one  thought  that  he  should 
learn  to  read.  When  told  that  he  was  to  be  a 
school-boy,  he  was  greatly  pleased.  Perhaps  he 
thought  that  now  his  days  for  hunting  wood  and 
gathering  crabs  and  oysters  were  over,  but  he  was 
glad  to  go  to  school.  He  wanted  to  be  able  to  read 
the  story-books  of  his  country,  and  then,  too,  it 
would  be  something  new. 

When  the  school  began  he  started  in  the  morning 
with  the  others.  Without  books  or  slate,  with  no 
dinner-basket  on  his  arm,  he  entered  the  school- 
room. It  was  dark  and  gloomy,  its  walls  were  almost 
black  with  smoke ; its  only  windows  were  two  square 
holes  with  wooden  bars  across,  high  above  the  reach 
of  the  scholars.  There  were  a few  desks  or  tables 
and  some  wooden  benches  without  backs  in  the 
room  ; these,  with  the  teacher’s  desk  and  chair,  were 
the  only  furniture. 

The  school  was  soon  called  to  order  by  the  teach- 
er, who  tried  to  put  on  a very  wise  look  behind  his 


123 


124 


CHOH  LIN. 


large  spectacles.  Choh  Lin  as  he  looked  at  him  felt 
that  he  was  in  the  presence  of  the  wisest  man  in 
China,  and  one  who  probably  knew  all  there  was  to 
be  learned.  He  wondered  if  he  ever  would  know 
one-half  as  much  as  the  sober  schoolmaster,  and  de- 
termined to  try  to  take  in  all  the  learning  his  head, 
would  hold.  When  the  scholars  were  all  seated  the 
teacher  called  one  to  him,  and,  taking  a book,  read 
a sentence  or  two  from  it,  and  had  the  boy  repeat  it 
correctly  after  him ; then  he  sent  the  pupil  to  his 
seat  to  repeat  again  and  again  the  same  words.  Then 
another  was  called,  and  his  lesson  read  to  him  in 
the  same  way ; he  in  turn  was  sent  back  to  his  seat 
repeating  it.  In  this  way  all  were  called,  until  each 
had  his  lesson  given.  All  were  soon  in  their  seats 
studying  and  repeating  their  lessons  at  the  top  of 
their  voices,  as  if  each  were  trying  to  drown  the 
voices  of  the  others.  Swinging:  themselves  back  and 
forth  on  their  seats  and  shouting  with  all  their 
might,  the  scholars  seemed  to  be  doing  anything 
else  than  studying;  yet  this,  the  Chinese  think,  is 
the  true  way  to  study.  Each  by  shouting  out  his 
own  lesson  will  be  unable  to  hear  what  others  say, 
and  will  not  be  attending  to  that  with  which  he  has 
no  business.  Besides,  the  teacher  can  tell  by  the 
noise  how  much  studying  is  being  done. 

As  soon  as  a boy  had  learned  the  lesson  he  went 
to  the  teacher,  and,  handing  him  the  book,  turned 
his  own  back  on  the  master;  then  in  a rapid  way 
he  rattled  off  from  memory  what  had  been  learned. 


Clio II  LIN  AT  SCHOOL. 


125 


A new  lesson  was  given  in  the  same  way  as  the 
first,  and  the  pupils  went  back  to  their  seats  to 
shout  it  into  their  memory. 

Such  was  the  school  to  which  Choh  Lin  went. 
Like  many  others  in  China,  little  else  was  taught 
;in  it  than  reading  some  of  the  old  books  of  the 
’country  and  writing.  Arithmetic,  geography,  his- 
tory and  other  studies,  so  important  in  American 
schools,  had  little  place  there.  If  able  to  do  as 
well  as  their  forefathers  did  thousands  of  years  ago, 
the  Chinese  usually  are  satisfied. 

After  the  other  boys  had  their  lessons  given, 
Choh  Lin’s  turn  came.  The  teacher  called  him  up, 
asked  a few  questions,  praised  him,  and  then  gave 
him,  like  the  others,  a sentence  or  two  to  learn,  only 
it  was  easier  than  what  the  older  boys  had.  He  did 
not  begin  at  the  alphabet,  because  the  Chinese  lan- 
guage has  no  alphabet — no  letters  at  all.  Nor  did 
he  need  to  learn  to  spell.  The  people  of  Choh 
Lin’s  country  never  spell  in  their  own  language; 
the  words  are  already  spelled  out  and  ready  for  the 
scholar  to  begin  to  read  them.  Instead  of  being 
made  up  of  letters,  the  words  are  made  up  of  dots 
and  marks,  straight  and  crooked  arranged  in  differ- 
ent ways.  But  every  child  in  America  probably 
has  seen  Chinese  characters,  or  words,  on  tea- boxes, 
if  nowhere  else.  Those  are  real  Chinese  words — 
just  like  the  words  in  their  books.  If  some  boy 
thinks  that  it  must  be  easy  to  learn  to  read,  since 
there  are  no  words  to  be  spelled,  let  him  think  that 


126 


CHOH  LIN. 


Chinese  words  are  hard  to  remember  because  there 
are  so  many  of  them.  There  are  at  least  ten  thou- 
sand in  common  use,  and  each  one  different  from  the 
others,  yet  many  so  alike  that  one  is  often  mistaken 
for  another.  Imagine  how  hard  it  would  be  to 
learn  to  read  a language  that  had  several  thousand 
letters,  and  each  made  up  of  a number  of  marks, 
some  of  very  many.  The  fact  is,  that  there  probably 
is  no  written  language  so  difficult  to  learn  to  read  as 
the  Chinese.  One  may  be  learning  a lifetime  and 
yet  not  know  nearly  all  the  words  in  the  books  for 
the  use  of  common  people. 

When  Choli  Lin  went  to  his  seat,  reciting  the 
words  the  teacher  had  read,  the  little  fellow  felt  as 
if  he  had  grown  six  inches  since  he  came  into  the 
schoolroom.  He  was  a scholar  in  a school  with 
other  boys.  He  had  a book  of  his  own,  and,  more 
than  that,  was  studying  a lesson  given  by  a real 
teacher — a man  who  wore  spectacles,  and  large  ones 
too.  Proud  Choh  Lin ! He  saw  himself  there  a 
student  and  becoming  learned  and  great.  The 
teacher  had  told  him  that  by  diligent  study  he 
would  some  day  become  a learned  man,  a graduate, 
and  then  an  officer  of  the  government,  and  then — 
But  the  boy’s  imagination  could  not  go  farther.  He 
knew  of  the  mandarins  who  ruled  over  the  portion 
of  country  to  which  Tay  Soa  belonged ; he  had 
heard  of  the  Tau  Tai,  or  district  magistrate,  and 
knew  that  there  was  such  a being  as  a governor- 
general  of  the  province ; but  the  emperor — of  course 


CHOH  LIN  AT  SCHOOL. 


127 


he  had  heard  of  him — whether  he  was  a real  god 
or  part  god  and  part  man  Choh  Lin  did  not  know. 
He  certainly  did  not  think  of  being  emperor  some 
day,  any  more  than  he  did  of  being  a god,  nor  did 
he  know  enough  about  a governor-general  to  think 
of  being  one  when  he  was  old  enough ; but  he  did 
think  that  he  might  some  day  become  a siun  hang, 
an  under-mandarin,  or  a mandarin’s  secretary. 
Great  plans  were  formed  in  that  little  head  as  he 
walked  to  his  seat  and  began  to  study.  He  would 
be  great,  and  then  he  should  be  rich,  and  thus  have 
plenty  of  money.  Then  his  mother,  sister  and  the 
rest  would  have  plenty  to  eat,  no  matter  how  much 
famine  there  might  be,  nor  need  they  work  any  more. 

In  thinking  and  planning  the  little  boy  did  not 
forget  his  lesson.  He  kept  repeating  it  over  and 
over  in  a low  voice,  not  daring  to  shout  out  as  the 
rest  did.  He  was  afraid  of  his  own  voice,  but  as 
he  thought  more  of  his  plans  and  heard  the  voices 
of  others  ringing  in  his  ears,  he  tried  to  study  loud 
too,  and  raised  his  voice ; but  the  noise  made  by  the 
others  drowned  his  own,  and  he  spoke  louder,  then 
louder  and  louder,  until  his  voice  rose  as  high  as  the 
rest;  then  Choh  Lin  was  content.  He  was  a full 
scholar  now,  and  could  shout  as  loudly  as  any.  He 
tried  to  shout  a little  louder,  but  it  soon  made  him 
hoarse,  and  he  was  obliged  to  be  less  a scholar, 
though  he  swayed  himself  back  and  forth,  just  as 
he  saw  the  others  do,  until  there  was  danger  of 
his  falling  off  the  bench. 


128 


CHOH  LIN. 


Choh  Liu  now  knew  his  lesson,  and  had  known 
it  for  some  time,  but  hardly  dared  go  to  the  teacher 
with  it.  Finding  enough  courage  at  length,  he 
gathered  all  he  had  and  boldly  walked  to  the  teach- 
er’s desk  ; handing  the  book,  he  turned  his  back  and 
began  to  recite.  He  went  through  the  whole,  though 
it  was  not  much,  without  missing  a word. 

“ Ah ! you  have  done  well  to-day  for  a new 
scholar,”  said  the  teacher.  “ Some  day  you  will 
know  by  heart  many  books  if  you  keep  on  in  this 
way.” 

The  tremble  he  felt  when  he  came  to  recite  had 
all  gone  out  of  the  little  boy’s  knees  now,  and  all 
the  flutter  out  of  his  heart.  He  felt  proud  of  the 
teacher’s  praise,  and  determined  to  be  a scholar 
equal  to  the  teacher  himself.  A new  lesson  was 
given  to  be  speedily  learned  and  well  recited.  Choh 
Lin  did  not  understand  why  he  was  praised  less  for 
this  than  for  the  first;  so  he  took  his  seat  after  the 
second  recitation  with  less  pride ; but  at  the  end  of 
the  day  he  had  made  good  progress  for  a beginner, 
and  was  quite  well  pleased  with  being  a school-boy. 

As  he  went  along  the  street  he  wondered  if 
people  did  not  look  at  him  and  say,  “ Choh  Lin 
has  become  a scholar.  He  will  be  a great  man 
some  day,  perhaps  a graduate  and  a high  manda- 
rin.” 

He  had  a great  deal  to  tell  at  night  about  the 
school.  His  mother,  grandmother,  brother  and  sis- 
ter were  almost  as  proud  of  the  young  scholar  as  he 


The  Young  Scholar. 


Page  129. 


CHOH  LIN  AT  SCHOOL. 


129 


was  of  himself,  and  were  ready  to  listen  to  his  plans 
for  the  future  until  he  talked  of  being  a very  great 
man;  then  Chi  Lap  told  him  that  “the  little  bird 
chirruped  loudly  in  the  nest,  but  chirruped  louder 
to  get  back  when  the  nest  was  gone.” 

Chi  Lap’s  remarks  usually  of  late  quieted  the 
younger  brother  in  his  plans.  The  two  loved  each 
other,  no  doubt,  as  much  as  ever,  but  the  older 
brother,  being  more  at  work  and  among  men, 
thought  it  his  duty  to  say  wise  things  to  the  young- 
er one. 

Choh  Lin  went  to  school  day  after  day,  nor  did 
he  grow  tired  of  study.  Sometimes  he  did  wish  for 
a day  when  he  might  rest,  but  those  days  are  few 
in  China — no  Saturday  of  play  for  the  scholars, 
and  no  Sabbath  of  rest.  Now  and  then  a feast-day 
comes  when  the  schools  are  closed,  but  usually  they 
are  open  day  after  day.  The  Chinese,  having  no 
Sunday,  have  no  weeks;  their  time  is  divided  by 
days,  or  literally  suns  and  months,  or  moons. 

As  the  little  boy  talked  more  with  the  boys  at 
school,  his  thoughts  were  more  fixed  on  becoming 
rich  than  on  becoming  great.  Since  he  noticed  how 
his  mother  and  Chi  Lap  must  work  to  earn  money 
for  food  and  clothing  for  the  family,  he  determined 
to  be  rich  and  pay  them  back  some  day.  “ Mother, 
you  and  Chi  Lap  work  on  yet  a few  years,”  said  he 
one  day,  “ until  I have  learned  enough  at  school ; 
then  I will  go  to  work  and  earn  money  enough  for 
us  all.  The  boys  at  school  all  mean  to  be  rich  when 

9 


130' 


CHOU  LIN. 


they  can  read  well ; so  do  I.  It  will  be  very  easy 
to  get  money  then.  All  rich  men  can  read  many 
books,  and  poor  men  can  read  none.  Learning  to 
read  does  it;  so  the  boys  and  the  teacher  say.” 

He  thought  that  learning  to  read  books  written 
many  hundreds  of  years  ago  would  in  some  way 
give  him  power  over  money.  The  older  he  grew 
the  more  he  determined  to  become  rich.  Nor  was 
it  strange.  He  had  learned  by  a terrible  experience 
what  the  poor  must  suffer,  nor  had  he  forgotten  the 
comforts  that  wealth  gives. 

When  Choh  Lin  had  gone  to  school  a short  time 
he  was  told  to  bring  writing-material,  so  that  he 
might  learn  to  write.  Some  paper,  a writing-stone, 
a cake  of  ink,  a tiny  water-pot  and  a pointed  brush 
of  fine  hair  were  bought  for  him,  and  he  was  ready 
to  become  a writer.  When  he  brought  these  the 
teacher  took  the  little  pot,  and,  filling  it  with  water, 
poured  some  into  a hollow  place  in  one  end  of  the 
stone,  and  then,  taking  the  stick  of  ink,  he  dipped 
the  end  in  the  water  and  rubbed  it  on  the  stone, 
thus  inking  it.  He  then  took  the  brush,  which 
was  a hollow  stick  of  bamboo  about  as  thick  as  a 
goose-quill,  in  one  end  of  which  was  a bunch  of 
soft  hair  that  tapered  down  to  a point.  This  end, 
when  the  brush  was  not  in  use,  was  kept  covered 
by  a small  cap  or  piece  of  bamboo  large  enough  to 
slip  on  the  handle.  Taking  off  the  cap,  the  teacher 
dipped  the  brush  in  water,  touched  it  lightly  on  the 
inked  stone,  and  began  writing  on  the  paper  some 


CHOH  LIN  AT  SCHOOL. 


131 


Chinese  words  for  the  little  boy  to  copy.  After 
writing  a few  simple  ones  he  gave  Choh  Lin  the 
brush  and,  showing  him  how  to  hold  it,  told  him 
to  write  the  words'.  He  made  slow  and  rough  work 
at  first,  but,  encouraged  by  the  teacher  and  the  other 
boys,  he  soon  learned  to  make  something  that  looked 
like  the  copy. 

After  a while  Choh  Lin  was  taught  to  add  and 
subtract,  but  not  much  more  of  arithmetic.  For 
nearly  a year  he  continued  at  school, studying  every 
day  except  on  feast-days.  He  never  played  truant, 
for  he  was  too  anxious  to  learn  ; besides,  he  liked  to 
go  to  school,  where  he  could  be  with  other  boys, 
and  where  the  teacher  would  prevent  their  taking 
advantage  of  his  size. 

Mrs.  Lee  was  pleased  to  hear  from  the  teacher  of 
the  progress  her  boy  made,  and  would  gladly  have 
continued  him  at  school  had  she  been  able.  The 
teacher  said  all  the  good  he  could  of  Choh  Lin, 
since  he  wished  to  have  as  many  pupils  as  he  could 
get.  Since  each  one  paid  for  his  own  tuition,  the 
more  scholars  the  more  money  for  the  master.  But 
what  he  said  of  Choh  Lin  was  meant  to  be  the  truth. 
The  little  boy  had  become  a great  favorite  with  the 
teacher.  He  was  well  behaved  and  made  rapid 
progress  in  his  studies. 

At  the  end  of  the  year  Mrs.  Lee  found  herself 
unable  to  keep  her  son  at  school.  She  and  the 
teacher  regretted  it,  but  none  felt  so  sorry  as  Choh 
Lin.  With  the  end  of  school  he  saw  his  bright 


132 


CHOH  LIN. 


hopes  disappear ; and,  more  than  that,  he  was  obliged 
to  go  back  to  his  old  work  of  hunting  for  wood  and 
oysters,  crabs  and  other  food. 

Another  drought  had  begun.  Work  was  scarce, 
food  was  rapidly  growing  dearer,  and  both  boys 
were  needed  to  help  keep  the  family  from  starva- 
tion. Fortunately,  the  drought  did  not  last  as  long 
nor  was  food  as  scarce  as  during  the  former  famine. 
When  the  rain  fell  again,  Choh  Lin  was  disap- 
pointed at  not  being  able  to  go  back  to  school.  Un- 
able to  study  without  a teacher,  he  forgot  much  of 
what  he  had  learned. 

After  the  second  drought  Chi  Lap,  who  had  now 
become  quite  a large  boy,  concluded  that  Tay  Soa 
was  a good  place  for  famines  not  only,  but  a good 
place  to  move  away  from;  so  he  determined  to  go 
down  to  the  large  city  of  Amoy,  about  a dozen  miles 
away,  and  see  if  he  could  not  find  something  to  do 
there.  He  went  down  on  one  of  the  boats  going  to 
Amoy,  and  came  back  with  the  news  that  he  had 
found  something  to  do.  He  was  going  to  the  city 
as  a peddler,  to  sell  candies  and  other  good  things  for 
those  who  had  a sweet  tooth.  To  start  would  take 
but  little  money,  and  he  had  been  told  that  he  could 
earn  considerable  at  it.  His  mother  was  willing  to 
let  him  try,  while  the  grandmother  opposed  it,  and 
Choh  Lin  felt  that  he  could  not  let  his  brother  go. 
But  Chi  Lap  did  go,  and  stayed  in  Amoy  too,  com- 
ing home  now  and  then  for  a day  or  two. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

STONING  THE  DEVIL. 

ONE  day  a number  of  the  men  in  Tay  Soa  were 
talking  together  earnestly  about  a disease  raging 
in  some  villages  not  far  away.  As  usual,  the  stories 
of  the  ravages  of  the  disease  had  grown  by  travel- 
ing. Some  said  that  many  were  sick  and  some  had 
already  died,  while  others  said  that  half  the  people 
were  sick  and  that  a great  number  were  dead.  It 
was  said,  too,  that  the  disease  was  spreading  to  the 
different  villages  and  approaching  Tay  Soa.  This 
last  news  had  aroused  the  people  to  great  excitement, 
and  they  were  considering  what  should  be  done  to 
keep  the  disease  from  their  village. 

“ What  can  we  do  ?”  asked  one.  “ If  the  evil 
spirits  choose  to  send  such  calamities,  we  must  sub- 
mit and  suffer.  If  we  are  to  die  we  must  die,  and 
that  is  all  we  can  do.” 

“ What  do  you  think,  Uncle  Kim  ?”  asked  one  of 
the  younger  men  of  an  old  man  in  the  group  who 
had  stood  by  quietly  listening,  but  now  and  then 
shaking  his  head  at  remarks  that  seemed  to  displease 
him.  “ You  are  older  than  we,  and  far  more  wise ; 

133 


134 


CHOH  LIN. 


do  you  think  that  we  can  do  anything  to  prevent 
this  disease  reaching  Tay  Soa?” 

“I  think  we  can  keep  the  disease  away  from  our 
village,”  he  replied,  “ but  the  disease  is  not  so  much 
to  be  dreaded  as  something  else.”  Then  he  stopped 
and  looked  as  wise  as  he  could  at  oue  and  another 
of  the  company. 

“Something  else?  What  else,  Uncle  Kim?” 
asked  several  voices  at  once.  “ Please  tell  us.  You 
are  wise;  years  have  taught  you  many  things;  let 
us  drink  from  the  fountain  of  your  wisdom.” 

After  waiting  a while  and  looking  at  one  and 
another,  the  old  man  began : “ Disease  is  not  so  bad 
as  that  which  brings  it.  All  such  evils  are  only 
weapons  of  the  bad  spirits,  who  use  them  to  tor- 
ment us.  We  cannot  see  evil  spirits — we  can  only 
see  their  acts — but  we  can  feel  them  ; and  unless  we 
do  something  soon  we  shall  feel  one  act  of  the  evil 
one  more  than  we  have  felt  for  many  days.” 

“ But  what  can  we  do?”  asked  many  eager  voices. 
“ Can  we  do  anything  to  keep  away  the  evil?” 

“ Yes,”  replied  the  old  man  ; “ but  when  I tell 
it  you  will  not  heed.  Many  years  ago,  when  the 
fathers  lived,  we  had  not  such  calamities  as  now 
visit  our  country.  Then  all  was  happiness  and 
peace.  The  fathers  knew  how  to  care  for  them- 
selves and  their  children,  but  we  have  gone  from 
their  wisdom  into  ignorance  and  sorrow.” 

“What  did  the  fathers  do?”  asked  an  impatient 


one. 


STONING  TIIE  DEVIL. 


135 


“ Keep  silence,”  said  another,  “ and  let  age  and 
wisdom  speak.” 

Uncle  Kim  began  again  : “ All  evil  comes  from 
the  devil.  He  hates  men  and  wishes  to  cause  them 
pain  and  misery,  but  if  he  sees  them  in  trouble  and 
in  great  suffering,  he  lets  them  alone.  He  is  con- 
tent if  they  suffer,  no  matter  who  brings  the  suffer- 
ing.” 

“ What  do  you  mean,  venerable  Uncle  Kim  ?” 
asked  a young  man.  “ Remember,  some  of  us  are 
but  youthful ; we  have  only  read  a few  characters 
in  the  child’s  book,  while  you  have  searched  through 
the  great  volumes  of  deep  wisdom.” 

“ Oh,  there  is  no  need  of  telling  you,  young  men  ; 
you  are  giving  up  the  customs  of  our  fathers,  and 
all  are  suffering  for  it.  If  you  would  learn  wisdom 
from  the  past,  all  might  yet  be  well.” 

“ Uncle  Kim,  please  tell  us  what  customs  we 
should  follow,  and  we  will  gladly  go  back  to  them,” 
said  one  of  the  older  men.  “ No  doubt  we  have 
gone  astray,  but  now  we  come  back  as  children  to 
learn  lessons  from  a father,  and  here  we  wait  for 
him  to  teach  us,  and  we  will  follow.” 

“In  the  time  of  the  fathers,”  said  the  old  man, 
“ they  tried  a way  to  keep  off  disease  and  other 
evil,  and  it  succeeded.” 

As  he  stopped  a moment,  one  man,  impatient  and 
ready  to  show  his  wisdom,  asked,  “What  was  it? 
Did  they  offer  sacrifices  to  the  evil  spirits  ?” 

“ No,”  continued  the  old  man  ; “ sacrifices  to  the 


136 


CHOH  LIN. 


devil  are  useless.  He  cares  nothing  for  what  we 
offer,  but  for  what  we  suffer.  Give  sacrifices  to  the 
gods  and  human  blood  to  devils.” 

“ What  do  you  mean  ?”  asked  one  who  seemed 
startled. 

“ To  escape  the  torments  of  the  devil  we  must 
take  the  work  out  of  his  hands,”  replied  Uncle 
Kim. 

“ How  can  we  do  that  ?”  was  asked. 

“ By  causing  each  other  to  suffer.” 

“ In  what  way  ?” 

“ This  is  the  way  the  fathers  did,”  continued  the 
old  man,  “ as  they  told  me  when  I was  a child : 
They  gathered  on  the  plain,  and,  dividing  into  two 
parties,  they  separated  a little  distance  and  then  be- 
gan throwing  stones  at  each  other.  Often  men  were 
hit,  wounded,  and  some  were  even  killed.  The  dev- 
il, seeing  them  fight  in  this  way,  thought  that  they 
were  enemies  and  would  do  each  other  all  the  injury 
necessary  without  his  help,  so  he  let  them  alone.” 

“ Did  they  not  have  any  sickness  then  ? Did  not 
people  suffer  and  die?”  asked  a young  man. 

“ Some  of  them  did,”  was  the  reply,  “ but  not  as 
many  as  now.  The  devil  can  work  far  more  evil 
than  we  can.” 

“ Do  you  mean,”  asked  one,  “ that  we  are  to  stone 
each  other  to  death  to  save  the  devil  the  trouble  of 
killing  us?” 

“ Do  you  believe  that  any  of  us  will  never  die?” 
was  the  answer. 


STONING  THE  DEVIL. 


137 


“ Do  you  mean  that  the  devil  will  let  us  alone  if 
we  hurt  each  other  enough  ?”  asked  another. 

“ Certainly,”  replied  Uncle  Kim.  “ That  is  the 
way  the  fathers  did;  and  if  we  would  live  as  hap- 
pily and  as  long  as  they,  we  must  do  as  the  fathers 
did.” 

“ That  may  be  all  right,”  spoke  a young  man, 
“ but  I don’t  see  why  we  should  do  the  bad  work 
of  evil  spirits.  It  is  enough  that  we  sulfer  from 
them,  and  not  do  their  work  too,  and  that  upon  our 
own  friends  and  relatives.” 

“ It  is  not  in  that  way  that  we  are  to  look  at  it,” 
said  an  older  man.  “ As  I understand  Uncle  Kim, 
we  must,  by  doing  some  of  the  devil’s  work,  keep 
him  from  doing  any  of  it,  and  so  escape  a great 
deal  of  trouble. — Is  it  not  so,  venerable  uncle?” 

“Right!  right!”  replied  the  old  man.  “Besides, 
it  is  better  to  receive  wounds  at  the  hand  of  a friend 
than  of  an  enemy.” 

“ Uncle  Kim  is  right,”  said  a man  who  had  until 
now  been  silent.  “ When  we  take  the  matter  into 
our  own  hands  we  control  it.” 

“Why  need  we  hit  each  other  at  all?”  inquired 
a man.  “ We  may  stand  far  off  and  throw  stones 
without  hurting  any  one.” 

“ Yes,”  said  another,  “ and  we  need  not  throw 
heavy  stones  nor  take  good  aim,  either.” 

“You  are  young  and  I am  old,”  spoke  Uncle 
Kim.  “ Take  the  advice  of  an  old  man : Not 
stones,  nor  throwing  them,  will  satisfy  the  devil, 


338 


CHOH  LIN. 


but  the  pain  we  suffer,  the  wounds  we  receive,  the 
blood  spilled, — only  these  satisfy  the  evil  ones.” 

Some  of  the  Tay  Soa  boys,  Chi  Lap  among  them, 
heard  this  consultation,  for  it  took  place  before  he 
went  to  Amoy;  and  the  boys  held  a council  too. 
They,  however,  waited  and  listened  quietly  until  the 
men  had  decided  on  the  time  and  place  when  they 
would  “ stone  the  devil,”  as  it  was  called.  When 
all  arrangements  had  been  made  by  the  men  the 
boys  made  their  plans.  They  agreed  to  follow  the 
men  and  wait  until  the  battle  was  fairly  begun,  then 
take  part  in  it.  Some  knew  of  certain  men  whom 
they  would  try  to  hit  if  a good  chance  offered. 

When  both  consultations  were  over  Chi  Lap  hur- 
ried home  and  told  his  younger  brother  of  the  pro- 
posed fight,  and  urged  him  to  go  along  to  see  men 
stone  the  devil. 

“ Stone  the  devil?”  repeated  Choh  Lin  ; “ how  can 
they  see  him  to  hit  him?” 

“ Oh,  they  don’t  hit  him,  but  they  throw  stones 
at  each  other  to  save  him  the  trouble.  I think  that 
each  one  supposes  the  other  is  the  devil,  and  so  tries 
to  hit  him.” 

Chi  Lap  told  what  he  had  heard,  and  of  course 
his  little  brother  was  eager  to  go  along.  When  the 
time  came  for  the  stoning  the  grandmother,  seeing 
the  two  boys  start  away,  called  them,  “Where  are 
you  going  ?” 

“ Going  to  see  the  men  stone  the  devil,”  was  the 
reply. 


STONING  THE  DEVIL. 


139 


“ ‘ Stone  the  devil  ’ !”  said  the  old  lady.  “ Do 
they  mean  to  do  that  here?  Then  there  is  safety. 
If  the  people  are  coining  back  to  the  old  customs, 
the  favor  of  the  gods  will  come  back  to  us.  But 
do  you  boys  mean  to  throw  stones  with  the  rest? 
You  must  not,”  said  she,  changing  her  voice  to  one 
of  command  ; “you  will  be  hurt,  perhaps  killed.” 

“ Well,  if  we  are  killed,”  said  Chi  Lap,  half  in 
sport,  “ it  will  save  the  lives  of  others.  It  it  be 
good  to  throw  stones  and  hurt  people,  then  it  must 
be  good  for  us  to  do  it,  and  good  for  us  to  be  hurt.” 

“ No,  no ! Let  others  suffer,  but  not  yourselves.” 
Not  until  the  boys  had  promised  to  keep  entirely 
out  of  the  way  of  the  stones  would  she  allow  them 
to  go. 

The  men  had  gathered  when  the  boys  reached 
the  place,  and  were  dividing  into  two  parties.  It 
was  a large  level  spot  of  ground  where  they  had 
met,  and  stones  were  plenty.  After  dividing,  the 
two  parties  separated  about  a stone’s  throw ; when 
all  were  ready  one  side  began  throwing  stones  at 
the  other ; these  were  speedily  flung  back.  At  first 
each  side  seemed  careful  not  to  hit  any  in  the  other 
party,  but  some  were  hit ; this  made  them  a little 
angry,  and  those  struck  became  willing  to  let  the 
other  side  suffer.  Stones  were  thrown  with  more 
violence  and  better  aim.  The  parties  grew  excited 
and  the  battle  became  a real  one.  Many  bruises 
were  given  and  received,  blood  flowed,  and  some 
were  forced  to  leave  the  field,  yet  the  battle  kept 


140 


CHOH  LIN. 


on.  Instead  of  stoning  the  devil,  the  men  stoned 
each  other,  and  in  earnest  too.  The  fight  did  not 
last  long.  Three  lay  on  the  field  helpless  and  seem- 
ingly lifeless.  When  their  friends  noticed  their 
condition  they  called  to  the  others  to  stop,  but  they 
did  not,  and  more  cuts  and  wounds  were  given. 

At  length  the  battle  ceased.  Four  now  lay  on 
the  field  as  if  dead.  Around  them  friends  gathered 
and  spoke,  but  received  no  answer  except  a groan 
from  one  of  them.  The  other  three  were  senseless, 
and  one  of  them  lifeless.  The  dead  and  the  wound- 
ed were  carried  from  the  field  to  the  village  amid 
great  lamentations.  The  grief,  no  doubt,  was  sin- 
cere, but  all  felt  grateful  that  some  had  been  hurt, 
and  each  was  thankful  that  the  wounded  did  not 
include  himself.  One  of  the  three  borne  from  the 
field  alive  died  before  morning,  and  a few  days  after 
a third  one  gave  up  his  life,  while  the  fourth  slow- 
ly recovered.  Others  who  had  been  wounded  car- 
ried the  marks  for  many  days ; some  never  lost  the 
scars. 

The  stoning  was  a subject  for  talk  among  the 
boys  for  many  a day.  Some  thought  it  noble, 
while  others  regarded  it  as  great  fun,  but  a few 
thought  it  a terrible  thing  and  very  cruel.  The 
tender  heart  of  Choh  Lin  was  greatly  affected  by  it. 
AVhen  he  talked  to  his  grandmother  he  spoke  of  it 
sometimes  with  tears.  “ Why  is  it,  grandmother,” 
said  he,  “ that  people  must  hurt  each  other  in  this 
way  to  please  the  evil  spirits?  Why  do  not  the 


STONING  THE  DEVIL. 


141 


gods  keep  the  evil  spirits  away?  Why  do  not  they 
take  care  of  the  people  instead  of  allowing  them  to 
fight  each  other  ?” 

“ There  are  two  kinds  of  spirits,”  said  the  grand- 
mother— “the  evil  and  the  good.  The  gods  and 
the  good  spirits  on  one  side  are  fighting  against  the 
devil  and  the  evil  spirits  on  the  other.  If  the  gods 
and  the  good  spirits  should  always  have  their  way, 
the  evil  ones  would  mass  together  and  produce  some 
dreadful  calamity.  The  way  to  keep  the  evil  ones 
from  this  is  to  pretend  that  we  are  their  friends  and 
do  the  work  that  they  like  to  see.” 

“ But,  grandmother,”  said  the  child,  “by  doing 
this  work  the  people  are  forgetting  the  gods  and 
serving  their  enemy.” 

“ My  son,”  said  the  old  lady,  “ we  can  sometimes 
best  serve  our  friends  by  seeming  to  be  their  en- 
emies.” 

“ Do  you  mean  that  by  stoning  each  other  we  are 
doing  each  other  service?” 

“Yes,”  replied  she;  “by  hurting  some  we  save 
many  from  being  hurt  much  more  by  the  evil  one. 
All  he  wants  is  to  see  us  in  trouble,  to  see  us  suffer; 
and  if  he  sees  us  injuring  each  other,  he  sits  down 
and  rests.” 

Chi  Lap  had  his  own  views  of  doing  the  work 
of  the  devil.  “That  may  do  for  his  children,”  said 
he,  “but  not  for  the  children  of  men.  If  the  evil 
one  wishes  to  see  us  injured,  let  him  do  it  himself, 
and  not  set  us  at  it,  and  then  give  us  no  pay  except 


142 


CHOH  LIN. 


wounds,  bruises  and  death.  Let  those  who  will,  do 
the  work  of  the  devil ; I will  not.” 

With  great  show  of  sorrow  the  dead  were  buried. 
The  people  felt  that  they  must  make  all  the  greater 
mourning  to  let  the  evil  ones  see  how  much  they 
suffered.  There  were  others  besides  Chi  Lap  who 
regarded  this  whole  proceeding  as  foolish,  but  the 
great  majority  looked  upon  it  as  a noble  act,  while 
a few  of  the  aged  rejoiced  to  see  a revival  of  one 
of  the  old  customs  of  their  country. 

There  may  be  a gradual  change  of  customs 
throughout  China,  but  it  is  very  slow,  and  in  many 
places  the  customs  of  thousands  of  years  ago  are 
yet  followed  by  the  people.  It  is  only  in  and  near 
the  seaports,  where  the  people  have  mingled  with 
other  nations,  that  there  has  been  much  change  of 
customs.  Whether  this  strange  and  foolish  super- 
stition of  stoning  the  devil  was  ever  common 
throughout  China  the  author  does  not  know,  but 
it  certainly  was  very  strong  many  years  ago  in  the 
country  around  Tay  Soa,  and  of  late  years  it  has 
been  revived.  One  of  these  attempts  at  doing  the 
woi’k  of  the  devil  the  writer  saw  on  the  plain  north 
of  Tay  Soa  some  years  ago. 


CHAPTER  XVI 


REBELLION  AT  AMOY. 

WE  go  back  in  our  story  two  years  and  take  the 
reader  to  the  city  of  Amoy,  about  twelve  or 
thirteen  miles  from  Tay  Soa. 

Amoy  is  built  on  the  landward  side  of  the  island 
bearing  the  same  name.  The  people  call  the  island 
and  city  A Mung  in  the  spoken  language,  though 
some  Chinese  speak  the  name  very  much  as  we  do, 
and  thus  foreigners  have  got  the  name  Amoy.  In 
the  written  language,  which  is  the  same  all  over 
China,  the  name  is  “ Ha  Bun,”  though  the  meaning 
is  the  same  as  Amoy — “ mansion-door that  is, 
Amoy  is  the  mansion-door  of  China,  or  its  principal 
opening.  Until  lately  it  was  the  chief  naval  station 
of  the  empire. 

Amoy  City  contains  about  two  hundred  and  fifty 
thousand  inhabitants,  yet  so  compactly  built  is  the 
town  and  so  narrow  are  the  streets  that  the  whole 
city  does  not  cover  much  more  than  a square  mile 
of  ground.  It  is  a walled  town,  but  the  larger  part 
of  it  lies  outside  the  walls.  Every  old  Chinese  city 
has  high  walls  surrounding  what  was  the  city  in 
former  years.  But  as  towns  grow  and  walls  do 

143 


144 


CHOH  LIN. 


not,  many  of  the  cities  have  by  far  the  larger  part 
of  their  inhabitants  outside  the  walls.  Within  the 
walls  the  mandarins,  or  officers,  live,  and  there  the 
soldiers  are  usually  stationed. 

Besides  the  walls,  Amoy  has  gates  at  the  ends  of 
its  streets,  which  are  shut  at  night  and  opened  at 
daylight,  so  that  none  can  enter  the  city  or  go  out 
after  dark. 

In  the  spring  of  1853  rumors  reached  Amoy  of 
the  approach  of  a rebel  army  whose  purpose  was  to 
capture  the  city.  It  was  during  the  great  Tai-Ping 
rebellion,  which  came  so  near  destroying  the  present 
Chinese  government.  Armies  of  rebels  were  moving 
in  different  directions,  capturing  the  cities  that  lay 
in  their  way.  Word  reached  Amoy  that  one  of 
these  armies  was  coming  to  the  coast.  There  was 
great  excitement  in  the  city,  and  it  was  feared  that 
there  would  be  terrible  fighting,  as  there  was  an  im- 
perial army  in  the  town  and  a number  of  war-ves- 
sels lay  in  the  harbor.  The  people  professed  to  be 
loyal  to  the  government,  but  many  at  heart  were 
friends  of  the  rebellion. 

Not  long  after  the  report  of  the  approach  of  the 
rebels  their  army  appeared.  The  mandarins  boasted 
of  what  they  would  do  to  the  “ long  red-haired  rob- 
bers,” as  they  called  the  rebels,  and  some  believed 
that  the  government  soldiers  would  be  able  to  keep 
the  invaders  out  of  the  city. 

Late  in  the  afternoon  the  rebels  came  in  sight  of 
the  city.  Nothing  was  done  to  prevent  their  enter- 


REBELLION  AT  AMOY. 


145 


ing  the  harbor  from  the  river  on  the  west.  The 
soldiers  of  the  government  remained  in  the  walled 
part  of  the  town,  and  the  mandarin  fleet  lay  at  an- 
chor north  of  the  city.  The  gates  of  the  city-walls 
were  closed,  however,  and  all  the  gates  of  the  streets 
shut. 

Early  the  next  morning  the  rebels  were  found  on 
the  island  of  Amoy.  They  had  landed  not  far  from 
the  government  fleet.  Not  a war-vessel  had  opposed 
their  landing,  not  a shot  had  been  fired.  Not  only 
were  the  rebels  on  the  island  ; they  were  in  front  of 
the  city,  and  ready  with  the  light  of  day  to  make 
an  attack  on  the  gates  of  the  streets.  But  they 
found  no  need  of  that.  All  the  street-gates  stood 
open  before  them.  Early  in  the  morning  the  rebel 
army  entered  the  city,  and  without  bloodshed  took 
possession  of  the  unwalled  part  of  the  town.  The 
people  quietly  received  their  new  masters.  The 
walled  part  of  the  city  was  still  closed  to  the  invad- 
ing army.  The  four  gates  were  kept  securely  fast- 
ened and  strongly  guarded.  After  taking  full  pos- 
session of  the  rest  of  the  town,  the  rebels  marched 
to  the  walled  part  and  began  an  assault  on  three  of 
the  four  gates.  The  fourth  they  neglected  as  though 
it  did  not  exist.  Not  a rebel  soldier  was  seen  near 
it.  After  a short  assault  the  three  gates  gave  way 
and  the  attacking  army  entered.  Not  an  imperial 
soldier  was  to  be  seen  inside.  The  fourth  gate  stood 
wide  open,  and  through  it  might  be  seen  the  rear  of 
the  government  army  hastening  to  the  war-vessels 
10 


146 


CHOH  LIN. 


in  the  harbor.  Every  soldier  and  every  mandarin 
had  escaped,  and  all  were  soon  on  board  the  govern- 
ment vessels,  which  weighed  anchor,  hoisted  sail 
and  moved  away,  leaving  the  city  entirely  in  the 
hands  of  the  rebels.  Not  a man  was  killed  and 
only  one  or  two  wounded  in  the  taking  of  the  city. 
The  rebels  were  delighted,  most  of  the  people  satis- 
fied and  the  imperial  army  not  greatly  troubled. 

Why  the  mandarins  so  readily  gave  up  the  city  is 
uncertain.  Perhaps  they  had  heard  so  much  of 
rebel  victories  that  they  dared  not  meet  them ; and 
it  is  possible  that  some  of  the  officials  of  the  gov- 
ernment made  enough  money  by  delivering  up  the 
city  to  the  rebels  to  make  defeat  easy  to  bear.  Bat- 
tles more  bloodless  and  more  successful  can  be  fought 
in  China  by  silver  than  by  the  sword. 

It  is  not  rare  for  attacking  armies  in  China  to 
neglect  one  gate  of  a walled  town.  The  reason 
given  for  this  is  that  a rat,  when  he  finds  a hole  for 
escape,  will  run  away,  but  when  all  ways  of  escape 
are  cut  off  he  will  fight. 

Not  long  did  the  rebels  peaceably  hold  possession 
of  Amoy.  When  the  news  reached  Pekin  the  man- 
darins were  ordered  to  retake  the  city  at  offce. 

Two  weeks  after  the  government  fleet  sailed 
northward  from  Amoy,  there  came  a fleet  of  im- 
perial war-vessels  into  the  same  harbor  from  the 
south.  The  mandarins  tried  to  enter  the  harbor 
and  take  the  city  by  surprise,  but  the  rebels  knew 
of  their  coming  and  knew  their  plans.  Instead  of 


REBELLION  AT  AMOY. 


147 


coming  in  front  of  the  city,  the  vessels  anchored 
some  distance  away,  and  at  once  the  soldiers  landed 
and  marched  to  assault  the  place  on  the  side  away 
from  the  water.  As  they  advanced,  sure  of  victory, 
they  were  suddenly  and  furiously  attacked  by  rebel 
soldiers  hidden  in  the  valley  south  of  the  city. 
Partly  recovering  from  the  surprise,  the  mandarins 
tried  to  urge  on  their  soldiers  to  battle.  Many  did 
stand,  but  they  were  too  much  frightened  to  fight 
with  any  hope  of  success,  and  soon  the  battle  became 
a rout.  The  government  soldiers  fled,  some  toward 
the  city,  others  to  the  vessels.  Those  who  reached 
the  war-vessels  went  away  with  them  as  soon  as 
possible;  those  who  found  no  hiding-place  in  the 
city  were  caught  and  held  as  prisoners,  if  not  killed. 

Tli is  was  a very  different  battle  from  that  by 
which  the  rebels  took  the  city,  as  the  many  wound- 
ed and  dead  proved.  Not  content  with  driving  off 
the  mandarin  army,  the  rebels  determined  to  capture 
every  soldier  hiding  in  the  town.  Little  bands  of 
victors  after  the  fight  marched  through  the  streets 
searching  for  fugitives ; whenever  one  was  found  he 
was  hurried  off  to  the  walled  part  of  the  town,  there 
to  be  held  for  a ransom  if  unwilling  to  turn  rebel, 
or  put  where  he  would  never  fight  rebels  any  more. 

All  the  afternoon  of  this  day  the  rebel  soldiers 
were  searching  houses  or  marching:  through  the 
streets  with  their  prisoners.  The  excitement  was 
great.  The  shouts  of  the  victorious  soldiers,  the 
screams  of  terrified  women  and  the  cries  of  fright- 

O 


148 


CHOH  LIN. 


ened  children  made  the  people  almost  wild  with 
terror. 

This  day,  as  well  as  that  on  which  the  rebels  cap- 
tured the  city,  was  the  Sabbath — a day  like  others  to 
nearly  all  the  people  in  Amoy,  but  there  were  a few 
to  whom  it  was  a sacred  day.  About  ten  years  be- 
fore, missionaries  from  America,  and  later  from  Eng- 
land, had  come  to  Amoy  to  preach  the  gospel,  and 
at  this  time  there  were  quite  a number  of  Christians 
in  the  young  churches  established  in  the  city.  These, 
after  morning  worship,  were  startled  by  the  firing 
and  the  noise  of  battle,  and  later  heard  the  shouts 
of  the  victorious  rebels  as  they  pursued  the  fugitive 
soldiers.  An  officer  of  the  defeated  army,  Sok  Tai 
by  name,  came  to  the  door  of  the  house  of  the  Rev. 
John  Stronach,  an  English  missionary,  and  begged 
to  be  saved  from  the  vengeance  of  the  rebels.  Sok 
Tai,  though  an  officer  in  the  army,  was  a Christian 
and  well  known  to  Mr.  Stronach.  The  good  mis- 
sionary at  once  took  the  man  into  his  house  and 
promised  to  protect  him.  Soon  after  the  rebel  sol- 
diers appeared  at  the  door  and  asked  for  the  officer 
hidden  there.  The  missionary  told  the  soldiers  that 
they  had  no  right  to  enter  his  house,  and  that  he 
would  not  give  up  to  them  any  good  man  who  asked 
for  protection.  In  vain  the  soldiers  pleaded  and 
threatened  ; the  fugitive  was  not  given  to  them. 
Mr.  Stronach  was  so  well  known  in  the  city  as  a 
good  and  brave  man  that  the  rebels  dared  not  at- 
tempt  to  take  the  hiding  soldier  from  his  house. 


REBELLION  AT  AMOY. 


149 


They  feared  not  merely  the  missionary,  but  the 
English  nation.  Wishing  to  keep  the  friendship 
of  foreigners,  the  soldiers  left  the  fugitive  in  Mr. 
Stronach’s  charge  for  the  time.  Afterward  the 
rebel  officers  demanded  Sok  Tai  from  the  mission- 
ary, but  the  demand  was  met  with  a polite  though 
firm  refusal,  nor  could  anything  that  was  said  or 
done  compel  the  brave  missionary  to  give  up  to 
death  a man  who  had  been  doing  his  duty  in  fight- 
ing against  the  enemies  of  his  country.  Not  long 
after,  Mr.  Stronach  sent  his  charge  by  a foreign  ves- 
sel to  Shanghai,  where  he  remained  until  the  rebels 
left  the  city,  when  he  returned,  gave  up  his  position 
in  the  array  and  became  a preacher  of  the  gospel. 
He  was  until  lately,  and  may  yet  be,  a preacher  in 
one  of  the  churches  of  Amoy,  where  he  has  done 
faithful  service  in  trying  to  bring  the  same  city  to 
his  imperial  Master,  Jesus. 

Arrangements  had  been  made  for  a baptismal 
service  that  afternoon  in  the  first  Christian  church 
of  Amoy.  The  Christians  from  all  parts  of  the 
city  had  been  invited  to  be  present  to  unite  in  the 
service  connected  with  the  baptism.  When  news 
of  the  battle  reached  the  missionaries,  and  they  saw 
the  excitement  in  the  city,  they  feared  that  it  would 
be  impossible  to  hold  the  service.  People  were 
hiding  everywhere,  while  excited  men  were  rushing 
through  the  streets.  Soon  after  came  the  shouts  of 
the  victors  as  they  chased  fugitives  through  the 
streets  or  led  captives  to  the  walled  part  of  the  town. 


150 


CHOU  LIN. 


This  seemed  anything  but  the  time  for  a religious 
meeting,  yet  the  missionaries,  thinking  that  a few 
Christians  might  gather,  went  to  the  church  intend- 
ing to  hold  a prayer-meeting  with  those  who  might 
attend.  When  they  reached  the  place  they  found  a 
number  of  people  waiting  for  them,  and  among 
them  the  converts  who  were  expecting  to  be  bap- 
tized. The  excitement  of  battle  could  not  keep 
them  away  from  the  house  of  God  at  such  a time  as 
this.  Water  was  brought,  and  amid  the  shouts  and 
uproar  of  the  streets  these  who  a short  time  before 
had  been  heathen  were  consecrated  to  God  and  his 
Church  by  baptism.  It  was  a sacred,  a precious  ser- 
vice, though  they  did  not  know  but  that  it  would 
be  their  last  together  on  earth.  As  the  frightened 
sheep  draw  nearer  together  and  gather  closer  about 
the  shepherd  when  they  hear  the  howl  of  the  wolf, 
so  did  these  followers  of  Jesus  draw  nearer  together 
and  closer  to  the  Great  Shepherd  as  they  heard  the 
wild  screams  without. 

After  this  battle  the  imperial  soldiers,  learning  a 
lesson  from  their  defeat,  prepared  more  deliberately 
to  capture  the  city.  For  four  and  a half  months 
they  were  gathering  soldiers  and  making  elaborate 
preparations  for  another  attack.  The  people  of 
Amoy  knew  that  when  it  came  the  capture  of  the 
city  would  not  be  a bloodless  one.  There  were 
gloomy  forebodings.  Many  consultations  did  the 
Christians  hold  and  many  were  the  prayers  offered 
at  the  mercy-seat. 


REBELLION  AT  AMOY. 


151 


It  needed  all  the  shrewdness  of  a Chinaman’s 
nature  to  pray  just  right — not  so  much  as  it  regarded 
God,  but  as  it  regarded  man.  The  sympathy  of  the 
people  was  largely  with  the  rebels,  while  the  rebels 
were  warm  friends  of  foreigners  and  of  the  mission- 
aries, and  seemed  to  be  very  favorable  to  Christian- 
ity. To  pray  against  such  an  army  was  a difficult 
thing  for  the  Chinese  Christians.  The  mandarins 
were  opposed  to  foreigners,  to  missionaries  and  their 
religion,  so  that  to  pray  for  the  national  government 
was  a severe  tax  for  the  faith  of  the  converts.  But 
as  the  missionaries  had  taught  them  to  respect  and 
pray  for  their  rulers,  the  people  did  not  know  what 
else  to  do.  The  missionaries  wisely  said  as  little  as 
possible  about  the  rebellion.  Quietly  attending  to 
their  duties,  they  left  the  affairs  of  the  nation  in  the 
hands  of  others,  looking  to  God  to  overrule  all  for 
the  good  of  the  people  and  the  furtherance  of  his 
cause. 

At  last  the  imperial  fleet  sailed  into  the  harbor 
from  the  south  and,  passing  around  Ko-long-su,  a 
small  island  in  the  harbor  and  half  a mile  west  of 
the  city,  anchored  at  the  mouth  of  a creek  north  of 
the  town.  An  army  landed  and  encamped  near  the 
walls  of  Amoy.  The  rebel  fleet  was  anchored  in 
front  of  the  city  and  not  far  from  the  anchoring- 
place  of  the  mandarin  vessels.  After  the  army  had 
landed  the  imperial  fleet  hoisted  anchor,  and,  sailing 
down  toward  the  rebel  vessels,  discharged  a broad- 
side at  them ; then,  sailing  off  to  the  westward, 


152 


CIIOII  LIN. 


it  came  back  to  its  anchorage  again.  As  soon  as 
wind  and  tide  permitted  the  rebel  fleet  hoisted  an- 
chor, and,  sailing  toward  the  enemy’s  fleet,  fired  a 
broadside  and  came  back  to  its  anchoring-ground. 
Day  after  day,  if  wind  allowed,  was  this  saluting, 
for  it  proved  little  more,  kept  up.  Now  and  then 
a ball  struck  a vessel,  more  by  accident  than  because 
of  correct  aim,  and  usually  the  result  of  each  broad- 
side was  a bloodless  victory,  though  to  which  side 
it  would  have  been  hard  to  tell.  The  rebels,  not 
having  enough  men  to  garrison  the  city  and  at  the 
same  time  keep  up  the  battles  on  the  water,  were 
forced  to  gather  on  board  their  junks  when  the  tide 
and  wind  suited,  and  after  the  brief  fight  hurry 
ashore  to  be  ready  to  repel  any  attack  that  might 
be  made  on  land. 

The  real  fighting,  though,  was  done  from  the 
walls  of  the  city  and  the  decks  of  the  vessels  when 
the  guns  were  silent.  This  was  done  not  with  can- 
non or  musket,  nor  yet  with  arrow  nor  dart,  but 
with  the  weapon  that  of  all  kinds  the  Chinese  sol- 
diers know  so  well  how  to  handle — the  tongue. 
With  their  tongues  sailors  and  soldiers  kept  up, 
when  near  enough  to  be  heard,  an  almost  ceaseless 
fire.  Every  kind  of  evil  name  of  which  they  could 
think — and  Chinese  can  think  of  a great  many — - 
they  called  the  opposing  forces.  Had  it  been  possi- 
ble for  hard  names  to  kill  or  even  wound,  then 
there  would  soon  not  have  been  a soldier  to  handle  a 
gun  nor  a sailor  to  hoist  an  anchor  either  in  defence 


REBELLION  AT  AMOY. 


153 


of  or  for  the  capture  of  the  city.  No  name  seemed 
so  well  suited  to  the  rebels,  in  the  opinion  of  the 
mandarins,  as  “ Ang-thau  Chhat”  (“red-headed 
robbers”),  while  the  rebels  all  agreed  in  calling  the 
other  side  “ Kwoan  Chhat”  (“mandarin  robbers”). 

Their  guns  not  being  of  the  best  nor  their  courage 
the  greatest,  this  method  of  warfare  suited  both  sides, 
and  for  six  weeks  it  was  continued  on  the  water, 
while  the  mode  of  fighting  on  land  was  not  very 
different.  The  imperial  soldiers  would  come  near 
enough  to  the  city  to  allow  their  musket-balls  to  fall 
short  of  the  walls,  and  the  rebels  on  the  fortifications 
fired  back  with  the  same  bloodless  effect. 

One  morning  very  early  there  was  a great  com- 
motion within  the  walls  as  the  rebel  soldiers  marched 
out  and  through  the  city  and  down  to  their  vessels. 
They  embarked  in.  sight  of  the  imperial  fleet,  hoist- 
ed anchor  and  hurriedly  sailed  away,  leaving  behind 
some  of  their  number  who  had  for  different  reasons 
been  delayed.  The  government  vessels  remained  at 
anchor  and  did  nothing  whatever  to  hinder  the  es- 
cape of  the  rebels.  As  soon  as  they  left  the  city  the 
mandarin  army  marched  in  and  took  possession. 

Now  began  a massacre.  The  capturing  forces  at- 
tacked the  few  rebels  they  found  and  cruelly  butch- 
ered them.  Every  one  else  who  seemed  to  offer 
resistance  was  at  once  killed,  while  many  a one, 
neither  soldier  nor  rebel,  was  without  any  reason 
murdered.  It  was  necessary  for  the  credit  of  the 
victors  to  report  to  Pekin  that  after  a long  siege  the 


154 


CHOH  LIN. 


city  of  Amoy  had  been  taken,  but  only  taken  after 
a terrible  battle  in  which  a great  number  of  the 
enemy  were  killed.  The  greater  the  number  of 
slain  the  more  would  seem  the  courage  of  the  con- 
querors. The  rebels  were  cruel,  but  the  mandarin 
soldiers  were  far  more  so.  It  is  not  the  truly  brave, 
but  the  cowards,  who  are  cruel. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


MRS.  LEE  FINDS  THE  LIFE-GIVING  GOD. 

THE  news  of  the  capture  of  Amoy  by  the  rebels 
reached  Tay  Soa  the  same  day.  The  Tay  Soa 
passenger-boats  hurried  away  from  the  city  as  soon 
as  they  could,  and  reported  that  an  immense  num- 
ber of  rebels  had  captured  Amoy  and  driven  away 
the  government  soldiers.  Proof  of  this  soon  fol- 
lowed, as  the  government  fleet  was  before  long  seen 
to  sail  around  to  the  north  of  Amoy  Island. 

Some  were  well  pleased  to  know  that  the  rebels 
had  come  so  near  and  had  so  easily  driven  out  the 
hated  mandarins,  while  a few  were  troubled.  They 
did  not  wish  to  see  the  government  overthrown,  and 
asked  only  for  peace.  They  had  seen  enough  of 
the  clan-wars,  or  battles  between  the  people  of  dif- 
ferent families  and  villages,  and  thought  that  if 
such  small  wars  proved  so  destructive  to  property, 
a war  between  the  whole  government  and  a large 
army  of  rebels  would  be  worse.  But  a great  many 
did  not  care.  They  had  little  to  lose,  and  war 
might  give  them  a chance  to  gain  something. 

Chinese  know  very  little  about  true  patriotism  or 
love  of  country.  While  they  believe  theirs  to  be 

155 


] 56 


CHOH  LIN. 


the  best  country  of  the  world,  they  do  not  deem  the 
mandarins  the  best  rulers.  They  know  that  many 
are  dishonest,  cruel  and  care  little  for  the  country 
or  the  people  if  themselves  may  but  gain  plenty 
of  money.  While  there  are  officers  in  China,  and 
probably  many,  who  are  true  patriots,  most  of  the 
people,  at  least  of  the  lower  and  middle  classes,  be- 
lieve that  their  rulers  love  money  more  than  any- 
thing else ; nor  are  they  far  wrong.  Why  should 
they  think  otherwise?  The  people  themselves  love 
money  even  more  than  Americans  do — can  more  be 
said? — and  they  judge  their  rulers  by  themselves. 

The  capture  of  Amoy  gave  the  people  of  Tay 
Soa  much  to  talk  about  and  the  timid  ones  many 
an  anxious  thought ; but  when  the  boats  went  safe- 
ly to  and  from  Amoy  after  the  rebels  had  posses- 
sion, their  fears  slowly  passed  away.  After  the  de- 
feat of  the  government  soldiers  in  the  battle  of 
A-Mung-Kong  those  who  were  friendly  to  the 
rebels  were  not  slow  to  speak.  They  prophesied 
that  soon  the  government  of  the  whole  country 
would  change  hands  and  that  the  rebel  leader  would 
become  emperor.  It  was  said  that  the  rebels  were 
enemies  of  the  gods,  and  that  they  worshiped  a for- 
eign god,  and  if  successful  would  force  all  the  Chi- 
nese to  give  up  the  worship  of  their  gods. 

“ If  they  are  enemies  of  the  gods,”  said  Choh 
Lin’s  grandmother,  “ then  the  mandarins  will  de- 
stroy the  long-haired*  robbers.  Any  people  who 

* When  China  was  conquered  by  the  Mantchu  Tartars,  about 


FINDING  THE  LIFE-GIVING  GOD. 


157 


fight  the  gods  fight  against  themselves,  and  should 
be  overthrown.” 

“They  may  be  overthrown,”  spoke  Chi  Lap  (this 
was  before  he  had  gone  to  Amoy),  “ but  it  will  be 
because  they  have  not  enough  soldiers,  rather  than 
because  they  have  not  enough  gods  to  help  them. 
Gods  that  cannot  take  care  of  people  when  there  is 
peace  will  not  be  likely  to  do  so  when  there  is  war.” 

“ You  are  a bad  boy,”  replied  the  old  lady 
angrily ; “ I only  wonder  that  the  gods  let  you  live 
at  all.  I hope  that  they  will  teach  you  to  speak 
better  of  them,  and  that — that — that  they  will  over- 
throw the  rebels  and  let  you,  and  such  as  you,  see 
that  the  gods  are  mighty.” 

When  the  news  of  the  retreat  of  the  rebels  reached 
Tay  Soa  the  old  lady  was  happy.  She  said  that  the 
gods  had  at  last  shown  whom  they  would  help.  Chi 
Lap  had  little  to  say,  though  he  did  not  believe  that 
the  gods  of  China  had  much  to  do  with  the  failure 
of  the  rebels.  He  only  wondered  why  they,  who 
had  so  successfully  held  the  city,  did  not  fight  a 
battle  before  giving  it  up. 

It  was  some  time  after  the  mandarins  had  recap- 
tured Amoy  that  Chi  Lap  went  to  the  city  to  be- 
come a peddler.  Perhaps  the  removal  of  her  son 

two  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago,  the  people  were  ordered  to 
shave  their  heads,  and  only  allow  the  hair  on  the  crown  to  grow 
long  and  be  braided  in  a queue  as  now.  The  Tai-Ping  rebels 
did  not  shave  their  heads,  but  allowed  the  hair  to  grow  long  • 
hence  they  were  often  spoken  of  as  “the  long-haired  rebels” 
and  “ long-haired  robbers.” 


158 


CHOU  LIN. 


gave  Mrs.  Lee  a new  idea.  In  Tay  Soa  and  the 
villages  near  considerable  cotton  cloth,  or  muslin 
— more  than  was  used  by  the  people — was  woven, 
and  some  of  it  was  sold  elsewhere.  Mrs.  Lee  saw 
that  some  was  taken  to  Amoy  for  sale,  and  thought 
that  she  might  try  to  make  a little  money  in  this 
way.  This  seemed  much  easier  than  working  in 
and  around  the  village  wherever  she  could  find  em- 
ployment. 

She  bought  some  cotton  cloth  from  her  friends 
and  started  one  morning  in  a passenger-boat  for 
Amoy.  She  had  been  to  the  city  before,  and  had 
no  difficulty  in  finding  a sale  for  her  goods.  Sell- 
ing for  a fair  profit,  she  determined  to  try  again, 
and  soon  had  quite  a trade.  But  she  bought  more 
than  cloth ; she  also  took  eggs  and  poultry,  as  well 
as  other  things,  for  sale  in  Amoy ; and  after  a while 
one  and  another  of  her  friends  in  Tay  Soa  had  her 
make  purchases  in  the  city  for  them.  As  she  made 
a profit  on  what  she  bought  as  well  as  on  what  she 
sold,  she  could  thus  comfortably  support  herself 
and  her  family. 

Chi  Lap,  being  now  in  the  city,  took  care  of  him- 
self, so  Mrs.  Lee  had  only  four  instead  of  five  to 
support.  Choli  Lin,  however,  was  unable  to  go  to 
school,  much  as  he  wished  to  learn,  because  he  was 
needed  at  home  while  his  mother  was  away,  nor 
were  they  yet  rich  enough  to  get  along  without  his 
help  in  gathering  fuel  and  oysters  and  other  articles 
of  food. 


FINDING  THE  LIFE-GIVING  GOD.  159 


Tay  Soa  was  on  a bay  that  became  bare  at  low 
tide,  so  that  boats  were  compelled  to  go  out  and 
come  in  with  high  water,  and  were  thus  obliged,  as 
tides  came  about  an  hour  later  every  day,  to  start 
sometimes  very  late  in  the  day  and  again  very  early 
in  the  morning.  Nor  could  they  leave  Amoy  un- 
less the  wind  was  favorable  until  the  tide  ran  toward 
Tay  Soa.  Even  if  they  did  go  homeward  before 
the  tide  suited,  they  must  wait  some  distance  from 
home  until  there  was  enough  water  in  Tay  Soa  Bay 
to  sail  up  to  the  landing.  Hence  passengers  were 
often  obliged  to  stay  in  Amoy  several  hours,  and  if 
a very  strong  north-east  wind  blew  they  had  to  stay 
a day  or  more  in  the  city. 

One  day  Mrs.  Lee,  after  having  sold  her  goods, 
while  waiting  for  the  boat  to  start,  took  a walk 
through  the  city.  She  had  heard  that  foreigners 
lived  in  the  city,  and  she  wanted  to  see  one  of  their 
homes.  Having  friends  in  Amoy,  she  persuaded 
one  of  them,  who  lived  not  far  from  the  home  of 
the  American  missionaries,  to  take  her  to  the  place. 
Accompanied  by  a little  girl,  the  two  women  went 
to  the  house  of  the  missionaries.  It  was  a Chinese- 
built  house,  somewhat  changed  and  enlarged.  The 
missionaries  lived  in  the  second  story,  while  on  the 
ground-floor  was  a chapel.  The  chapel-door  stood 
open  as  the  two  approached,  but  no  one  was  in  the 
room.  It  was  full  of  benches,  and  Mrs.  Lee  ex- 
claimed as  they  entered,  “ Oh,  see  how  many  seats 
the  foreigners  have ! How  many  of  them  there 


160 


CHOH  LIN 


must  be ! What  a large  room ! how  high  and 
light ! But  what  is  that  at  the  other  end  ?” 

Her  friend  could  not  give  very  satisfactory  an- 
swers to  her  questions,  but  suggested  that  this  was 
perhaps  a “ worship-hall.” 

“ What !”  spoke  Mrs.  Lee,  “ is  this  where  the  for- 
eigners worship  their  gods?  or  do  they  keep  the 
tablets  of  their  ancestors  here?  I would  like  to 
see  their  gods ; but  where  are  the  foreigners  ?” 

Her  friend  had  heard  of  the  chapel  and  worship, 
but  could  not  say  anything  about  it  from  what  she 
had  seen.  While  they  were  talking  the  Chinese 
chapel-keeper  appeared,  and,  greeting  them  respect- 
fully, asked  what  they  wanted. 

“ Oh,  nothing,”  replied  Mrs.  Lee ; “ we  only  came 
for  amusement.” 

“ This  is  not  a place  for  amusement,”  said  the 
man,  “ but  a place  to  hear  the  doctrine.” 

“Very  well,  then,  we  will  hear  the  doctrine,” 
spoke  Mrs.  Lee,  though  she  did  not  know  what  was 
meant  by  “ the  doctrine.”  Like  all  other  Chinese, 
she  was  anxious  to  see  and  hear  everything. 

The  chapel-keeper  invited  them  to  be  seated,  and 
then  began  to  tell  of  the  doctrines  of  the  Bible.  At 
first  none  of  the  three  were  interested,  but  as  the 
good  man  told  the  story  of  Jesus,  new  to  Mrs.  Lee, 
her  attention  was  drawn,  her  eyes  were  fixed  on  the 
speaker,  and,  almost  breathless,  she  listened  to  catch 
each  word  as  it  fell  from  his  lips.  It  was  a new,  a 
strange  doctrine,  but  it  awoke  in  her  mind  all  those 

O 7 


FINDING  THE  LIFE-GIVING  GOD.  161 


old  longings  for  the  life-giving  God.  She  asked 
few  questions  at  first,  yet  seemed  to  drink  in  every 
word.  She  was  surprised,  astonished,  yet  delighted, 
to  hear  this  doctrine. 

After  a while  the  speaker  stopped,  as  he  said,  “ I 
cannot  make  this  as  plain  as  the  missionary  can.  I 
am  like  one  who  has  been  blind  all  his  life,  and  then 
suddenly  finds  his  eyes  opened  to  the  brightness  of 
noonday.  My  eyes  are  dazzled  with  the  light.  I see, 
I wonder,  I am  delighted,  but  dazzled.  I can  only 
tell  little,  yet  that  little  shows  how  much  light  there 
is.  The  missionary  himself  will  soon  be  down  to 
preach  the  doctrine,  and  he  will  make  it  all  plain 
to  you.  He  was  born  in  the  light  and  has  ever 
lived  in  it,  and  knows  ten  thousand  times  more 
than  I do.  Come  back  again  soon  and  hear  him 
speak.” 

Mrs.  Lee  went  away  determined  to  return  as  soou 
as  the  missionary  came.  Her  heart  was  full.  Her 
friend  did  not  seem  to  care  to  talk  of  the  new  doc- 
trine, but  Mrs.  Lee  could  speak  of  nothing  else.  It 
was  as  if  her  thirsty  soul  had  at  last  found  the  water 
for  which  she  had  longed  so  many  years.  As  she 
thought  of  what  the  chapel-keeper  had  said  the 
feeling  of  gladness  began  to  give  place  to  one  of 
sorrow.  That  story  of  Christ’s  suffering  for  sinners 
• — for  all  the  sinners  of  the  world,  and  for  herself 
as  well  as  others — was  one  that  she  could  not  un- 
derstand. She  did  understand  the  suffering  and  the 
love,  but  how  could  Christ  know  about  her?  If  it 
ll 


162 


CHOH  LIN. 


were  true,  and  this  foreign  God  really  knew  about 
her,  and  then  died  to  save  her,  surely  she  must  be 
a great  sinner;  and  how  much  he  must  love  ! How 
much  he  must  have  loved  mankind  to  die  for  them  ! 
How  different  this  story  from  the  stories  of  their 
gods  of  China ! How  different  this  God  must  be 
from  those  of  her  country!  They  were  only  will- 
ing to  give  favors  after  they  had  been  well  paid  for 
it,  and  too  often  they  took  all  they  could  get  and 
gave  nothing  in  return.  This  God  gave  his  best 
first,  and  to  the  worst  as  well  as  to  the  best  of  man- 
kind, and  then  kept  giving  favors  afterward  to  all, 
only  asking  in  return  that  people  should  love  and 
trust  and  serve  him. 

Before  the  time  for  service  came  Mrs.  Lee  was  at 
the  chapel  waiting.  When  the  missionary  appeared 
she  had  little  thought  about  his  strange  dress  or  his 
appearance,  but  only  of  the  doctrine  she  hoped  to 
hear.  When  the  hymn  was  given  out  she  listened 
intently.  The  missionary  began  by  saying,  “Now, 
great  family,  come  let  us  sing  and  praise  God.” 
When  the  singing  began  Mrs.  Lee  thought  she  had 
never  heard  anything  like  it.  It  certainly  was  very 
different  from  the  chanting  and  singing  of  the  Chi- 
nese  that  she  had  heard.  The  singing,  however, 
was  not  of  the  best.  That  did  not  matter  to  Mrs. 
Lee ; she  was  not  a singer  herself,  yet  that  singing 
pleased  her.  When  she  saw  that  many  others  sang, 
she  wanted  to  join,  but  did  not  dare  let  her  voice 
attempt  it,  though  her  heart  sang  with  the  rest.  She 


FINDING  THE  LIFE-GIVING  GOD.  163 


felt  that  her  heart  could  join  in  the  prayer,  and  she 
did  pray  with  her  whole  soul.  As  the  good  mis- 
sionary thanked  God  for  Ids  mercy  toward  sinners 
in  sending  his  only  Son  to  die  for  them,  she  felt 
that  he  was  uttering  her  own  thanks  ; and  then  as 
he  told  God  of  their  sinfulness  and  begged  for  par- 
don, she  felt  that  the  missionary  was  praying  her 
own  prayer.  Those  strange,  wonderful  words  which 
he  read  from  a book  that  he  called  “God’s  book” 
went  to  her  heart.  Mrs.  Lee’s  interest  did  not 
lessen  with  the  sermon.  It  was  a simple  statement 
of  the  truths  of  the  gospel : it  told  of  man’s  sinful- 
ness, of  the  trouble  and  sorrow  that  sin  caused,  and 
what  ruin  it  would  at  last  bring  to  the  soul ; it  told 
how  the  world  failed  to  find  any  remedy  for  sin, 
and  then  told  of  Jesus  the  great  Saviour  from  sin. 

Doubtless,  God  directed  the  preacher  to  present 
just  that  truth  ; it  certainly  was  what  Mrs.  Lee 
needed  and  what  she  had  longed  for  for  years.  It 
told  her  of  the  life-giving;  God  ; it  taught  her  also 
that  she  needed  another  life — a life  that  this  God 
alone  could  give,  for  sin  was  working  death  in  her. 

At  last  Mrs.  Lee  had  found  the  God  she  had 
sought  so  long,  and  it  was  the  God  of  foreigners ! 
At  once  she  determined  to  make  him  her  own  God. 
It  seemed  now  as  if  she  were  in  a new  world.  The 
darkness  in  which  she  had  been  groping  was  gone ; 
instead  of  being  lost,  and  not  knowing  where  to  go 
or  what  to  do,  she  saw  a plain  path  before  her.  It 
is  true,  she  could  see  only  a little  way  in  that  path, 


164 


CHOH  LTN. 


but  she  could  see  the  path,  and  she  was  sure  it  was 
the  right  one.  Seeing  the  path,  she  had  only  one 
thought — to  enter  it  at  once. 

After  Mrs.  Lee  had  learned  this  much  and  thought 
it  over  she  began  to  understand  how  little  she  did 
know.  One  thing  she  saw — while  it  surprised  her, 
yet  it  gave  her  confidence  in  the  missionary : he 
seemed  to  know  all  there  was  in  her  heart.  She 
was  certain  he  had  not  seen  her  before,  but  that  he 
knew  her  feelings,  and  had  told  them,  was  just  as 
certain  ; so  she  felt  sure  that  he  would  be  able  to  tell 
all  she  needed  to  know.  Afterward,  in  speaking  of 
that  first  sermon  and  the  talk  of  the  chapel-keeper, 
she  said,  “ Among  the  tens  of  thousands  of  people 
whom  I have  met,  I never  before  met  any  that 
knew  what  was  in  me;  but  these  men,”  meaning 
the  chapel-keeper  as  well  as  the  missionary,  “ have 
told  me  what  was  in  my  very  bones.” 

When  the  service  closed  she  was  obliged  to  hasten 
to  the  boat,  but  it  was  with  a determination  to  come 
affain  soon  and  hear  more  of  the  new  good  doctrine. 
Part  of  her  business  in  Amoy  at  this  time  was  to 
buy,  for  others  as  well  as  herself,  incense-sticks, 
idolatrous  paper  and  other  things  used  in  idol-  and 
spirit-worship;  but  after  hearing  the  talk  of  the 
chapel-keeper  and  the  sermon  of  the  missionary  she 
determined  not  to  buy  anything  for  idol-worship 
nor  to  have  anything  whatever  to  do  with  idolatry, 
or  with  the  worship  of  the  spirits  of  the  dead.  On 
the  boat  she  could  hardly  help  telling  the  people 


FINDING  THE  LIFE-GIVING  GOD.  165 

what  she  had  heard,  but  as  it  is  not  considered 
proper  for  a woman  to  speak  much  in  the  presence 
of  men,  she  kept  her  thoughts  to  herself. 

She  was  sure  that  her  children  and  mother-in-law 
would  be  as  glad  to  hear  about  the  new  religion  as 
she  had  been.  She  pictured  to  herself  their  sur- 
prise and  joy  when  they  heard  of  this  God  who  so 
loved  the  world,  and  for  their  own  sakes  too,  and 
not  for  the  good  he  could  get  from  them. 

After  reaching  home  she  first  showed  her  pur- 
chases, thinking  it  would  be  all  the  better  to  wait 
to  tell  about  the  new  God  until  all  were  quiet. 
After  she  had  shown  all  her  purchases  the  mother- 
in-law  asked,  “ Where  are  the  incense-sticks,  paper 
and  other  things  for  offering  to  the  gods  and  to  the 
spirits  of  the  dead?” 

“I  have  brought  none,”  replied  Mrs.  Lee;  “I 
did  not  buy  any.  We  will  no  longer  need  such 
things ; they  will  be  of  no  use  to  us  any  more.” 

“No  use?”  said  the  old  lady  in  amazement; 
“ what  do  you  mean  ?” 

“ I mean,”  answered  Mrs.  Lee,  “ that  we  have 
found  the  true  God  and  will  no  longer  worship 
idols.” 

“‘The  true  God’!”  repeated  the  grandmother ; 
“of  course  ours  are  the  true  gods.  Why,  then,  did 
not  you  bring  the  things  with  which  to  worship 
them  ?” 

“ I did  not  bring  them  because  I have  found  a 
better  way  of  worshiping  the  true  God.  The  gods 


166 


CHOH  LIN. 


of  our  fathers  are  not  the  true  gods,  but  I know 
the  true  God  now.  He  is  the  life-giving  God 
whom  I sought  so  long  in  vain  in  all  the  temples. 
He  is  the  one  we  need.  I am  so  glad  that  we 
know  about  him  now ! Listen  while  I tell  you.” 

Then  she  told  what  she  had  heard,  expecting  to 

find  her  mother-in-law  as  much  interested  as  she  was. 
Choh  Lin  listened  eagerly,  and  his  sister  was  atten- 
tive too,  and  seemed  rather  pleased  than  otherwise ; 
but  the  grandmother,  instead  of  listening  with 
pleasure,  grew  displeased,  and  then  angry,  and  would 
hardly  allow  her  daughter-in-law  to  finish  before  she 
said  angrily,  “ Is  that  the  god  you  have  found  ? It 
is  a foreign  god,  and  you  have  been  telling  one  of 
the  false  stories  of  the  foreigners.  If  they  have 
gods,  we  do  not  want  them.  We  will  not  have 

them.  You  shall  not  worship  them.  You  must 

not  teach  the  children  anything  about  them  or  their 
doctrine.  I will  not  allow  it.”  And  then,  as  if 
fearful  that  she  had  shown  too  much  anger,  for  she 
was  becoming  a little  careful  of  what  she  said  to 
Mrs.  Lee,  she  continued  in  a milder  tone,  “The 
gods  of  the  Middle  Kingdom  are  the  gods  for  us ; 
the  worship  of  the  fathers  should  be  our  worship. 
If  there  are  better  gods  than  our  own,  our  fathers 
would  have  found  it  out  long  ago.  Be  assured  that 
they  found  the  best  there  are,  and  taught  their  chil- 
dren to  worship  them.” 

Mrs.  Lee  was  surprised,  disappointed,  sad,  and 
for  a moment  almost  angry,  and  would  have  given 


FINDING  THE  LIFE-GIVING  GOD.  167 

a sharp  reply  had  not  her  mother-in-law  spoken 
more  mildly  at  the  last.  She  replied  in  a gentle  and 
almost  pleading  voice,  “ But  this  doctrine  went  to 
my  heart  as  a bird  to  its  nest,  and  is  sitting  there. 
It  is  just  what  I have  wanted  to  hear,  but  none  of 
our  priests  or  people  could  tell  me.  I have  longed 
for  this  ever  since  the  cruel  relatives  killed  me  and 
I was  brought  back  to  life  again.  It  is  the  doctrine 
of  the  heart.” 

“ Yes,”  replied  the  other,  angrily,  “ and  your 
longing  brought  on  us  all  the  trouble  we  have  suf- 
fered. It  has  robbed  me  of  my  son  and  his  chil- 
dren of  their  property.  You  have  been  unfaithful 
to  the  gods,  and  we  have  all  suffered  for  that  un- 
faithfulness. Do  not  bring  on  us  greater  trouble  by 
deserting  the  gods  of  our  people  altogether.” 

Choh  Lin’s  sister,  who  was  usually  quiet,  could 
not  hear  her  mother  so  unjustly  accused,  even  by 
the  grandmother,  without  some  reply.  “ Grand- 
mother,” said  she,  “ mother  was  faithful  to  the  gods 
before  father  died,  and  afterward  she  did  all  she 
could  to  serve  them.  Not  until  her  husband  and 
her  property  were  taken  away,  and  she  was  almost 
robbed  of  life,  did  she  cease  her  faithful  worship  of 
the  gods.  And  even  then  she  did  not  desert  the 
gods ; she  only  sought  the  one  who  had  brought  her 
back  to  life.”’ 

“ You  girls  don’t  know  anything  about  such 
things,”  replied  the  grandmother  petulantly. 

Choh  Lin,  who  had  listened  with  close  attention 


168 


CHOH  LIN. 


to  his  mother’s  story,  felt  hurt  at  the  rebuke  of  the 
grandmother,  and  as  soon  as  she  had  answered  his 
sister  he  asked,  “Grandmother,  did  the  gods  take 
my  father  away?  and  did  they  allow  the  relatives 
to  rob  us  of  our  property  ?” 

“ Of  course  they  did,”  replied  she  sharply. 
“ They  punish  those  who  desert  them.” 

“ But  mother  did  not  desert  the  gods,  grand- 
mother. She  went  to  the  temple  and  prayed  very 
often  when  my  father  was  sick.  I remember  about  it, 
and  she  prayed  and  offered  the  gods  many  sacrifices 
afterward,  too,  asking  them  to  take  care  of  us  and 
keep  the  relatives  from  taking  away  our  property; 
yet  her  prayers  were  not  answered.  We  lost  all, 
even  though  she  begged  the  gods  so  much  to  take 
care  of  us.  Grandmother” — and  he  spoke  slowly 
— “ the  gods  deserted  mother ; they  deserted  us  all, 
and  not  we  them.” 

The  old  lady  looked  with  amazement  at  the  boy, 
and  then  said,  “ Have  the  evil  spirits  entered  our 
family  ? What  will  come  next  ?”  Saying  this,  she 
walked  hastily  away. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

PERSECUTION. 

MRS.  LEE  soon  made  another  visit  to  Amoy 
and  to  the  mission-chapel,  where  she  heard 
more  of  the  truth.  She  found  business  calling  her 
oftener  to  the  city  now  than  formerly,  and  each  time 
she  visited  the  chapel  to  have  a talk  with  the  chapel- 
keeper  or  missionary  if  it  were  not  time  for  service. 
There  was  no  more  earnest  listener  than  she  when 
the  gospel  was  preached,  nor  any  inquirer  more  at- 
tentive to  what  was  said  in  the  inquiry-meetings 
which  she  attended.  Rapidly  she  learned  the  truth, 
and  soon  became  able  to  teach  others. 

Mrs.  Lee  was  ready  to  talk  of  the  new  religion 
to  any  people  whom  she  met,  but  soon  learned  that 
it  was  wisdom  to  say  nothing  to  her  mother-in-law. 
The  old  lady  became  excited  and  angry  whenever 
the  gospel  was  referred  to,  and  often  forbade  Mrs. 
Lee  to  speak  to  any  one  in  the  family  of  the  new 
religion.  The  daughter,  however,  listened  atten- 
tively and  eagerly  when  her  mother  spoke  of  the 
Saviour.  When  the  two  were  alone,  then  more 
questions  were  asked  by  the  younger,  not  a few, 

169 


170 


CHOH  LIN. 


however,  being  unanswered  until  Mrs.  Lee  had 
made  another  trip  to  the  city. 

Choh  Lin  had  become  at  once  interested  in  the 
gospel,  nor  was  he  afraid  to  talk  of  the  new  religion 
even  in  the  presence  of  his  grandmother,  though  he 
soon  learned  that  it  was  best  to  keep  silence  on  the 
subject  when  she  was  near.  The  story  of  the  love 
of  Jesus  for  men  had  won  the  heart  of  the  boy,  and 
he  was  eager  to  know  more  about  the  Saviour.  He 
watched  anxiously  for  the  return  of  his  mother 
from  the  city  ; and  often  had  more  questions  to  ask 
about  what  she  had  learned  from  the  missionaries 
than  what  she  had  seen  and  done  while  there. 

When  Chi  Lap,  on  his  visits  home,  heard  about 
the  gospel,  he  too  listened  with  interest,  and  was 
pleased ; but  his  thoughts  were  so  full  of  money- 
making in  Amoy  that  he  had  more  to  say  about 
that  than  about  the  new  religion.  A dread  seemed 
to  come  over  him  after  a while  lest  the  people  in 
the  village  should  persecute  them  for  being  Chris- 
tians, and  he  urged  Choh  Lin  to  say  nothing  about 
the  gospel  to  others,  and  even  begged  his  mother 
not  to  tell  the  neighbors  that  she  had  determined  to 
become  a Christian. 

“ It  is  all  right  ,”  said  he,  “ to  pray  to  the  foreign 
God — he  is  much  better  than  the  gods  of  China — 
but  pray  to  him  when  others  do  not  see  you,  and 
don’t  neglect  the  worship  of  the  idols  entirely.  The 
people  will  not  care  how  much  you  worship  foreign 
gods  as  long  as  you  do  not  desert  their  own.” 


PERSECUTION. 


171 


Choh  Lin  refused  to  be  entirely  silent,  and  his 
mother  would  tell  her  friends  of  the  life-giving 
God ; nor  did  she  stop  with  that : she  urged  them 
to  take  him  as  their  God. 

The  grandmother  made  every  effort  to  lead  her 
daughter-in-law  back  to  idolatry  and  to  the  worship 
of  the  spirits.  She  tried  to  persuade  Mrs.  Lee  to 
give  up  her  Amoy  business,  hoping  in  this  way  to 
keep  her  from  the  influence  of  the  missionaries. 
She  forbade  her  daughter-in-law  going  to  the  chap- 
el, and  threatened  her  with  severe  punishment  if 
she  dared  disobey.  Mrs.  Lee  was  not  a woman  to 
be  hindered  by  threats  from  doing  what  she  believed 
to  be  her  duty  as  well  as  her  right;  so  she  continued 
her  business  in  Amoy  and  her  visits  at  the  chapel. 
There  were  no  Christians  near  Tay  Soa,  nor  was  there 
any  Christian  service  nearer  than  Amoy.  In  addi- 
tion to  the  morning  and  evening  worship,  there  was  a 
preaching-service  each  day  in  the  chapel  there,  and  on 
the  Sabbath  there  were  several  services  in  the  same 
place.  One  of  these  was  an  inquiry-meeting,  where 
all  who  wished  to  know  more  of  the  gospel  were 
questioned  about  their  knowledge  and  plainly  taught 
the  truth.  As  it  was  not  proper,  according  to  Chi- 
nese custom,  for  the  younger  women  to  meet  with 
the  men,  Monday  afternoon  was  set  apart  as  a time 
for  special  service  for  the  women.  Mrs.  Lee  learned 
very  soon  of  this  woman’s  meeting,  and  attended  it 
whenever  she  could,  instead  of  the  Sabbath  service. 
The  missionaries,  noticing  that  she  was  almost  al- 


172 


CHOH  LIN. 


ways  present  on  Monday  instead  of  on  Sunday, 
asked  why  she  did  not  attend  the  Sabbath  service, 
since  it  was  allowable  for  women  of  her  age  to  meet 
with  the  men. 

“ I thought  that  wras  the  men’s  Sabbath,”  replied 
she,  “and  Monday  the  Sabbath  for  the  women.” 

When  told  that  women  did  not  meet  with  the 
men  because  a part  of  the  chapel  had  not  been  par- 
titioned off  for  their  use,  and  that  the  Monday  af- 
ternoon meeting  was  intended  for  the  young  women, 
who  could  not  meet  with  the  men,  and  that  the  first 
day  of  the  week  was  the  Sabbath  for  all,  she  said 
that  she  would  be  there  afterward  on  the  first  in- 
stead of  the  second  day  of  the  week ; nor  did  she 
spend  many  Sabbaths  after  that  away  from  Amoy. 
Usually  she  started  for  the  city  on  Saturday,  and 
returned  on  Monday  to  her  home.  On  these  trips 
she  took  with  her  not  only  her  food,  but  fuel  with 
which  to  cook  it.  The  mother-in-law,  noticing  soon 
that  Mrs.  Lee  made  a point  of  visiting  Amoy  once 
every  seven  days,  suspected  that  it  had  something  to 
do  with  the  worship  of  the  foreign  God,  and  tried 
to  stop  her  trips  to  the  city.  She  even  forbade  Mrs. 
Lee  to  take  food  along.  Choh  Lin,  who  heard  his 
grandmother  forbid  his  mother  to  take  food  or  fuel, 
was  so  anxious  to  have  her  learn  more  of  the  gospel 
that  he  hid  some  of  the  wood  gathered  each  week, 
and  on  Saturday  carried  it  on  board  the  passenger- 
vessel  for  his  mother’s  use  in  the  city : he  even  car- 
ried rice  on  board,  so  that  his  grandmother  would 


PERSECUTION. 


173 


not  suspect  that  Mrs.  Lee  was  going  to  the  city. 
They  could  not  long  keep  it  a secret  from  the  old 
lady  : she  was  made  sure  by  others  where  her  daugh- 
ter-in-law went  and  what  she  did  in  the  city.  If, 
for  any  reason,  Mrs.  Lee  did  not  go  to  Amoy  to 
spend  the  Sabbath,  she  held  a service  at  home  with 
her  two  children,  who  were  becoming  almost  as 
much  interested  in  the  gospel  as  their  mother. 
They  had  learned  to  pray,  they  refused  to  work  on 
the  Sabbath,  and  were  trying  to  live  Christian  lives 
as  well  as  they  knew  how. 

When  their  mother  was  away  the  two  tried  to 
keep  up  a Sabbath  worship,  though  the  old  lady, 
taking:  advantage  of  Mrs.  Lee’s  absence,  sought  to 
lead  the  children  back  to  idolatry. 

“ Grandmother,”  said  Choh  Lin  one  day,  “ you 
don’t  know  about  this  foreign  God ; you  will  not 
let  mother  tell  of  him,  and  no  one  else  has  ever 
told  you ; how  can  you  tell  whether  or  not  he  is 
good  ?” 

“ The  gods  and  the  religion  of  our  fathers  are 
good  enough  for  me,”  she  replied  ; “ our  ancestors 
believed  in  them  and  died  in  that  faith  ; why  should 
not  I?  Beware  of  this  foreign  religion;  it  will 
some  day  bring  ruin  upon  those  who  heed  it.” 

“Grandmother,”  answered  he,  “mother  has  wor- 
shiped the  gods  of  the  Middle  Kingdom;  she  now 
worships  the  God  of  the  foreigners ; she  has  had  a 
chance  to  try  both.  She  likes  the  God  of  the  for- 
eigners best.  Whom  are  we  to  follow — the  oue 


174 


CHOH  LIN. 


who  has  tried  both  sides  or  the  one  who  has  tried 
only  one  ?” 

“ You  haven’t  seen  the  end  of  this  worship  of  a 
foreign  God,”  replied  the  old  lady.  “ Let  your 
mother  beware  when  the  gods  visit  their  anger 
upon  you.” 

The  persuasions  and  warnings  of  his  grandmother 
had  little  etfect  upon  the  boy.  The  doctrines  his 
mother  taught  on  her  return  from  the  city  made 
him  the  more  anxious  to  become  a Christian,  but 
there  was  one  oft-repeated  appeal  from  the  grand- 
mother that  was  not  without  its  etfect : “ I am  soon 
going  to  the  spirit-world,”  said  she,  “and  what  will 
my  spirit  do  for  food  and  clothing  if  my  grand- 
children refuse  to  care  for  it?  I must  live  and 
starve,  yet  starve  and  live.  The  other  spirits,  en- 
joying plenty  provided  by  faithful  relatives,  will 
think  that  I have  been  very  bad  to  be  thus  deserted 
by  my  own  children.  I will  be  deserted,  shunned, 
hated  and  made  an  outcast  in  the  spirit-world ; and 
all  because  my  children  desert  the  religion  of  their 
fathers.  I will  suffer,  suffer,  suffer,  and  all  because 
my  children  have  deserted  me;  yet  they  say  they 
love  me.  Is  this,  can  it  be,  love?  No,  no;  my 
worst  enemy  could  not  do  more.” 

It  needed  all  the  mother’s  faith  and  knowledge 
to  keep  her  children  from  turning  back  to  supersti- 
tion and  idolatry  when  they  for  the  first  time  heard 
this  appeal.  The  Chinese  believe  that  their  com- 
forts in  the  next  life  depend  on  their  friends  and 


Mrs.  Lee, 


Page  175, 


PERSECUTION. 


175 


relatives  in  this.  Not  only  do  they  believe  that 
their  souls  are  fed  and  clothed  by  the  gifts  of  their 
friends  in  tbis  world,  but  that  the  respect  and  honor 
their  spirits  receive  from  their  friends  in  the  unseen 
world  depend  on  the  attention  shown  by  relatives 
in  this.  The  people  may  doubt  the  power  of  the 
gods,  and  even  ridicule  them,  but  none  of  them 
ridicule  the  worship  of  spirits : to  that  idolatry  all 
are  faithful. 

As  Mrs.  Lee  continued  to  attend  the  chapel-ser- 
vice at  Amoy,  and  refused  again  and  again  to  give 
anything  for  idolatrous  feasts  or  the  worship  of  the 
spirits  of  the  dead  in  Tay  Soa,  the  people  became 
excited  and  even  angry  at  her.  They  feared  that 
the  gods  and  the  spirits  of  the  dead  would  not  only 
punish  her  and  her  family,  but  the  whole  village, 
for  such  wickedness.  Some  visited  and  talked  with 
Mrs.  Lee,  begging  her  to  return  to  the  religion  of 
the  place  and  not  bring  calamities  on  the  whole  vil- 
lage. When  they  asked  if  she  worshiped  the  for- 
eigners’ God,  she  said  she  did,  and,  further,  that  he 
was  the  only  true  God.  Instead  of  trying  to  excuse 
herself,  she  urged  them  to  take  this  as  their  God. 
She  said  that  the  religion  of  the  foreigners  was  like 
medicine  to  the  sick  soul. 

“ Yes,”  said  one,  “ it  may  be  like  medicine,  but 
a medicine  that  poisons.  It  will  be  like  opium, 
making  you  feel  happy  at  first,  but  it  will  rob  you 
of  all  you  have.  If  you  turn  away  from  the  gods 
and  the  spirits  of  the  dead,  you  will  soon  see  how 


176 


CHOH  LIN. 


they  will  turn  away  from  you.  When  calamity 
comes,  what  will  you  do  ?” 

“ Do  gods  and  spirits  in  the  Middle  Kingdom 
keep  calamity  away?”  asked  she. 

“ Certainly  they  do,”  was  the  answer. 

“ Then  why  did  not  they  keep  calamity  away 
from  me  when  I did  serve  them  ? Instead  of  car- 
ing for  me  when  I was  the  most  faithful,  they  let 
my  husband  die  and  let  others  take  away  all  of  my 
property,  and  finally  left  me  and  my  children  to 
starve.  I do  not  see  how  they  can  bring  on  me 
much  worse  calamities  for  deserting  them  than  they 
allowed  to  come  on  me  when  I was  faithful  to 
them.” 

“ Sol  Law  Chim  * is  right,”  spoke  an  old  woman 
who  stood  by.  “She  lost  everything  while  obey- 
ing our  gods,  and  why  should  she  continue  to  serve 
them?  They  took  all  that  she  gave,  and  then  took 
the  presents  of  her  enemies  and  allowed  them  to 
rob  her.” 

This  woman  was  a warm  friend  of  Mrs.  Lee,  and 
had  already  learned  from  her  much  about  the  gos- 
pel ; indeed,  was  half  inclined  to  give  up  the  wor- 
ship of  the  gods  herself. 

“ Right  or  wrong,”  said  one  of  the  elders  of 
the  village,  “Sol  Law  Chim  must  do  her  share  to- 
ward paying  for  the  idols’  feasts  and  ceremonies  of 
the  village.  If  she  stays  in  Tay  Soa,  she  must  do 

* Chim  means  “ wife  or  widow  of — and  Sol  Law  Chim  means 
“ wife  or  widow  of  Sol  Law.” 


PERSECUTION. 


177 


as  we  do,  and  care  for  the  temples  and  the  worship 
of  the  ancestral  tablets.  This  is  not  a foreign  vil- 
lage, and  we  do  not  mean  to  have  foreigners  live 
here,  nor  will  we  permit  you  to  observe  their  re- 
ligion, either.” 

Mrs.  Lee  remained  firm  against  all  their  persua- 
sions, and  then  they  resorted  to  threats.  “ We  will 
drive  you  from  our  village,”  said  one. 

“You  cannot  do  that,”  was  her  reply,  “because 
I own  my  house.” 

“ Your  relatives  will  take  that  away,”  answered 
another. 

“Then  I will  appeal  to  the  mandarins,”  was  her 
reply. 

“ They  will  not  help  you,”  said  one  of  the  elders 
of  the  village.  “ You  lose  all  your  rights  by  giving 
up  the  religion  of  your  people.” 

“ Then  I will  pray  to  the  great  and  true  God 
whom  I serve,”  spoke  Mrs.  Lee  determinedly,  “ and 
He  who  saved  Daniel  even  in  the  lions’  den  will 
take  care  of  me.” 

“ Your  God  may  be  strong  in  his  own  country, 
but  he  can  do  nothing  in  the  Middle  Kingdom, 
where  he  will  have  so  many  gods  against  him.” 

“ He  is  not  the  God  of  a single  country,  but  of 
the  whole  world,”  replied  Mrs.  Lee.  “He  made 
the  world  and  all  that  is  in  it.  He  is  the  only  true 
God.” 

“ Well,”  spoke  one  in  a conciliatory  tone,  “ he 
may  be  a very  great  God,  and  there  may  be  no 
12 


178 


CHOH  LIN. 


harm  for  you  to  worship  him,  but  don’t  give  up  the 
worship  of  the  spirits  of  the  dead.” 

“ Why  should  I worship  them?”  she  asked. 

“ Because  they  are  mighty,  and  can  give  great 
favors  and  bring  great  evils  upon  us.” 

“Mighty!”  replied  she  in  contempt,  “and  yet 
they  cannot  take  care  of  themselves.  You  believe 
we  must  give  them  house,  clothing,  food,  and  even 
drink,  in  the  spirit-world.  They  are  perfectly  help- 
less; how,  then,  can  they  help  or  injure  us?” 

Determined  to  bring  the  matter  to  a test,  one  of 
them  asked,  “ Will  you  help  pay  for  the  food  to  be 
given  to  our  ancestors  at  the  ancestral  feast  ?” 

For  a moment  Mrs.  Lee  was  silent;  then  she  said 
calmly,  “ No,  I don’t  believe  it  can  do  them  any 
good  whatever ; they  are  entirely  beyond  our  power, 
and  I do  not  mean  to  worship  them  nor  care  for 
their  wants.  I don’t  believe  I can  really  do  any- 
thing for  them.” 

“ What !”  spoke  one,  “ have  you  entirely  given 
up  the  worship  of  our  ancestors  for  an  unknown 
god  of  foreigners?” 

“ Yes,”  was  her  reply  ; “ he  is  the  true  God,  the 
only  one.  I have  given  up  all  others  for  him,  nor 
will  I again  worship  our  ancestors.  The  foreign 
God  shall  be  my  God.” 

“ If  she  deserts  our  gods  and  our  ancestors,  she 
deserts  us,”  said  one,  “ and  becomes  a foreigner. 
Let  her  go;  let  foreigners  care  for  her  in  time  of 
famine,  watch  by  her  when  she  is  sick,  bury  her 


PERSECUTION. 


179 


when  she  is  dead,  weep  at  her  grave  and  care  for 
her  forsaken  spirit.  She  is  ours  no  longer and 
with  contempt  they  were  about  turning  away. 

But  others  were  not  so  willing  to  leave  Mrs.  Lee: 
if  the  gods  did  not  punish,  they  felt  it  to  be  their 
duty  to  do  so,  and  for  a time  it  seemed  that  her  life 
was  in  danger.  Fortunately,  milder  counsels  pre- 
vailed, and  the  people  decided  to  leave  Mrs.  Lee  to 
herself,  counting  her  as  a foreigner  and  an  outcast. 

Her  relatives  were  not  so  easily  persuaded  to 
leave  Mrs.  Lee  to  herself.  They  had  already  heard 
of  her  deserting  the  worship  of  their  ancestors,  but, 
not  knowing  just  how  the  village  elders  would  look 
on  that  desertion,  they  were  not  in  a hurry  to  visit 
her.  They  knew  full  well  that  if  their  robbery  of 
her  property  were  brought  before  the  mandarins 
they  would  be  made  to  suffer.  Besides,  the  stories 
of  what  foreign  ships  of  war  and  soldiers  had  done 
to  different  parts  of  China  made  them  look  on  for- 
eigners with  dread;  yet  they  felt  that  something 
must  be  done  after  they  learned  of  Mrs.  Lee’s 
public  decision.  Being  superstitious,  they  believed 
that  the  spirits  and  gods  would  punish  all  for  the 
neglect  and  the  sin  of  one.  They  visited  Mrs.  Lee, 
and  in  a polite  way  drew  out  her  opinions  and  pur- 
poses. At  first  they  gently  advised  her  to  give  up 
the  foreign  god,  but  when  she  insisted  on  choosing 
for  herself  they  became  more  determined,  harsh  and 
angry.  They  commanded  her  to  have  nothing  more 
to  do  with  foreigners,  to  give  up  the  worship  of  the 


J80 


CHOH  LIN. 


foreign  god,  and  threatened  her  with  terrible  pun- 
ishment if  she  refused.  Mrs.  Lee  told  them,  as  she 
had  told  others,  that  she  meant  to  be  a Christian, 
and  no  words  of  theirs  nor  threats  should  turn  her 
from  that  course.  Seeing  her  calmness  and  deter- 
mination, they  thought  that  perhaps  the  foreigners 
would  help  her,  so  they  dared  do  nothing  more  than 
threaten.  They  called  her  by  every  name  of  con- 
tempt they  could  think  of. 

To  call  a married  woman  or  widow  in  China  by 
her  maiden  name  as  well  as  her  given  name  is  re- 
garded as  one  of  the  greatest  insults  that  can  be 
given  to  a woman : these  relatives  called  her  by 
both,  and  added  another  term  whose  meaning 
seemed  to  contain  in  it  all  the  contempt  and  dis- 
grace that  words  could  heap  upon  Mrs.  Lee.  They 
went  in  front  of  the  ancestral  tablets,  and,  kneeling 
there,  begged  the  spirits  to  make  her  an  outcast, 
hated,  despised  by  all,  and  then  to  heap  upon  her 
all  the  punishment  and  sorrow  they  could  give. 
From  the  ancestral  tablets  they  went  to  the  idol 
temple,  and  there  again  they  bowed  in  prayer  before 
the  gods,  begging  them  to  punish  with  sufferings 
and  curses  the  woman  who  had  deserted  the  religion 
of  their  country  and  the  spirits  of  the  dead.  Hav- 
ing done  all  they  dared,  they  left  Mrs.  Lee  and 
treated  her  as  an  outcast  who  had  no  more  claims 
on  them  than  the  dogs  of  the  streets. 

All  this  Mrs.  Lee  bore  meekly  and  patiently. 
She  had  learned  what  the  Saviour  said  about  those 


PERSECUTION. 


181 


who  are  deserted  of  friends  for  his  name’s  sake,  and 
she  learned  that  there  is  a blessing  given  for  all  the 
sufferings  endured.  Though  the  mother-in-law  re- 
mained bitterly  opposed  to  Christianity,  she  would 
not  turn  against  her  daughter-in-law.  Mrs.  Lee 
was  so  kind  and  faithful  that  the  old  lady  could  not 
help  loving  her.  She  could  not  but  see  that  the 
foreign  religion,  instead  of  making  her  daughter- 
in-law  careless  of  her  family,  had  really  made  her 
more  thoughtful  and  careful  to  attend  to  their 
wants.  Yet  she  continued  to  oppose  Mrs.  Lee’s 
religion,  and  used  every  means  in  her  power  to  in- 
fluence the  children  against  the  mother’s  faith  and 
to  train  them  up  as  idolaters.  The  kindness  of 
Mrs.  Lee,  however,  her  faithful  life,  and,  more  than 
all,  the  new  doctrine,  influenced  the  children  more 
than  the  grandmother’s  warnings. 

Steadily  Choh  Lin  gained  a knowledge  of  the 
truth,  and  the  more  he  knew  about  it  the  more  he 
loved  it.  Yet  he  did  not  seem  to  understand  that 
he  was  a sinner  with  a sinful  nature,  needing  a new 
heart  and  the  grace  of  God  to  help  him  live  a dif- 
ferent life.  To  him  the  true  God  was  merely  a 
greater  one  than  any  in  China  and  very  different 
from  all,  but  one  whom  he  might  serve  or  not  as 
he  chose.  He,  however,  did  not  hesitate  to  let  it  be 
known  that  he  had  taken  the  foreign  God  as  his 
own  and  had  given  up  all  other  worship.  When 
the  villagers  and  the  relatives  turned  against  his 
mother,  they  turned  against  him  too.  Even  the 


182 


CHOH  LIN. 


boys  who  had  been  his  friends  and  companions, 
those  who  had  fought  with  and  for  him  in  many  a 
battle,  now  turned  against  him.  It  was  unpopular 
in  the  village  to  say  or  do  anything  kindly  to  Choh 
Lin  or  his  mother.  The  boys  were  only  too  ready 
to  put  into  acts  the  words  that  they  heard  grown 
people  speak.  Those  who  had  been  enemies  of 
Choh  Lin  before,  but  had  not  dared  to  injure  him 
as  they  wished  on  account  of  his  relatives  and 
friends,  now  made  him  suffer.  Many  a time  the 
poor  fellow  heard  them  hooting  at  him  in  the  street 
and  calling  out,  “ Hoana  !”  (“foreigner”),  “ Hoana 
kia!”  (“foreigner’s  child”),  and  sometimes  they 
even  shouted,  “ Hoana  kui  !”  (“  foreign  devil  ”). 
They  would  not  play  nor  walk  with  him,  and  hard- 
ly spoke  to  him.  If  they  could  trip  him  or  push 
him  down,  enough  of  them  were  ready  to  do  it. 
If  he  gathered  wood  on  the  shore,  they  would  steal 
it  or  rob  him  of  his  oysters.  Sometimes,  when  he 
w'as  carrying  water  from  a spring  to  his  home,  they 
came  behind,  and  when  he  had  nearly  reached  the 
house  threw  sand  into  the  pail,  or  if  he  set  it  down 
to  rest  they  kicked  it  over,  thus  compelling  him  to 
co  acain  for  water.  They  tried  to  set  the  docs  on 
him,  threw  stones  and  sticks  at  him,  and  annoyed 
him  in  every  way  possible.  If  he  happened  along 
when  they  were  arranging  some  plan  for  sport,  they 
at  once  stopped  and  said,  “ Here  comes  this  foreign- 
er child;  he  must  not  know  anything  about  it.  Let 
him  go  to  his  own  people;  he  don’t  belong  here.” 


PERSECUTION. 


] 83 


Few  men  had  kind  words  for  him;  all  seemed  to 
treat  him  as  though  he  were  a worthless  dog,  who 
was  permitted  to  live  only  because  no  one  cared  to 
take  the  trouble  of  putting  him  out  of  the  way. 

Yet  it  was  not  always  so,  nor  did  every  one  treat 
him  with  unkindness.  Jip  longed  to  be  friendly, 
and  when  able  showed  Clioh  Lin  no  little  good-will, 
but  dared  not  let  others  know  it.  To  have  played 
with  Choh  Lin  or  to  have  been  seen  in  company 
with  the  friendless  boy  would  have  been  to  hear 
others  say,  “ There  is  another  foreigner!  He  is  be- 
coming a foreigner  like  Choh  Lin.  Keep  away 
from  them  both.  They  will  make  us  foreigners 
too.” 

When  Chi  Lap  came  home  and  saw  how  unkindly 
his  mother  and  brother  were  treated — his  sister  being 
nearly  grown,  according  to  Chinese  custom  was  not 
allowed  to  go  away  from  her  home — he  felt  troubled 
and  urged  them  to  give  up  the  outward  worship,  so 
as  not  to  allow  the  people  to  know  that  they  served 
the  foreigners’  God.  Yet  he  was  unwilling  that 
they  should  become  idolaters  again.  He  listened 
himself  with  no  little  pleasure  to  the  doctrine,  and 
seemed  glad  that  his  mother,  brother  and  sister  were 
trying  to  follow  the  new  religion  ; but  he  did  not 
understand  why  they  were  obliged  to  let  anybody 
know  about  it.  He  was  making  a living  for  him- 
self, and  able  to  help  his  mother  a little,  but  he 
feared  that  if  it  were  known  in  the  city  that  his 
mother  and  brother  were  Christians  it  would  injure 


184 


CHOH  LIN. 


his  business  ; so  he  begged  them  to  be  like  others 
outwardly  and  keep  their  religion  hidden. 

But  neither  Chi  Lap’s  entreaties  nor  the  threats 
of  the  village  people  had  any  effect  on  Mrs.  Lee  or 
Choh  Lin.  They  had  learned  that  Christianity  was 
not  only  something  of  the  heart,  but  that  it  must  be 
shown  out  in  the  life. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


IN  AMOY. 

MRS.  LEE  became  well  known  in  the  chapel  at 
Amoy.  One  day  a missionary  asked  whether 
she  had  any  family.  She  told  him  about  her  family 
and  about  Chi  Lap  being  in  the  city.  The  mission- 
ary said  he  would  like  to  see  her  son. 

Chi  Lap  appeared  in  the  chapel  soon  after.  It 
was  not  the  first  time  he  had  gone  there.  He  too 
was  interested  in  Christianity,  but  afraid  to  let  it  be 
known  lest  it  should  injure  his  business.  This  time 
he  happened  to  be  in  the  chapel  when  his  mother  was 
there.  After  service  she  called  him  to  the  mission- 
ary and  introduced  him  as  her  son.  As  no  one  but 
the  missionary  seemed  to  notice  him,  he  remained, 
and  the  more  he  heard  the  more  he  wanted  to  hear. 

This  missionary  had  a little  girl  who  was  an  in- 
valid, and  he  needed  some  one  to  wait  on  her. 
Pleased  with  the  boy,  he  offered  to  hire  him.  Chi 
Lap  was  earning  money,  but  not  rapidly ; besides, 
he  was  not  sure  of  making:  a living  for  the  future 
at  his  business,  as  many  other  boys  were  engaged 
in  it;  so  he  was  glad  to  accept  an  offer  of  regular 
wages  and  a home,  but  more  still  was  he  pleased  to 

185 


186 


CHOH  LIN. 


be  with  the  missionary  where  he  might  hear  the 
gospel. 

The  missionaries  had  asked  Mrs.  Lee  about  Choh 
Lin  too,  and  whether  she  wished  to  give  him  an 
education. 

“ Yes,”  said  she,  “ I should  be  glad  to  have  him 
learn,  but  cannot  afford  to  pay  what  the  teacher 
charges.” 

They  told  her  of  the  mission-school  where  chil- 
dren were  taught  for  nothing,  and  said  that  if  Choh 
Lin  really  wanted  to  study,  and  she  would  bring 
him  to  Amoy,  he  might  attend  the  school  there. 
Though  delighted  with  this  offer,  Mrs.  Lee  hardly 
knew  how  to  have  her  two  boys  away  while  she  re- 
mained at  Tay  Soa.  After  planning  for  a while, 
she  decided  to  hire  rooms  at  Amoy  and  live  there 
herself  with  Choh  Lin,  and  leave  her  mother-in- 
law  and  daughter  at  Tay  Soa  if  unwilling  to  move 
to  the  city. 

When  she  first  told  Choh  Lin  of  her  plan  the 
boy  was  almost  wild  with  joy.  He  could  hardly 
wait  to  get  ready  for  school.  He  cared  not  only  for 
that  and  to  be  in  the  large  city,  but  was  pleased  to 
think  that  he  would  be  with  the  missionaries  and 
could  hear  the  gospel  for  himself.  Had  he  had  his 
own  way,  Choh  Lin  would  have  started  for  Amoy 
the  next  morning.  He  little  thought  that  a boy 
might  need  better  clothes  for  school,  and  would 
need  more  than  one  suit.  He  had  had  very  little 
in  the  way  of  new  clothing  of  late  years. 


IN  AMOY. 


187 


Choh  Lin’s  longing  to  become  a learned  man  that 
he  might  be  a rich  one  came  back  with  double  force 
now  that  he  saw  so  good  a chance  to  get  an  educa- 
tion. He  was  anxious  to  learn  the  truth  and  be- 
come a Christian,  but  did  not  think  yet  of  using  his 
learning  for  doing  good  with  it.  He  wanted  to  be 
rich,  that  he  might  buy  as  many  good  things  as  he 
could  use. 

Choh  Lin  could  talk  of  very  little  besides  Amoy 
and  the  school.  He  asked  his  mother  all  kinds  of 
questions,  far  more  than  she  could  have  answered 
had  she  been  at  the  school  herself.  She  knew  little 
about  it — so  little,  indeed,  that  her  answer  usually 
was,  “ I don’t  know.” 

The  grandmother  was  not  pleased  with  the  idea 
of  Choh  Lin  going  to  the  school  of  the  foreign 
teachers,  and  would  gladly  have  kept  him  at  Tay 
Soa.  Far  rather  would  she  have  him  grow  up  in 
ignorance  than  learn  from  people  who  believed  a 
foreign  religion.  It  was  useless  for  her,  however, 
to  try  to  keep  Choh  Lin.  She  would  have  felt  less 
troubled  if  her  grandson  had  been  going  to  live 
among  heathen  ; but  to  be  among  Christians  and 
away  from  her  own  influence,  to  be  with  his  mother 
alone,  who  would  do  everything  possible  to  make 
him  an  enemy  of  the  gods  and  spirit-worship  of 
China, — this  was  almost  more  than  the  old  lady 
could  endure.  Mrs.  Lee  had  urged  her  mother-in- 
law  to  go  to  Amoy,  but  in  vain.  She  would  not 
listen  to  such  a proposal.  She  had  lived  at  Tay 


188 


CHOH  LIN. 


Soa  so  many  years  that  she  could  not  think  of  going 
away  now.  Probably  she  had  a secret  fear  of  meet- 
ing the  missionaries,  lest  they  should  turn  her,  as 
they  had  done  her  daughter-in-law,  away  from  the 
religion  of  China. 

Those  were  long  days  to  Choh  Lin  that  came  be- 
tween the  decision  and  the  moving  to  Amov  ; aside 
from  the  desire  to  see  and  live  in  a city,  and  the  wish 
to  be  at  school,  was  the  anxiety  to  get  away  lest 
another  famine  should  come,  causing  more  suffering 
and  starvation.  But  there  was  another  feeling  still 
that  made  him  wish  to  leave:  he  had  few  friends 
now  since  he  had  become  a worshiper  of  the  true 
God,  and  he  longed  to  be  where  people  did  not 
hate  and  persecute,  and  cry  out,  “ There  goes  a for- 
eigner’s child.” 

He  had  heard  his  mother  talk  so  much  of  the 
chapel  and  the  people  who  gathered  there  to  wor- 
ship, of  the  singing,  the  prayers  and  the  preaching, 
that  he  felt  anxious  to  attend  the  chapel  too.  He 
was  eager  to  meet  the  Christians,  and  most  of  all 
the  missionaries,  and  to  tell  them  that  he  also  wor- 
shiped the  true  God. 

At  last  the  day  for  moving  came.  INTot  many 
boats  were  needed  to  bear  their  goods  to  Amoy. 
Two  strong  men  could  probably  have  carried  all 
their  furniture  and  everything.  Mrs.  Lee  left  most 
of  her  property  at  Tay  Soa,  intending  to  buy  the 
few  things  needed  when  she  reached  Amoy. 

It  was  a grand  day  to  the  country  boy  when  he 


IN  AMOY. 


189 


reached  the  large  city.  He  was  delighted  at  the 
many  sights  before  him.  It  seemed  that  he  had 
not  in  all  his  life  seen  so  many  boats  as  lay  at  an- 
chor or  were  sailing  around  in  the  harbor,  and  some 
of  them  were  such  immense  vessels ! The  war- 
junks  appeared  to  be  awful,  with  their  flags  flying 
and  the  great  cannon  reaching  their  long  necks  and 
open  mouths  out  toward  him  from  the  decks  of  the 
vessels.  The  merchant-junks,  with  high  sterns  and 
gaudy  paintings,  with  carved  work  and  horrid 
(though  to  him  grand)  pictures,  were  mighty  ves- 
sels. As  they  lay  at  anchor,  with  their  huge  black 
eyes  on  either  side  of  the  bow  looking  out  upon  the 
water,  they  seemed  to  the  boy  as  great  giants  who 
were  merely  resting  before  going  out  on  the  ocean 
to  beat  down  the  waves  with  their  immense  bulk. 
Farther  away  from  the  landing  where  the  Tay  Soa 
boats  stopped  lay  the  foreign-built  ships.  These, 
so  far  away,  appeared  to  be  wonderful  giants  with 
their  tall  masts  and  many  crosstrees.  More  won- 
derful still  was  the  great  city,  reaching  about  a mile 
along  the  harbor  and  stretching  nearly  as  far  back 
from  the  water.  The  crowds  of  vessels  surprised 
him,  the  multitudes  of  houses  astonished  him,  and 
the  many  new  and  strange  sights  kept  him  in  a 
fever  of  excitement  and  wonder.  He  hardly  lis- 
tened to  anything  his  mother  said,  and  when  the 
boat  anchored  and  the  time  came  to  go  ashore  he 
was  so  interested  in  looking  that  he  could  scarcely 
think  of  stepping  into  the  small  boat. 


190 


CHOH  LIN. 


At  the  landing  they  were  met  by  Chi  Lap.  The 
older  brother  was  pleased  at  the  curiosity  of  Choh 
Lin,  and  proud  to  be  able  to  tell  him  about  the 
many  new  things  that  appeared;  but  he  cautioned 
Choh  Lin  not  to  ask  too  loud  nor  seem  to  be  too  io> 
norant,  lest  the  people  find  out  that  he  was  nothing 
but  a country  boy. 

“‘  Nothing  but  a country  bov’!”  repeated  the 
younger  brother.  “ Certainly,  I am  a country  boy, 
and  I came  from  Tay  Soa,  a place  that  is  as  good 
as  any  in  the  Middle  Kingdom.” 

“Shih!  shih!”  spoke  Chi  Lap  in  a low  voice; 
“don’t  say  anything  about  Tay  Soa.  It  is  a good 
place,  but  then  it  is  not  Amoy.” 

“Thung-a!  ti  thung-a!  Ti  but  but!  Ho  chiah  ! 
Bell  boe  thung-a?”  cried  a boy  as  he  came  along 
with  a tray  or  basket  of  sweetened  fruits  and  candies. 
(“Sugared  things!  sweet  sugared  things!  Sweet, 
very,  very  sweet!  Good  eating.  Will  you  buy 
sugared  things?”)  Seeing  Choh  Lin,  he  came  to 
him  and  said,  “ Good  young  friend,  here  are  just 
what  you  like,  the  sweetest  kind  of  fruits  and  can- 
dies. Even  the  bright  country  does  not  have  any 
as  sweet  and  good.  Will  you  buy?  They  are  so 
cheap!  I am  really  almost  giving  them  away. 
These,”  holding  up  some,  “ are  worth  five  cash — 
yes,  ten  cash — apiece,  but  I will  sell  them  to  you 
at  a single  cash  each.  You  will  never  get  any  as 
cheap  up  in  the  country.” 

Choh  Lin  was  ready  at  once  to  spend  a few  cash 


IN  AMOY. 


191 


to  take  advantage  of  such  a bargain,  but  Chi  Lap 
said  quietly  yet  decidedly  as  he  motioned  Choh  Lin 
not  to  buy,  “Em  boe  ” (“not  buy”),  and  hurried 
his  brother  on. 

“ Why  did  not  you  let  me  buy  ?”  asked  the 
younger;  “they  were  so  cheap.” 

“‘Cheap’!”  repeated  Chi  Lap.  “ I used  to  sell 
those  same  things  five  for  a cash.  He  saw  that  you 
were  from  the  country,  and  thought  that  you  did 
not  know  much.  Be  careful  how  you  act  and  wliat 
you  buy.  Almost  every  one  will  charge  you  five 
times  as  much  as  a thing  is  worth  if  they  see  that 
you  don’t  know.” 

The  two  boys  were  soon  at  Choh  Lin’s  future 
home.  It  was  very  small,  with  only  two  little  rooms, 
and  very  dark  ones  at  that,  but  about  as  good  as 
the  homes  of  many  poor  people  in  the  city.  It 
took  only  a short  time  to  get  their  household  goods 
in  order.  Chi  Lap,  on  account  of  his  mother  and 
brother  moving  to  Amoy,  had  a holiday  and  spent 

it  with  them.  As  soon  as  the  work  was  done  the 

• 

two  brothers  went  out  for  a walk,  Chi  Lap  intend- 
ing to  show  Choh  Lin  the  chapel,  mission-house 
and  school.  It  was  Saturday,  and  there  was  no 
school,  so  the  boys  could  go  into  the  schoolroom 
without  interfering  with  the  scholars.  Chi  Lap  got 
the  key  and  showed  his  brother  around.  They  met 
the  missionary  as  they  were  going  about,  and  Chi 
Lap  at  once  introduced  Choh  Lin,  who  hardly  knew 
what  to  say  when  addressed. 


192 


CHOH  LIN. 


It  is  so  common  for  the  Chinese  to  greet  one 
another  with  the  questions,  when  they  meet  as 
strangers,  “ How  old  are  you  ? and  have  you  eaten 
yet?”  that  Choh  Lin  expected  of  course  that  the 
missionary  would  ask  how  old  he  was,  so  he  an- 
swered as  politely  as  he  could,  “ Chap-jee  hay  ” 
(“  twelve  years  ”). 

But  the  missionary  had  said  he  was  glad  to  see 
him,  and  then  asked  when  he  and  his  mother  came 
into  the  city.  Choh  Lin,  a little  too  excited  to  no- 
tice the  question,  supposed  that  it  was  the  regular 
one,  and  answered,  “Chiah-pa”  (“eaten  enough”). 

The  missionary  smiled,  and  after  a few  pleasant 
words  went  on,  leaving  the  two  to  look  around  far- 
ther. 

Choh  Lin  felt  troubled  when  his  older  brother 
told  him  what  the  missionary  had  asked,  and  won- 
dered if  he  would  think  ill  of  the  new  scholar. 

“Don’t  fear,”  said  Chi  Lap;  “the  missionaries 
are  the  kindest  and  best  men  in  the  world,  and  are 
the  wisest  too.  They  know  almost  everything. 
They  even  know  what  we  mean  when  we  tell  them 
just  the  opposite.  The  other  servants  say  that  mis- 
sionaries can  see  into  our  hearts  and  almost  know 
what  we  think,  only  they  can’t  always  tell  when 
people  cheat  them.  They  know  everything  about 
the  badness  of  the  heart  except  when  it  is  shown  in 
bargains.” 

Choh  Lin  was  greatly  pleased  with  his  visit  to 
the  school.  Chi  Lap  told  him  that  as  they  would 


IN  AMOY. 


193 


be  able  to  go  to  the  chapel-service  the  next  day, 
there  would  be  no  need  now  of  visiting  that  room. 

Choh  Lin  was  with  his  mother  in  the  chapel 
among  the  first  at  the  morning  worship.  He  took 
the  hymn-book  offered  him,  and  was  proud  to  let  it 
be  known  that  he  knew  quite  a number  of  the  char- 
acters (or  words)  in  it.  When  the  hymn  was  given 
out  he  could  find  it;  nor  was  that  very  difficult,  as 
there  were  only  thirteen  in  the  book.  Thirteen 
hymns,  however,  were  enough  for  Choh  Lin.  That 
first  one  was  not  sung  as  well  as  it  would  have  been 
in  a church  in  America,  but  far  better  than  Choh 
Lin  had  ever  heard  singing.  God  accepted  it  as 
praise,  no  doubt,  for  it  was  sung  heartily  and  the 
people  meant  what  they  sang.  That  singing  was 
worship;  Choh  Lin  came  there  to  worship  God,  so 
he  tried  to  join  in  the  song.  Softly  and  in  a low 
tone  he  followed  the  others,  readily  catching  the 
simple  tune;  each  note  seeming  a step  by  which  the 
boy’s  heart  went  up  to  God.  Then  the  reading  of 
the  Bible  was  like  opening  the  door  to  allow  him  to 
approach  and  listen  to  the  Almighty,  while  the 
prayer  appeared  to  be  God  coming  out  to  listen 
while  all  united  through  the  leader  in  talking  to 
him. 

The  newness  of  the  service  attracted  the  boy,  but 
the  solemnity  of  the  worship,  and  yet  its  simplicity, 
drew  his  heart  out  toward  God.  Choh  Lin  was  not 
yet  a heart-Christian,  nor  did  he  really  know  what 
it  was  to  be  one.  He  had  only  changed  gods  when 
13 


194 


CHOH  LIN. 


he  gave  up  idolatry.  He  did  not  know  about  a 
change  of  heart,  and  about  the  need  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  to  bring  about  that  change  ; but  the  Spirit  of 
God  was  leading  him,  though  he  did  not  know  it. 

That  first  Sabbath  in  Amoy  was  a happy  day  for 
the  country  boy.  New  things  met  him  everywhere 
and  pleased  him,  but  nothing  so  pleased  and  satis- 
fied him  as  the  services  in  the  chapel.  These  made 
this  the  best  day  he  had  ever  seen.  How  glad  he 
was  that  he  had  come  to  Amoy  ! But  there  was 
one  thing  that  gave  him  trouble,  and  that  was  what 
he  was  asked  and  what  he  learned  in  the  inquiry- 
meeting. So  many  things  the  missionary  asked  of 
which  he  had  never  thought,  and  many  things  also  of 
which  he  had  never  heard,  that  the  boy  was  amazed. 
He  was  sorry,  too,  to  be  obliged  to  answer  again 
and  again  that  he  did  not  know.  Each  time,  how- 
ever, the  missionary  kindly  explained  the  question 
and  its  answer.  At  the  close  of  the  meeting  Choh 
Lin  felt  that  there  was  something  in  the  new  relig- 
ion that  he  had  not  learned — something  deeper  than 
he  had  yet  felt ; and  the  prayer  that  the  missionary 
gave  him — to  pray  that  the  Holy  Spirit  would  show 
him  his  sin  and  lead  him  to  Christ — he  resolved  to 
offer  very  often,  and  to  keep  praying  until  his  heart 
was  all  clean  and  right  before  God.  He  longed  to 
be  able  to  read  the  Bible,  that  he  might  know  more 
about  the  Saviour  and  how  to  please  and  serve 
God. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


IN  THE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 

EARLY  Oil  Monday  morning  Choh  Lin  was 
ready  for  school.  Indeed,  long  before  the  time 
he  wanted  to  start,  but  was  told  by  his  mother  to 
wait.  When  permitted  to  go  he  started  eagerly  for 
the  school,  which  was  only  a little  distance  away. 
He  took  no  dinner-basket  nor  yet  books.  He  could 
come  home  for  dinner,  and  the  books  would  be  fur- 
nished by  the  school.  His  courage,  however,  oozed 
out  at  the  ends  of  his  fingers  by  the  time  he  had 
reached  the  schoolroom.  When  he  saw  the  strange 
faces  and  the  wise-looking  teacher  he  almost  wished 
himself  back  at  Tay  Soa.  Scholars  and  teacher 
were  strangers  to  him.  Fortunately,  the  mission- 
ary was  there,  and  at  once  saw  Choh  Lin.  He  in- 
troduced the  boy  to  the  teacher,  said  a few  kind 
words,  and  then  left. 

Choh  Lin  hardly  knew  where  his  tongue  had 
gone  when  the  teacher  asked  him  questions,  but 
succeeded  in  finding  it  before  the  teacher  had  waited 
too  long  for  answers. 

When  the  school  was  called  to  order  a seat  was 
given  him,  a chapter  from  the  Bible  read,  a prayer 

195 


196 


CHOH  LIN. 


offered  by  the  teacher,  and  the  work  of  the  day  be- 
gan. There  was  the  same  noisy  study  on  the  part 
of  the  boys,  and  some  had  the  same  lessons  that  he 
had  heard  recited  at  Tay  Soa.  But  another  book 
was  studied,  and  that  was  the  Bible.  Each  one  was 
taught  to  read  and  commit  it  to  memory.  Choh  Lin 
was  glad  to  study  the  holy  book.  Not  only  did  he 
study;  he  thought  of  what  he  learned,  and  many  a 
passage  was  kept  in  mind  to  ask  his  mother  about 
afterward.  Besides  the  usual  studies  of  the  Chinese 
schools  and  the  Bible  the  boys  were  taught  some- 
thing of  geography  and  arithmetic : they  were  also 
taught  a catechism  of  Bible  truths;  for  this,  while 
it  was  a school  to  fit  the  scholars  for  useful  lives, 
was  meant  primarily  to  teach  them  of  the  Bible  and 
the  Saviour  in  the  hope  that  they  would  become 
Christians. 

Some  of  the  boys  studied  just  because  they  must, 
while  others  were  anxious  to  learn  all  they  could. 
Choh  Lin  set  himself  at  once  to  study,  because  he 
meant  to  get  the  good  of  it  in  the  future.  The 
teacher  noticed  his  studious  habits  and  praised  him 
for  trying  to  do  so  well. 

“ Some  -day,”  said  he,  “you  may  be  a learned 
man  and  a preacher  of  the  gospel.” 

This  was  praise  that  Choh  Lin  did  not  care  for. 
He  did  not  wish  to  become  a preacher ; indeed,  had 
not  thought  of  it  at  all.  Had  the  teacher  said  that 
some  day  he  would  become  a graduate  and  a rich  as 
well  as  great  man,  Choh  Lin  would  have  been  far 


IN  THE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 


197 


more  pleased.  He,  however,  learned  to  like  the 
quiet,  kind  and  good  teacher,  and  was  ready  to  listen 
and  take  his  advice.  He  did  not  understand  how 
some  boys  could  deceive  the  teacher  as  they  did. 
When  the  teacher  was  not  looking  they  began  whis- 
pering or  playing,  but  as  soon  as  his  eye  was  on 
them  they  pretended  to  be  busy  with  their  studies. 
It  was  strange  to  Choh  Lin  that  boys  in  a school 
where  they  were  taught  of  the  true  God  and  from 
the  Bible  should  do  this.  He  soon  learned  that 
not  all  boys  who  know  about  God  serve  him  faith- 
fully. 

Choh  Lin  did  not  find  the  boys  as  friendly  as  he 
hoped.  At  recess,  when  all  had  an  opportunity  to 
talk,  the  others  seemed  to  forget  that  a strange  boy 
was  among  them.  Some  did  come  to  him  and  ask 
where  his  home  was,  but  when  they  learned  that  he 
was  from  a little  village  off  in  the  country,  they  did 
not  seem  to  care  much  more  for  him.  Hone  asked, 
as  he  hoped  they  would,  whether  or  not  he  were  a 
Christian,  and  none  seemed  to  care  much  about  any- 
thing but  play.  He  gradually  became  acquainted 
with  the  boys,  yet  did  not  like  them  as  much  as  he 
had  hoped.  They  called  him  a country  boy,  and 
said  that  he  was  green  ; they  ridiculed  his  country 
ways  and  made  sport  of  many  things  he  did. 

City  people  in  China  think  themselves  brighter 
and  better  than  those  who  live  in  the  country.  They 
speak  of  country  people  as  green.  Perhaps  they 
are  right,  yet  green  things,  unless  painted,  are  live 


198 


CHOH  LIN. 


things.  The  country  is  the  place  where  good  things 
grow,  and  were  it  not  for  the  country  city  people 
would  soon  die.  Country  people  can  live  without 
the  city,  but  city  people  cannot  live  without  the 
country. 

For  a while  Clioh  Lin  took  their  ridicule  kindly, 
yet  could  not  see  why  he  was  the  worse  for  having 
lived  in  the  country.  He  knew  that  inside  of  him 
he  was  as  real  a boy,  and  just  as  able  to  study  or  to 
work,  as  any  city  boy.  He  was  right.  It  is  not  so 
much  the  place  in  which  he  lives  that  makes  the 
boy  as  it  is  that  which  is  in  him.  A diamond  is 
no  less  a diamond  because  found  in  the  sand  of  the 
river-bed,  nor  is  a boy  the  less  worthy  because  he 
happens  to  have  had  his  home  where  there  is  an 
abundance  of  grass,  trees  and  ground.  If  Choh 
Lin  did  not  know  as  much  of  the  city,  he  knew  far 
more  of  the  country  than  the  boys  who  ridiculed 
him  ; and  he  was  really  wiser  than  those  who  had 
lived  all  their  lives  where  there  was  little  to  be  seen 
except  stone  pavements  and  brick-and-mortar  walls. 

“ I may  be  green,”  said  he  one  day  when  the  boys 
were  ridiculing  him,  “but  I would  rather  be  that 
than  dry.  Dry  things  are  dead  things.  Dry 
weather  brings  drought  and  famine  and  starvation 
and  death.” 

“You  don’t  know  anything,”  replied  one  of  the 
boys,  “and  that  is  the  reason  we  laugh.” 

“ That  may  be,”  answered  Choh  Lin,  “ but  I 
mean  to  learn.  I do  know  one  thing,  and  that  is 


IN  TEE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 


199 


that  the  great  men  of  past  ages  say  that  we  must 
not  laugh  at  the  mistakes  of  people,  but  help  cor- 
rect them.” 

“ What  do  you  know  about  the  men  of  past 
ages?”  asked  a boy.  “They  died  long  before  you 
were  born.” 

“Men  die,  but  their  sayings  live,”  replied  Choh 
Lin  ; “ so  our  teacher  told  us.” 

Not  once,  but  often,  did  the  others  try  to  tease 
the  country  boy ; usually  he  was  too  good-natured 
to  become  angry. 

One  of  them  asked  him  one  day,  “ Is  it  true  that 
the  people  at  Tay  Soa  are  so  green  that  before  they 
are  allowed  to  come  to  the  city  the  village  elders 
order  them  to  be  put  out  in  the  sun  for  three  or 
four  days  to  dry?” 

“ Is  it  true,”  asked  Choh  Lin  in  reply,  “ that 
when  city  people  go  out  into  the  country  the  man- 
darins are  obliged  to  show  them  the  cows,  lest  when 
they  see  them  out  iu  the  fields  they  would  think 
them  lions  and  tigers  and  be  frightened  to  death  ?” 

“ Why  is  it  that  you  country  people  are  so  brown- 
skinned, and  we  of  the  city  are  so  white  ?”  asked  one. 

“ I suppose  it  is  for  the  same  reason,”  replied 
Choh  Lin,  “ that  farmers  hide  their  plants  when 
first  set  out  in  the  sun — because  they  are  so  weak.” 

“Do  you  think  we  city  people  are  weaker  than 
you  in  the  country?”  asked  a boy  indignantly. 

“ I only  answered  Kioug’s  question,”  replied 
Choh  Lin  quietly. 


200 


CHOH  LIN. 


“ If  we  are  weak,”  spoke  Kiong,  “ we  are  strong 
enough  to  buy  all  the  good  things  and  sell  them  for 
the  benefit  of  the  country  people,  who  otherwise 
would  have  nothing  but  what  they  raise  on  the 
land.” 

“ I can  tell  why  country  people  are  all  brown,” 
said  another  boy  : “ they  are  so  homely  that  the  sun 
is  ashamed  to  see  them,  so  it  paints  their  faces 
brown,  and  some  almost  black.” 

“ Perhaps  that  is  the  reason,”  replied  Choh  Lin, 
“ yet  the  sun  is  willing  to  look  into  the  faces  of  coun- 
try people.  But  because  the  city  people  are  so  full 
of  trickery  and  dishonesty  he  turns  away  from  them 
and  allows  them  to  grow  pale.” 

“ We  are  no  more  dishonest  in  the  city  than  you 
in  the  country,”  said  the  boy  angrily.  “You  bring 
stale  eggs  to  the  city  and  sell  them  for  fresh,  and 
old  fowls  for  young  chickens.  Then  you  fill  their 
craws  with  wet  sand,  so  that  we  buy  a pound  or  two 
of  sand  for  the  same  price  that  we  pay  for  chicken- 
meat.” 

“ I know  that  country  people  are  not  always  hon- 
est,” answered  Choh  Lin,  “ but  they  must  cheat  to 
try  to  keep  near  their  city  brothers.  Yet  it  is  too 
bad  to  see  that  the  country  people  are  falling  so  far 
behind  that  they  are  losing  sight  of  their  friends  in 
the  city.  We  cannot  learn  such  things  as  quickly 
as  you.  Cheating  is  like  fire:  it  goes  slowly  among 
green  things,  but  eats  up  everything  that  is  dry.” 

The  first  morning  of  school,  when  the  teacher 


IN  THE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 


201 


prayed,  Clioh  Lin  at  once  bowed  his  head  and  put 
his  hands  before  his  face.  The  next  morning,  look- 
ing up  a moment  at  the  others  before  closing  his 
eyes,  he  saw  that  some  heads  were  not  bowed. 
While  there  were  not  a few  who  sat  with  faces  cov- 
ered by  their  hands,  others  were  looking  around  the 
room,  and  two  or  three  were  whispering.  He  did 
not  know  which  was  the  right  way  for  boys  to  act, 
nor  did  he  dare  ask.  He  wanted  to  worship  as  boys 
should,  and,  thinking  over  the  matter  for  a while, 
determined  to  watch,  and  the  boys  that  seemed  to 
be  the  best  he  believed  to  be  the  ones  who  took  the 
right  way  to  pray.  He  soon  learned  that  those  who 
sat  with  bowed  heads  and  listened  to  the  teacher’s 
prayer  were  the  safe  ones  to  follow. 

He  learned  how  to  act  not  only  during  time  of 
prayer,  but  at  all  times,  and  gradually  his  “green- 
ness ” passed  away.  But  he  did  not  lose  the  hearty 
good-nature  and  happy  boyishness  of  the  country, 
though  he  became  as  polished  as  any  in  the  school. 
He  was  really  polished : soft  things  may  be  made 
smooth,  but  it  is  the  hard  and  the  solid  only  that 
can  be  polished.  Choh  Lin  had  some  of  this  hard 
grit  in  his  character,  and  the  teacher,  as  well  as 
the  missionaries,  saw  that  he  would  not  only  bear 
polishing,  but  that  it  would  be  worth  while  to 
do  it. 

Gradually  he  won  the  respect  of  his  teacher  and 
the  missionaries.  While  most  of  the  boys  learned 
to  like  him,  others  became  jealous  and  tried  to  annoy 


202 


CHOH  LIN. 


him  long  after  the  rest  gave  up  teasing  him  about  the 
country.  These  accused  him  of  making  presents  to 
the  teacher  to  win  his  favor.  Choh  Lin  had  made 
a short  visit  to  Tay  Soa  after  being  some  months  in 
school,  and  brought  several  presents  from  the  coun- 
try for  his  friends  and  the  teacher.  Iu  vain  did 
Choh  Lin  deny  that  he  had  done  this  to  gain  favors 
from  the  teacher ; it  was  enough  for  the  few  that  he 
had  given  him  presents.  The  boy  said  that  it  was 
their  duty  to  show  respect  to  their  teacher,  and  that 
was  all  his  present  was  meant  for.  The  great  diffi- 
culty with  these  boys  was  that  they  were  too  lazy  to 
study,  and  did  not  like  to  hear  Choh  Lin  praised 
for  success  and  themselves  blamed  for  not  doing' 
well.  More  than  that,  they  did  not  like  to  see  the 
missionaries  take  so  much  more  notice  of  this  coun- 
try boy  than  of  themselves.  Their  dislike  in  time 
became  almost  hate,  and  they  were  eager  to  find 
something  against  the  boy. 

One  day,  as  he  was  coming  out  of  the  schoolroom, 
some  one  behind  pushed  him  against  another  in 
front.  That  one,  Ivok,  turned  angrily  and  struck 
Choh  Lin,  saying  as  he  did  so,  “ You  green  country 
boy,  cannot  you  come  out  of  school  without  trying 
to  push  others  over?” 

The  blow  was  so  unexpected  that  Choh  Lin, 
without  taking  time  to  think,  struck  back,  and  re- 
ceived a blow  in  return.  This  would  have  led  to  a 
fight  had  not  the  teacher  heard  the  disturbance  and 
come  to  the  door.  He  was  surprised  to  see  his  fa- 


IN  THE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 


203 


vorite  pupil  striking  another,  and  sharply  rebuked 
Choh  Lin.  Too  much  confused  to  reply,  the  boy 
walked  away.  This  gave  those  unfriendly  to  him 
an  opportunity  to  say  unkind  things  for  the  teach- 
er’s ears. 

Choh  Lin  saw  that  he  had  lost  favor  with  the 
teacher,  and  feared  that  the  missionaries,  if  they 
heard  of  the  trouble,  would  send  him  away  from 
school.  He  wanted  to  explain  to  his  teacher  and 
beg  him  not  to  tell  the  missionaries,  but  dared  not. 
He  resolved,  however,  that  he  would  not  strike  any 
one  again,  no  matter  how  great  the  provocation. 

Some  time  after  this  the  teacher’s  pen  and  also 
some  papers  from  his  desk  were  missing;  among  the 
papers  was  a record  of  misbehavior  of  some  of  the 
scholars.  Choh  Lin  happened  to  be  absent  from 
the  school  the  day  that  the  loss  was  discovered.  All 
the  other  scholars  denied  having  been  to  the  teach- 
er’s desk,  and  said  that  they  had  seen  nothing  of 
either  pen  or  papers.  The  teacher  determined  to 
find  out  if  any  one  had  taken  the  pen  and  paper,  and 
examined  the  desk  of  each  boy.  He  found  nothing 
of  the  missing  record,  but  did  find  some  of  the 
paper  and  the  pen  at  Choh  Lin’s  place.  The  teach- 
er was  greatly  troubled  at  this  discovery,  though  he 
said  very  little  about  it  to  the  scholars.  They, 
however,  had  seen  him  take  the  pen  and  papers 
from  Choh  Lin’s  desk.  The  good  man  hardly 
knew  whether  to  tell  the  missionaries  or  to  wait 
and  have  a talk  first  with  the  boy.  He  waited  un- 


204 


CHOH  LIN. 


til  the  next  day,  determined  to  give  Choh  Lin  a 
chance  to  explain  before  telling  the  missionaries. 

Choh  Lin  was  at  school  early  the  next  day,  aud 
the  teacher  asked  him  about  the  pen  and  papers. 
When  told  where  they  had  been  found,  the  boy  re- 
plied, “ An  enemy  has  done  this.  I have  not  taken 
the  pen  or  the  papers.  Why  should  I ? The  mis- 
sionaries are  good  to  invite  me  to  their  school ; 
should  I repay  them  by  stealing  from  the  teacher 
they  so  kindly  furnish,  and  who  has  himself  been 
so  kind  to  me?  More  than  that,  the  Lord  in  the 
Ten  Commandments  says,  ‘ Thou  shalt  not  steal.’  I 
am  trying  to  obey  and  serve  that  Lord  ; why  should 
I,  then,  prove  myself  so  unfaithful  to  him  ?” 

The  honest  look  of  the  boy  would  have  convinced 
almost  any  one  but  a Chinaman  that  Choh  Lin  was 
telling  the  truth.  But  the  teacher  was  so  used  to 
the  deceitful  ways  of  his  people,  and  knew  so  well 
how  a look  of  honesty  can  be  assumed  by  them, 
that  he  was  not  convinced  of  the  boy’s  innocence. 
“ We  will  see,”  he  said.  “ It  is  almost  time  to  be- 
gin school ; we  will  talk  of  it  some  other  time.” 

“ Please  do  not  tell  the  pastors,”  pleaded  Choh 
Lin;  “ they  will  drive  me  from  the  school;  then  I 
must  go  back  to  my  native  village  to  live  again 
among  the  heathen.  There  I cannot  learn  to  read, 
nor  are  there  any  Christians  with  whom  I may  wor- 
ship. There  is  no  Sabbath  there,  no  Bible,  no  God. 
Please  don’t  send  me  back ; I want  to  be  a Chris- 
tian. I did  not  steal.” 


IN  THE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 


205 


The  kind-hearted  teacher  was  almost  convinced 
of  Choh  Lin’s  honesty,  and  agreed  to  say  nothing 
about  the  matter  to  the  missionaries.  Some  of  the 
scholars,  knowing  where  the  pen  and  papers  had 
been  found,  were  ready  to  believe  Choh  Lin  a thief, 
though  some  insisted  that  his  enemies  had  put  the 
articles  there,  and  they  were  ready  to  say  who  had 
done  it,  too. 

A few  days  after  this  the  chapel-keeper,  who  also 
took  care  of  the  schoolroom,  overheard  some  boys 
say  that  Choh  Lin  had  stolen  the  teacher’s  pen  and 
some  papers  and  hid  them  in  the  desk. 

“What!”  said  he,  “Choh  Lin  stolen  pen  and 
papers?  That  cannot  be.  He  is  an  inquirer  and 
don’t  steal.”  When  told  the  whole  story,  the 
chapel-keeper,  who  was  a great  friend  of  Choh  Lin, 
said,  “I  can  tell  all  about  that.  I found  some 
pieces  of  paper  and  a pen  on  the  floor  one  night ; 
the  paper  was  by  a mouse-hole ; perhaps  the  mouse 
had  carried  the  rest  into  his  hole.  I picked  them 
up  and  put  them  by  Choh  Lin’s  seat.  I saw  that 
he  had  no  pen,  and  thought  if  this  were  not  his  he 
would  see  that  the  owner  got  it.  He  is  a boy  whom 
we  all  can  trust.  You  will  find  it  out  some  day, 
too,  and  be  sorry  that  you  called  him  a thief  now.” 

The  chapel-keeper’s  explanation  was  given  to  the 
teacher  and  to  the  scholars,  and  Choh  Lin  was  again 
in  favor.  Even  those  who  did  not  like  him  could 
find  nothing  now  to  say  against  him.  His  kindness 
and  readiness  to  help  others  gradually  won  almost 


206 


CHOH  LIN. 


all  of  the  scholars  as  his  warm  friends;  and  when 
they  learned  that  his  father  had  once  been  rich  they 
were  the  more  ready  to  respect  and  honor  him. 
Yet  a few  of  the  boys  watched  him  closely,  not  so 
much  to  find  fault  in  him  as  to  keep  him  from 
seeing  and  telling  of  their  faults. 

It  has  already  been  said  that  few  vices  are  so 
common  in  China  as  gambling : boys  as  well  as 
men  are  passionately  fond  of  it.  They  are  ready 
to  try  games  of  chance  for  almost  anything.  Some 
would  probably  even  be  willing  to  take  a chance  or 
two  at  a church  fair  if  they  lived  in  America.  One 
day  after  school  a boy  appeared  in  the  street  with  a 
quantity  of  preserved  fruit.  He  had  also  a bam- 
boo-cup, or  tube  made  of  bamboo-wood,  open  at  one 
end,  the  other  closed  by  the  joint.  In  this  cup  were 
twenty  or  twenty-five  small  splints  of  bamboo,  pro- 
jecting out  of  the  cup.  These  were  numbered  on 
the  ends  which  were  hidden.  He  invited  the 
school-boys  to  try  their  fortune  for  some  of  his 
fruit.  By  paying  a single  cash,  he  said,  they  might 
get  the  value  of  five  cash  in  fruit  if  they  drew  a 
lucky  number  from  the  cup.  When  the  boys  saw 
how  much  fruit  might  be  got  for  one  cash,  several 
were  eager  to  try.  The  owner,  after  shaking  the 
cup  with  the  splints,  reached  it  out  to  the  boy  who 
gave  him  one  cash.  The  boy  drew  one  of  the 
splints,  but  the  number  was  a wrong  one,  and  the 
owner  of  the  fruit  said,  “ You  will  have  to  try 
again ; that  didn’t  draw  anything.” 


IN  THE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 


207 


One  of  the  other  boys  handed  a cash,  drew  a stick, 
and  the  number  proved  to  be  the  right  one. 

“ Here  are  your  fruits,”  said  the  owner,  giving 
him  five  times  as  much  as  one  cash  could  buy  else- 
where. 

The  lucky  purchaser,  munching  his  fruit  and 
looking  disdainfully  on  the  others  who  had  not 
dared  to  venture,  said,  “ See  what  I got  for  a single 
cash  ! You  boys  might  have  fruit  in  plenty  if  you 
were  not  afraid  to  try  your  luck.” 

His  success  induced  others  to  try,  and  many  cash 
slipped  quickly  into  the  pocket  of  the  fruit-seller. 
While  a few  drew  prizes,  the  most  of  the  cash  were 
given  for  nothing. 

“Why  don’t  you  try  it?”  said  Kok  to  Choh  Lin. 
“Don’t  you  like  fruit?” 

“ Yes,”  replied  he,  “ but  I don’t  want  to  get  it  in 
that  way.” 

“Why  not?”  was  asked. 

“ Because  it  is  gambling,”  answered  Choh  Lin. 

“It  isn’t  gambling,” said  one;  “it  is  only  buying 
fruit  and  taking  the  chances  of  getting  it.” 

“It  is  gambling,”  spoke  another,  “and  just  the 
kind  we  school-boys  are  forbidden  to  engage  in.” 

When  the  fruit-seller  heard  that  they  were  school- 
boys belonging  to  the  foreign  school,  he  hurried 
away,  lest  the  foreigners  should  complain  to  the 
mandarins  of  his  keeping  a fruit-gambling  stand. 
He  knew  very  well  that  it  would  take  all  of  his 
gains  to  buy  off  the  mandarins,  who  would  be  glad 


208 


CHOH  LIN. 


enough  to  arrest  a boy  for  promoting  gambling. 
They  would  thus  seem  to  be  very  active  in  having 
. the  laws  respected ; and  yet  those  very  mandarins 
would  probably  join  in  gambling  with  men  if  they 
could  do  it  without  being  discovered. 

The  next  day  at  school  there  was  some  talk 
among  the  boys  about  gambling  for  fruit.  The 
teacher  overheard  this.  At  noon  he  called  Choh 
Lin  to  him  and  asked,  “ Were  any  of  you  boys 
gambling  yesterday  ?” 

Choh  Lin,  unable  to  say  no,  unwilling  to  say  yes, 
not  caring  to  tell  tales  of  the  others,  was  silent. 
The  teacher  saw  this  silence,  and  understood  it  to 
mean  not  only  the  guilt  of  the  other  boys,  but  of 
Choh  Lin. 

“ So  you  have  been  gambling  ?”  said  he.  “ Do  you 
not  know  it  is  against  the  rules  of  the  school,  and 
that  it  is  a sin  against  the  Church  and  the  law  of 
God  ? You  are  an  inquirer  and  wish  to  be  a Chris- 
tian. Don’t  think  that  you  can  be  one  and  gamble 
too.  The  Bible  says  you  cannot  serve  God  and 
Mammon ; and  gambling  is  the  worst  kind  of 
Mam  mon-worsh  i p.” 

“ I have  not  gambled,”  replied  the  boy,  “ and  do 
want  to  be  a Christian ; I am  trying  to  be  one  and 
obey  God.” 

“Who  of  the  boys  were  gambling?”  asked  the 
teacher,  “ for  I see  that  there  has  been  gambling 
done.” 

Questioned  closely,  Choh  Lin  at  last  told  about 


IN  THE  MISSION-SCHOOL. 


209 


the  gambling,  and  he  would  not  have  been  like  the 
Chinese  if  he  had  steadily  refused  to  tell  who  did 
try  their  chances. 

That  afternoon  the  teacher,  after  a serious  talk 
about  the  crime  aud  sin  of  gambling  before  the 
whole  school,  questioned  the  boys  as  to  who  had 
been  engaged  in  it.  He  asked  the  guiltv  ones  so 
closely  that,  though  some  denied  and  others  con- 
fessed, all  felt  sure  he  knew  who  some  of  the  guilty 
ones  were,  and  some  were  certain  that  Choh  Lin 
had  told.  The  gamblers  were  punished,  and  they 
blamed  Choh  Lin  for  it.  For  a while  this  made 
him  less  popular,  but  the  feeling  wore  away.  Tell- 
ing tales  is  not  despised  in  China  as  it  is  with  us. 
When  the  boys  were  told  how  the  teacher  had  found 
out,  some  asked  Choh  Lin  why  he  did  not  tell  a 
falsehood  about  it ; others  said  that  he  had  done 
right ; and  there  the  matter  ended. 

14 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


TRYING  TO  BE  A CHRISTIAN. 

WHEN  in  his  native  village  Choh  Lin  thought 
himself  a Christian.  He  had  given  up  wor- 
shiping idols  and  the  spirits  of  the  dead,  prayed  to 
the  God  of  the  foreigners  and  kept  the  Sabbath 
day ; so  he  thought  himself  as  good  a Christian  as 
anybody.  His  mother  had  tried  to  teach  him  that 
he  and  all  others  are  sinners,  but  since  the  Chinese 
language  has  no  words  that  give  the  Bible  idea  of 
sin  and  sinners,  the  boy  had  very  little  notion  of 
sin.  He  supposed  that  he  had  merely  displeased 
the  foreign  God  by  choosing  Chinese  gods,  and  now 
that  he  had  changed  gods  he  thought  all  had  been 
made  right.  Yet  he  did  not  feel  satisfied.  That 
first  Sabbath  in  the  mission-chapel  had  opened  his 
eyes  to  many  things  of  wh'ch  he  had  never  thought. 
He  had  been  like  one  walking  by  the  light  of  a lan- 
tern in  a dark  night,  seeing  a few  things  near,  but 
only  darkness  beyond.  Then  the  moon,  rising, 
showed  many  other  things,  but  all  dimly.  The 
teaching  his  mother  had  given  was  like  the  lantern- 
light,  and  that  of  the  chapel  was  as  moonlight. 
Choh  Lin  was  beginning  to  see  much,  but  dimly. 
210 


TRYING  TO  BE  A CHRISTIAN. 


211 


His  mother  had  told  him  that  there  was  only  one 
God,  and  yet  that  there  was  a Father  and  a Son  and 
a Holy  Spirit.  How  there  could  be  only  one,  and 
yet  three,  he  did  not  understand.  He  had  learned 
from  her  that  God  would  not  have  any  to  worship 
him  who  served  other  gods.  Yet  he  did  not  under- 
stand that  God  wanted  not  outward  but  heart  wor- 
ship. Mrs.  Lee  had  told  him  that  he  must  trust 
in  Jesus,  the  Son  of  God,  but  Choh  Lin  could  not 
understand  this.  His  great  need  was  to  know  him- 
self— to  know  what  a sinner  he  was  and  how  help- 
less without  an  almighty  Saviour.  Hot  less  did  he 
need  to  know  God,  and  that  he  is  so  pure  and  holy 
that  he  cannot  accept  the  service  of  a sinner  who 
does  not  approach  him  through  Christ. 

Choh  Lin  learned  rapidly  that  first  day  in  the 
chapel,  but  still  more  did  he  learn  at  the  inquiry- 
meeting. He  was  beginning  to  see  the  darkness  in 
which  he  had  lived.  How  the  light  came  more  and 
more  brightly,  and  Choh  Lin  felt  more  and  more 
thankful  that  he  was  allowed  to  see,  and  he  was 
anxious  to  see  more.  His  prayer  that  the  Holy 
Spirit  would  show  him  his  sins  was  answered,  and 
what  the  language  of  his  country  failed  to  tell  the 
Spirit  made  known  to  his  heart.  He  began  to  see 
what  sin  is — how  it  blinds  the  eyes  of  the  soul  and 
hardens  the  heart  and  unfits  it  to  enjoy  good.  He 
saw,  too,  how  it  stains  the  soul,  so  that  it  is  unfit 
for  God’s  company  and  service,  and  unfit  to  enjoy 
and  unable  to  receive  the  blessings  that  God  offers. 


232 


CHOH  LIN. 


He  saw  that  the  sinful  soul  is  not  only  bad,  but  a 
place  in  which  bad  things  grow — that  evil  is  con- 
stantly springing  up  there  as  weeds  in  a garden. 
He  saw,  too,  what  sin  had  done  for  him  and  made 
him  do  against  God.  When  he  thought  of  the 
many  times  he  had  offended  God  and  done  the 
things  that  even  his  own  heart  told  him  he  ought 
not  to  do,  he  began  to  understand  what  a sinner  he 
had  been. 

He  did  not  long  need  to  pray  to  be  shown  his 
sins.  They  arose  all  around  him ; quietly  as  fog 
appears,  so  they  appeared.  From  fog  they  changed 
to  clouds — black  clouds,  loaded  with  rain  and  wind 
and  thunder.  What  if  they  should  burst?  In  a 
moment  they  would  overwhelm  him.  What  should 
he  do?  where  could  he  go?  Helpless,  he  was  al- 
most hopeless.  In  fear  and  distress  he  prayed  for 
mercy.  He  felt  the  need  of  a Saviour  now,  and  an 
almighty  one.  Earnestly  he  prayed  the  prayer 
given  by  the  missionary,  to  be  shown  Christ  as  his 
Saviour. 

That  prayer,  too,  was  answered.  It  was  daybreak 
now,  and  daylight  came  swiftly.  Full  light  shone 
into  the  soul  of  the  Chinese  boy.  The  bright  sun 
rose.  Jesus,  the  Sun  of  righteousness,  sent  his  glo- 
rious light  into  Choh  Lin’s  soul,  and,  lo  ! the  dark 
clouds  of  sin  vanished.  No  thunder-peal  nor  light- 
ning-flash nor  storm  was  near;  instead,  all  was  peace 
and  beauty.  How  happy  Choh  Lin  was ! He 
seemed  in  a new  world.  It  was  a new  sun  that 


TRYING  TO  BE  A CHRISTIAN. 


213 


shone  over  head,  and  the  clouds  in  the  sky  were 
more  beautiful  than  he  had  ever  seen  them,  while 
the  gray  rocks  of  the  hills  of  Amoy  appeared  to  be 
set  in  green  and  gold.  The  far-olf  hills  were  the 
same  that  he  had  often  seen,  but  never  had  they 
been  so  beautiful.  He  could  now  sit  by  the  hour 
and  admii'e  them.  Now  they  were  God’s  hills; 
those  rocks  were  Gods  rocks ; the  clouds  aud  sun 
were  his  too ; and  that  God  was  his  heavenly 
Father,  the  one  who  loved  him — so  loved  him  that 
he  gave  his  only-begotten  Son  to  die  that  he  might 
live.  How  delightful  the  thought  that  the  great 
God  loved  him  and  had  forgiven  his  sins ! More 
than  that,  God  would  take  care  of  him  always,  and 
after  a while  take  him  to  live  in  heaven. 

Happy  Choh  Lin!  He  had  found  Christ,  and 
his  soul  was  full  of  joy.  He  had  heard  of  the  love 
of  God  from  the  first  time  his  mother  had  been  to 
the  chapel,  but  not  until  now  did  he  understand  it. 
He  had  heard  of  men  in  China  who  had  sold  them- 
selves to  die  that  they  might  get  money  to  support 
their  families;  he  had  heard  of  great  men,  too,  who 
had  given  their  lives  for  the  good  of  the  people; 
but  that  was  unlike  the  love  of  God  in  Christ. 
Those  men  died  for  their  own,  for  those  who  loved 
them,  but  Jesus  died  for  his  enemies.  Those  were 
only  men ; Jesus  was  God.  They  died,  and  then 
did  no  more;  Jesus  died,  but  that  was  only  the  be- 
ginning of  what  he  did.  He  was  always  trying  to 
save  men.  He  seemed  never  to  grow  weary  of 


214 


CHOH  LIN. 


waiting  and  trying  to  save.  It  was  a new  story  of 
love,  a wonderful  story,  and  never  grew  old. 

Choh  Lin  wondered  that  others  did  not  love  to 
listen  to  it,  nor  could  he  understand  how  the  people 
could  hear  it  again  and  again  and  yet  not  care  about 
the  Saviour.  He  did  not  think  that  the  Holy  Spirit 
had  made  him  see  his  need,  and  then  had  led  him 
to  Christ,  and  was  now  making  him  see  so  much  to 
love  in  the  Saviour.  People  who  see  nothing  in 
Jesus  to  love  often  wonder  why  Christians  think  so 
much  of  him.  This  is  not  because  Christians  are 
blinded,  but  because  others  are.  God’s  people  never 
see  anything  in  Jesus  that  is  not  there,  but  others 
fail  to  know  and  love  Christ  because  they  are  blind 
and  their  hearts  are  closed  to  him.  A blind  man 
cannot  see  beauties,  no  matter  how  plain  they  are ; 
but  if  he  does  not  see  them,  that  is  no  proof  that 
the  beauties  do  not  exist;  it  only  proves  him  blind. 
We  pass  by  strangers  every  day  without  a thought 
of  love,  yet  when  we  become  acquainted  with  those 
same  strangers  we  may  love  them  with  all  our 
hearts.  So  people  are  blind  to  Christ’s  beauty  be- 
cause to  them  he  is  a stranger.  When  the  Holy 
Spirit  opens  their  eyes  and  makes  them  acquainted 
with  Christ,  then  they  love  him  as  they  can  love  no 
other  being. 

Choh  Lin  had  now  found  Christ,  but  did  not 
know  what  difficulties  a Christian  must  meet. 
When  persecuted  in  Tay  Soa  for  being  a worshiper 
of  the  foreigners’  God,  he  longed  to  be  among  Chris- 


TRYING  TO  BE  A CHRISTIAN. 


215 


tiaus.  But  he  did  not  find  everything  as  pleasant 
at  Amoy  as  he  had  hoped.  He  meant  to  live  a 
good  life,  but  found  that  there  are  other  things  than 
outside  persecutions  to  hinder.  In  school  were 
many  little  trials  hard  to  bear;  so  even  in  his  home 
and  among  his  best  friends  he  found  troubles.  Nor 
were  his  troubles  all  from  without.  His  heart  had 
them.  They  seemed  to  live  and  grow  and  multiply 
there.  After  he  learned  in  the  inquiry-meetings 
what  he  needed,  he  thought  that  as  soon  as  he  found 
the  Saviour  all  his  troubles  would  end.  Now  that 
he  had  found  Christ,  he  was  perplexed  to  know  that 
the  difficulties  in  the  way  of  living  a Christian  life 
did  not  disappear.  While  he  had  little  difficulty 
with  his  studies,  he  had  all  the  more  with  the  other 
pupils  of  the  school. 

Then  there  were  troubles  in  the  street.  Boys 
called  him  a green  country  boy,  a foreigner’s  child, 
and  said  that  he  was  obliged  to  leave  his  native  vil- 
lage because  the  people  would  not  have  foreigners’ 
children  there.  It  is  true  that  this  kind  of  perse- 
cution did  not  last,  but  there  was  a trouble  that  did 
not  end,  and  that  was  in  his  own  heart.  Evil 
thoughts  arose;  they  came  just  when  he  least  ex- 
pected them.  Poor  Choh  Lin  ! He  began  to  be- 
lieve himself  a hypocrite.  He  became  at  times 
wretched,  nor  did  he  know  what  to  do.  Again  the 
evil  thoughts  left  him,  and  for  a while  everything 
went  well — so  well  that  he  became  proud  of  him- 
self. He  felt  that  he  was  becoming  very  good, 


216 


CHOH  LIN. 


better  than  other  Christians.  Suddenly  there  would 
come  a change.  Before  he  had  time  to  see  his  dan- 
ger lie  was  guilty  of  some  sin,  and  then  was  as 
wretched  as  he  had  been  proud  before. 

Choh  Lin  learned  before  long  that  his  own  evil 
heart,  aided  by  Satan,  was  the  cause  of  much  of 
this  difficulty.  When  he  learned  how  I’aul  was 
tried  by  the  “ law  in  his  members”  warring  against 
“ the  law  in  his  mind,”  so  that  he  could  not  do  the 
things  he  would,  he  learned  to  be  more  on  his  guard. 
Knowing  now  the  danger,  he  escaped  it  far  oftener 
than  before.  Although  Choh  Lin  did  not  always 
do  the  best  he  knew,  yet  he  did  try  to  do  right,  and 
tried  hard.  Sometimes  his  evil  nature  got  the  better 
of  him,  and  then  came  sad  times  of  repenting. 
However,  he  gained  in  the  resistance  to  evil  habits 
and  temptations.  He  was  regularly  at  the  inquiry- 
meetings,  and  his  answers  to  the  questions  of  the 
missionaries  showed  that  he  was  gaining  in  knowl- 
edge.  The  missionaries  did  not  yet  admit  him  to 
the  membership  of  the  Church  ; they  did  not  feel 
sure  that  he  was  a Christian,  and  thought  it  safer  to 
allow  him  to  wait  than  to  have  him  become  a mem- 
ber too  soon.  The  Chinese  inquirers  learn  so  soon 
to  repeat  from  memory  the  answers  to  the  questions 
at  the  inquiry-meetings  that  the  missionaries  are 
often  uncertain  whether  or  not  they  have  become  true 
Christians,  and  therefore  postpone  admitting  them 
to  the  full  communion  of  the  Church.  This  practice 
of  deferring  admittance  to  church-membership  has 


TRYING  TO  BE  A CHRISTIAN. 


217 


proved  to  be  a wise  one.  The  missionaries  have 
continued  it  only  in  cases  where  it  seems  best. 
But  these  inquirers  are  not  regarded  as  outside  of 
the  Church  family;  instead,  they  are  at  once  taken 
into  many  of  its  privileges  and  receive  special  care 
and  training. 

When  his  mother  was  received  Choh  Lin  also 
wished  to  join  the  Church;  yet,  believing  that  the 
missionaries  knew  best,  he  waited  patiently.  At 
last  the  time  came  when  he  was  to  be  received  into 
the  communion  of  the  Church.  It  was  a happy 
day  to  the  young  Christian.  He  could  now  stand 
before  all  the  world  as  a follower  of  Christ.  Not 
without  prayer  and  a deep  feeling  of  unworthiness 
did  he  come  before  the  officers  of  the  Church  for 
the  final  examination,  and  then  seat  himself  among 
the  members  to  partake  of  the  bread  and  wine. 
How  earnestly  he  listened  to  every  word  of  the 
missionary  ! How  full  of  meaning  to  him  was  that 
communion  service!  He  saw  his  Saviour  in  and 
through  the  whole  service ; it  seemed  as  if  Jesus 
were  really  there  and  saying  to  him,  “ This  is  my 
body  broken  for  you.  This  cup  is  the  new  testa- 
ment in  my  blood,  which  is  shed  for  you.”  The 
soul  of  Choh  Lin  was  communing  with  Jesus,  and 
he  enjoyed  a feast.  As  he  went  away  it  was  not  to 
leave  the  communion  behind  him;  by  it  he  had 
been  drawn  nearer  the  Saviour. 

If  he  had  before  been  careful  not  to  do  anything 
wrong,  lest  he  be  kept  out  of  the  Church,  he  was 


218 


CHOH  LIN. 


even  more  careful  now  lest  he  dishonor  the  Church 
and  his  Saviour.  That  he  did  nothing  wrong  none 
will  suppose — he  certainly  did  fail  to  do  right  many 
times — but  on  the  whole  he  lived  a Christian  life. 
He  was  one  of  the  youngest,  if  not  the  very  young- 
est, member  of  the  Church,  being  only  fifteen  years 
old,  and  because  of  his  youth  was  the  more  closely 
watched  by  Christians,  with  a desire  to  help  him  ; 
and  he  was  as  closely  watched  by  the  heathen,  with 
a desire  to  hinder  him.  His  schoolfellows  were 
ready  to  notice  any  wrong  he  might  do  and  report 
it  to  others.  He  had  not  an  easy  life,  yet  found  a 
strong  Arm  to  help  him  do  right,  and  a loving 
Saviour  to  pity  and  pardon  when  he  did  wrong. 

There  came  to  Clioh  Lin  a trial  that  he  hoped 
had  been  left  at  Tay  Soa.  He  suffered  want.  His 
mother,  who  had  been  able  to  support  one  family  at 
Tay  Soa  from  her  business,  was  not  able  to  support 
two,  even  though  containing  only  the  same  persons. 
It  cost  more  to  live  at  Amoy ; she  had  the  rent  to 
pay,  besides,  in  the  city,  and  Choli  Lin  was  unable 
to  help  by  hunting  fuel  or  food.  Mrs.  Lee,  rather 
than  let  her  mother-in-law  suffer,  often  went  with- 
out food  herself.  Clioh  Lin’s  wants  were  cared  for 
as  well  as  she  was  able,  but  he  was  hungry  many  a 
time.  Sometimes  he  wondered  why  the  Lord  did 
not  send  them  food  as  he  did  to  Elijah,  or  make  an 
abundance  of  a little  as  Christ  did  : but,  again,  he 
felt  that  when  the  Lord  was  ready  their  wants 
would  be  supplied. 


TRYING  TO  RE  A CHRISTIAN. 


219 


Chi  Lap  helped  his  mother  and  brother  a little  in 
their  time  of  need.  His  wages  in  the  mission  fam- 
ily were  more  than  he  needed  to  supply  his  wants, 
and  he  gladly  gave  them  all  he  could  spare.  He 
did  not  remain  long  in  the  mission  family.  A mer- 
chant offered  him  much  larger  wages,  and  he  ac- 
cepted the  position  after  talking  the  matter  over 
with  the  missionary.  He  now  hired  a small  house 
on  the  island  of  Ko-long-su,  opposite  and  near 
Amoy,  where  he,  his  mother  and  brother  lived  in 
comfort.  Choh  Lin  now  could  see  that  God  had 
only  tried  their  faith,  and  felt  that  he  could  not  be 
thankful  enough  for  prosperity. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


BUSINESS  OFFERS. 

DURING  their  time  of  poverty  in  Amoy,  Choh 
Lin  continued  at  school.  At  times  he  talked 
to  his  mother  and  brother  of  trying  to  earn  a living, 
but  they  urged  him  to  keep  at  school,  promising  to 
do  their  part  now  in  supporting  him,  and  saying 
that  when  he  became  learned  his  turn  would  come 
to  help  them.  So  anxious  was  Mrs.  Lee  that  he 
should  continue  studying  that  she  would  have 
starved  herself  rather  than  see  him  go  into  business. 
She  had  a purpose  in  all  this,  though  she  kept  it  hid- 
den. She  wished  to  see  her  youngest  son  a learned 
man,  not  that  he  might  become  an  honored  scholar, 
but  that  he  might  preach  the  gospel  that  had  brought 
light  and  gladness  to  her  dark  soul.  For  this  she 
hoped  and  prayed,  and  for  this  she  was  ready  to 
make  any  sacrifice. 

Choh  Lin  liked  to  study,  nor  had  he  lost  the  de- 
sire of  being  learned  that  he  might  become  rich ; 
but  there  had  arisen  in  his  heart  another  desire : it 
was  to  be  learned  that  he  might  do  good.  The  love 
of  Christ  was  gradually  conquering  all  other  love, 
and  making  the  young  Christian  think  more  of 
220 


BUSINESS  OFFERS. 


221 


others  than  of  self.  But  if  any  thoughts  of  be- 
coming a regular  preacher  of  the  gospel  entered  the 
mind  of  Choh  Lin,  they  did  not  stay  there  long  at 
a time. 

Though  living  on  the  island  of  Ko-long-su  and 
going  to  and  from  school,  he  saw  much  of  the  city 
and  people  of  Amoy  and  learned  much  about  the 
foreign  merchants  there.  He  saw  Chi  Lap  in  the 
employ  of  one  and  making  money  rapidly,  and 
could  not  help  wishing  to  be  in  the  employ  of  for- 
eigners too.  Chi  Lap  was  soon  promoted,  and  had 
an  increase  of  salary.  When  he  talked  to  his 
younger  brother  of  money-making,  Choh  Lin  could 
not  keep  down  the  longing  to  be  in  business.  He 
had  already  far  more  education  than  his  older 
brother,  and  could  not  help  thinking  that  he  might 
soon  receive  a larger  salary  than  Chi  Lap.  About 
this  time  one  of  the  missionaries  otfered  Choh  Lin 
a place  in  his  family  as  servant  at  good  wages.  The 
boy  wanted  to  accept  at  once,  but  there  arose  in  his 
heart  the  feeling  that  if  he  did  he  would  not  be 
able  to  do  so  much  good  as  he  might  by  continuing 
at  school.  This,  together  with  the  urging  of  his 
mother  and  brother  that  he  stay  at  school,  made 
him  refuse  the  otfer. 

Hot  long  after  a foreign  physician  in  Amoy,  who 
had  noticed  the  bright  boy,  offered  him  a place  not 
only  as  errand-boy,  but  as  an  assistant  in  his  office. 
The  doctor  told  him  that  he  would  pay  good  wages, 
far  more  than  he  could  earn  at  other  work.  When 


222 


CHOH  LIN. 


Choh  Lin  seemed  unwilling  to  accept,  the  doctor 
offered  him  twenty  dollars  a month  as  salary. 
Twenty  dollars  a month!  This  was  more  money 
than  the  boy  had  ever  owned  at  one  time,  and  far 
more  than  he  dared  hope  to  earn  for  years  to  come. 
He  could  hardly  believe  his  ears,  and  asked  again. 

“ Yes,  I will  give  you  twenty  dollars  a month/’ 
said  the  doctor.  “That  is  more  than  six  times  as 
much  as  a workingman  can  earn  ; and  I will  give 
you  that  to  begin  with ; then  as  soon  as  you  learn  the 
business  I will  increase  the  salary.  You  are  just 
the  kind  of  boy  I want.  Some  day  you  may  be- 
come a foreign  doctor  yourself,  and  then  you  can 
make  your  fortune.” 

Choh  Lin  could  hardly  give  any  answer.  The 
offer  was  so  large  that  it  seemed  impossible  to  be- 
lieve it  real.  The  doctor,  however,  convinced  him 
that  he  was  in  earnest,  yet  gave  the  boy  time  to 
think  of  it  and  to  consult  the  missionaries  about 
it. 

As  money  in  China  will  buy  about  twelve  times 
as  much  as  in  America,  this  offer  was  equal  to  near- 
ly three  thousand  dollars  a year  here.  It  was  a 
great  temptation  to  a boy  who  had  lived  in  poverty 
and  almost  starved  for  lack  of  money  to  buy  food. 
Eagerly  he  hastened  home  to  tell  of  the  wonderful 
offer,  expecting,  of  course,  that  his  mother  and 
brother  would  urge  his  acceptance. 

Chi  Lap  was  pleased  and  proud  of  his  younger 
brother,  yet  could  not  help  showing  his  disappoint- 


BUSINESS  OFFERS. 


223 


ment  as  he  said,  “Of  course  the  little  brother  must 
accept.  There  is  a fortune  in  it.  Such  offers  do 
not  come  often ; yet  I wanted  to  see  him  a learned 
man  first.” 

“ I do  not  see  why  he  should  accept,”  said  Mrs. 
Lee.  “ You  are  earning  enough  to  support  us  all 
now;  we  have  enough  to  eat  and  drink  and  wear. 
I do  not  wish  to  see  Choh  Lin  go  into  business  yet. 
Let  him  wait  until  he  has  been  longer  at  school.” 

“Mother,  I have  been  a long  time  at  school,  and 
can  read  and  write  well;  why  should  I not  begin 
now  to  earn  money?  You  and  Chi  Lap  have  taken 
care  of  me  so  long  that  it  is  time  for  me  to  earn 
something.  I may  never  get  so  good  an  offer 
again.”  So  spoke  Choh  Lin  as  he  wistfully  looked 
from  Chi  Lap  to  his  mother. 

“ There  is  a better  offer  waiting  your  answer,” 
replied  the  mother. 

“A  better  offer!  What  is  it?”  inquired  Choh 
Lin  eagerly.  “ I have  heard  of  nothing  else.” 

“ It  is  this,”  replied  Mrs.  Lee,  slowly  quoting 
from  the  Bible  as  well  as  she  could  remember : 
“‘There  is  no  man  that  shall  leave  house  and  land 
and  father  and  mother,  for  my  sake  and  the  king- 
dom of  heaven,  who  shall  not  receive  in  this  life  a 
hundred-fold  more,  and  in  the  world  to  come  life 
everlasting.’  There,”  continued  she,  “ is  the  offer 
of  our  Lord  to  you,  Choh  Lin.  It  has  been  wait- 
ing for  you  to  accept.  It  is  a great  deal  larger  than 
that  of  the  physician.  Which  will  you  take?” 


224 


CHOH  LIN. 


Suddenly  a glimpse  of  the  meaning  of  his  mother 
flashed  on  the  boy’s  mind,  and  he  asked,  “ Do  you 
mean  that  I must  give  up  this  good  otfer  for  Christ’s 
sake,  mother?” 

“ Yes,”  was  the  reply. 

“ But  how  must  I do  it  for  him  ? Cannot  I serve 
him  as  well  in  the  doctor’s  office  as  in  any  other 
way?  Besides,  shall  I not  have  plenty  of  money 
with  which  to  do  good?” 

“You  cannot  preach  the  gospel  in  the  doctor’s 
office.” 

“ Preach  the  gospel !”  spoke  Choh  Lin  in  sur- 
prise. “ How  did  you  know  that  I thought  of  be- 
coming a preacher?” 

“I  did  not  know  it,  but,  my  boy” — here  the 
mother’s  voice  trembled — “ I have  prayed  that  you 
might  become  a preacher.  For  that  I have  hoped 
and  struggled — yes,  and  have  starved  myself  too — 
that  you  might  keep  at  school  to  prepare  for  that 
work.  The  Lord  has  been  very  good.  He  has 
spared  both  of  my  boys  to  me ; he  has  sent  the 
teachers  to  tell  me  of  the  life-giving  God  and  of  a 
Saviour;  and  I have  wanted  to  give  one  of  my  boys 
back  to  his  service.  The  Lord  has  done  so  much 
for  us  that  I hoped  we  could  spare  one  of  our  fam- 
ily for  his  service,  to  prove  that  we  are  willing  to 
do  something  for  his  cause.” 

“ Do  you  mean  that  Choh  Lin  is  to  become  a 
preacher?”  asked  Chi  Lap. 

“Yes;  I have  hoped  and  prayed  that  he  may,” 


BUSINESS  OFFERS. 


225 

was  the  mother’s  answer.  “ We  have  found  the 
Saviour,  and  it  seems  but  just  to  our  people  that 
we  should  do  something  to  tell  them  of  a Saviour 
too.” 

“ But  I can  give  money  to  educate  and  support 
another  preacher,”  replied  Choh  Lin. 

“ Where  is  the  man?”  asked  Mrs.  Lee.  “ While 
we  are  waiting  to  find  him  many  may  perish  with- 
out hearing  of  the  Saviour;  but  Choh  Lin  might 
tell  them.  Yes,  he  might,  only  he  wished  to  earn 
money.  While  he  was  earning  money  the  souls 
were  lost.  ‘ What  shall  a man  give  in  exchange 
for  his  soul  ?’  ” 

Choh  Lin  was  silent,  and  Mrs.  Lee,  after  a few 
moments’  waiting,  continued:  “ Wait,  my  son  ; don’t 
decide  just  yet.  Think  a while  of  what  the  Saviour 
did  for  you,  and  ask  what  he  would  have  you  do 
for  him.  Pray  to  be  shown  the  way.  It  may  be 
that  I am  wrong;  the  Lord  knows  best  what  you 
can  do  for  him.  Look  to  him,  and  he  will  show 
the  way.  Whatever  you  do,  first  ask  the  mission- 
aries about  it.” 

His  mother’s  talk  was  so  earnest  that  Choh  Lin 
could  not  help  thinking  of  what  she  said.  He 
prayed  as  well  as  thought  over  the  offer;  he  asked 
the  missionaries,  too,  but  he  asked  with  such  an  un- 
certain tone,  as  if  himself  half  decided  to  continue 
at  school,  that  they  at  once  advised  him  to  go  on 
with  his  studies. 

Hardly  daring  to  go  against  his  mother’s  earnest 

15 


226 


CHOH  LIN. 


wish,  and  more  than  half  convinced  that  she  was 
right,  Choh  Lin  decided  to  decline  the  offer  of  the 
doctor.  At  times  afterward  he  felt  that  he  had  done 
right,  and  at  others  felt  sorry  that  he  had  refused  so 
good  an  opportunity.  He  did  not  yet  see  clearly 
his  duty  to  preach  the  gospel;  rather,  he  could  not 
at  once  give  up  the  idea  of  becoming  a rich  man. 
The  spirit  of  self-denial  for  Christ  was  gradually 
taking  possession  of  his  heart. 

This  was  not  the  only  offer  that  Choh  Lin  had. 
He  was  becoming  well  known  and  quite  a favorite 
among  the  foreigners.  Since  his  brother  proved  so 
good  a business-man  they  thought  that  the  younger 
brother  would  be  likely  to  be  equally  good.  For- 
eigners were  making  money  very  rapidly  then,  and 
were  willing  to  pay  large  salaries  to  Chinamen 
whom  they  could  trust.  The  fact  that  Choh  Lin 
was  in  the  mission-school  and  had  been  much  with 
foreigners,  and  thus  had  learned  their  ways,  made 
him  the  more  desirable.  Then  he  was  a Christian 
and  an  honest  boy  or  young  man;  that  made  him 
worth  more  than  twice  the  amount  many  foreigners 
were  willing  to  pay  to  a heathen.  So  much  better 
and  more  trusty  are  the  Christian  than  the  heathen 
Chinese  that  it  was  not  an  uncommon  thing  when 
the  writer  lived  in  China  for  heathen  to  steal  cer- 
tificates of  character  of  Christians  and  use  them  as 
an  almost  sure  way  of  getting  employment. 

A most  tempting  offer  came  to  Choh  Lin  from  a 
foreign  merchant  some  time  after  that  of  the  doctor 


BUSINESS  OFFERS. 


227 


had  been  refused.  A merchant  in  Amoy  who  knew 
the  young  student  well,  wanted  to  start  a branch  of 
his  business  in  the  island  of  Formosa,  and  looked 
around  for  a trusty  Chinaman  to  put  at  the  head  of 
it.  One  day  he  invited  Choh  Lin  to  his  office  and 
offered  him  a position  as  clerk  at  a salary  of  fifty 
dollars  a month.  After  he  became  sufficiently  ac- 
qnaiuted  with  the  business,  the  merchant  said,  he 
wanted  him  to  start  a branch  of  it  in  Formosa  and 
take  a share  in  the  profits  in  addition  to  his  salary. 

This  was  an  offer  that  few  Chinamen,  even  in 
those  days  of  large  salaries,  received.  To  us  the 
offer  may  not  seem  a large  one,  but,  remembering 
the  value  of  money  in  China,  the  offer  was  equal  to 
six  thousand  dollars  a year  here.  Such  a salary, 
for  a schoolboy  not  yet  eighteen  years  old,  was  a 
very  large  one. 

No  wonder  that  Choh  Lin  was  compelled  to  pray 
long  and  earnestly  before  he  could  decide  to  reject  this 
opportunity.  He  had,  however,  been  led  to  think 
more  of  preaching  the  gospel  since  he  had  declined 
the  doctor’s  offer.  When  he  told  the  missionaries 
of  these  opportunities,  they  could  not  ask  him  to 
refuse.  They  wished  him  to  study  for  the  ministry, 
but  could  not  urge  him  to  decline  so  tempting  an 
offer.  They  told  him  that  he  must  do  as  he  thought 
best,  but  urged  him  not  to  think  alone  of  money. 
They  spoke  of  the  need  of  preachers,  and  told  him 
of  the  Lord’s  reward  to  his  faithful  servants.  They 
said  also  that  they  wished  him  to  study,  and  would 


228 


CHOH  LIN. 


be  very  glad  if  he  decided  to  give  his  life  to  the 
ministry.  They  said  that  they  could  never  afford 
to  give  one-fifth  part  as  much  money  as  the  mer- 
chant promised,  yet  they  would  give  him  enough, 
when  a preacher,  to  provide  for  his  wants;  and, 
further,  if  he  should  decide  to  become  a preacher, 
they  would  allow  him  money  enough  now  to  defray 
his  necessary  expenses.  They  made  no  tempting 
offers,  but  merely  said  that  the  Lord  would  reward 
him  in  the  end  if  he  gave  up  anything  for  the 
Lord's  sake. 

“How  much  do  you  allow  young  men  while 
studying,  and  how  much  after  they  become  preach- 
ers?” asked  Choh  Lin. 

“We  will  allow  you  two  dollars  and  a half  a 
month  while  studying,”  was  the  answer,  “ and  when 
you  preach  the  allowance  will  depend  on  your  ex- 
penses—from  four  to  eight  dollars  a month.  But 
we  do  not  wish  you  to  preach  for  the  sake  of 
making  money.  If  that  be  your  object,  we  do  not 
want  you  at  all.  We  only  want  those  who  are  anx- 
ious to  save  their  countrymen,  and  who  are  willing 
to  make  sacrifices  for  Christ.  We  do  not  pay 
preachers  for  their  work  and  sacrifice ; the  Lord 
does  that  when  the  work  is  done.  We  only  keep 
them  from  want  while  at  work.  Souls  are  worth 
a sacrifice.  Has  not  our  Saviour  done  enough  to 
make  us  willing  to  do  a great  deal  for  him  and  for 
the  souls  he  loves  and  died  to  save  ?” 

After  talking  the  matter  over  further,  the  mis- 


BUSINESS  OFFERS. 


229 


sionaries  advised  Choli  Lin  to  think  and  pray  over 
the  offer  of  the  merchant,  and  to  think  and  pray  as 
earnestly  over  his  duty,  before  deciding  to  accept  or 
decline  the  opportunity  for  business. 

Had  the  offer  been  made  a few  months  earlier,  it 
would  have  been  accepted,  but  now  Choli  Lin  hesi- 
tated. He  was  much  better  able  now  to  think  of 
the  ministry  than  he  had  been  then.  He  had  been 
growing  iu  a spirit  of  self-denial ; he  had  also 
learned  more  of  the  love  of  Jesus,  and  had  given 
himself  more  fully  to  the  Saviour;  in  short,  he 
lived  nearer  the  cross  than  he  had  done,  and  was 
better  able  to  think  of  his  duty  to  Christ  and  to  his 
fellow-men.  Dollars  did  not  seem  to  him  quite  as 
large  now  as  before  : the  more  he  thought  of  Christ 
and  of  souls  the  smaller  did  money  seem  in  com- 
parison. 

When  alone,  Choh  Lin  weighed  the  two  offers — 
the  one  of  the  merchant  and  the  other  of  the  mis- 
sionaries. Here  was  an  offer  of  fifty  dollars  a 
month  now,  and  soon  to  be  increased ; and  in  a few 
years  he  would  be  a rich  man.  He  would  be  able 
to  live  well  and  would  be  honored  by  all. 

On  the  other  hand  was  the  offer  of  two  dollars 
and  a half  a month,  or  just  one-twentieth  of  the 
merchant’s  offer.  It  is  true  the  two  dollars  and  a 
half  might  be  increased  to  four,  or  even  eight,  pos- 
sibly to  ten,  dollars  in  a few  years,  but  he  could 
never  expect  to  receive  more.  So,  at  the  very  most, 
being  a preacher,  he  could  not  expect  to  receive, 


230 


CIIO II  LIN. 


after  years  of  preparation,  more  than  one-fifth  of 
what  he  was  offered  now  by  the  merchant. 

Then  the  work.  He  would  as  a merchant’s  clerk, 
and  soon  as  overseer  of  the  business,  have  regular 
hours  for  work,  and  when  they  were  over  he  would 
have  nothing  to  do;  he  might  rest  and  do  as  he 
chose.  As  a preacher  his  work  would  never  be 
done;  day  and  night  he  must  be  burdened  with  care 
and  anxiety  as  well  as  work.  He  must  economize 
in  every  possible  way — live  in  any  house,  no  matter 
how  poor,  that  the  mission  was  able  to  provide  for 
him.  More  than  that,  he  must  go  wherever  he 
might  be  sent,  live  among  strangers,  and  probably 
have  no  permanent  home.  As  a merchant  he  would 
have  a comfortable  home,  enjoy  all  luxuries  and  be 
almost  entirely  his  own  master.  Then,  too,  if  a 
merchant,  he  would  be  respected  by  everybody,  but 
as  a preacher  he  would  be  despised  by  his  people  as 
trying  to  overthrow  the  religion  of  his  fathers  and 
set  up  instead  that  of  the  hated  foreigners.  He 
would  be  mocked,  insulted,  abused,  and  possibly 
killed,  for  preaching  a foreign  religion. 

Thus  did  Choh  Lin  look  at  the  two  offers,  but 
did  not  stop  there.  There  came  second  thoughts. 
“ True,”  said  he  to  himself,  “ I will  be  honored, 
have  an  easy  life  and  become  rich ; but  I must  die 
some  day.  What  then  ? What  good  will  honor, 
luxury  and  wealth  do  me  when  I am  dead  ? Then 
I must  meet  the  souls  of  my  countrymen  whom  for 
a fortune  I now  propose  to  neglect.  I will  have 


BUSINESS  OFFERS. 


231 


gained  the  fortune  only  to  lose  it  then,  and  will  ne- 
glect the  souls  now  to  lose  them  then  too.  I must 
meet  the  Saviour  who  gave  himself  for  me,  and  I 
must  meet  him  empty-handed.  I will  have  nothing 
to  show  for  my  life.  Then  I will  see  that  all  the 
honors  and  rewards  of  an  eternity  have  been  given 
for  a little  ease,  a little  honor,  a few  thousand  dol- 
lars, during  the  short  life  of  earth.  If  I become  a 
preacher  I must  remain  poor  and  unhonored,  per- 
haps despised;  my  life  will  be  a hard  one,  but  it 
will  soon  end.  Then  what?  No  more  poverty  or 
toil  or  disgrace.  Then  will  begin  riches,  reward, 
rest,  glory.  Then  Jesus  will  say,  ‘Inasmuch  as  ye 
did  it  unto  the  least  of  these,  ye  did  it  to  me.’ 
Then  he  will  say, ‘Well  done,  good  and  faithful 
servant ; be  thou  ruler  over  many  things  ; enter  thou 
into  the  joy  of  thy  Lord.’  And  all  this  for  eternity, 
never  to  end ! Can  it  be  that  I ever  thought  of 
entering  man’s  service  when  God  wanted  me? — of 
looking  for  dollars  as  my  pay  when  God  offers  im- 
mortal souls? — of  giving  all  my  life  for  time  when 
an  eternity  is  waiting  for  it?  Have  I been  so 
blinded?  Do  I know  so  little  of  Jesus,  so  little 
of  the  true  Christian  life?  I begin  to  see  and  know 
— yes,  and  mean  to  begin  to  do  too.  No,  I will  not 
be  a merchant.  Dollars  cannot  buy  me.  I belong 
not  to  this  world,  but  to  eternity,  and  for  that  I will 
live.  Yes,  I will  be  a preacher.” 

When  Choh  Lin  made  known  his  decision,  all 
his  friends  except  the  missionaries  and  his  mother 


232 


CHOH  LIN. 


thought  him  foolish.  They  tried  to  persuade  him 
to  accept  the  merchant’s  offer,  but  in  vain.  He 
said  little  in  reply,  but  quietly  told  the  merchant 
that  he  could  not  accept,  and  the  missionaries  that 
he  was  ready  to  begin  his  study  for  the  ministry. 

When  Choh  Lin  declined  the  offer  the  merchant 
made  it  to  Chi  Lap.  It  was  at  once  accepted,  and 
the  older  brother  was  on  the  road  to  riches.  After 
learning  the  business  of  the  merchant  in  Amoy,  Chi 
Lap  was  sent  to  Formosa.  There  he  rapidly  rose 
in  honor.  He  proved  himself  an  excellent  business- 
man, and  not  only  made  money  for  his  employer, 
but  became  rich  himself.  Before  he  was  thirty 
years  of  age  Chi  Lap  was  regarded  as  a rich  man. 
But  riches  proved  dangerous.  Wealth  led  him  into 
sin.  He  was  disciplined  by  the  Church  for  wrong- 
doing, and  seemed  almost  an  outcast  from  his  Chris- 
tian brethren.  For  years  he  lived  away  from  the 
Church  and,  it  is  to  be  feared,  away  from  God. 
Disease  slowly  weakened  his  strength  and  misfor- 
tune gradually  diminished  his  riches.  It  is  true, 
he  repented  of  his  folly  and  became  a penitent  and. 
we  trust,  a faithful  Christian,  but  too  late  to  remedy 
the  evil  of  his  life.  Saddened,  disappointed  and 
amid  the  shadows  of  dishonor  through  his  unfaith- 
ful life,  he  sank  into  the  grave.  For  ten  years  he 
had  enjoyed  his  riches,  but  before  he  was  forty  years 
of  age  he  left  a half-wasted  fortune,  a dishonored 
life,  to  tell  of  the  failure  he  had  made. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


A NEW  RELATIVE. 


E go  back  in  our  story  to  the  rebellion  in 


* ' Amoy,  to  tell  of  a man  who  may  already  be 
known  to  some  of  Choh  Lin’s  friends. 

When  the  imperial  army  encamped  north  of 
Amoy,  the  people  in  a small  village  near  became 
frightened,  and,  leaving  their  homes,  Sought  refuge 
in  the  city.  Some  of  these  found  their  way  to  the 
mission-chapel  and  there  became  acquainted  with 
the  missionaries.  The  strangers  received  so  kindly 
a welcome  that  they  looked  upon  the  foreigners  as 
true  friends,  and  at  once  were  ready  to  listen  to 
what  they  had  to  say.  The  gospel  was  something 
new  and  pleased  them ; but  when  they  learned  that 
the  object  of  the  missionaries  was  to  persuade  people 
to  give  up  the  worship  of  the  gods,  and  especially 
of  the  spirits  of  the  dead,  they  were  less  attentive. 
Some  of  them,  however,  had  become  too  much  in- 
terested to  stay  away  from  the  chapel.  Among 
these  was  a young  man  named  Jap  Han  Chiong. 
He  was  a bright,  active,  though  quiet  and  modest 
young  man,  and  greatly  respected  by  the  people  of 
his  village. 


233 


234 


CII01I  LIN. 


When  peace  was  restored  in  the  city  the  strangers 
were  anxious  to  return  to  their  home.  Before  start- 
ing they  sent  Han  Chiong  to  the  mandarins  to  ask 
if  it  would  be  safe  to  go  back.  The  Rev.  Dr.  Tal- 
mage  of  the  American  mission,  who  had  won  the 
confidence  of  the  refugees,  was  asked  to  accompany 
the  young  man.  The  two  were  politely  received  bv 
the  government  officers,  but  were  told  that  as  it  was 
uncertain  what  the  rebels  would  do,  it  would  be 
better  for  the  strangers  to  remain  a while  longer  in 
Amoy. 

When  Dr.  Talmage  and  Han  Chiong  came  back, 
old  Mr.  Jap  showed  great  pleasure  at  the  interest 
the  foreigners  had  taken  in  himself  and  friends, 
and  spoke  to  the  missionary  about  the  Christian 
religion.  He  said  it  was  good,  and  just  the  religion 
for  the  young  people  of  China.  He  even  asked  Dr. 
Talmage  to  make  a Christian  of  Han  Chiong. 

Day  after  day  the  old  man’s  interest  in  the  for- 
eigners and  their  religion  deepened,  and  lie  wished 
that  his  son  might  become  a Christian.  In  one  of 
his  talks  with  the  missionaries  about  Han  Chiong 
the  question  was  asked  of  Mr.  Jap,  “ Why  do  not 
you  become  a Christian  ? If  these  doctrines  are  so 
good  for  your  son,  why  should  not  they  be  good  for 
his  father?” 

“ They  are  good,  very  good,”  replied  the  old 
man,  “ but  I am  too  old  to  accept  them  now. 
When  a man  is  seventy  years  of  age  it  is  time 
for  him  to  think  of  the  spirit-world  and  the  pres- 


A NEW  RELATIVE. 


235 


enee  of  his  fathers  there,  but  not  to  change  his 
religion.” 

When  told  that  he  was  not  too  old  to  seek  the 
true  God  and  give  himself  to  the  Saviour,  he  con- 
tinued, “ It  is  too  late  for  me  now  to  begin  to  serve 
the  foreign  God.  My  feet  have  so  long  trodden  in 
the  old  that  they  cannot  now  begin  to  walk  in  the 
new  path.  But  the  feet  of  Han  Chiong  are  not  yet 
hardened  by  the  long  walk;  let  him  turn  to  the  new 
path.  It  will  be  easy  for  him  to  walk  in  the  new 
way.  It  is  the  best  way.  Had  I known  of  it  ear- 
lier I would  be  far  along  in  the  path,  but  it  is  too 
late  now.  My  sun  is  near  the  western  mountains ; 
if  I change  from  one  to  the  other  way  now,  the  sun 
may  set  before  I have  learned  the  new  road.  If  the 
darkness  should  come  upon  me  when  in  neither 
way,  what  could  I do  ? There  would  be  no  hope, 
no  place  for  my  spirit.” 

Though  unwilling  to  change  his  religion,  yet  Mr. 
Jap  was  regularly  at  the  chapel-service.  He  cared 
less  and  less  for  superstitious  customs  and  idol-wor- 
ship,  and,  though  unwilling  to  own  it,  he  was  slow- 
ly giving  up  all  for  Christ.  Before  he  went  back 
to  his  village  he  was  an  inquirer  after  the  truth, 
and  when  he  left  Amoy  for  his  home  he  left  it  de- 
termined to  be  a Christian.  His  wife,  who  was 
also  old,  was  nearly  as  much  interested  as  he  in 
Christianity,  and  some  time  after  they  reached  the 
village  they  both  were  received  into  the  Church, 
and  with  others  became  the  first  members  of  what 


236 


CHOH  LIN. 


is  now  the  Chinese  Christian  church  of  O Kang. 
Old  Mr.  Jap  lived  to  the  very  unusual  age  in  China 
of  ninety  years,  and  the  last  twenty  were  spent  in 
the  service  of  Jesus. 

Han  Chiong  was  more  ready  to  listen  to  his 
father’s  advice  than  Mr.  Jap  supposed.  From  the 
first  he  was  interested  in  the  gospel  and  anxious  to 
learn  about  Christianity.  He  gradually  let  it  be 
known  that  he  too  was  ready  to  give  up  the  old  for 
the  new  religion  ; and  when  his  father  and  mother 
became  members  of  the  Church  their  son  was  with 
them. 

Han  Chiong  was  too  active  and  able  a man  to 
remain  long  hidden  in  his  native  village.  Not  a 
great  while  after  he  left  Amoy  he  returned  to  the 
city  to  engage  in  business  there.  He  at  once  joined 
himself  to  the  Christians,  and  became  known  as  one 
of  the  most  active  and  faithful  of  all. 

A few  years  after  he  moved  to  Amoy,  the  church 
founded  there  by  the  American  missionaries,  one  of 
the  first  organized  churches  in  China,  had  grown  so 
large  that  it  was  thought  best  to  divide  it,  and  the 
second  church  was  formed.  Han  Chiong  was  cho- 
sen an  elder  in  this  organization.  Not  long  after 
the  new  church  was  formed  the  native  Christians 
of  the  two  churches,  advised  by  the  missionaries, 
came  to  the  decision  that  they  were  able  to  support 
pastors  of  their  own.  Often  was  the  matter  talked 
of  and  prayed  over,  and  the  way  seemed  clear  for 
the  churches  to  move  forward  ; but  the  question  was, 


A NEW  RELATIVE. 


237 


Who  shall  be  chosen  as  pastors?  There  was  not  a 
native  Christian  in  or  around  Amoy  fitted  for  the 
office.  It  was  finally  decided  that  the  members  of 
each  church  should  meet  and  choose  pastors  from 
the  native  Christians,  and  then  have  these  men 
study  with  the  missionaries  until  fitted  to  become 
regular  ministers. 

The  meetings  were  solemn  ones.  The  members 
felt  that  it  was  a very  serious  undertaking  to  choose 
men  all  untried  to  become  their  spiritual  guides. 
Not  less  anxious  were  the  missionaries  that  this 
first  effort  of  the  Chinese  Christian  Church  to  take 
care  of  itself  should  start  successfully,  but  more 
anxious  were  they  that  the  guiding  hand  of  God 
should  be  plainly  seen  in  the  new  undertaking. 

“Whom  shall  we  choose?”  was  often  and  anx- 
iously asked,  and  gradually  the  answer  came  to  one 
after  another.  When  the  meetings  were  held  the 
anxious  prayers  and  earnest  looks  told  more  of  the 
interest  all  had  in  the  result  than  the  uncertainty 
about  the  men  to  be  chosen.  When  the  vote  was 
taken,  Mr.  Lo,  an  elder  and  one  of  the  best  men 
of  the  first  church,  was  chosen  as  its  pastor,  and 
Jap  Han  Chiong  was  chosen  to  become  pastor  of 
the  second  church. 

Both  men  felt  unfit  for  the  work  to  which  they 
were  called,  but,  like  true  men  and  faithful  Chris- 
tians, said  that  they  would  do  the  best  they  could 
in  the  office  to  which  the  Lord  seemed  through  his 
Church  to  call  them. 


208 


CHOH  LIN. 


The  two  began  at  once  to  study  for  the  ministry, 
and  were  in  a few  years  ordained  and  installed  pas- 
tors of  the  churches  that  had  called  them.  After 
some  years  of  devoted  work  Pastor  Lo  was  called 
home  to  enjoy  the  rest  and  reward  that  the  Lord 
gives  his  faithful  servants.  Pastor  Jap,  as  Han 
Chiong  is  now  called,  still  remains,  after  more  than 
twenty  years  of  faithful,  successful  service,  the  loved 
and  honored  pastor  of  the  second  church  of  Amoy. 
He  was  probably  the  first  ordained  native  pastor  in 
China,  and  thus  is  the  oldest  pastor,  though  not  the 
oldest  man,  among  the  many  pastors  of  China.  For 
twenty  years  has  Han  Chiong  proved  that  a Ch i Ha- 
inan can  win  and  hold  the  love  of  a Christian  peo- 
ple, hold  the  respect  and  confidence  of  unbelieving 
as  well  as  Christian  foreigners,  and  live  a blessing 
to  the  church  that  loves  to  call  him  pastor. 

A tjaiii  we  go  back  in  the  story.  After  Mrs.  Lee 
rnovEd  to  Amoy  she  learned  that  her  mother-in-law 
was  trying  to  bring  about  a marriage  between  Choh 
Lin’s  sister  and  a young  man  in  the  country.  The 
old  lady  felt  much  troubled  that  at  least  one  of  her 
grandsons  and  her  daughter-in-law  had  deserted  the 
religion  of  their  fathers,  and  determined,  if  possible, 
to  keep  the  granddaughter  from  going  the  same 
way.  She  did  not  know  that  her  granddaughter 
was  already  trying  to  live  a Christian  life.  Being 
a young  woman  now,  according  to  Chinese  custom 
she  could  not  go  to  the  temple  nor  to  any  idolatrous 
gatherings,  and  she  always  excused  herself  from  the 


A NEW  RELATIVE. 


239 


idolatrous  practices  that  could  be  attended  to  in  the 
house.  She  did  not  hide  from  the  old  lady  her 
wish  to  be  a Christian,  but  as  anything  said  in  favor 
of  the  foreign  religion  only  caused  an  outburst  of 
anger,  the  girl  soon  learned  to  say  little  about  it. 

The  grandmother  felt  sure  that  only  one  thing 
was  needed  to  draw  the  young  woman  back  to  idol- 
atry, and  that  was  to  marry  her  into  a heathen 
family.  So  every  effort  was  put  forth  to  bring 
about  an  engagement.  The  people  of  Tay  Soa 
were  ready  and  willing  to  help  the  old  lady,  and 
urged  that  it  was  time  the  young  woman  were  en- 
gaged. Very  many  girls  were  married  much 
younger  than  she,  and  for  the  grandmother  to  wait 
until  the  mother  was  ready  to  make  a suitable 
match  for  her  daughter  was  unwise.  She  was  so 
bound  up  with  the  foreign  religion  that  she  would 
hardly  give  her  daughter’s  interest  a thought. 

A suitable  man  having  been  recommended,  the 
old  lady,  without  letting  Choh  Lin’s  mother  know, 
began  bargaining  at  once  for  the  marriage  of  the 
young  girl.  News  fortunately  reached  Mrs.  Lee  at 
Amoy  in  time,  and  she  hastened  to  Tay  Soa,  and  at 
once  put  a stop  to  the  proposed  engagement. 

Not  long  after  it  was  told  the  mother  that  old 
Mrs.  Lee  was  again  trying  to  marry  the  girl  to 
another  young  man.  This,  too,  was  prevented,  but 
Mrs.  Lee  felt  that  her  mother-in-law  was  not  en- 
tirely in  the  wrong.  It  was  time  that  a husband 
were  found  for  the  daughter,  and  if  the  mother  and 


210 


CHOH  LIN. 


brothers  did  not  attend  to  it,  the  grandmother  must. 
More  than  this,  Mrs.  Lee  knew  that  as  soon  as  the 
engagement  was  made  the  grandmother  could  do 
nothing  more  to  prevent  it.  An  engagement  in 
China  is  almost  as  binding  as  marriage  itself ; indeed, 
in  some  cases  more  so.  A husband  for  not  a very 
good  reason  may  be  divorced  from  his  wife,  but  an 
engaged  man  must  have  a good  cause  for  refusing 
to  marry  the  woman  to  whom  he  is  engaged.  The 
woman  lias  little  choice  or  power  in  either  case. 

Mrs.  Lee  determined  to  select  a husband  for  her 
daughter,  but  she  could  not  so  easily  decide  on  the 
man.  She  would  not  marry  her  to  a heathen,  nor 
did  she  wish  an  ordinary  workingman,  even  though 
a Christian,  if  a better  one  could  be  obtained. 
Christian  men  of  any  kind  were  not  plenty,  and  of 
those  not  married  there  were  very  few.  Fortu- 
nately for  her,  young  Mr.  Jap  was  not  only  unmar- 
ried, but  not  even  engaged. 

This  was  not  so  strange,  as  China  has  any  quantity 
of  young  and  old  bachelors,  though  it  is  a rare  thing 
to  find  a woman  over  twenty  who  has  never  been 
married  or  eno-aa-ed.  For  this  there  are  two  rea- 

o o 

sons:  many  Chinamen  have  more  than  one  wife, 
and  there  are  not  as  many  women  as  men  in  that 
country.  While  no  doubt  as  many  girls  as  boys  are 
born,  the  cruel  custom  of  killing  many  of  the  infant 
girls  has  not  yet  been  abolished. 

Han  Chiong  was  the  man  Mrs.  Lee  chose,  but 
the  question  was  not  yet  settled.  Would  he  choose 


A NEW  RELATIVE. 


241 


the  same  way  ? Of  course  he  could  not  call  to  see 
young  Miss  Lee,  nor  even  see  a photograph  of  her, 
but  some  one  might  tell  him  about  her  and  learn 
his  opinion.-  Like  most  men  in  China,  Han  Chiong 
wished  a wife  if  able  to  pay  for  a good  one.  He 
was  told  that  Miss  Lee  was  a good  and  desirable 
young  woman,  and  that  her  mother  would  not  ex- 
pect much  money  in  return.  Gradually  the  bargain 
was  made,  and  it  was  at  last  fully  settled  that  Choh 
Lin  and  Han  Chiong  were  to  be  brothers- in-law. 

None  were  more  pleased  with  this  than  Choh  Lin 
and  Chi  Lap,  while  old  Mrs.  Lee  was  as  angry  as 
the  boys  were  pleased.  Yet  she  could  do  nothing 
to  prevent  the  engagement  and  marriage.  Mothers 
have  more  authority  than  grandmothers  over  their 
own  children,  and  the  old  lady  could  only  grumble 
and  show  her  displeasure  by  angry  words  and  sour 
looks. 

Mrs.  Lee  was  anxious  to  have  the  wedding;  take 
place  as  soon  as  possible,  in  order  that  she  might 
induce  her  mother-in-law  to  move  to  the  city. 
Business  was  so  poor  that  she  was  unable  to  support 
two  separate  families  from  her  scanty  income,  and 
she  urged  the  grandmother  to  come  to  Amoy.  Old 
Mrs.  Lee  refused.  She  was  angry  that  her  daugh- 
ter-in-law  had  led  the  whole  family  from  the  relig;- 
ion  of  China,  and  was  unwilling  to  do  anything  to 
please  her;  but,  more  than  this,  she  was  afraid  that 
by  going  to  Amoy  she  would  in  some  way  come  in 
contact  with  Christianity  and  be  unable  to  resist  its 
16 


242 


CIIOH  LIN. 


power.  The  only  way  of  safety  was  to  remain 
away  from  Amoy  and  from  Christian  influence. 
While  her  hatred  to  Christianity  did  not  lessen,  her 
outspoken  opposition  to  it  greatly  decreased.  She 
could  not  help  seeing  that  its  influence  on  her 
daughter-in-law  and  grandchildren  made  them  more 
kind  to  her ; yet  the  old  feeling  against  them  for 
deserting;  the  religion  of  their  fathers  remained. 
After  a time  she  acted  as  though  willing  that  tliev 
should  be  Christians  if  she  were  allowed  to  retain 
her  religion.  Though  Mrs.  Lee  failed  to  induce 
her  mother-in-law  to  move  to  Amoy,  another  in- 
fluence brought  about  the  desired  result. 

There  had  been  trouble  for  a long  time  between 
the  people  of  Tay  Soa  and  those  of  a few  villages 
some  distance  away.  For  perhaps  a hundred  years 
this  trouble  had  been  handed  down  from  father  to 
son,  sometimes  quiet  and  slumbering,  and  again 
breaking  out  into  active  enmity,  terminating  in 
battles  and  bloodshed.  About  the  time  that  Mrs. 
Lee  effected  the  engagement  of  her  daughter  there 
were  signs  of  this  trouble  being  aroused  again,  and 
rumors  reached  Tay  Soa  of  a purposed  attack  on  it. 
The  old  lady  now  began  to  listen  with  more  will- 
ingness to  suggestions  for  her  removing  to  Amoy. 
When  it  became  quite  probable  that  Tay  Soa  would 
be  attacked  she  consented  to  go  to  the  city.  She 
had  seen  some  of  these  fights,  and  dreaded  seeing 
another.  She  even  urged  her  daughter-in-law  to 
hasten  the  arrangements  for  moving,  and  only  felt 


A NEW  RELATIVE. 


243 


content  when  she  saw  Tay  Soa  in  the  distance  over 
the  stern  of  the  vessel  that  was  taking  her  to  Amoy. 
No  one  was  more  happy  than  Choh  Lin  to  have 
his  grandmother  and  sister  with  him.  Now,  as  the 
family  were  together,  it  seemed  that  he  had  all  he 
could  wish. 

But  there  came  a break  in  this  ceaseless  flow  of 
joy.  The  time  for  his  sister’s  wedding  came  all  too 
soon  for  him,  and  far  too  soon  to  please  the  grand- 
mother. It  greatly  grieved  old  Mys.  Lee  to  see 
that  the  old  heathen  wedding-ceremonies  were  given 
up  for  the  simple  ones  of  the  Christian  Church. 
The  missionaries,  however,  had  not  advised  chang- 
ing the  customs  that  had  nothing  to  do  with  idol- 
atry and  worship  of  the  spirits,  and  the  grand- 
mother consoled  herself  with  the  parts  that  were 
left,  and  hoped  that  some  day  the  people  would  see 
the  need  of  bringing  back  the  rest. 

Young  Mrs.  Jap  went  at  once  to  live  with  her 
husband,  and  Choh  Lin  found  that  he  had  two 
homes  again.  Between  him  and  his  brother-in-law 
there  arose  a friendship  that  increased  with  years, 
and  that  will  last  as  long  as  the  love  of  eternity 
endures. 


CHAPTER  XXIY. 


BECOMING  A PREACHER. 

HOH  LIN,  having  decided  to  continue  his 


studies,  gave  himself  little  further  thought 
about  business.  He  had  occasionally  visited  his 
old  home,  and  now  made  another  visit  before  begin- 
ning to  study  in  earnest.  Since  he  had  become  a 
student  and  dressed  better  and  came  from  the  large 
city,  he  was  treated  with  more  respect  than  when  he 
lived  at  Tay  Soa.  People  had  heard  of  his  success 
in  his  studies,  and  also  of  the  business  offers  he  had 
received.  Old  friends  congratulated  him  on  his 
splendid  prospects. 

“ Five  hundred  dollars  a month,”  said  an  old 
man  to  him,  “and  then  in  a few  years  to  be  man- 
darin in  Formosa!  What  an  offer!  You’ll  be 
rich  in  two  years — yes,  rich  in  a month  ! If  I had 
five  hundred  dollars  I would  be  rich  now.  How 
can  it  be  possible?” 

“Not  five  hundred  dollars  a month,  Uncle  Ton,” 
replied  Choh  Lin,  laughing,  “but  fifty.” 

“ Oh,  I heard  it  was  five  hundred,”  spoke  the  old 
man.  “No  matter;  fifty  dollars  a month  is  a great 
sum  of  money.  We  think  it  a large  sum  here  for 


BECOMING  A PREACHER. 


245 


a man  to  earn  by  a year  of  work.  Bat  then  to  be 
mandarin  in  Formosa!  That  is  wonderful!  You 
will  be  able  to  gain  many  thousand  dollars  by  that 
office.” 

“‘Mandarin  of  Formosa’?”  said  Choh  Lin  in 
surprise.  “ What  do  you  mean?” 

“Are  you  not  to  be  a mandarin  there  in  a few 
years?”  asked  the  old  man.  “ Was  not  that  prom- 
ised too?” 

“‘Mandarin’?”  repeated  Choh  Lin;  then,  as  the 
truth  came  to  him,  he  said,  “Oh,  it  was  not  to  be 
mandarin,  but  to  take  charge  of  business  there,  that 
I received  an  offer.” 

“ Well,  how  did  you  get  the  offer?”  inquired  the 
old  friend. 

“ Through  the  foreigners.” 

“ I knew  you  would  not  lose  by  attending  the 
foreign  schools  and  caring  for  the  foreign  religion. 
It  was  wrong  to  harm  you  and  your  mother  for 
worshiping  the  foreign  God.  If  people  can  make 
money  by  serving  another  god,  why  should  they 
not  do  it?  When  you  are  rich,  Choh  Lin,  don’t 
forget  your  old  friends  in  Tay  Soa.” 

“ Perhaps  I’ll  never  be  rich,”  was  the  young 
man’s  reply. 

“ Never  be  rich  on  fifty  dollars  a month  and  at 
the  head  of  business  in  Formosa!  Why  will  you 
not  be  rich  ?” 

“ Because  I have  declined  the  offer  and  do  not 
mean  to  be  a merchant.” 


246 


CHOH  LIN. 


“ What!  not  mean  to  be  a merchant?”  cried  the 
old  man  in  surprise.  “ What  do  you  mean  to  be  ?” 

“ I mean  to  study  and  become  a preacher  of  the 
true  religion.” 

“ What  true  religion  ?” 

“The  religion  of  the  one  great  and  true  God — 
the  religion  that  the  foreigners  brought.” 

“ Do  you  mean  to  lose  the  chance  to  become  a 
rich  man  in  a year  that  you  may  tell  people  of  a 
foreign  religion?”  Then,  thinking  for  a moment, 
he  continued,  “ Do  the  foreigners  hire  you  to  do 
it?” 

“They  want  me  to  do  it,  and  will  pay  me,”  an- 
swered Choh  Lin. 

“Oh,  I see:  they  give  more  than  the  business- 
foreigner.  How  much  do  they  give?” 

“Two  dollars  and  a half  a month  while  I am 
studying,  and  as  soon  as  I am  able  to  preach  they 
will  give  me  more,  perhaps  eight  dollars.” 

“Two  dollars  and  a half  now,  eight  after  a 
while!”  spoke  the  old  man — “fifty  dollars  now, 
perhaps  five  hundred  after  a while!  Does  your 
foreign  religion  teach  you  such  folly  as  that?”  and, 
without  saying  any  more,  the  old  man  turned  away 
disgusted.  He  told  the  story  to  others  and  said 
that  the  foreign  religion  made  people  crazy. 

Choh  Lin’s  real  friends  in  Tay  Soa  urged  him 
not  to  give  up  his  good  chance  in  business,  and 
warned  him  against  preaching  the  new  religion. 
They  said  it  would  bring  him  trouble  and  death, 


BECOMING  A PREACHER. 


247 


and  would  probably  bring  calamity  on  his  native 
village.  Others  ridiculed,  and  were  ready  even  to 
persecute,  him.  But  the  few  who  had  become  inter- 
ested in  the  gospel  said  nothing. 

Choh  Lin  soon  returned  to  Amoy.  The  warn- 
ings of  friends,  the  ridicule  of  enemies,  were  hard 
to  bear,  but  it  was  far  worse  to  listen  to  the  coaxing 
and  threats  of  the  old  grandmother. 

The  theological  seminary  in  which  Choh  Lin 
studied  was  very  different  from  our  ideas  of  such 
a school.  It  was  one  small,  dark  room,  with  a few 
benches  and  desks.  There  was  no  library,  but  the 
one  great  and  best  Book  was  there.  There  were, 
however,  a few  books  and  an  old  map  or  two  from 
A merica. 

Besides  Choh  Lin,  there  were  four  or  five  other 
young  men  studying  for  the  ministry  or  to  be  teach- 
ers, and  two  or  three  older  ones  who  spent  some 
time  in  the^ city  studying,  but  were  most  of  their 
time  in  the  country  preaching. 

The  professors  were  a Chinese  teacher  and  two 
or  three  young  missionaries.  These  latter,  though 
learned  men,  were  not  well  enough  acquainted  with 
the  language  of  the  people  to  be  able  to  give  young 
Chinamen  the  best  of  training  for  the  ministry. 

It  wras  a humble  seminary  in  which  Choh  Lin 
prepared  for  the  ministry,  but  that  humble  school 
has  grown,  until  now  it  can  be  fairly  dignified  by 
the  name  of  a theological  seminary.  The  work  it 
has  already  done  is  having  an  effect  on  the  city  and 


248 


CHOH  LIN. 


the  country  around  Amoy,  but  that  work  has  only 
begun.  Long  after  Choh  Lin  and  those  men  who 
were  its  first  professors  shall  have  joined  the  com- 
pany of  the  blessed  the  theological  seminary  at  Amoy 
will  reach  the  greatness  of  its  power.  Then  the 
work  of  those  modest  young  missionaries  will  be 
shown  to  be  the  truest  and  wisest  statesmanship 
with  which  foreigners  have  blessed  China. 

Choh  Lin’s  whole  heart  was  in  his  studies:  he 
hardly  took  time  to  rest,  and  the  result  of  over- 
study was  soon  seen.  He  grew  thin  and  a trouble- 
some cough  appeared.  Still,  he  kept  at  work. 
Though  the  missionaries  warned  him  to  study  less 
and  take  more  exercise,  he  kept  at  his  close  appli- 
cation. After  a while  there  came  alarming  symp- 
toms: there  were  slight  hemorrhages,  as  it  was  sup- 
posed, of  the  lungs.  Choh  Lin  was  now  alarmed, 
and  listened  to  the  advice  of  his  teachers  and  took 
more  rest.  But  the  cough  continued,  and  it  seemed 
that  consumption  would  soon  take  the  young  man’s 
life. 

A foreign  physician  ordered  him  to  give  up  study 
altogether  and  leave  the  city.  He  advised  Choh 
Lin,  instead  of  going  away  to  another  country,  to 
go  with  the  fishing-boats  sailing  from  Amoy  out 
on  the  ocean  and  become  a fisherman.  This  was  a 
strange  prescription,  but  the  doctor  saw  that  the 
young  man  needed  air,  exercise  and  something  to 
keep  him  from  study. 

It  was  a severe  trial  to  Choh  Lin,  but  as  the  mis- 


BECOMING  A PREACHER. 


249 


sionaries  said  he  must  obey  the  physician’s  order, 
and  his  mother  and  brother  agreed  to  it,  he  became 
a fisherman.  It  was  a hard  life,  to  be  tossed  on  the 
waters  in  a little  vessel,  to  live  with  rough  men  on 
poor  food,  to  sleep  in  a dirty,  wet  boat,  and,  worse 
than  all,  to  be  obliged  to  work  hard  and  to  risk  the 
dangers  of  the  ocean.  Many  times  he  wished  him- 
self ashore  in  the  seminary  or  in  his  own  home. 
Many  times,  too,  he  wished  that  he  had  listened  to 
the  missionaries  and  not  studied  so  hard.  He  be- 
lieved more  than  ever  that  the  missionaries  were 
wise  men.  He  determined  to  follow  their  advice 
in  future.  But  it  proved  hard  advice  before  long. 

The  change  of  air  and  ways  of  living,  as  well  as 
the  constant  exercise,  soon  proved  the  wisdom  of 
the  physician’s  advice.  The  cough  lessened,  his 
appetite  returned  and  he  grew  stout  and  rugged. 
As  soon  as  he  felt  better  he  went  to  the  missionaries 
on  his  return  from  one  of  the  fishing- voyages  and 
asked  to  be  taken  back  to  the  school.  It  was  a 
trial  to  be  told  that  he  had  not  yet  grown  strong 
enough,  and  that  he  must  go  back  to  the  fishing- 
boat.  He  obeyed,  though  far  from  willingly. 
These  fishing-trips  became  more  anti  more  unpleas- 
ant to  him,  and  he  could  not  understand  why  he 
must  continue  them,  for  to  himself  he  seemed  well. 
Not  until  he  had  been  a fisherman  for  a whole  year 
did  the  physician  say  that  he  might  return  to  his 
studiel,  and  not  until  that  permission  was  given  did 
the  missionaries  welcome  him  back  to  the  seminary* 


250 


CHOH  LIN. 


It  was  a long  and  tedious  year  for  Choh  Lin 
among  the  fishermen.  Perhaps  he  thought  then  of 
the  business  opportunities  he  had  refused;  perhaps 
he  longed  to  be  in  business,  instead  of  being  a stu- 
dent and  again  losing  his  health.  If  he  did  have 
such  longings,  he  kept  them  secret.  But  some  of 
his  friends,  especially  those  at  Tay  Soa,  thought 
that  he  would  have  been  wiser  had  he  gone  into 
business  instead  of  wasting  his  strength  in  study. 
His  grandmother  said  that  he  was  sick  because  he 
had  deserted  the  religion  of  his  fathers,  and  that 
the  gods  had  sent  the  illness  as  a punishment.  She 
further  said  that  the  gods  would  take  his  life  if  he 
continued  to  serve  the  foreign  God.  When  he  came 
back  restored  and  strong,  old  Mrs.  Lee  felt  sure  that 
she  was  right,  for  as  soon  as  her  grandson  gave  up 
study  and  left  the  missionaries  he  became  better. 
She  begged  her  daughter-in-law  not  to  let  him  go 
back  to  school  to  die. 

Bugged,  healthy  and  happy,  the  young  man  went 
back  to  the  seminary  more  satisfied  than  ever  that 
the  foreigners  were  wiser  than  his  own  countrymen. 
Probably  not  a Chinaman  would  have  told  him  to 
go  to  fishing  for  his  health,  but  the  foreign  doctor 
had  ; obeying,  he  was  now  well.  Great  are  the  for- 
eigners! thought  Choh  Lin. 

But  higher  thoughts  were  iu  his  heart.  Iu  all 
he  believed  that  God  had  been  present,  and  that 
divine  mercy  had  spared  and  restored  him  to  health. 
Yes,  even  though  a foreigner  had  advised  his  going 


BECOMING  A PREACHER. 


251 


with  the  fishermen,  it  was  God  who  had  brought 
that  foreigner  to  China.  God  had  sent  the  mission- 
aries there  to  teach  him  and  his  countrymen  the 
way  to  Christ.  This  was  the  greatest  of  mercies, 
and  Choh  Lin  determined  to  prove  his  gratitude  by 
giving  himself  more  entirely  to  the  service  of  God. 

He  began  his  studies  with  new  zeal,  but  with 
more  wisdom.  He  took  more  rest,  and  found  him- 
self better  able  than  before  to  study.  But  a new 
way  of  resting  from  study  was  ordered  by  the  mis- 
sionaries. The  students  were  sent  off  occasionally 
to  the  mission-stations  to  preach  on  the  Sabbath.  In 
this  way  they  had  variety  in  their  work,  as  well  as 
an  opportunity  to  use  the  knowledge  they  had 
gained.  They  also  learned  how  to  preach  by  prac- 
ticing preaching;  they  saw,  too,  something  of  the 
work  they  would  soon  be  set  apart  to  do. 

Choh  Lin  was  happy,  yet  full  of  fear,  when  told 
to  go  off  to  one  of  the  mission-stations  on  Saturday 
and  aid  the  helper  there  to  preach  on  the  next  day. 
It  is  true  he  had  addressed  small  meetings,  but  he 
had  not  preached  to  a regular  Sabbath  audience. 
He  had  often  thought  and  studied  what  to  say  when 
he  did  preach.  He  had  longed  for  the  time  when 
he  might  preach,  and  now,  before  he  had  expected, 
it  had  come.  He  started  for  the  station  with  some 
fear,  and  yet  with  a little  pride  too.  He  had  been 
praised  often,  and  it  would  have  been  strange  had 
he  believed  that  all  who  praised  him  had  told  false- 
hoods. Though  not  without  pride,  he  felt  that  he 


252 


CIIOH  LIN. 


was  to  speak  the  Lord’s  words.  Idle  prayed  that 
the  right  words  might  be  chosen  and  so  presented 
that  the  people  could  not  but  hear  and  believe. 
Perhaps  there  was  a feeling  of  expectation  that  the ’ 
people  would  listen  with  wonder  at  the  eloquence 
of  the  speaker,  and  then  would  be  so  impressed  by 
what  he  said  that  they  would  be  unable  to  turn 
away  from  the  truth.  If  he  expected  to  see  his 
hearers  weep  as  they  listened  and  then  cry,  “ What 
must  we  do  to  be  saved?”  he  would  not  have  been 
very  unlike  some  other  young  preachers. 

When  he  began  to  preach  the  audience  looked  at 
the  young  speaker  with  no  little  interest.  His  fine 
form,  pleasing  manner  and  pleasant  voice,  as  well 
as  his  youth,  held  their  attention  for  a while,  nor 
were  they  without  interest  in  the  words  he  spoke. 
But  after  a time  some  faces  turned  from  him,  and 
here  and  there  a man  was  looking  at  his  neighbors, 
talking  to  the  one  next  to  him,  looking  up  to  the 
ceiling,  turning  over  the  leaves  of  the  hymn-book, 
and  one  or  two  were  asleep.  The  conduct  was  much 
like  that  of  a congregation  in  an  American  church, 
only  in  our  country  it  would  be  a Christian  audience ; 
Choh  Lin’s  was  mostly  heathen.  It  would  have  been 
very  discouraging  to  the  young  preacher  had  there 
not  been  some  who  listened  attentively  to  the  whole 
sermon.  At  its  close  the  young  man  felt  not  a little 
discouraged  to  find  that  his  words  had  seemingly 
^ad  little  effect.  lie  did  not  think  that  they  were 
as  seeds  in  new  ground — that  his  hearers  were  hea- 


The  Chinese  Preacher. 


Page  253. 


BECOMING  A PREACHER. 


253 


then  men  with  hearts  little  prepared  for  the  truth. 
He  expected  to  reap  a harvest  at  once  from  the  seed 
sown. 

Though  disappointed,  the  young  preacher  was 
learning  a lesson  of  faith  ; he  was  also  learning  that 
it  is  not  by  might  nor  by  power,  but  by  the  Lord’s 
Spirit,  that  souls  are  converted.  He  was  disap- 
pointed, but  not  discouraged ; he  only  determined 
the  more  to  continue  preaching. 

In  these  preaching-excursions  he  did  not  think 
that  all  his  work  was  done  when  from  the  pulpit  he 
told  the  people  of  a Saviour.  Before  and  after  ser- 
vice, sitting  in  the  little  chapel  with  only  one  or  two 
hearers,  he  often  preached  more  effective  sermons 
than  from  the  pulpit  itself.  One  and  another  lis- 
tened attentively  as  he  told  the  old  story,  though 
new  to  them,  of  a Saviour’s  love.  Some  were 
deeply  interested,  and  asked  many  questions  and 
seemed  anxious  to  learn  more.  But  others,  as  soon 
as  he  told  them  to  give  up  the  worship  of  the  spirits 
of  the  dead  and  their  own  evil  ways,  did  not  care 
to  hear  anything  more  about  this  new  religion. 

Many  times  was  he  asked,  “ What  are  you  telling 
these  things  for?”  “ How  much  do  the  foreigners 
give  you  for  teaching  their  religion  ?”  “ What  will 
they  give  me  to  become  a follower  of  their  gods?” 
More  than  one  offered  to  become  Christians  if  Choh 
Lin  would  ensure  them  positions,  a chance  to  make 
money.  But  the  people  could  not  understand  why 
foreigners  should  teach  their  religion  to  others,  and 


254 


CHOH  LIN. 


even  pay  men  to  do  it,  when  there  seemed  no  way 
of  making  money  by  it.  They  would  not  believe 
that  it  was  done  from  love  to  Christ  and  anxiety 
for  souls.  Many  believed  that  there  was  some  de- 
ception hidden,  and  that  preaching  the  gospel  was 
only  another  foreign  way  of  getting  money  from 
the  Chinese.  In  vain  Choh  Lin  tried  to  explain ; 
people  would  not  believe.  They  knew  that  they 
would  not  do  such  things  for  nothing;  they  knew, 
too,  that  other  foreigners  were  always  trying  to 
make  money,  and  so  believed  that  missionaries  had 
some  selfish  purpose.  Many,  therefore,  listened  in 
great  doubt  to  the  young  preacher. 

“ Ah,  yes,”  said  one,  “you  may  be  in  earnest — so 
you  must  be,  or  the  foreigners  would  discharge  you 
— but  you  are  yet  young  and  the  foreigners  have  not 
let  you  see  what  they  mean  to  do.  Have  any  of 
our  mandarins  or  great  men  become  worshipers  of 
the  foreign  God  ? They  know  more  than  we,  and 
see  that  it  is  not  wise  to  desert  the  religion  of  our 
country.  When  they  listen  and  follow  this  new 
religion,  then  we  will  think  about  it.” 

These  and  many  other  objections  might  have  dis- 
couraged the  young  preacher  had  there  not  been 
another  side  to  the  work.  His  own  heart  was  full 
of  joy  as  he  told  men  of  a Saviour.  He  knew  that 
he  was  doing  the  work  the  Lord  intended  him  to 
do.  Then,  too,  there  were  some  who  not  only  lis- 
tened, but  asked  to  know  more.  They  came  each 
time  he  preached.  They  showed  that  they  believed 


BECOMING  A PREACHER. 


255 


what  he  said,  and  wished  to  find  a better  God  than 
they  knew  in  their  country. 

Gradually  did  Choli  Lin  engage  more  and  more 
in  preaching.  Sometimes,  when  the  regular  preach- 
ers were  ill  or  obliged  to  go  away  on  preaching- 
tours,  the  students  were  sent  to  take  their  places,  and 
sometimes  they  stayed  a week  or  two  at  these  sta- 
tions. During  the  summer  season  most  of  the  time 
of  the  students  was  spent  in  the  country  at  these 
stations.  On  their  return  from  their  work  each 
young  man  had  learned  something  and  had  some- 
thing to  ask  the  teachers. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 


CHI  LAP  AND  THE  GRANDMOTHER  BECOME 
CHRISTIANS. 

rTl HOUGH  Chi  Lap  had  for  a long  time  attended 
-A-  chapel-service  and  was  often  in  the  inquiry- 
room,  yet  he  had  not  confessed  Christ  publicly  when 
his  grandmother  came  to  Amoy.  He  was  a praying 
young  man  and  tried  to  live  right,  but  he  had  not 
given  himself  to  Christ.  He  feared  that  he  might 
suffer  by  becoming  a Christian,  and  he  waited. 

Shortly  after  his  sister  and  grandmother  came  to 
Amoy  urgent  business  called  Chi  Lap  to  his  native 
village.  He  had  heard  that  the  enemies  of  Tay  Soa 
had  sent  soldiers  down  to  watch  the  village,  and 
knew  that  it  would  be  difficult  to  pass  these  men  in 
safety ; yet  he  resolved  to  try  it.  Instead  of  taking 
the  regular  route,  he  landed  some  distance  below  the 
place,  determining  to  walk  the  rest  of  the  way  and 
enter  the  village  from  an  unusual  direction. 

When  he  approached  the  town  he  saw,  to  his  sur- 
prise and  terror,  that  it  was  surrounded  by  the  en- 
emy, who  seemed  to  be  besieging  the  place.  Not 
having  yet  been  noticed  by  the  soldiers,  he  stopped 
and  hid  while  he  thought  what  was  best  to  be  done. 


256 


CHI  LAP  AND  THE  GRANDMOTHER.  257 

His  business  was  urgent;  he  must  try  to  enter  Tay 
Soa,  yet  to  do  so  might  make  him  a prisoner  of  the 
besieging  army.  If  known  to  belong  to  the  Lee 
family,  he  would  be  held  until  a price  was  paid  by 
his  friends  for  his  ransom. 

Chi  Lap  was  proud  and  not  lacking  in  courage. 
He  wanted  to  be  known  as  a man  who  did  his  duty  ; 
so  he  was  unwilling  to  turn  back.  He  said  to  him- 
self, “This  business  must  be  attended  to;  it  is  my 
duty  to  go  ahead  and  do  it,  yet  I shall  probably  be 
captured,  for  I cannot  pass  the  soldiers  without 
being  seen.  But  if  I go  back  people  will  call  me 
a coward ; they  will  say  I cannot  be  trusted  with 
business,  and  it  may  cause  me  to  lose  my  place. 
There  is  one  thing  I can  do,  and  that  is  pray  to  the 
foreign  God.  The  foreign  teachers  say  that  he  can 
do  great  things ; mother  and  Choh  Lin  say  so,  too, 
and  I partly  believe  it.  Why  should  not  I ask  him 
to  help  me  now?  If  he  is  so  great  and  so  willing 
to  hear  prayer,  why  will  he  not  help  me  and  keep 
those  soldiers  from  harming  me?  I will  try  him, 
and  if  he  does  hear  and  save  me  I will  after  that 
become  his  servant.” 

Chi  Lap  knelt  down  and  prayed  in  a low  voice 
that  he  might  be  saved  from  the  enemies  of  Tay 
Soa  and  be  brought  back  in  safety  to  Amoy.  How 
well  he  prayed  none  can  now  say. 

When  he  arose  from  his  knees  it  was  with  a de- 
termination to  trust  to  the  foreign  God  and  go  for- 
ward. Steadily,  but  with  anxious  heart,  he  walked 
17 


258 


CHOH  LIN. 


toward  the  village  and  the  soldiers.  Without  say- 
ing a word,  he  passed  the  line,  expecting  every  mo- 
ment to  be  stopped  and  taken  prisoner.  The  men 
looked  at  him  as  he  came  up,  talked  about  him — at 
least  so  Chi  Lap  supposed — but  said  not  a word  to 
him,  and  quietly  allowed  the  young  man  to  pass  by 
into  the  village.  Not  until  he  reached  it  and  saw 
that  he  was  not  yet  in  the  hands  of  the  enemy  did 
he  breathe  freely.  When  he  found  himself  com- 
paratively safe  he  could  hardly  help  kneeling  down 
to  thank  God  for  hearing  his  prayer. 

His  friends  praised  his  bravery,  saying  that  he 
would  become  a great  general,  since  he  dared,  alone 
and  unarmed,  to  walk  up  to  and  pass  an  array  of 
hostile  soldiers.  Chi  Lap  thought  that  if  they 
could  have  heard  his  heart  beat  and  known  his  feel- 
ings when  he  passed  the  enemy  his  friends  would 
not  call  him  brave.  Yet  he  was  really  courageous. 
True  bravery  is  not  absence  of  fear,  but  going  for- 
ward in  the  way  of  duty  in  spite  of  fear. 

Chi  Lap  said  nothing  to  the  people  of  Tay  Soa 
about  his  prayer,  nor  yet  of  his  determination  to 
become  a Christian.  He  knew  how  his  mother  and 
brother  had  been  persecuted  by  them  for  worshiping 
the  God  of  the  foreigners,  and  he  had  no  wish  to 
endure  their  persecution.  He  was  brave  enough  to 
face  the  enemy,  but  not  brave  enough  to  confess 
Christ  to  his  friends.  He  had  prayed  to  be  pro- 
tected from  the  one,  but  had  not  asked  God  for 
help  to  meet  the  other. 


CHI  LAP  AND  THE  GRANDMOTHER.  259 


He  finished  his  business  as  soon  as  he  could  and 
took  the  first  opportunity  to  go  by  boat  to  Amoy. 
The  enemies  did  not  keep  as  close  a watch  on  the 
water  as  they  did  on  the  land,  and  it  was  possible  for 
boats  to  come  and  go  at  night.  When  he  reached 
Amoy  he  told  his  story,  with  no  little  gratitude  to 
God  for  his  care  over  him,  and  at  once  confessed 
that  he  meant  to  be  a Christian. 

“ God  heard  my  prayer,”  said  he ; “ why  should 
I not  serve  him?  He  alone  kept  those  soldiers 
from  harming  me.  Because  of  his  care  I am  free ; 
so  I belong  to  him.” 

There  was  a marked  change  in  Chi  Lap  after 
that.  He  soon  joined  the  Church,  and  for  years 
was  an  active  and  faithful  member  of  it.  When  he 
had  been  for  some  time  in  Formosa,  and  had  grown 
rich,  then  he  was  led  into  temptation  and  fell  before 
it,  as  we  have  learned,  yet,  we  trust,  not  in  a final 
fall. 

To  his  dying  day  Chi  Lap  could  give  no  other 
explanation  of  his  escape  from  the  soldiers  than 
that  God  heard  his  prayer  and  took  care  of  him  ; 
nor  can  the  author  give  any  other.  The  God  who 
shut  the  lions’  mouths  so  that  they  should  not  hurt 
Daniel  could  control  the  soldiers  so  that  they  let 
the  young  man  pass  their  lines.  F Call  upon  me  in 
the.  day  of  trouble,  and  I will  deliver  thee,  and  thou 
shalt  glorify  me :”  Chi  Lap  tried  that  promise  and 
found  it  good. 

The  object  of  the  soldiers  in  besieging  Tay  Soa 


260 


CHOH  LIN. 


was  to  frighten  the  people  and  force  them  to  pay  a 
price  to  be  let  alone,  rather  than  to  kill  them.  If 
the  villagers  could  not  be  forced  to  do  this,  then  the 
enemy  would  attack  the  village  and  try  to  carry 
away  prisoners,  to  be  held  until  a price  should  be 
paid  for  their  freedom. 

We  leave  Chi  Lap  now  and  turn  to  the  grand- 
mother. When  she  came  to  Amoy  it  was  with 
many  a secret  vow  that  she  would  not  become  a 
Christian.  She  determined  not  to  have  anything  to 
do  with  Christians,  and  not  to  go  to  a chapel  where 
the  foreign  religion  was  taught.  She  even  resolved 
not  to  speak  to  a missionary,  and,  if  possible,  not 
to  allow  one  of  them  to  speak  to  or  see  her,  lest  in 
some  way  they  should  lead  her  to  change  her  religion. 

“Why  should  I change?’’  said  she  to  herself. 
“ My  religion  is  good  enough  for  me,  and  it  satis- 
fied my  fathers.  As  they  lived  I will,  and  as  they 
died  so  will  I die.” 

Yet  there  came  to  her  mind  the  sad  questions, 
“Who  will  care  for  my  spirit  when  I am  gone? 
Who  will  feed  and  clothe  it?  Who  will  care  for 
the  spirits  of  my  dead  ancestors?  What  shall  I 
say  when  I meet  them  in  the  spirit-world,  and  they 
ask  me  why  they  are  neglected  ? Can  I tell  my  son 
that  his  children  .and  his  wife  left  the  religion  of 
the  Middle  Kingdom  for  that  of  foreigners?  Must 
I say  that  this  happened  while  I was  living?” 

Such  sad  thoughts  made  old  Mrs.  Lee  determined 
to  try  to  win  back  her  grandchildren  to  idolatry, 


CHI  LAP  AND  THE  GRANDMOTHER.  261 


and  made  her  more  willing  to  go  to  Amoy,  where 
she  might  influence  them. 

At  Amoy  she  was  a stranger.  Being  in  a Chris- 
tian home,  there  was  little  opportunity  for  her  to 
become  acquainted  with  heathen  women,  but  she 
often  met  Christian  people.  As  Christian  women 
were  few,  they  were  the  more  in  each  other’s  com- 
pany. Knowing  the  feelings  of  the  elder  Mrs.  Lee 
toward  the  gospel,  these  said  very  little  to  her  about 
it,  but  they  spared  no  pains  to  make  her  feel  con- 
tented in  her  new  home.  Before  long,  in  spite  of 
her  determination  to  have  nothing  to  do  with  Chris- 
tians, the  old  lady  learned  to  like  her  new  friends. 
She  was  specially  pleased  that  they  said  so  little 
against  the  religion  of  China  and  seemed  willing 
that  she  should  worship  as  she  chose. 

Some  time  after  leaving  Tay  Soa  she  became  ill. 
This  illness  increased  until  her  recovery  was  doubt- 
ful. Christian  women  came  in  to  see  and  care  for 
her.  They  treated  her  as  if  she  were  a mother. 
Any  delicacy  that  might  tempt  the  appetite  was 
brought  in  and  she  was  coaxed  to  eat  it.  Day  and 
night  kind  friends  watched  by  the  old  lady,  doing 
all  in  their  power  for  her  comfort.  They  occasion- 
ally spoke  to  her  about  the  true  God,  yet  were  kind 
and  gentle  in  telling  her  of  a Saviour,  saying  little 
to  offend.  They  constantly  prayed  for  her  salva- 
tion, though  usually  when  she  did  not  hear.  The 
younger  Mrs.  Lee,  however,  could  not  hide  her  anx- 
iety for  her  mother-in-law,  nor  could  she  help  at 


262 


CHOII  LIN. 


times  praying  by  the  old  lady’s  bedside.  But  it 
was  so  gently  done  that  old  Mrs.  Lee  was  not  at 
all  offended.  Indeed,  the  continued  kindness  of  all 
made  her  lose  her  hatred  of  Christianity,  and  she 
was  willing  that  they  should  pray  for  her  recovery. 

To  her  it  was  a mystery  why  these  people  should 
care  so  much  for  a stranger,  an  old  woman,  and 
poor  too.  When  she  asked  they  answered  that 
this  was  their  duty  as  taught  by  the  Christian  re- 
ligion ; they  did  it  because  they  were  trying  to  obey 
God.  No  explanation,  however,  would  at  first  sat- 
isfy old  Mrs.  Lee,  and  again  and  again  she  asked 
her  daughter-in-law,  “ Why  do  they  do  these  things? 
Why  are  they  so  kind?  I can  never  pay  them;  I 
have  no  money.  I am  no  relative  of  theirs,  not 
even  an  acquaintance  from  whom  they  may  some 
day  expect  a reward.  I am  only  a poor  old  woman 
who  must  soon  go  to  the  spirit-world,  and  can  in  no 
way  return  their  favors  here.  True,  I may  in  the 
spirit-world,  and  gladly  will  I do  all  I can  there  for 
such  kind  friends.  Yet  it  is  strange  why  they  are 
so  good  to  me.” 

Once,  when  the  younger  Mrs.  Lee  said  that  all 
was  done  from  love  to  Christ,  the  old  lady  replied, 
“ That  may  all  be,  but  people  in  the  Middle  King- 
dom do  not  love  the  gods  so  much  as  that.  They 
love  and  serve  the  gods  to  receive  something,  but 
what  does  the  foreign  God  care  for  me?  I don’t 
pray  to  him  ; I never  serve  him.  What  good  will 
he  do  them  for  their  care  of  me  ?” 


CHI  LAP  AND  THE  GRANDMOTHER.  263 


Beiu  * told  that  the  God  of  the  foreigners  eared 
for  all,  and  even  loved  those  who  did  not  serve  him, 
the  old  lady  was  surprised,  though  she  had  no  doubt 
heard  the  same  truth  before,  and  said,  “ What ! care 
for  and  even  love  those  who  are  not  his  friends,  who 
never  worship  him?  That  cannot  be;  gods  never 
do  that.” 

Slowly  this  idea  entered  her  mind  and  filled  her 
with  wonder  at  the  difference  between  the  God  of 
the  foreigners  and  the  gods  of  the  Chinese.  She 
was  scarcely  less  surprised  to  notice,  sick  as  she  was, 
that  the  women  who  watched  by  her  occasionally 
kneeled  beside  the  bed  when  they  thought  her  asleep 
and  in  a low  voice  prayed  for  her  recovery.  “ Why 
should  they  pray  that  I may  get  well  ?”  she  asked 
herself.  “ Why  do  they  wish  me  to  live?  If  I do 
not  die,  some  one  else  must.  Death  will  have  his 
full  share;  if  not  the  old,  then  he  takes  the  young; 
and  if  I am  spai’ed  some  of  their  own  relatives,  or 
even  themselves,  may  be  taken.” 

She  did  not  die.  After  a while  she  began  to  im- 
prove, and  slowly  recovered  her  health.  When 
able  to  talk  more  she  was  ready  to  converse  with 
Christians  about  their  religion.  She  was  glad  to 
talk  with  Choh  Lin  and  his  brother,  and  seemed  to 
have  lost  all  wish  to  win  them  back  to  idolatry. 

One  day  Choh  Lin  said  to  her,  “ Grandmother, 
you  often  asked  why  our  friends  were  so  kind  to 
you,  a stranger.  I’ll  tell  you  : it  was  because  God 
has  changed  their  hearts.” 


264 


CHOH  LIN. 


“ Why  did  he  change  their  hearts  ?”  she  asked. 
“ Do  those  whose  hearts  are  changed  ever  speak  evil 
words  or  have  evil  thoughts  ?” 

“Yes,  grandmother,”  answered  he ; “sometimes 
they  do,  hut  it  is  because  they  do  not  ask  God 
to  keep  them  from  evil  or  do  not  trust  enough  in 
him.  They  are  like  plants  that  droop  when  they 
have  no  water.  Christ  is  the  Christian’s  water  of 
life.” 

“ Don’t  they  hate  their  enemies  any  more  ?”  she 
asked. 

“No.  The  Lord  says  we  must  love  our  enemies, 
bless  them  that  curse  us  and  do  good  to  them  that 
use  us  badly.” 

“ Is  that  too  in  your  religion  ? It  is  not  in  ours. 
We  hate  those  who  hate  us ; yes,  and  keep  hating 
even  after  we  go  to  the  spirit- world,”  she  added  in 
a lower  voice.  After  they  had  talked  for  a while 
she  continued : “ Our  religion  is  to  do  to  others  as 
they  do  to  us ; the  foreign  religion  is  to  do  to  them 
as  we  wish  they  would  do  to  us.”  Then  she  mur- 
mured, “Yes,  it  is  a good  religion.  It  is  good  to 
the  sick  and  to  the  stranger;  it  has  been  good  to 
me.”  Choli  Lin  thought  her  asleep,  but  she  was 
thinking  aloud. 

As  she  grew  better  she  was  the  more  ready  to  lis- 
ten while  others  talked  about  the  Saviour.  She 
often  asked  questions  and  became  more  and  more 
interested.  She  was  glad  to  have  others  pray  with 
and  for  her,  yet  for  some  time  seemed  unwilling  to 


CHI  LAP  AND  THE  GRANDMOTHER.  265 


ask  them  to  do  so.  One  day  she  said  to  those  at- 
tending her,  “ That  is  a good  doctrine  about  loving 
those  who  do  not  love  you.  If  more  obeyed  it  this 
world  would  be  much  more  happy  than  it  is  now. 
Who  first  taught  it  ?” 

“ God  himself/’  was  the  reply. 

“ It  must  have  been  a God  who  could  think  of 
such  things ; men  think  only  of  getting,  not  of  giv- 
ing— of  rewarding  evil  for  evil,  and  sometimes  evil 
for  good,  rather  than  good  for  evil.  None  but  a 
God  could  have  given  such  a religion  to  man,  and 
I want  to  know  about  that  God.”  This  was  said 
as  if  at  last  she  had  broken  through  a great  barrier 
that  restrained  her.  She  then  continued  : “ That 
God  has  been  very  good  to  me.  When  I came  here, 
a stranger,  he  sent  you  to  care  for  me ; you,  who  are 
his  people,  did  more  for  the  old  stranger  than  sisters 
would  do.  None  of  those  who  worship  the  gods  of 
the  Middle  Kingdom  have  cared  for  me.  The  gods 
I have  served  for  so  many  years  have  deserted  me, 
while  the  God  of  foreigners  has  cared  for  me.  Yes, 
he  has  heard  the  prayers  of  his  people,  and  has  saved 
my  life  and  is  restoring  me  to  health.  He  is  the 
God  whom  I will  serve.” 

From  this  time  old  Mrs.  Lee  was  a changed 
woman.  She  no  longer  hesitated  to  ask  the  way  to 
the  Saviour. 

None  were  more  glad  than  were  Choh  Lin  and 
his  mother  to  welcome  the  old  lady  among  those 
who  worshiped  the  true  God.  Mrs.  Lee  felt  now 


266 


CHOH  LIN. 


that  her  joy  was  nearly  full.  Her  three  children 
were  Christians,  her  favorite  son  was  studying  for 
the  ministry,  and  now  the  old  mother-in-law  was 
seeking  Christ.  Patiently  had  Mrs.  Lee  borne  un- 
kind treatment  and  bitter  words;  earnestly,  con- 
stantly and  hopefully  had  she  prayed  for  her  mother- 
in-law’s  conversion  ; now  her  patience  was  rewarded, 
her  prayers  were  answered.  All  through  those  years 
the  younger  Mrs.  Lee  had  believed  that  her  prayers 
would  be  answered,  yet  the  delay  had  been  a great 
trial  to  her  faith.  Now  that  faith  obtained  its  re- 
ward, she  felt  that  she  could  not  be  thankful 
enough.  Many  times  did  she,  with  tears  of  joy, 
tell  how  good  the  Lord  had  been  to  her,  and  urge 
others  to  trust  him  more. 

When  old  Mrs.  Lee  was  able  to  go  out,  the  first 
place  she  wished  to  visit  was  the  chapel,  where  from 
the  preacher  she  might  hear  the  gospel.  She  took 
delight  in  worshiping  with  God’s  people  and  telling 
in  the  inquiry-meeting  what  the  Lord  had  done  for 
her.  “ I want  to  be  with  the  people  of  the  God 
who  did  so  much  for  me  when  I did  not  love  him,” 
said  she  to  the  missionary.  “ I want  to  be  with 
them,  not  for  what  I can  get,  but  for  what  I want 
to  give  them.  They  are  always  doing  me  good, 
while  I can  do  nothing  in  return.  I am  only  a 
beggar,  vet  it  is  not  hard  to  beg  from  loving  brothers 

OO  7 J O O 

and  sisters  who  only  wish  to  know  what  I need. 
Best  of  all  is  it  to  receive  such  goodness  from  a God 
who  is  willing  to  call  a poor  worthless  old  woman 


CHI  LAP  AND  THE  GRANDMOTHER.  267 


like  me  daughter.  It  is  a good  religion  ; it  is  the 
one  I need.” 

Gradually  the  old  lady  learned  the  true  way. 
She  was  old,  her  mind  worked  slowly;  it  was  diffi- 
cult for  her  to  unlearn  many  things  that  for  a life- 
time she  had  been  learning,  and  more  difficult  still 
to  overcome  the  evil  habits  of  a lifetime.  But  she 
gained,  and  the  change  in  her  became  great.  After 
instructing  her  for  some  time  the  missionaries  bap- 
tized and  received  her  into  the  Church. 


CHAPTER  XXYI. 

CHOH  LIN  MARRIED  AND  A PREACHER. 

IT  must  not  be  supposed  that  because  this  is  a 
true  story  it  is  to  have  in  it  nothing  of  love  and 
marriage.  Love  is  a part  of  life,  therefore  writers 
who  wish  to  make  their  fictitious  stories  real  tell  of 
love.  But  too  often  their  tales  seem  as  if  love 
were  the  only  thing  worth  telling  about  in  this 
world.  God  made  us  to  love  and  be  loved  in  this 
world,  but  that  is  not  the  only  object  of  life.  Those 
who  make  it  such  make  their  lives  failures  as  far  as 
others  are  concerned,  and  often  failures  as  far  as 
their  own  happiness  is  concerned.  Those  who  live 
for  doing  good  will  be  more  loved  and  happier  than 
those  who  think  only  of  loving  and  being  loved. 

The  Chinese  believe  that  children  should  love 
their  parents  and  parents  their  children,  and  admit 
that  husbands  and  wives  should  love  each  other; 
yet  they  do  not  believe  it  wise  or  well  for  young 
people  of  opposite  sexes  to  love  each  other  at  all 
until  engaged.  With  them  engagement  for  mar- 
riage  comes  first — love  afterward,  if  at  all.  People 
in  China,  as  a rule,  do  not  marry  because  they  love, 
268 


MARRIED  AND  A PREACHER. 


269 


but  because  it  is  the  custom  and  because  they  wish 
homes  and  families  of  their  own. 

In  America  it  is  the  custom  for  each  man  to  carry 
a watch.  He  who  can  gets  a gold  one,  but  many 
must  content  themselves  with  one  of  silver,  while  a 
few  own  nothing  but  a nickel  watch,  and  some  are 
too  poor  to  own  a watch  at  all.  It  is  somewhat  so 
in  China  with  marrying.  Men  get  wives  if  they 
can,  and  the  best  they  can  afford,  but  some  are  too 
poor  to  own  a wife,  while  some  own  several.  Men 
are  not  so  anxious  there  to  marry  rich  wives,  be- 
cause a daughter  does  not  usually  take  with  her  a 
share  of  her  father’s  wealth  beyond  the  presents 
given  at  the  wedding.  After  marriage  a woman 
loses  most  of  her  claim  on  her  father’s  family.  She 
belongs  to  her  husband  and  to  his  family,  and  is 
even  treated  at  times  by  her  own  relatives  as  if 
dead. 

Men  do  not  always  make  their  own  choice;  on 
the  contrary,  the  parents  or  friends  of  young  men 
and  boys  frequently  choose  the  wife  and  complete 
the  engagement.  This  is  often  done  without  con- 
sulting the  one  most  interested.  Some  day  the 
young  man  is  told  that  he  is  engaged  to  be  married 
to  a young  lady  whom  he  may  never  have  met.  He 
usually  takes  it  as  a matter  of  course.  The  young 
lady  is  rarely  consulted.  She  is  engaged,  or  sold,  to 
a stranger,  often  with  little  more  regard  to  her  feel- 
ings than  if  she  were  a horse  or  a cow. 

The  time  for  engagements  varies,  some  being 


270 


CHOH  LIN. 


promised  in  marriage  only  a short  time  before  the 
wedding,  and  others  are  engaged  in  their  youth.  It 
is  not  an  unusual  thing  for  parents  to  engage  their 
infants,  and  these  engagements  last. 

Marriages  in  China,  it  can  readily  be  seen,  are 
not  always  happy;  too  often  they  are  wretched. 

When  Choh  Lin  was  fifteen  years  of  age,  and 
before  he  had  decided  to  become  a preacher,  the 
older  brother  of  a young  girl  in  the  city  visited 
Mrs.  Lee  and  tried  to  make  arrangements  with  her 
for  the  engagement  of  Choh  Lin  to  his  sister.  The 
girl  was  intelligent,  rather  pretty,  of  good  dispo- 
sition and  of  a family  fully  equal  to  that  of  Choh 
Lin,  and,  moreover,  was  a professed  Christian. 
Mrs.  Lee  knew  that  she  would  be  likely  to  make 
a suitable  wife  for  her  son.  The  fact  that  she  had 
been  brought  up  as  a Christian  made  her  the  more 
acceptable  to  Mrs.  Lee.  Besides,  Choh  Lin  was  now 
approaching  manhood,  and  it  was  fully  time  that 
a wife  should  be  chosen  for  him.  But  his  mother 
was  unable  to  pay  for  a wife  for  her  son,  so  she 
frankly  told  the  man  that  she  could  not  afford  to 
give  what  would  be  expected  as  engagement-money. 

“ We  do  not  want  any  money  now,”  was  the  an- 
swer. “ You  will  be  able  when  your  sons  are  earn- 
ing more  to  pay,  and  we  will  wait.  We  want  a 
(rood  husband  for  our  sister.” 

But  Mrs.  Lee,  while  satisfied  with  the  girl,  was 
unwilling  to  bind  herself  to  pay,  so  the  engagement, 
was  not  made. 


MARRIED  AND  A PREACHER. 


271 


Shortly  after  this  a near  relative  of  another  girl 
in  the  city  called  on  Mrs.  Lee,  and  broached  the 
subject  of  the  marriage  of  Mrs.  Lee’s  son. 

“Yes,”  said  Mrs.  Lee,  “Chi  Lap  is  old  enough, 
and  should  have  a wife,  but  he  is  so  busy  now  that 
he  cannot  take  time  to  select  a wife.  Besides,  he  is 
rapidly  rising  in  business  and  will  some  day  be  a 
rich  man  ; then  he  can  afford  to  get  a much  better 
wife  than  now.” 

“ ‘ Rising  in  business  ’ ?”  spoke  the  visitor  in  sur- 
prise. “Has  he  left  school?  Why  did  he  stop?” 

“ He  has  not  been  at  school  for  some  years,”  re- 
plied the  mother. 

“ Oh,  I was  speaking  of  your  younger  son,”  said 
the  woman.  “He  has  had  no  wife  chosen  for  him 
yet,  has  he?” 

“No,  he  is  quite  young  and  there  is  no  hurry,” 
answered  Mrs.  Lee.  “It  will  be  time  enough  to 
select  a wife  when  he  has  decided  on  the  business 
he  is  to  follow ; besides,  I do  not  wish  to  see  him 
married  before  his  older  brother.” 

“One  need  not  interfere  with  the  other,”  replied 
the  woman.  “ There  are  enough  beautiful  and  cul- 
tivated girls  for  both,  and  many  families  who  would 
be  glad  to  marry  their  daughters  to  your  sons.” 

After  flattering  Mrs.  Lee  for  a while  the  woman 
proposed  that  Choh  Lin  be  engaged  to  her  relative. 

“ I am  too  poor  now,”  replied  Mrs.  Lee,  “ to 
make  arrangements  for  the  marriage  of  my  younger 
son.  He  must  wait  until  we  are  richer.” 


272 


CHOH  LIN. 


“ We  do  not  ask  much  money,”  said  the  woman  ; 
“ if  you  will  only  promise  your  son,  a small  amount 
of  money  will  be  enough  to  satisfy  us  for  losing  our 
relative.” 

Mrs.  Lee  nevertheless  refused  to  make  the  en- 
gagement until  better  able  to  pay  the  amount  usu- 
ally expected,  and  the  woman  left  disappointed. 

Choh  Lin  was  a bright  youth,  a good  student  and 
gave  promise  of  being  a learned  and  noted  man ; so 
he  was  regarded  as  a desirable  husband.  Such  a 
young  man  could  not  fail  to  have  offers  of  a wife, 
and  even  have  them  repeated.  In  a year  or  two 
the  man  who  first  offered  his  sister  to  Mrs.  Lee  as 
a wife  for  her  younger  son  called  asain  and  urged 
the  suit  for  his  sister.  Believing  that  Choh  Lin 
would  bring  no  little  honor  to  his  wife  and  to  her 
family,  the  brother  of  the  young  lady  made  unusual 
offers. 

At  the  engagement  a price  is  fixed  for  the  bride, 
part  of  it  to  be  paid  then  and  the  rest  at  the  wed- 
ding. This  price  varies  according  to  the  wealth, 
beauty,  rank,  intelligence  and  many  other  qualifica- 
tions of  the  bride.  It  may  vary,  too,  if  more  than 
one  man  wishes  the  same  maiden.  Her  relatives 
can  then  demand  a high  rate,  since  the  demand  is 
more  than  the  supply. 

The  brother  and  mother  of  the  young  lady  were 
so  anxious  to  get  Choh  Lin  that  they  offered  her  to 
Mrs.  Lee  for  thirty  dollars — a very  low  price  for 
such  a desirable  wife — and  further  agreed  to  wait 


MARRIED  AND  A PREACHER.  273 

for  all  the  money  until  the  wedding,  and  then,  if 
Choh  Lin  were  unable  to  pay  all,  they  would  take 
even  less. 

The  bargain  was  finally  made,  and  Choh  Lin, 
when  about  sixteen  years  old,  was  engaged  to  be 
married.  The  engagement,  once  made,  could  not 
be  broken  without  incurring  shame  and  disgrace. 
The  fact  that  he  was  engaged  to  be  married  gave 
Choh  Lin  but  little  care.  He  did  not  call  to  see 
the  young  lady — that,  in  Chinese  society,  would 
have  been  regarded  as  very  improper — nor  did  he 
write  to  her  or  receive  messages  from  her.  The 
two  were  almost  strangers,  and  such  they  must 
remain  until  the  wedding-day.  He  had,  however, 
seen  her  as  a little  girl  in  school  when  he  first  came 
to  Amoy.  If  he  gave  the  subject  much  thought,  it 
was  that  of  satisfaction  that  there  was  one  less  care 
for  him  now : a wife  had  been  chosen,  and  it  only 
remained  to  fix  the  wedding-day,  and,  when  that 
arrived,  be  married.  It  was  not  a matter  of  love 
at  all,  but  of  business,  and  he  was  told  that  the 
business  had  been  well  done,  a good  bargain  made; 
why  should  he  worry  himself? 

When  he  was  twenty  years  old  the  wedding-day 
came.  It  was  a day  of  festivity  and  gladness  to 
Choh  Lin  and  to  his  fellow-students,  but  less  a time 
of  festivity  to  the  bride. 

Since  her  engagement  her  mother  and  brother 
had  died,  and  she  was  left  to  the  care  of  more  dis- 
tant relatives.  While  her  friends  took  charge  of 


18 


274 


CIIOH  LIN. 


the  preparations  the  absence  of  these  two  destroyed 
much  of  the  happiness  of  the  young  lady,  yet  it 
made  her  look  forward  with  more  hopeful  anxiety 
to  the  time  when,  instead  of  mother  and  brother, 
she  would  have  a husband  to  care  for  her.  But 
what  would  the  husband,  what  would  the  wife  be? 
It  need  not  be  told  how  anxious  each  was  to  meet 
the  other  and  see  if  all  that  had  been  told  was  true, 
and  if  either  had  changed  since  childhood. 

The  bride,  dressed  in  brilliant  colors,  was  carried 
in  a closed  red  sedan-chair  to  the  home  of  Choh 
Lin.  He,  too,  was  dressed  in  his  best,  waiting  to 
receive  the  wedding-procession.  It  was  an  anxious 
moment  to  the  two  when  he  stepped  to  the  sedan  as 
it  was  set  down  at  his  home.  Then  he  opened  the 
door  of  the  chair  and  for  the  first  time  since  child- 
hood looked  on  the  face  of  his  bride,  and  she  on  the 
face  of  her  husband. 

As  Mrs.  Lee,  her  son  and  the  bride  were  Chris- 
tians, the  ceremony  resembled  a marriage-ceremony 
in  America.  After  the  wedding  the  young  couple 
settled  down  quietly  to  married  life.  Owing  to  the 
death  of  her  near  relatives  the  bride  did  not  bring 
the  usual  number  of  presents,  and  Choh  Lin  had 
less  money  to  pay  to  her  relatives  for  his  wife. 
They  accepted  twenty-four  dollars  as  a fair  price, 
considering  the  circumstances.  Of  course  the  Chi- 
nese deny  that  the  money  is  given  to  pay  for  a wife, 
yet  admit  that  it  is  meant  to  make  amends  for  the 
loss  her  relatives  feel  at  her  leaving  them. 


MARRIED  AND  A PREACHER. 


275 


Choli  Lin  and  his  wife  soon  learned  that  neither 
was  perfect,  yet  each  found  in  the  other  a true  and 
faithful  companion,  and  before  they  had  been  mar- 
ried many  months  they  had  learned  to  love  each 
other  fondly.  Some  years  after  their  marriage  the 
author  visited  them  in  their  home  and  saw  that 
there  can  come  true  love  to  the  hearts  of  those  who 
are  strangers  on  their  wedding-day.  But  Choh 
Lin’s  experience  is  not  like  that  of  many  married 
people  in  China.  Their  lives  are  wretched ; un- 
loved they  live  and  unloved  they  die.  A married 
life  without  love  they  find  a miserable  slavery. 

For  some  time  before  his  marriage  Choh  Lin’s 
time  had  been  largely  given  to  preaching.  At 
length  the  work  became  so  urgent  that  the  mission- 
aries were  obliged  to  take  the  older  students  alto- 
gether from  their  studies  and  place  them  in  charge 
of  the  different  fields.  He  had  been  married  only 
a short  time  when  they  told  him  one  day  that  he 
must  give  up  study  in  the  seminary  and  move  out 
into  the  country  to  take  charge,  with  another 
preacher,  of  a large  mission-field  where  the  people 
seemed  ready  and  anxious  to  hear  the  gospel. 

“We  would  like  you  to  remain  here  and  study 
longer,”  said  they — “you  are  yet  too  young  to  have 
so  much  work  and  responsibility  placed  on  you — 
yet  what  else  can  we  do  ? The  Lord  has  heard  the 
prayer  of  the  Church  and  has  opened  the  field  for 
us;  now  we  must  try  to  occupy  it.  We  are  few, 
but  the  Lord  will  be  with  us.  It  may  be  that  after 


276 


CHOH  LIN. 


awhile  you  will  be  able  to  return  and  study,  but 
now  it  seems  the  Lord’s  will  that  you  give  all  your 
time  to  preaching.” 

“ As  you  say,  teachers,  so  will  I do,”  answered 
Choh  Lin.  “ I gave  myself  to  the  Lord  for  his 
work,  and  do  not  mean  to  keep  part  of  myself  back 
now,  and  thus  be  like  Ananias  and  Sapphira.  If 
you  think  I can  do  the  work,  send  me.  I am  glad 
to  do  the  Lord’s  will,  only  I wish  that  I were 
better  fitted  for  it.” 

Choh  Lin  went  to  the  mission-field  alone,  leaving 
his  wife  in  Amoy,  intending  as  soon  as  he  could 
make  arrangements  to  move  to  the  field  and  live 
there.  He  longed  to  stay  at  Amoy  or  near  the  city, 
where  so  many  Christians  were  and  where  he  had 
so  many  friends.  To  leave  behind  those  whom  he 
loved,  to  give  up  the  associations  and  the  comforts 
he  had  there,  to  live  among  heathen  people,  made 
the  sacrifice  no  small  one  for  the  young  man.  But 
a greater  trial  was  before  him,  and  one  that  he 
dreaded  more  than  any  other.  He  must  have 
charge  in  part  of  a mission.  True,  the  older 
preacher  would  have  the  principal  charge,  but 
Choh  Lin  knew  enough  of  the  work  to  know  that 
the  older  man  would  stay  at  the  principal  station 
and  send  him  to  preach  and  take  charge  of  one  or 
more  of  the  smaller  ones  connected  with  it.  How 
could  he  do  this?  How  meet  the  opposition  of 
idolaters?  How  meet  their  shrewd  schemes  to 
drive  him  away?  How  keep  the  Christians  and 


MARRIED  AND  A PREACHER. 


277 


the  inquirers  from  getting  into  trouble  with  the 
heathen?  How  hold  his  position  and  yet  keep 
peace?  A single  mistake  on  his  part  might  destroy 
the  effect  of  all  that  had  been  done  and  prevent  for 
years  the  preaching  of  the  gospel  again  in  the  place. 
Then,  too,  what  would  the  people  think  of  him  ? 
What  heed  would  the  heathen  give  to  the  words  of 
such  a youth  ? 

A more  serious  trouble  seemed  before  him.  How 
should  he  be  able  to  teach  inquirers  the  way  to 
Christ  and  to  heaven  ? What  if  he  make  a mistake 
and  direct  them  wrong?  What  if  he  lead  men 
away  from  Christ? 

As  these  thoughts  came  to  the  mind  of  the  young 
man  he  was  almost  ready  to  refuse  to  become  a 
preacher.  He  thought  and  prayed  over  the  matter, 
he  read  the  Bible  to  learn  more  clearly  his  duty,  but 
could  see  only  one  course,  and  that  was  to  go  for- 
ward and  do  the  work  to  which  the  Lord  had  called 
him.  He  remembered  Jonah  ; he  also  remembered 
the  Lord’s  promise,  “ My  grace  is  sufficient  for 
thee;”  and  he  went  forward. 

The  new  work  was  even  more  difficult  than  he 
supposed  ; so  the  strength  he  received  to  do  it  was 
greater  thau  he  expected.  With  every  trial  he 
found  new  help  given,  yet  it  seemed  to  him  as  if 
the  heathen  made  special  efforts  to  trouble  and  per- 
plex him.  While  usually  polite,  they  occasionally 
were  unkind  and  insulting,  telling  him  that  he  was 
taking  foreigners’  money  to  betray  his  own  people 


278 


CHOH  LIN. 


and  their  religion  to  a foreign  people  and  a foreign 
God.  In  a quiet  way  and  by  shrewd  means  they 
sought  to  drive  him  away.  They  tried  to  frighten 
the  man  who  had  rented  a house  for  a chapel,  so 
that  he  should  demand  it  back.  They  tried,  by 
telling  of  a probable  war  against  foreigners  and  all 
who  held  to  their  religion,  to  make  Choh  Lin  afraid 
to  preach.  Bills  were  found  posted  along  the  streets 
warning  people  not  to  forsake  their  own  for  a for- 
eign religion,  and  telling  of  the  danger  of  attending 
chapel-services.  Now  and  then,  during  worship 
in  the  chapel,  stones  were  thrown  on  the  roof  to 
frighten  the  worshipers.  Those  who  came  to  hear 
the  gospel  were  threatened  if  they  continued  to  at- 
tend the  chapel.  Many  were  frightened  away,  and 
some  who  seemed  really  interested  in  the  gospel 
stayed  away  for  fear  of  persecution. 

Choh  Lin  was  often  sick  at  heart,  and  not  with- 
out serious  fears  lest  he  might  suffer  violence,  yet 
he  kept  faithfully  at  his  work.  He  could  now  un- 
derstand the  persecutions  the  apostles  suffered.  He 
could  understand,  too,  what  the  Saviour  meant  when 
he  said,  “Lo,  I am  with  you  alway,  even  unto  the 
end.”  The  young  preacher  felt  that  presence.  In 
his  darkest  hours  he  could  look  upward  and  see 
light  there;  in  his  weakest  moments  he  felt  a strong 
arm  supporting  him. 

His  work  was  not  without  results.  In  spite  of 
threats,  some  did  come  to  the  chapel ; they  listened 
too,  and  more,  they  believed  the  truth  he  taught. 


MARRIED  AND  A PREACHER. 


279 


One  and  another  stayed  after  the  sermon  to  talk 
with  the  preacher  about  “ the  doctrine.”  Gradually 
light  came  to  their  souls,  and  one  by  one  they  gave 
themselves  to  Christ.  Only  those  who  have  led  souls 
to  Jesus  can  understand  the  joy  of  Choh  Lin  as 
these  told  him  that  they  had  found  the  Saviour. 
His  voice  and  theirs  united  in  many  a song  of 
thanksgiving  over  what  the  Lord  had  done  for 
their  souls. 

For  a long  time  Choh  Lin  did  not  think  it  best 
to  bring  his  wife  to  the  place  where  duty  called 
him.  Those  were  happy  times  when  he  was  able 
for  a few  days  to  leave  his  station  and  go  to  Amoy 
to  his  home  and  to  Christian  friends.  He  soon 
learned  the  value  of  his  good  wife’s  sympathizing 
words  and  cheerful  counsels,  but  more  still  did  he 
prize  the  helpful  words  and  helpful  advice  of  the 
missionaries.  He  said  they  seemed  to  lift  his  faith 
above  the  clouds  and  showed  him  the  sun  always 
shining  there.  From  these  visits  the  young  preach- 
er returned  with  stronger  heart  and  more  earnest  zeal. 

It  was  not  the  purpose  of  the  missionaries  to  keep 
the  young  men  steadily  in  the  same  place,  but  to 
change  them  about,  that  they  might  not  be  com- 
pelled to  study  so  hard  in  preparing  their  sermons, 
and  also  to  give  them  a chance  to  work  under  the 
care  of  different  leaders  among  the  older  preachers. 
Then,  as  soon  as  a young  man  proved  himself  fitted 
for  a larger  and  more  important  field,  the  mission- 
aries speedily  promoted  him. 


280 


CHOH  LIN. 


Thus,  Choh  Lin  was  changed  about  from  one 
station  to  another,  though  most  of  the  time  at  a 
distance  from  Amoy.  After  a few  years  he  was 
promoted  to  be  at  the  head  of  a principal  station, 
where  he  remained  in  charge  for  some  time,  and 
then  was  placed  over  one  of  the  most  important  of 
all  the  stations  connected  with  the  mission.  But  of 
this  more  will  be  told  in  a later  chapter. 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 


THE  GOSPEL  AT  T AY  SO  A. 

HEN  the  missionaries  inquired  of  Mrs.  Lee 


’ » about  the  village  in  which  she  had  lived,  she 
told  them  that  none  except  herself  had  heard  a mis- 
sionary preach,  but  that  she  had  spoken  to  some 
about  the  foreign  God,  and  added,  “Few  care  to 
hear  about  him  ; the  most  say  that  I must  not  speak 
in  the  village  of  any  but  the  gods  of  the  Middle 
Kingdom.” 

“ Do  you  obey  ?”  was  asked. 

“ No,”  was  her  reply,  “ but  I say  nothing  to  those 
who  are  angry,  for  fear  it  will  only  make  them  hate 
the  doctrine  the  more.  There  are  some  who  are 
willing  to  listen,  and  one  or  two  who  want  to  know 
more.  I wish  that  the  foreign  teachers  could  visit 
Tay  Soa  and  tell  the  people  of  the  doctrine.  You 
could  make  it  so  plain  that  they  would  see  it  to  be 
good.” 

More  than  once  Mrs.  Lee  invited  and  even  urged 
the  missionaries  to  go  to  Tay  Soa  to  preach  the  gos- 
pel to  the  people.  As  their  number  was  so  small 
and  their  work  in  the  city  as  well  as  outside  of  it 
so  great,  it  was  some  time  before  they  were  able  to 


2SL 


282 


CHOH  LIN. 


visit  the  village.  Meanwhile,  Mrs.  Lee’s  talks,  and 
still  more  her  life,  were  having  an  effect  on  some 
of  the  people.  The  change  in  her  had  been  great 
— too  great  to  pass  unnoticed  by  a watchful  and 
gossiping  people.  They  had  not  forgotten  her 
search  for  the  life-giving  God,  and  saw  from  her 
manner  and  her  life  that  she  believed  she  had 
found  this  God.  There  was  a marked  change  that 
they  could  not  help  noticing.  She  had  no  longer 
unkind  and  harsh  things  to  say  of  her  enemies. 
She  said  little  about  them,  and  that  little  was  rather 
tinged  with  sadness  than  hate. 

“Yes,  they  have  wronged  me,”  said  she  one  day 
to  a friend,  “ but  I must  bear  it  patiently.  The 
great  Upper  Ruler  (the  Chinese  Christian  name  for 
God)  will  make  it  all  right  sometime;  he  knows 
what  is  best.” 

“What!”  asked  the  friend  in  surprise,  “ do  you 
think  it  best  for  you  to  be  robbed  of  all  your  prop- 
erty? I think  it  would  have  been  best  if  the  rob- 
bers were  made  to  pay  back  and  then  go  to  prison. 
I do  not  see  how  it  can  be  best  for  you  to  be  made 
to  work  so  hard  for  your  living,  when,  had  it  not 
been  for  those  robbers,  you  would  have  plenty,  and 
to  spare  for  your  needy  friends.” 

“It  will  be  for  the  best  in  the  end,”  replied  Mrs. 
Lee  quietly.  “ Even  now  I see  how  it  has  proved 
for  the  best.  Had  I not  been  poor  I would  not 
have  been  in  Amoy  and  would  not  have  heard 
about  the  life-giving  God.” 


THE  GOSPEL  AT  T AY  SO  A. 


283 


“ But  then  you  would  not  have  needed  him,” 
spoke  the  other. 

“ ‘ Would  not  have  needed  him  ’ ?”  implied  Mrs. 
Lee,  looking  up  in  surprise:  “I  always  needed  him, 
but  did  not  know  it.  I was  like  a thirsty  person 
who  dreams  of  water,  but  awakens  to  know  that  lie 
is  dying  from  thirst.  When  I sought  among  the 
temples  for  the  life-giving  God,  then  in  dreams  I 
was  feeling  my  thirst  and  seeking  to  quench  it,  but 
not  until  I heard  in  the  chapel  of  the  true  God  did 
I awaken  to  know  that  I was  dying  from  thirst. 
Yes,  there  I awoke,  and  there  too  found  the  living 
Fountain  of  water.  No,  no,  it  is  well.  My  pov- 
erty made  me  go  to  Amoy,  and  there  I became  rich. 
The  good  Upper  Ruler  allowed  me  to  lose  my  earthly 
property  that  I might  have  a share  in  his  eternal 
and  heavenly  riches.  It  was  best.” 

Talks  like  these  left  an  impression  on  her  friends. 
They  saw  that  Mrs.  Lee  was  moved  by  a different 
spirit,  and  many  were  the  remarks  made  about  her 
by  her  neighbors.  Nor  were  these  all  against  her. 
The  people  saw  that  she  was  not  affected  by  ridicule. 
Instead  of  persecution  arousing  her  to  anger  and  to 
reply  in  bitter  words,  it  only  seemed  to  make  her 
more  gentle  and  kind.  True,  there  were  times  when 
her  old  nature,  aroused  beyond  the  power  of  the 
new  and  better  one  to  control  it,  showed  itself  in 
angry  words.  This  was  not  often,  and  was  always 
followed  by  acts  of  kindness  that  really  perplexed 
the  people  of  Tay  Soa  more  than  her  general  change 


284 


CHOH  LIN. 


of  conduct.  Returning  good  for  evil  is  not  a Chi- 
nese custom. 

Mrs.  Lee  was  not  backward  to  speak  about  the  / 
true  God  to  those  who  were  ready  to  listen,  and  1 
gladly  visited  and  talked  with  those  who  showed 
any  interest  in  the  gospel.  But  she  was  obliged  to 
be  very  careful,  lest  those  opposed  to  the  truth 
should  persecute  those  to  whom  she  talked.  Some 
who  would  willingly  have  listened  dared  not  speak 
to  Mrs.  Lee  about  Christianity,  and  hardly  dared 
visit  or  speak  to  her  at  all,  lest  others  should  accuse 
them  of  wishing  to  become  worshipers  of  the  for- 
eign God. 

In  spite  of  all  opposition  and  persecution,  some 
in  Tay  Soa  became  deeply  interested  in  the  gospel, 
and  their  interest  continued,  so  that  when  one  of 
the  missionaries  visited  the  village  not  long  after 
Mrs.  Lee  moved  to  Amoy,  there  were  others  besides 
Mrs.  Lee,  who  was  at  Tay  Soa  on  a visit,  glad  to 
welcome  him.  Of  course  the  people  all  gathered  to 
see  and  listen  to  the  foreigner.  Many  had  never 
before  seen  one,  and  to  them  he  was  a great  curi- 
osity. 

The  missionary’s  visit  made  no  little  talk  in  Tay 
Soa.  His  dress,  his  appearance,  his  way  of  speaking 
their  language,  were  all  discussed;  and  when  these 
subjects  grew  old  the  doctrine  he  taught  formed  an 
unending  topic  for  discussion.  Men  talked  of  it  on 
the  street,  women  talked  of  it  in  their  homes,  hus- 
bands and  wives  talked  of  it  in  their  families.  Some 


THE  GOSPEL  AT  T AY  SO  A. 


285 


were  bitter  against  the  missionary  and  the  foreign 
religion,  and  some  merely  spoke  of  both  as  curios- 
ities, while  a few  showed  that  they  were  friendly  to 
both  missionary  and  doctrine.  Nearly  all  of  these 
were  Mrs.  Lee’s  friends  and  persons  with  whom  she 
had  already  talked  of  Christianity.  Those  who 
were  friendly  were  careful,  though,  to  say  little  in 
favor  of  the  gospel  in  the  presence  of  its  enemies, 
and  specially  careful  were  they  to  say  and  do  noth- 
ing that  might  arouse  against  themselves  persecution 
such  as  Mrs.  Lee  had  suffered. 

When  Mrs.  Lee  removed  to  Amoy,  there  had  been 
no  little  discussion  and  bitter  feeling.  Some  said 
that  she  had  gone  to  be  a servant  and  a spy  for  the 
foreigners,  and  others  that  the  cruelty  of  the  vil- 
lagers had  driven  her  awav. 

“ Some  day  the  gods  will  visit  Tay  Soa  with  great 
calamities  for  what  that  woman  has  suffered,”  said 
a man  one  day  to  several  who  were  talking  about 
Mrs.  Lee’s  leaving.  “ The  gods  have  led  her  awav 
that  they  may  punish  the  village  the  more  severely.” 

“ We  had  nothing  to  do  with  her  suffering,”  re- 
plied another.  “ It  was  her  own  relatives  who  did 
it.  I am  willing  that  the  gods  shall  punish  all  of 
them  : they  deserve  it.” 

“Yes,  but  we  did  not  hinder  their  robbing  the 
widow,”  persisted  the  other.  “ We  did  nothing  to 
help  her,  and  we  must  suffer  with  the  evil  ones. 
Angry  gods  are  sometimes  blind.  Yet  we  also  had 
something;  to  do  with  her  suffering;.  Have  we  not 

O O 


286 


CHOH  LIN. 


ridiculed  her  search  for  the  life-giving  God,  and 
have  we  not  even  persecuted  her  since  she  believes 
that  she  has  found  him?” 

“ ‘ Persecuted  her  ’ !”  spoke  another  excitedly. 
“She  deserved  it  for  deserting  the  worship  of  the 
Middle  Kingdom  for  that  of  outside  barbarians. 
No,  no ; the  gods  have  not  led  her  away  that  they 
may  punish,  but  that  they  may  favor  and  bless,  this 
village.  Let  her  go;  it  will  be  a blessing  to  us.” 

“Oh,  she  has  not  gone  for  any  such  reason,”  said 
a man  who  had  been  quiet  before.  “ The  gods  did 
not  send  her  away,  nor  has  she  gone  away  to  wor- 
ship the  foreign  God.  She  is  a wise  woman.  She 
sees  that  neither  she  nor  her  sons  can  make  money 
here,  but  that,  aided  by  the  friendship  of  foreigners, 
they  will  earn  money  rapidly  in  Amoy ; so  she  goes 
there.  Chi  Lap  is  already  earning  money  in  the 
city  ten  times  as  rapidly  as  he  could  here;  his 
mother  and  younger  brother  will  soon  be  doing  the 
same.  Foreigners  have  ten  thousand  times  as  much 
money  as  Middle-Kingdom  people,  and  Mrs.  Lee  is 
wise  enough  to  take  the  right  way  to  get  it.  She 
becomes  a friend  of  foreigners  and  follows  their  re- 
ligion, but  it  is  that  she  may  win  their  favor,  and 
so  help  her  sons  as  well  as  herself  to  gain  their 
money.  I too  would  be  willing  to  accept  the  for- 
eigners’ teligion  could  I make  a fortune  by  it;  so 
would  every  one  else.” 

This  speech  had  a great  effect  for  the  time;  nor 
did  this  effect  entirely  die  away.  It  made  many 


THE  GOSPEL  AT  T AY  SO  A. 


287 


think  more  favorably  of  Mrs.  Lee  and  of  foreigners 
too — also  of  their  religion,  or  rather  of  their  money. 

Another  visit  from  the  missionary  followed  the 
first.  Though  he  was  not  so  much  of  a curiosity 
as  before,  the  interest  in  the  doctrine  was  greater. 
Mrs.  Lee’s  talks  were  having  their  etfect,  and  that 
effect  had  been  increased  rather  than  lessened  by 
her  leaving  them.  But,  more  still,  the  discussions 
about  the  Christian  doctrine  had  aroused  a great 
deal  of  interest,  and  many  listened  intently  to  the 
address  of  the  missionary.  There  was  in  it  little  to 
anger  the  most  determined  idolater,  but  much  to 
lead  him  to  think.  Little  was  said  against  the  gods 
of  China.  They  were  given  all  the  credit,  and  far 
more  than  they  deserved,  but  their  best  qualities 
were  contrasted  with  those  of  the  true  God.  When 
the  missionary  spoke  of  Christ,  he  could  find  noth- 
ing in  the  religion  of  the  Chinese  with  which  to 
compare  or  contrast  him.  Jesus  was  presented  as 
the  God  who  knew  men — knew  their  souls,  uudei’- 
stood  their  need,  and  came  to  supply  that  need, 
came  to  save  men  whom  no  spirits,  no  gods  besides, 
could  save. 

Greater  and  more  earnest  discussion  followed  this 
than  the  former  visit  of  the  missionary,  but  now  it 
was  the  doctrine  he  taught  rather  than  the  man  that 
was  discussed.  Some  had  asked  many  questions ; 
these  were  regarded  as  the  wise  men  now,  and  their 
opinions  about  Christianity  were  considered  as  worth 
a great  deal.  They  were  ready  to  give  not  only  the 


288 


CHOH  LIN. 


missionary’s  words,  but  as  ready  to  add  to  them 
what  they  supposed  he  would  have  said  had  he 
been  asked  certain  questions.  In  this  way  the  for- 
eign teacher  was  made  to  teach  some  things  that  he 
would  never  have  thought  of  saying.  Yet  many 
truths  remained  in  the  minds  of  the  people,  and 
those  truths  were  working,  though  slowly. 

Mrs.  Lee’s  weekly  visits  to  Tay  Soa  helped  on 
the  effect  of  the  truth.  She  visited  the  women  and 
explained  many  things,  so  that  by  several  of  the 
women  and  a few  of  the  men  her  visits  were  antici- 
pated with  growing  interest.  After  several  visits 
of  missionaries  it  became  evident  that  there  were  a 
number  of  inquirers  in  the  village.  It  seemed  that 
a mission-station  should  be  formed  and  a chapel 
opened  at  Tay  Soa,  and  regular  services  held. 

When  the  missionaries  tried  to  hire  a house  for  a 
chapel  their  enemies  began  to  make  their  opposition 
felt.  They  went  to  the  man  who  intended  to  rent 
them  the  house  and  forbade  his  doing  it.  They  made 
such  threats  that  he  dared  not  keep  his  part  of  the 
bargain.  He  sent  word  to  Amoy  that  he  could  not 
rent  his  house  to  the  missionaries,  nor  would  an 
offer  of  a larger  rent  make  him  change  his  mind. 
He  wanted  the  money,  but  he  was  afraid  that  if  he 
got  it  he  could  not  long  keep  it,  if  indeed  he  could 
keep  his  life. 

Foiled  in  their  efforts  to  hire  this  man’s  house, 
the  missionaries  were  at  a loss  what  to  do.  They 
were  determined  to  open  a chapel  in  Tay  Soa,  not 


THE  GOSPEL  AT  TAY  SO  A. 


28'J 

only  on  account  of  the  interest  among  the  people, 
but  to  have  a station  there  as  a starting-place  for 
the  large  and  populous  country  beyond. 

“ I’ll  tell  you  how  to  get  a house  for  a chapel,” 
said  Mrs.  Lee.  “Let  some  Christian  Chinaman  go 
up  there  and  rent  a house  for  you.  When  the  bar- 
gain is  made  and  the  owner  gets  his  money  regu- 
larly, he  will  not  readily  turn  you  out.” 

Acting  on  this  advice,  a house  was  rented  and  a 
chapel  opened.  As  soon  as  the  enemies  of  Chris- 
tianity learned  how  they  had  been  defeated  they 
were  more  opposed  than  ever  to  the  gospel.  They 
"were  not  angry  at  being  outwitted,  but  angry  be- 
cause the  missionaries  had  succeeded.  Shrewdness 
in  bargains  rarely  offends  a Chinaman.  Though 
unable  to  prevent  the  worship  of  the  foreign  God 
in  their  village,  these  men  determined  to  make  it  as 
uncomfortable  as  possible  for  the  worshipers.  These 
were  threatened  with  all  manner  of  punishment, 
nor  were  threats  alone  applied.  More  than  once 
was  violence  used,  yet  a wholesome  fear  of  the  mis- 
sionaries, who  were  known  to  have  influence  with 
the  mandarins,  prevented  any  great  injury  being 
done. 

Regular  Sabbath  services  were  now  held  by  a 
native  preacher ; occasionally  one  of  the  mission- 
aries preached.  Quite  a large  class  of  inquirers 
was  formed.  For  the  first  time  in  the  history  of 
new  stations  in  and  around  Amoy  the  majority  of 
these  inquirers  were  women.  According  to  Chinese 

19 


290 


CHOH  LIN. 


custom,  none  but  elderly  women  are  allowed  to  go 
out  into  the  streets,  nor  is  it  deemed  proper  for  even 
these  to  be  much  in  gatherings  of  men.  For  them 
to  hear  the  gospel  is  therefore  nearly  impossible, 
except  as  they  hear  it  through  fathers,  brothers, 
husbands  or  sons.  It  is  no  unusual  thing  for  a 
church  to  be  organized  and  continued  for  several 
years  with  men  only  as  members.  Work  by  women 
among  the  women  is  bringing  about  a change  in 
this  respect. 

The  missionaries  were  surprised  to  find  so  many 
women  among  the  inquirers  at  Tay  Soa,  but  a ques- 
tion or  two  made  it  plain.  This  was  the  result  of 
Mrs.  Lee’s  efforts.  Her  talks  in  the  homes  of  those 
willing;  to  allow  it  had  brought  the  natural  results. 
The  prayers  of  the  good  woman  not  only  for,  but 
with,  her  friends  had  been  specially  powerful. 
Mrs.  Lee’s  strong  point  was  prayer.  Her  equal 
among  Chinese  Christians,  men  as  well  as  women, 
the  author  never  heard  in  China.  Gifted  with  good 
intellect,  a pleasing  voice,  a ready  flow  of  words  and 
beautiful  imagery,  being  a woman  of  deep  emotions, 
strong;  faith,  and  with  a heart  on  fire  with  love  for 
souls,  it  was  almost  impossible  to  listen  to  her  sup- 
plications without  being  affected  by  them. 

For  a number  of  months  the  missionaries  and 
native  preachei’S  visited  and  preached  in  the  chapel 
at  Tay  Soa ; and  then  a Christian  was  placed  in 
charge  as  chapel-keepei'.  It  was  this  man’s  duty  to 
attend  to  the  building,  conduct  the  daily  morning 


THE  GOSPEL  AT  TAY  SO  1. 


291 


and  evening  worship,  and  even  lead  the  Sabbath 
service  if  no  preacher  came.  He  was  also  expected 
to  talk  to  the  people  about  the  gospel. 

When  Choh  Lin  was  able  to  be  away  from  school 
at  Amoy  and  visit  Tay  Soa,  it  was  his  delight  to  be 
present  at  these  services.  His  heart  was  glad  when 
he  welcomed  several  of  his  old  friends  to  the  chapel, 
and  his  joy  was  great  when  he  met  his  early  com- 
panions, Oan  and  Jip.  He  knew  that  their  excuse, 
that  they  came  from  curiosity,  was  not  the  only 
reason.  Their  eager  faces  as  they  listened  to  his 
words  told  more  than  language  could  that  they  were 
interested  in  the  gospel.  When  none  heard,  they 
let  him  know  that  they  did  care  about  the  new  re- 
ligion, only  they  were  afraid  of  persecution.  The 
threats  of  the  leading  men  of  the  village  had 
alarmed  them  as  well  as  others,  and  kept  them  from 
the  place  of  worship;  yet  they  were  eager  to  learn, 
and  when  able  asked  any  who  knew  about  the 
truth. 

At  last,  after  many  months  of  instruction,  the 
first  converts  at  Tay  Soa  were  baptized  and  admitted 
to  the  membership  of  the  Church.  It  was  not 
thought  wise  to  organize  a church  at  once  in  the 
village,  so  these  became  members  of  the  second 
Christian  church  in  Amoy. 

That  first  communion  season  at  Tay  Soa  was  one 
never  to  be  forgotten  by  those  who  there  for  the 
first  time  took  the  bread  and  wine  in  remembrance 
of  Jesus.  They  had  found  it  trying  before  to  bear 


292 


CHOH  LIN. 


persecution;  they  hud  often  wished  that  the  Chris- 
tian life  were  not  such  a hard  one,  but  now  they 
felt  repaid  for  all  they  had  suffered.  They  began 
to  understand  how  the  Lord  pays  back  a hundred- 
fold in  this  life  for  what  his  people  lose  for  his  sake. 

The  converts  and  inquirers  were  not  all  from  Tay 
Soa.  Several  lived  outside  of  the  village,  and  a few 
came  from  the  village  of  Ang  Tung;  Thau,  some 
miles  farther  north.  This  was  a place  of  more  im- 
portance than  Tay  Soa,  on  the  way  to  the  large 
walled  city  of  Tang  Wan,  and  only  a few  miles 
from  it.  The  missionaries  knew  of  this  important 
city,  and  were  anxiously  hoping  for  some  way  to  be 
opened  that  the  gospel  might  be  carried  to  it.  The 
converts  at  Ang;  Tung;  Thau  seemed  to  be  marking; 
out  the  line  of  that  road.  It  needed  no  urging  to 
induce  the  missionaries  to  try  to  open  a chapel  iu 
that  village.  Before  long  this  was  accomplished, 
and  Ang  Tung  Thau  was  joined  to  Tay  Soa,  the 
two  becoming  one  charge  in  the  care  of  a native 
preacher  who  lived  at  Ang  Tung  Thau,  while  the 
chapel-keeper  remained  at  Tay  Soa. 

As  the  missionaries  hoped  and  prayed,  people 
from  Ang  Tung  Thau  visiting  Tang  Wan  told  of  the 
chapel  and  the  religious  teacher  who  lived  in  their 
village.  So,  too,  people  from  that  city  learned  in  the 
village  of  the  new  religion,  and  listened  to  the  teach- 
er,  and  at  length  asked  for  some  one  for  their  city. 

Ang  Tung  Thau  soon  became  a very  important 
station.  The  attendance  at  the  little  chapel  grew 


THE  GOSPEL  AT  TAY  SO  A. 


293 


rapidly,  and  was  soon  too  large  to  find  room  in  the 
building. 

“ We  must  have  more  room,”  wrote  the  mission- 
aries to  the  Church  at  home.  “More  people  are 
coming  from  Tang  Wan  ; and  when  these  and  the 
Tay  Soa  people  join  in  the  Sabbath  service  the 
chapel  will  hardly  hold  half  of  them.” 

Money  was  sent  by  the  Church  in  America  for 
building  a house  of  worship  at  Ang  Tung  Thau,  and 
as  quickly  as  possible  a neat  chapel  was  built  for  the 
Christians  in  that  village.  The  new  chapel  was 
lanje  enough  to  hold  all  the  attendants  from  Any- 
Tung  Thau,  heathen  as  well  as  Christian,  and  it 
could  have  held  many  more  than  came  from  Tay 
Soa,  Tang  Wan  and  the  village  itself.  Rising 
much  higher  and  being  considerably  larger  thau 
any  other  building  in  the  village,  the  white  walls, 
the  green  blinds  and  the  straight  roof  of  the  chapel 
attracted  attention  at  once.  Within,  its  high  ceiling, 
tiled  floor  and  large  windows  not  only  give  it  a cool 
appearance,  but  make  it  a delightfully  light  and 
airy  house  of  worship.  This  substantial  chapel,  if 
no  misfortune  destroys  it,  will  in  all  probability  re- 
main for  half  a century  or  more  to  bless  the  people 
of  Ang  Tung  Thau.  And  yet,  if  the  author  does 
not  mistake,  its  whole  cost  was  only  about  six  hun- 
dred dollars. 

Reader,  few  memorials  are  more  useful  and  last- 
ing in  results  than  schools  and  churches  founded 
and  built  in  mission- fields. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 


SETTLED  AT  ANG  TUNG  THAU. 

"VTOW  that  Ang  Tung  Thau  and  Tay  Soa  had 
-L’  become  such  important  mission-stations,  the 
question  with  the  missionaries  was  as  to  whom  to 
put  in  charge  of  the  places. 

“ He  must  be  a careful  man,”  said  one  of  the 
missionaries,  “and  a man  who  not  only  can  see  far 
ahead,  but  be  able  to  manage  the  people  without 
getting  into  trouble  with  the  mandarins.  We  had 
better  not  be  too  fast  in  deciding  on  the  man  ; let 
us  try  our  men  for  a while  and  see  who  is  likely  to 
prove  the  best  for  the  field.” 

This  plan  was  taken,  and  one  of  the  older  preach- 
ers was  sent.  For  a month  or  more  this  man  re- 
mained ; then  it  was  thought  best  to  send  him  to 
another  field  even  more  important  than  that  around 
Tay  Soa.  Another  of  the  older  preachers  was  sent 
to  take  this  man’s  place.  He  soon  proved  that  he 
was  better  suited  to  another  charge.  Thus  change 
after  change  was  made  in  preachers  at  the  two 
stations. 

“I  have  been  thinking,”  said  one  of  the  mission- 
aries when  the  subject  for  a permanent  preacher  at 

294 


SETTLED  AT  ANG  TUNG  THAU.  295 


the  two  stations  was  talked  of  again,  “ that  we 
might  try  Choh  Lin.  I know  it  is  near  his  old 
home,  yet  that  may  not  be  so  much  against  him; 
indeed,  it  may  be  in  his  favor.  Perhaps  he  can 
interest  some  of  his  old  friends  and  relatives  and 
lead  them  to  become  Christians.  Choh  Lin  has 
been  a faithful  and  judicious  man  in  every  place 
where  he  has  been  tried,  and  I believe  that  he 
would  do  well  in  the  Tay  Soa  and  Ang  Tung  Thau 
region.  Let  us  try  him.” 

It  was  agreed  to  send  the  young  preacher  for  a 
few  weeks  to  those  stations,  with  the  understanding 
that  it  was  to  be  only  until  a suitable  man  could  be 
decided  on,  so  that  he  might  not  be  disappointed  if 
not  continued  there.  Word  was  sent  to  him  to 
come  to  Amoy  to  see  the  missionaries. 

“Shall  I tell  you  what  for?”  asked  the  man  who 
gave  the  message.  “ They  mean  to  send  you  to 
your  old  home.  If  you  do  well,  they  may  continue 
you  there;  if  not,  you  will  be  sent  to  some  other 
station.  It  is  a hard  place.  The  man  who  goes 
there  must  not  only  be  able  to  take  charge  of  Tay 
Soa  and  Ang  Tung  Thau,  but  must  try  to  open  a 
station  at  Tang  Wan.  If  you  can  do  this,  the  mis- 
sionaries will  think  you  a number-one  good  man. 
Others  of  us  have  tried,  but  we  have  failed.” 

“I  hardly  think  they  will  send  me  there,”  an- 
swered Choh  Lin.  “ I am  neither  old  enough  nor 
wise  enough.  Where  you  have  not  succeeded  I 
must  fail.” 


296 


CHOU  LIN. 


When  he  appeared  in  the  mission-house,  Clioh 
Lin  was  told  that  the  missionaries  wanted  him  to 
go  to  take  charge  of  the  two  stations  for  a while 
until  permanent  arrangements  could  be  made. 

“Do  you  think  me  able  to  take  charge  of  such 
important  places?”  he  asked.  “It  will  be  more 
difficult  to  do  it  in  and  near  my  old  home  than 
among  strangers.” 

“Are  you  not  willing  to  go?”  inquired  one  of 
the  missionaries. 

“ It  is  not  for  the  servant  to  say  where  he  will 
or  will  not  go,”  replied  Choh  Lin.  “ Where  the 
Lord  has  work  for  me  I am  ready  to  go : I only 
fear  that  it  will  need  a far  better  and  wiser  man 
than  I am  to  do  the  work.  If  you  think  me  fitted, 
I am  willing  to  go  and  remain  there,  and  will  do 
my  very  best,  poor  as  that  is,  in  the  work.” 

“ Whether  or  not  you  remain  will  depend  on  how 
well  you  succeed,”  said  a missionary.  “ You  are 
able  to  do  what  we  expect  of  you  if  you  go  in  the 
strength  of  the  Lord.  It  is  an  important  field  ; it 
is  the  key  to  the  large  country  beyond.  We  are 
sorry  to  take  you  away  again  from  your  family,  but 
until  we  know  what  is  best  to  be  done  it  will  not 
be  wise  to  move  your  family  to  Ang  Tung  Thau. 
While  you  are  there  you  will  be  able  to  come  to 
Amoy  often  to  consult  with  us  regarding  your 
studies,  so  that  you  will  not  be  altogether  the  loser, 
and  in  the  end  you  may  gain  the  more.” 

As  Choh  Lin’s  family  was  increasing,  he  became 


SETTLED  AT  ANG  TUNG  THAU.  297 


more  and  more  anxious  to  have  a permanent  home 
where  he  might  be  with  his  children  and  do  more 
to  train  them  in  the  Christian  life. 

The  missionaries  had  told  the  preachers  that  as 
the  churches  became  able  more  pastors  would  be 
needed ; these  would  be  chosen  from  the  men  best 
fitted  by  thorough  study  as  well  as  by  God’s  Spirit 
for  the  work.  The  hope  of  becoming  a pastor  was 
a great  inducement  to  them  to  study  faithfully.  As 
pastors  they  would  not  only  be  settled  permanently 
and  receive  a larger  salary,  but  their  positions  would 
be  more  honorable.  The  English  Presbyterian  and 
the  American  missionaries  had,  with  the  two  native 
pastors  and  the  Christian  churches,  formed  what  the 
Chinese  called  the  “ Tai  Hoey,”  or  “ great  assem- 
bly ” of  churches  and  ministers;  this  is  like  a pres- 
bytery. To  be  able  to  take  a part  in  the  work  of 
the  Tai  Hoey  was  the  ambition  of  all  the  preachers. 

After  a time  the  missionaries  determined  to  have 
a yearly  examination  of  all  who  had  any  wish  to 
become  pastors,  as  well  as  of  the  students  in  the 
two  seminaries;  for  the  two  missions  were  now 
uniting  in  much  of  their  work.  The  examination 
created  not  a little  excitement  among  the  preachers. 
They  saw  that  their  study  must  not  only  be  real, 
but  such  as  would  bear  a close  examination  by  the 
missionaries.  To  be  stationed  so  near  Amoy  that 
they  might  come  often  to  the  city  for  help  in  their 
studies  was  the  wish  of  every  one  of  the  younger 
men  ; and  when  Choli  Lin  was  told  to  take  a charge 


298 


CHOH  LIN. 


so  near  the  city  he  was  delighted,  even  though  the 
charge  was  not  permanent.  He  could  easily  bring 
his  family  down  to  Amoy,  and  be  with  them  each 
week,  and  thus  there  would  be  at  once  almost  as 
much  of  a gain  as  loss.  The  more  he  thought  of 
the  change,  the  more  pleased  he  was.  But,  then, 
how  could  he  succeed  where  others  who  were  older 
had  failed  ? What  should  he  do  about  Tang  Wan  ? 
He  knew  more  about  that  city  and  the  enemies  of 
the  gospel  there  than  others  did.  He  had  not  only 
heard  that  the  mandarins  and  the  more  wealthy  and 
educated  people  had  said  that  the  foreign  religion 
should  not  be  preached  in  that  city,  but  he  knew 
that  they  meant  what  they  said  and  would  leave 
nothing  undone  to  prevent  it. 

Choh  Lin  went  to  Ang  Tung  Than  with  a deter- 
mination to  do  his  best,  and  if  possible  prove  him- 
self fitted  for  the  field,  so  that  he  might  stay.  For 
some  weeks  he  remained,  doing  the  work  so  well 
that  nothing  was  said  in  the  mission  about  a change. 
There  was,  however,  less  need  now  of  a man  to 
manage  the  affairs  for  Tang  Wan.  The  mission- 
aries hired  a house  in  the  city  for  a chapel  about 
the  time  or  soon  after  Choh  Lin  went  to  his  new 
field  ; so  that  he  was  relieved  from  a large  share  of 
the  work  and  care  that  lie  dreaded. 

The  story  of  the  renting  of  this  building  need 
not  be  told : it  was  the  old  story  of  honest,  persist- 
ent and  quiet  determination  of  men  who  believed 
themselves  doing  God’s  work  against  hate,  cunning 


SETTLED  AT  ANG  TUNG  THAU.  299 


and  deceit.  The  missionaries  won  not  merely  be- 
cause they  were  honest,  but  because  they  were  really 
wiser.  Theirs  was  the  wisdom  that  God  gives,  and 
in  his  strength  they  trusted.  The  enemies  of  the 
foreign  religion  were  furious  when  they  found  all 
their  efforts  to  keep  the  foreigners  out  of  the  city 
vain.  The  house  was  rented  and  the  lease  was  not 
only  signed,  but  had  the  sanction  of  the  mandarins: 
to  oppose  further  would  be  to  bring  themselves  into 
the  hands  of  the  officials.  While  the  mandarins 
had  no  more  love  for  the  foreign  religion  than  had 
its  most  bitter  enemies,  yet  they  would  have  an  ex- 
cuse to  demand  no  small  sum  of  money  from  any 
who  might  attack  the  chapel  of  the  foreigners. 
Since  the  love  of  money  in  China  is  stronger  than 
conscience  or  enmity  to  another  religion,  the  haters  of 
foreigners  and  the  gospel  contented  themselves  with 
attacking  Christians  rather  than  their  house  of  wor- 
ship. As  this  story  is  of  Choh  Lin  rather  than  of 
the  chapel  at  Tang  Wan  and  the  Christians  there, 
the  story  of  their  persecutions  is  left  untold. 

A preacher  was  soon  placed  in  that  city,  and 
Choh  Lin’s  work  was  confined  to  the  two  stations 
and  the  country  around  them.  He  was  now  told 
that  he  might  remove  his  family  to  the  house  at 
Ang  Tung  Thau,  and  for  the  present  at  least  live 
there  as  the  pastor  of  the  two  places. 

Settled  near  his  old  home,  with  his  family  around 
him  and  preaching  the  gospel  to  his  old  friends  and 
people,  Choh  Lin  was  a happy  man.  He  was  loved 


300 


CHOH  LIN. 


by  his  friends,  the  people  under  his  care  loved  and 
trusted  him,  and  he  was  also  a favorite  with  the 
missionaries. 

Though  the  two  stations  had  been  prosperous 
before,  the  coming;  of  Choh  Lin  to  Ang;  Tung;  Thau 
was  the  beginning  of  a new  time  of  prosperity. 
The  attendance  at  the  larger  chapel  steadily  in- 
creased; so  did  the  number  of  inquirers,  and  one 
by  one  these  were  admitted  to  the  communion. 
Some  came  on  foot  fourteen  miles  nearly  every  Sab- 
bath to  hear  the  gospel.  The  service  was  now  held 
on  the  Lord’s  Day  at  Ang  Tung  Thau,  because  the 
Tay  Soa  chapel  was  too  small  to  hold  those  who 
came  even  after  the  Tang  Wan  house  of  worship 
was  opened. 

The  writer,  who  had  reached  Amoy  a few  months 
before  Choh  Lin  was  settled  at  Ang  Tung  Thau, 
spent  a Sabbath  at  that  place  not  long  after  the 
young  man  was  placed  in  charge,  and  describes 
what  he  saw : 

On  Saturday  evening  the  people  gathered  front 
the  village  and  some  distance  beyond  for  evening 
worship.  Perhaps  the  visit  of  the  young  mission- 
ary attracted  some,  and  the  communion  of  the  mor- 
row drew  more  than  the  usual  number.  At  the 
hour  for  service  the  leader  rose  and  read  the  hymn. 
At  once,  as  he  sat  down,  a burst  of  song  almost 
startled  the  visitor.  All  seemed  to  sing,  and,  while 
some  made  their  tunes  as  they  went  along,  most  of 
them  sang  the  tune  of  the  leader,  and  sang  it  well. 


SETTLED  AT  ANG  TUNG  THAU.  301 


One  or  two  verses  would  not  suffice : tlie  whole 
hymn  was  sung,  and  then  another  followed,  and 
still  another.  The  people  sang  as  though  they  en- 
joyed it  and  wanted  to  keep  on.  After  the  hymns 
came  the  reading  of  Scripture  with  pointed  and 
practical  comments,  then  followed  a prayer,  and 
then  another  song.  After  the  service  came  an  im- 
portant part  of  the  meeting — the  hand-shaking. 
While  this  is  a custom  well  worth  keeping  up  in 
American  churches,  more  than  one  missionary  has 
wished  that  it  had  not  been  introduced  into  the 
churches  in  China.  Don’t  wonder,  reader  : Chinese 
hands  are  not  always  clean.  But  this  could  not  be 
said  of  Choh  Lin’s  flock.  They  were  the  most  clean- 
ly Chinese  the  writer  has  ever  met.  This  fact  was 
more  evident  by  daylight  the  next  morning.  Each 
man,  woman  and  child  was  dressed  neatly  and  in 
clean  clothing,  and  there  wras  even  evidence  that 
some,  if  not  all,  had  taken  a bath. 

“ How  do  you  manage,  Choh  Lin,”  was  asked, 
“to  make  the  people  come  to  church  so  clean  and 
so  neatly  dressed?” 

“ We  keep  the  church  clean,”  was  his  reply,  “and 
tell  the  people  that  they  must  neither  bring  dirt 
into  nor  be  dirty  within  the  house  of  God.  I tell 
them  that  nothing  that  defileth,  not  even  dirt,  can 
enter  heaven,  and  that  if  they  wish  to  live  there 
they  must  begin  to  live  cleanly  here.  People  whose 
hearts  God  has  cleansed  should  show  it  not  only  by 
clean  lives,  but  by  clean  bodies.” 


302 


CHOH  LIN. 


“How  did  you  induce  them  to  change?” 

“ I told  Christians  to  set  the  example  ; and  when 
one  or  two  came  with  dirty  clothes  I asked  if  they 
had  forgotten  that  God  was  expected  with  us,  and 
if  it  would  not  be  better  to  go  home  and  put  on 
their  cleanest  clothes,  and  then  come  back  to  meet 
God.” 

“ How  did  they  like  that  ?” 

“ They  went  home  and  put  on  their  clean  cloth- 
ing, and  came  back  not  at  all  offended.  It  makes  a 
great  difference  whether  we  want  people  to  do  things 
for  our  own  or  for  the  Lord’s  sake.  I had  but  little 
trouble  to  persuade  them  to  come  clean  and  neat  to 
meet  the  Lord.” 

Before  the  hour  of  service  on  Sabbath  morning 
the  chapel  was  well  filled.  The  time  of  waiting 
was  spent  in  singing.  One  started  a hymn,  and  at 
once  all  joined  in.  The  regular  service  and  the 
sermon  were  much  like  such  services  in  our  own 
churches. 

The  communion  of  the  afternoon  was  the  import- 
ant service  of  the  day  : before  that  an  inquiry-meet- 
ing was  held,  with  probably  as  many  as  twenty  in- 
quirers. Among  these  was  an  old  woman  of  more 
than  eighty  years.  Her  form  was  bent,  her  face 
wrinkled,  her  eyes  dim,  her  ears  dull.  She  seemed 
anxious  to  know  the  truth,  but  unable  to  understand 
it.  She  was  attentive  to  every  word  spoken  to 
others,  but  when  questions  were  put  to  her  she  an- 
swered, “ I am  too  old  to  understand.  Go  to  my 


SETTLED  AT  ANG  TUNG  THA  U.  303 


daughter  ” (also  among  the  inquirers) ; “ she  is  not 
too  old.  Tell  it  all  to  her;  she  may  become  a fol- 
lower of  the  true  God.  It  is  too  late  for  me ; I am 
too  old.”  Questions  were  vain  : they  brought  the 
same  answer  : “ I am  too  old.  Teach  the  younger 
ones;  it  is  not  too  late  for  them.”  Her  daughter 
and  two  others  were  admitted  to  the  communion, 
but  the  old  mother  was  left  mourning  that  the  gos- 
pel came  too  late  for  her. 

As  Choh  Lin  was  not  an  ordained  preacher,  the 
ordinances  were  administered  by  the  two  mission- 
aries present. 

It  had  been  several  months  since  the  last  celebra- 
tion of  the  Lord’s  Supper  at  Ang  Tung  Thau,  and 
the  Christians  might  well  say,  “ With  great  desire 
have  we  longed  to  eat  this  supper,”  and  still  more 
might  those  who  for  the  first  time  commemorated 
the  dying  love  of  the  Lord  tell  of  their  wish  to  take 
the  bread  and  wine  in  remembrance  of  Christ. 

As  they  gathered  in  the  body  of  the  chapel,  fill- 
ing many  seats,  they  presented  a sight  not  soon  to 
be  forgotten.  Their  serious,  earnest  faces  turned  to 
the  speaker  were  a study.  Only  a few  years  ago 
every  one  of  that  gathering,  the  two  missionaries 
excepted,  was  a heathen.  Every  lip  had  prayed  to 
false  gods,  every  knee  had  bowed  to  idols,  every 
one  had  worshiped  the  spirits  of  the  dead : now 
all  were  followers  of  Christ. 

The  moments  flew  swiftly  as  the  missionary  told 
the  old,  old,  yet  new,  new  story  of  a Saviour’s  love; 


304 


CIIOH  LIN. 


and  when  all  arose  to  join  in  the  song  of  consecra- 
tion the  disciples  felt  that  the  song  was  far  too  short. 
They  wished  to  consecrate  themselves  over  and  over 
again  to  such  a Saviour  as  was  their  Lord.  When 
the  bread  and  wine  were  in  silence  distributed  each 
seemed  to  be  in  communion  with  the  Lord.  To 
describe  that  communion  or  to  tell  the  feelings  of 
the  Christians  would  be  an  impossibility.  There 
are  joys  that  are  unspeakable,  and  there  is  a peace 
that  passes  understanding.  The  child  of  God 
knows  them.  That  joy  and  peace  were  felt  at  that 
communion  at  Ang  Tung  Thau. 

When  the  services  closed  a large  number  of 
Christians  stayed  for  a talk  with  the  preacher  and 
missionaries. 

“ Since  the  Loi’d  has  done  so  much  for  us,  what 
ought  we  to  do  for  him?”  was  asked. 

“ We  should,  besides  giving  ourselves  to  him, 
do  all  we  can  to  tell  others  about  him,”  was  an- 
swered. 

“ Yes,”  added  Choh  Lin,  “ and  that  is  what  we 
must  try  to  do  here.  We  must  not  only  tell  others 
of  salvation,  but  give  our  money  to  send  the  gospel 
to  those  who  are  far  away.” 

“ We  have  not  forgotten  what  you  told  us  the 
other  Sabbath,  teacher,”  said  one  of  the  people. 
“ We  want  to  be  like  our  heavenly  Father  and  Sa- 
viour— give  and  sacrifice  for  the  good  of  those  who 
are  far  away — but  we  do  not  feel  sure  how  much 
we  ought  to  give.  You  said  that  we  should  do  as 


SETTLED  AT  ANG  TUNG  THAU. 


305 


the  Jews — give  one-tenth.  Did  you  mean  that  we 
must  give  one-tenth  before  or  after  we  buy  our  rice 
to  eat  ?” 

“ Let  us  ask  Tim  Lo,”  was  Choh  Lin’s  answer 
as  he  turned  to  a cripple  standing  near. — “ What 
do  you  think  of  it,  Brother  Tim  ?” 

“ I think  that  we  should  be  honest  with  the 
Lord,”  answered  Tim.  “ If  we  give  him  or  his 
work  one-tenth,  we  should  do  it  before  taking  our 
own  share.  It  would  not  be  one-tenth  if  we  first  paid 
for  our  rice  from  it.  Some  people  might  want  a 
great  deal  of  rice ; what  would  become  of  the  Lord’s 
work  then  ?” 

“How  do  you  give,  Brother  Tim?”  asked  Choh 

Lin. 

“Why,  if  I earn  forty  cash  a day  (but  I don’t 
often  do  it),  I take  out  four  first  for  the  Lord,  and 
say  that  is  his;  the  thirty -six  are  mine;  with  those 
I buy  my  rice.” 

From  the  first  the  missionaries  taught  the  Chris- 
tians that  it  was  not  only  their  duty  to  give  for  the 
spread  of  the  gospel,  but  to  support  their  own  pas- 
tors. So  decided  were  they  in  this  that  until  lately 
no  pastor  was  ordained  and  settled  over  a church 
until  the  people  promised  to  give  him  a better  salary 
than  preachers  supported  by  the  missions  received. 

Choh  Lin  was  anxious  to  see  Tay  Soa  and  Ang 
Tung  Thau  not  only  prosperous,  but  united  in  one 
and  become  an  organized  church,  able  to  call  and 
support  their  own  pastor. 

20 


^06 


CHOH  LTN. 


Steady  progress  was  made  in  the  two  stations : 
the  members  increased  in  number,  and  so  did  the 
contributions.  Before  Choh  Lin  had  been  two 
years  in  charge  the  two  stations  applied  to  the 
Tai  Hoey  for  an  organization  into  a church.  The 
request  was  granted,  and  from  the  two  the  church 
of  “ Hong  San  ” was  formed.  But  as  the  people 
were  not  able  to  pay  enough  to  support  a pastor, 
Choh  Lin  remained  the  acting  pastor.  He  had, 
however,  in  the  mean  while  passed  the  examinations 
at  Amoy  successfully  and  become  a licensed  preach- 
er, ready  to  become  a pastor  as  soon  as  a church  was 
able  to  call  him.  Here  he  might  be  left,  but  his 
story  would  not  be  complete  if  some  of  his  trials 
as  an  acting  pastor  were  not  told.  These  are  held 
for  another  chapter. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 


TRIALS  OF  A PASTOR. 

BELOVED  by  the  people  under  his  care,  Choh 
Lin  was  not  without  enemies.  These  were 
bitter  against  him,  not  so  much  for  his  own  sake  as 
for  that  of  the  foreigners  and  their  religion.  In 
China  the  gospel  is  hated,  not  so  much  because  of 
itself  as  because  it  is  the  religion  of  foreigners. 
Such  people  in  and  around  Ang  Tung  Thau  tried 
to  arouse  others  against  the  chapel,  its  worship  and 
its  worshipers.  At  first  they  had  tried  to  prevent 
the  building  of  the  chapel;  failing  in  that,  they 
tried  to  give  trouble  to  the  Christians.  These  ene- 
mies of  the  truth  were  wealthy  and  educated,  and 
it  is  quite  probable  that  they  were  secretly  aided  by 
the  lower  officials. 

As  in  Ang  Tung  Thau  there  were  three  large 
idol  temples,  to  have  a foreigners’  house  of  worship 
in  their  village  was  felt  to  be  a terrible  insult  to  the 
gods  of  the  Middle  Kingdom.  After  submitting 
for  some  time  to  the  disgrace,  as  well  as  risking  the 
anger  of  the  gods,  the  devout  idolaters  determined 
to  make  a strong  effort  to  drive  Christianity  from 
the  village.  Priests  were  summoned  from  other 


307 


308 


CHOH  LIN 


places,  in  the  hope  that  they  could  bring  some 
power  to  drive  out  the  gospel  or  induce  the  gods  to 
destroy  the  chapel  and  frighten  Christians  back  to 
idolatry.  Among  other  efforts  for  this  end,  they 
built  a large  fire  in  front  of  one  of  the  temples,  and 
the  priests,  after  chanting  and  going  through  a va- 
riety of  ceremonies,  leaped  through  this  fire,  hoping 
by  their  earnestness  to  attract  the  attention  of  the 
gods.  At  length  the  ceremonies  were  ended,  and 
many  felt  sure  that  the  chapel  and  Christianity 
were  doomed  in  that  place  at  least.  Day  by  day 
the  idolaters  waited  to  see  an  earthquake  destroy 
the  chapel  or  lightning  burn  it  down,  or  some  other 
destruction  come  upon  it,  but  they  waited  in  vain. 
Sabbath  after  Sabbath  the  worshipers  gathered; 
they  sang,  they  prayed,  they  listened  to  the  truth 
from  Choh  Lin’s  lips,  and,  like  their  house  of 
worship,  remained  unharmed. 

For  a while  the  idolaters  waited  hopefully,  now 
and  again  telling  the  Christians  that  the  gods  would 
before  long  prove  their  power.  Growing  weary  of 
vain  waiting,  the  idolaters  began  another  course. 
One  dav  the  Ang  Tung  Thau  people  were  surprised 
to  find  posted  on  the  buildings  printed  placards 
threatening  the  enemies  of  the  gods  with  terrible 
calamities  if  they  continued  to  follow  the  teacher 
of  another  religion  than  that  of  China.  Christians 
were  terrified,  and  not  a few  who  had  become  in- 
terested in  the  gospel  were  frightened  away  from 
the  chapel-services.  Choh  Lin  and  his  people  knew 


TRIALS  OF  A PASTOR. 


309 


very  well  that  those  were  not  meant  as  idle  threats. 
It  was  no  uncommon  thing  for  a mob  to  attack  and 
destroy  a Christian  house  of  worship,  and  drive  the 
worshipers  from  the  place  or  kill  them  in  it.  True, 
such  occurrences  had  been  less  frequent  of  late,  since, 
by  treaty  with  foreign  nations,  the  Chinese  had  been 
compelled  to  pay  for  all  damage  done  by  such  mobs; 
yet  there  were  many  people  willing  to  run  all  the 
risk  in  order  to  gratify  their  hatred  to  foreigners 
and  their  religion. 

Many  and  earnest  were  the  prayers  offered  by  the 
anxious  Christians,  great  were  their  fears,  yet  they 
stood  firm  in  their  faith.  It  was  a time  of  trial  to 
Choh  Lin.  He  did  not  know  when  each  morning: 
came  but  that  that  day  would  witness  the  destruction 
of  the  chapel  and  the  scattering  of  his  people.  Per- 
haps night  would  find  their  bodies  and  his  lying 
dead  in  the  streets.  Perhaps  his  wife  and  children 
would  be  torn  from  him  and  carried  into  slavery, 
and  he,  left  houseless,  homeless,  bereft  of  family 
and  friends,  forced  to  hide  as  a fugitive  and  an 
outcast.  When  weeks  passed  and  the  threats 
had  not  been  carried  out,  the  preacher  and  his  peo- 
ple hoped  no  harm  would  come  to  them.  Suddenly 
they  were  startled  by  a new  and  an  unexpected 
danger. 

The  missionaries  having  called  the  attention  of 
the  mandarins  to  the  threatening  posters,  the  people 
had  been  warned  not  to  molest  the  chapel.  Not 
daring  to  disobey,  they  sought  some  other  way  of 


310 


CHOH  LIN. 


attacking  the  Christians  and  frightening  others  from 

o o o 

joining  them. 

Among  the  inquirers  was  a man  from  a village 
some  distance  from  Ang  Tung  Thau.  Between 
that  village  and  a neighboring  one  there  had  some 
time  before  been  trouble,  and  considerable  property 
had  been  stolen.  That  difficulty  had  never  been 
settled.  This  man,  known  here  as  Lon,  was  now 
accused  as  one  of  those  who  had  stolen  the  property. 
He  was  arrested  and  taken  to  Amoy  for  trial.  He 
refused  to  confess  himself  guilty ; no  proof  being 
found,  there  was  only  one  course  for  the  magistrates 
— to  set  him  free.  He  had,  however,  in  the  trial 
confessed  himself  a Christian:  this  made  his  accu- 
sers the  more  determined  to  punish  him  and  the 
mandarins  to  listen  to  other  charges.  One  was 
speedily  brought : he  was  accused  of  taking  part  in 
a local  rebellion  fourteen  or  fifteen  years  before,  and 
tried  for  this  offence.  But  as  there  had  been  many 
engaged  in  the  same  rebellion,  and  as  it  had  not 
amounted  to  anything,  the  mandarins  dared  not 
convict  this  man  only  and  so  long  after  the  time ; 
therefore  he  was  acquitted  at  the  second  trial.  De- 
termined not  to  be  defeated  in  their  plans,  the  en- 
emies of  the  gospel  told  the  officers  that  a murder 
had  been  committed  in  this  man’s  village  and  the 
murderers  never  brought  to  trial.  Lon  was  the 
third  time  put  on  trial,  now  as  a murderer  to  be 
tried  for  his  life.  Had  he  been  convicted  on  either 
of  the  other  charges,  he  would  probably  have  been 


TRIALS  OF  A PASTOR. 


311 


executed.  If  proved  guilty  of  this  crime,  he  must 
die. 

As  soon  as  Choh  Lin  learned  of  Lon’s  arrest  he 
hurried  to  Amoy  to  do  what  he  could  to  aid  this  one 
of  his  flock.  It  became  evident  that  not  justice,  but 
Lon’s  death,  was  the  object  of  the  accusers  ; and  this 
not  so  much  from  hatred  to  the  man  as  to  the  for- 
eigners and  their  religion.  Further,  Choh  Lin 
learned  that  they  hoped  by  killing  this  man  to 
frighten  others  who  were  interested  in  the  gospel, 
and  perhaps  drive  the  gospel  entirely  from  Ang 
Tung  Thau.  The  young  preacher  told  the  mission- 
aries his  fears,  and  the  advice  and  aid  of  the  Amer- 
ican consul,  Gen.  Legendre,  were  sought.  He  at 
once  requested  the  mandarins  to  give  Lon  a fair 
trial.  Angry  at  the  consul,  at  the  missionaries  and 
at  everything  foreign,  the  mandarins,  instead  of 
granting  a trial  or  summoning  witnesses,  ordered 
the  accused  to  be  compelled  to  make  a confession. 

Lon’s  hands  were  held  together,  a close-fitting 
ring  forced  over  a finger  of  each,  a stick  placed  be- 
tween his  hands,  and  by  that  he  was  suspended. 
For  six  hours  he  was  left  to  hang  in  agony,  his 
whole  weight  supported  by  the  two  fingers.  In  the 
mean  while  he  was  beaten  several  times  and  told  to 
confess  the  part  he  had  in  the  murder.  Again  and 
again  he  declared  his  innocence : at  last  he  was 
taken  down. 

Word  of  this  cruelty  reaching  the  ears  of  Gen. 
Legendre,  he  tried  to  prevent  it,  but  to  no  purpose. 


312 


CHOH  LIN. 


The  next  day  poor  Lon  was  put  to  the  same  torture 
and  beaten  more  severely  than  before  to  make  him 
confess  guilt.  Weak  and  faint,  he  still  insisted  that 
he  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  murder.  After  being 
hung  as  before  for  several  hours,  he  was  again  taken 
down  and  locked  up  alone  in  the  prison.  The  third 
day  he  was  subjected  to  the  same  torture.  Hopeless 
and  almost  dead  from  pain  and  suffering,  he  groaned 
out  that  he  was  present  when  the  murder  was  com- 
mitted, though  he  did  not  say  that  he  had  anything 
to  do  with  it.  This,  however,  was  enough.  He 
was  taken  down  and  again  shut  up  in  the  prison. 

Meanwhile,  Gen.  Legendre  had  forced  the  man- 
darins to  consent  to  a fair  trial,  and  it  had  been 
agreed  that  Lon  should  be  tried  on  the  day  follow- 
ing the  one  on  which  the  poor  man  had  made  the 
confession.  Early  that  morning,  several  hours  be- 
fore the  time  set  for  the  trial,  the  accused  was  hur- 
ried from  the  prison  to  the  execution-ground  aud 
beheaded.  When  the  time  for  trial  came  the  man 
was  dead  and  the  enemies  of  foreigners  aud  their 
religion  had  conquered. 

It  was  sad  news  to  the  Christians  of  Ang  Tung 
Thau  that  their  leader  brought.  All  felt  sure  that 
Lon  had  been  killed  because  he  was  a Christian,  and 
they  asked  each  other  who  would  be  the  next  vic- 
tim. Lon’s  death,  however,  probably  saved  them. 
The  American  consul  would  not  allow  such  a case 
of  cruelty  and  the  murder  of  a Christian  to  go 
by  without  protesting  to  the  Chinese  government. 


TRIALS  OF  A PASTOR. 


313 


Probably  that  had  the  effect  to  make  the  mandarins 
careful  how  they  beheaded  any  more  Christians. 
They,  in  turn,  no  doubt  warned  the  people,  for  after 
Lon’s  death  the  enemies  of  Christianity  were  much 
more  quiet. 

For  a while  those  who  had  attended  the  chapel- 
service,  yet  had  given  no  proof  of  being  Christians, 
remained  away ; but  one  after  another  came  back, 
and  the  number  was  even  larger  than  before. 
Everything  seemed  to  show  that  the  Christians 
were  likely  to  have  little  more  persecution. 

One  day  a startling  story  was  told  in  the  streets. 
White  ants,  it  was  said,  had  quietly  eaten  the  wood- 
work of  all  the  temples,  and  each  was  ready  to 
crumble.  This  is  not  an  uncommon  thing  in  China. 
These  little  insects  find  their  way  into  the  timber 
and  destroy  all  but  the  outside.  This  is  done  so 
quietly  and  quickly  that  often  the  first  sign  of  their 
presence  is  the  sudden  falling  in  of  roof  and  floors 
of  a house,  leaving  only  the  walls  standing.  People 
crowded  to  the  temples  to  look  at  the  ruin  the  ants 
had  wrought.  Ants  were  in  two  of  the  buildings, 
but  the  story  was  proven  to  be  worse  than  the  real- 
ity. By  taking  out  the  eaten  timbers  the  temples 
could  yet  be  saved.  Priests  came  to  take  charge  of 
the  repairs,  but  on  their  examining  the  idols  they 
made  a more  alarming  discovery.  Several  of  the 
idols  carved  from  wood  had  been  eaten  by  the  ants. 
This  was  indeed  a calamity  to  the  idolaters.  The 
priests  at  once  told  them  that  the  spirits  of  the  gods 


314 


CHOH  LIN. 


had  left  the  idols  and  deserted  the  village.  The 
reason  was  plain  : the  gods  would  not  stay  where  a 
chapel  of  a foreign  god  was  allowed. 

The  words  of  the  priests  excited  the  crowd,  and 
a fanatical  idolater  by  a speech  aroused  the  people 
to  such  a degree  that  they  were  ready  for  anything. 
The  end  might  have  been  the  destruction  of  the 
chapel  had  it  not  been  for  a shrewd  old  man  in  the 
gathering.  Pie  was  not  a Christian,  nor  did  he  even 
attend  the  chapel-service,  so  none  suspected  him  of 
being  a friend  of  the  gospel.  “ What  kind  of  gods 
have  we  in  our  village,”  asked  he,  “ if  they  are 
driven  awav  by  a single  foreign  chapel  and  noth- 
ing but  the  foreigners’  religion?” 

“ What  do  you  mean  ?”  inquired  a priest. 

“ Gods  who  cannot  protect  themselves  can  give 
our  village  but  little  protection,”  was  the  reply. 

“ They  are  able  to  protect  both  themselves  and 
us,”  said  the  priest  sharply.  “ They  left  because 
unwilling  to  stay  where  the  people  do  not  want 
them.” 

“ We  do  want  them  to  stay,”  spoke  the  man 
quietly,  “ but  we  would  like  to  see  them  able  to 
take  care  of  us.” 

“ They  will  stay  if  that  chapel  is  taken  away,” 
shouted  the  fanatic,  “ but  otherwise  not.” 

“ If  the  chapel  of  the  foreigners  troubles  the 
gods,  why  cannot  they  remove  it,  instead  of  asking 
us  to  do  it?”  asked  the  old  man.  “ They  can  do  it 
very  easily,  but  we  will  get  into  trouble  if  we  at- 


TRIALS  OF  A PASTOR. 


315 


tempt  it.  They  certainly  are  stronger  than  we,  and 
stronger  no  doubt  than  the  foreign  God.  Let  them 
show  him  what  they  can  do.” 

It  was  useless  for  the  friends  of  the  gods  to  reply 
to  this  man.  His  questions  troubled  the  priests  and 
quieted  the  people.  Especially  did  the  people  grow 
quiet  when  the  man  asked  who  would  pay  for  the 
chapel  if  torn  down. 

The  storm  that  rose  so  suddenly  soon  passed 
away,  and  the  chapel  remained.  The  devout  idol- 
aters insisted  that  some  judgment  would  fall  upon 
Ang  Tung  Thau  for  allowing  the  foreign  God  to 
be  worshiped  there.  As  no  special  calamity  came, 
the  temples,  beyond  the  most  necessary  repairs,  re- 
mained as  they  were,  and  for  a time  the  gods  were 
allowed  to  remain  away  from  the  village. 

But,  as  this  story  is  growing  too  long,  the  rest  of 
Choh  Lin’s  trials  are  untold,  and  with  two  incidents 
that  are  more  pleasing  the  story  will  close. 

Among  the  new-comers  Choh  Lin  noticed  one  day 
an  old  man,  who  hurried  away  after  service.  This 
continued  for  some  time.  At  first  Choh  Lin  did  not 
try  to  speak  to  him,  lest  he  should  be  frightened 
away,  but  as  he  came  week  after  week  the  preacher 
inquired  more  about  him.  One  week  he  visited 
the  old  man’s  home,  some  miles  away.  He  asked 
one  or  two  of  the  neighbors  regarding  him.  They 
said  that  of  late  he  had  given  up  the  worship  of 
idols  and  spirits,  and,  instead,  prayed  to  an  unknown 
and  unseen  god.  Whenever  he  prayed,  which  was 


316 


CHOH  LIN. 


very  often,  they  said  he  first  sounded  a gong,  and 
then  kneeling  down  with  upturned  face  and  closed 
eyes  prayed  at  nothing. 

Calling  on  the  old  man,  Choli  Lin  learned  that 
he  had  given  up  idolatry  for  the  worship  of  the 
true  God,  of  whom  he  had  heard  and  whom  he  had 
learned  to  love  in  the  Ang  Tung  Thau  chapel. 

“ Do  you  sound  a gong  before  you  pray  ?”  asked 
the  preacher. 

“ Certainly,”  was  the  reply ; “ I always  do.” 

“ Why  do  you  do  that  ?” 

“‘Why’?”  repeated  the  old  man  in  surprise. 
“ Don’t  you  always  begin  worship  in  the  chapel  by 
sounding  the  gong?” 

Choli  Liu  understood  it  now.  The  gong — one 
having  a much  more  agreeable  sound  than  the  gongs 
we  hear  in  America — is  usually  sounded  in  front  of 
Christian  chapels  in  China,  as  bells  are  rung  with 
us  before  service  to  call  people  to  church.  The  old 
man  thought  that  sounding  the  gong  was  part  of 
the  worship  of  the  true  God. 

“ God  does  not  need  a gong  to  call  him  to  listen 
to  our  prayers,”  said  Choli  Lin,  “as  the  idolaters 
say  their  gods  need  to  be  called.  The  true  God 
knows  all  that  is  going  on  in  the  world  around  and 
in  our  hearts.” 

“Yes,  you  told  us  that  some  weeks  ago  in  the 
chapel,”  spoke  the  old  man.  “ But  I heard  the 
gong  sounded  before  the  service,  so  thought  that 
it  had  something  to  do  with  pleasing  God.  I want 


TRIALS  OF  A PASTOR. 


317 


to  please  him.  I did  not  know  exactly  how  to 
worship  him,  and  did  as  others  do  who  know  better 
than  I.” 

Choh  Lin  learned  that  this  old  man  had  been, 
through  his  preaching,  led  to  give  up  idols  and 
become  a worshiper  of  the  true  God,  and  before 
long  he  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing  him  a follower 
of  the  Saviour  and  a member  of  the  Church. 

Thus  not  only  in  but  out  of  the  chapel  and  out- 
side of  the  village  did  the  young  preacher  teach 
men  of  the  Saviour. 

In  a village  some  distance  from  Ang  Tung  Thau, 
as  well  as  from  Tay  Soa,  lived  an  old  uncle  of  Choh 
Lin.  As  a boy  the  latter  had  been  a great  favorite 
of  this  uncle.  His  mother  had  taken  him,  a short 
time  before  Mr.  Lee  died,  to  see  this  uncle,  who  was 
then  very  sick.  This  visit  pleased  the  old  man 
very  much,  and  he  remembered  the  boy  and  his 
mother  as  his  best  friends.  He  always  held  a deep 
interest  in  Choh  Lin  as  he  grew  to  be  a man,  and 
was  ready  to  do  any  favor  he  could  for  his  nephew. 
When  news  came  to  him  that  Choh  Lin  had  become 
a Christian,  the  old  man  was  greatly  troubled.  He 
went  to  see  his  nephew  and  Mrs.  Lee,  and  begged 
them  not  to  give  up  the  religion  of  their  fathers  for 
that  of  strangers.  Although  his  advice  was  un- 
heeded,  the  old  man  remained  a firm  friend  of  his 
nephew.  When  Choh  Lin  became  a preacher  at 
Ang  Tung  Thau,  he  visited  his  uncle,  and  the  two 
had  a long  talk  about  the  gospel. 


318 


CHOH  LIN. 


The  old  man  was  well  educated  and  loved  to  talk 
and  read.  “ What  a pity,  Choh  Lin,”  said  he,  “that 
you  will  remain  a Christian  and  preach  that  foreign 
doctrine ! You  have  a good  education  and  fine 
abilities : if  you  would  study  the  Chinese  classics 
and  take  the  regular  course  of  students,  you  would 
graduate  with  great  honors  and  become  a noted 
scholar  and  perhaps  a high  officer.  But,  alas  ! you 
follow  the  doctrine  of  those  foreigners,  and  now 
there  is  no  hope.  You  throw  everything  away  for 
that.  Yet  what  good  will  it  ever  do  you  or  your 
friends  ?” 

Choh  Lin  said  that  his  life  was  much  happier 
now  than  when  he  served  false  gods,  and  tried  to 
reason  with  his  uncle  on  the  folly  of  idolatry;  but 
the  talk  seemed  to  have  little  effect  on  the  old  man, 
who  was  unwilling  to  be  convinced  by  a youth  who 
had  only  studied  at  the  school  of  foreigners. 

Choh  Lin  visited  his  uncle  as  often  as  he  could, 
and  each  time  found  him  more  ready  to  talk  about 
Christianity.  From  opposing  it  he  contented  him- 
self with  speaking  well  of  the  religion  and  the 
books  of  China.  “Those  books,”  said  he,  “are  far 
better  than  the  books  written  in  other  countries. 
If  you  must  teach  a foreign  religion,  why  not  teach 
our  own  as  well,  and  specially  teach  the  more 
worthy  truths  in  our  books?  The  foreign  God 
no  doubt  is  good,  but  ours  are  better.  Why  not, 
then,  take  the  best,  instead  of  teaching  the  people 
to  serve  an  inferior  god?  You  are  only  helping 


TRIALS  OF  A PASTOR. 


319 


the  foreigners  to  take  possession  of  our  country 
some  clay.” 

When  Choli  Lin  read  some  passages  from  the 
Bible,  and,  comparing  them  with  the  writings  of 
Confucius,  asked,  “Which  of  these  will  be  likely 
to  do  our  countrymen  the  most  good — the  teachings 
of  the  foreign  book  or  those  of  the  Middle  King- 
dom?” the  old  man  was  silent. 

At  another  time  he  admitted  that  the  Bible  was 
a very  good  book,  and  was  willing  to  take  and  read 
it.  The  next  time  Choh  Lin  came  the  old  man 
said,  “ That  sacred  book  of  the  foreigners  is  very 
good.  It  will  do  no  harm,  but  very  much  good. 
It  is  an  excellent  book  for  some  people,  but  for  me, 
who  have  lived  a virtuous  life,  the  Chinese  books 
are  better.”  He,  however,  did  not  wish  his  nephew 
to  take  the  Bible  away,  and  said  that  he  had  not 
read  all  in  it  that  he  wished  to  know. 

At  Choh  Lin’s  next  visit  the  uncle  did  not  com- 
pare it  with  the  books  of  China,  but  said  a great 
deal  about  the  Bible.  “ It  is  the  book  for  my  fam- 
ily,” said  he;  “ I want  my  children  to  read  it.  The 
doctrines  it  teaches  are  just  what  they  need.  If  they 
will  read  and  obey  its  doctrines,  I will  not  object 
even  though  they  become  Christians.  That  book  will 
make  them  better  men  and  women,  and  better  citi- 
zens of  the  Middle  Kingdom.”  He,  however,  did 
not  understand  all,  and  had  many  questions  to  ask. 

At  Choh  Lin’s  next  visit  the  old  man  said,  “ That 
holy  book  is  the  book  for  me : it  has  the  food  for 


320 


CHOH  LIN. 


my  soul.  Other  books  do  well  for  the  body  and 
mind,  but  this  has  truths  that  go  to  the  heart.  Old 
as  I am,  I mean  to  serve  the  one  true  God  aud  give 
myself  to  Jesus  as  my  Saviour.” 

There  was  now  perfect  sympathy  between  Choh 
Lin  and  the  old  man  as  the  younger  told  the  other 
more  plainly  the  way  of  salvation. 

The  next  time  Choh  Lin  called  his  uncle  was  sick, 
too  sick  to  talk  much,  and  a few  days  later  word 
came  to  Ang  Tung  Thau  that  he  was  dead. 

“Oh,”  said  Choh  Lin  to  the  author  a short  time 
after  the  uncle’s  death,  “ if  I had  only  been  more 
faithful  in  prayer  as  well  as  teaching,  I would  have 
more  assurance  that  my  kind  and  loving  uncle  is 
saved,  but  now  I am  not  sure ; I only  hope.” 

Several  if  not  all  of  that  uncle’s  family  became 
Christians  after  his  death,  and  at  least  one  of  the 
sons  became  a preacher  of  the  gospel. 

Here,  as  he  was  in  1870,  we  leave  Choh  Lin, 
though  he  is  yet  living  and  a preacher.  This  true 
story  of  his  life  is  not  unlike  those  of  many  other 
as  faithful  men  as  he  was,  who  are  giving  their  all 
to  the  work  of  bringing  their  countrymen  to  Christ. 
These  men  need  help  in  their  work.  Will  you, 
reader,  give  it?  They  need  more  foreign  teachers, 
more  money,  more  prayer.  You  can  give  the  last; 
you  perhaps  cau  give  some  of  the  second,  and,  it 
may  be,  can  give  the  first.  Will  you  give  as  you 
are  able? 


. 


